THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 

OF  CALIFORNIA 

LOS  ANGELES 


^.»?-»IL»         --.-g-l.-l^ 


THE, 


^-^^ 


feoR' 


V 


EPORTING: 


^ 

7K 


»*_» 


X 


TYLE 


(s)   i-% 


*  *  *- 


v> 


/■  -  >  ■ 


—OF— 


^RT  *  I 


-A- 


Complete  *  Stenographic  *  Text- Book. 


PITMAN  SYSTEM. 


For  Class,  Corresponileoce  and  Self-lostruction, 


BY 


•—      ■/ 


EL 


LDDN  MDRilN. 


/^/>Wx 


Eleventh  Edition. 


PUBLISHED   BT 

CHRISTIAN  PUBLISHING  COMPANY, 

ST.  LOUIS,  MO. 


,    3    ,   J     »      >  '   »  )  '      >  >       >      ■ 


THE  MORAN  SERIES  OF  INSTRUCTION  BOOKS. 


The  ••Reporting  Style;"  Short-Hand  in  the  concrete.    Complete   in   one 
Volume.    320  pages.  -  -  -  •  -  ^{.1.50 

One    Hundred  Valuable    Suggestions    to    Short-Hand    Students.       Second 
Edition,  Revised. *1.U0 

The   Sign-Book;  Vocabulary  of   "Word  and  Phrase    Signs.    For   the    Vest- 
pocket.  ---------  2.5  Its 

The   Correspondence  Manual.     A  guide  for  students  who  take  instrui-tions 
by  mall.         -  -  .  .  -  .  -  -  -  2.5  cts 

Key  to  the  "Reporting  Style."      All   Exercises   rendered   In   full;    nicely 
engraved.    Letter-Press  Translations.        -----  $2.00 


Tlie  Type-Writer  Dictionarj-. 


60  cts 


The  Short-Hand  Primer.     The  Pitman  System  in  a  Nut-Shell.      -     25  cts 

The  "Reporting  Style"  series  of  student's  practice  books.    Manufactured 
expressly  for  writers  of  this  system.  -----         25  cts 


Key  to  the  Primer. 
Lesson  Cards. 


10  cts 
1  cent 


Sent  postpaid  on  receipt  of  price.    Apply  at  any  book  store,  or  from    the 
dealer  from  whom  this  book  was  obtained. 


-Copyright  1880,  by  Eldon  Moran. 
o 0 0 0 o 


All  Rights  Reserved. 


•  ••    . 

•  • .    • 


nnid^r 


}  ^<^9 


PUBLISHER'S  PREFACE. 

This  book  on  its  merits  has  sold  at  the  rate  of  nearly  two 
editions  a  year.  The  actual  demand  is  the  only  apology  for 
offering  this  revision  to  the  public.  Its  novel  features  have 
been  thoroughly  tested,  and  the  sales  have  constantly  in- 
creased. The  publishei's  feel  justified  in  making  the  very 
considerable  expenditure  necessary  in  bringing  out  an  en- 
larged edition,  because  it  is  confidently  believed  that,  all  in 
all,  this  is  the  most  satisfactory,  and  in  time  will  prove  the 
most  popular  of  stenographic  instruction  books  used  in  this 
country.  The  engraving  is  abundant,  and  most  excellent  in 
quality.  The  lessons  are  graded,  and  arranged  in  logical 
order.  The  reporting  style  is  taught  from  the  first,  Avhich 
is  now  almost  universally  admitted  to  be  the  most  sensible 
plan.  The  explanations  are  simple,  the  book  being  in- 
tended more  especially  for  the  young. 

An  important  advantage  also,  possessed  by  but  few  such 
works,  is  that  the  subject  is  exhaustively  treated  in  one  com- 
pact volume.  A  Key  to  all  exercises,  both  long  and  short 
hand, will  soon  be  j)ublished  f;  r  the  accomodation  of  persons 
who  need  such  a  book  for  reference  and  comparison. 

The  engraving  was  done  by  the  hand  of  Mr.  George 
Niederhoff,  one  of  the  inventors  of  the  admirable  process 
by  which  it  was  accomplished. 

Notwithstanding  the  care  that  has  been  exercised,  typo- 
graphical and  other  errors  are  likely  to  be  found  in  this 
edition.  We  will  appreciate  the  kindness  if  students  and 
teachers  will  call  our  attention  to  any  such  they  may  notice. 
A  copy  of  the  new  Sign  Book  will  be  presented  to  the  person 
first  pointing  out  an  error  which  requires  correction. 

3 


^.  i3  ••^'  -ii-  O  'v> 


CONTENTS. 

Introduction 

5 

sonants     .       -       -  1.38 

Long  and  Short  Hand  Compared 

10 

XXVIII.  naif  •  length     Final 

GeiuTiil  Directions 

11 

Hooked  Stems-        .  142, 

Definition  of  Terms 

12 

XXIX,  Half-leugtb  L,R,  M,N-  147 

LESSONS. 

XXX   Intervocalizatiou         -  152 

I.  Consonant  Alplnibet, 

XXXI.  Prefixes  .       .       .       -  157 

Sec  1- 

14 

XXXIL  Affixes    -       -       .       -  163 

II.  Consonant  Alptiabet. 

XXXIII.  Variable  Letters   -       .  167 

Sec.  2- 

16 

XXXIV.  Consonant  Position     -  173 

III.  Word-Signs ,-       -       - 

o.? 

XXXV.  Vocalization  -       .       -  182 

IV.  Ray  (upward  R)  and 

XXXVI.  Primitive  and  Deriva- 

Plira.sing - 

20 

tive     .       -       -       -  192 

V.  Long  Vowels 

32 

XXXVII.  Syllalncation  -       -        -  20  ) 

VI.  Dipiuliongs  and  the  S- 

XXXVIII  General  Principles       -  203 

Circle- 

38 

XXXIX.  Names  and  Nagntives  -  220 

VII.  Short  Vowels 

44 

XL.  Expedients  and  Punct- 

VIII Consonant  Position    - 

50 

uation       -       .       -  227 

IX.  S-Circle  Junctions 

54 

XLI.  Numbers,  Special  Rules 

X.  Phraseography    - 

58 

and  Suggestions     -  232 

XI.  Sez-Circle,    Emp  and 

XLII.  Rules  for  Phrasing       -  240 

Coalesccnts 

04 

XLIII.  Amanuensis  Reporting-  251 

XII.  Double  Consonants,— 

XLIV.              "                 "         , 

the  L-hook 

70 

Continued        .       -  235 

XIII.  R-book  Series,  Div.  1- 

70 

XLV.  Speech  Reporting  -       -  2j9 

XIV.        "            "       Div.  2- 

80 

XLVI.  Convention  Reporting  -  203 

XV.  Triple   Consonant  Se- 

XLVII.  Law  Reporting       -        -  209 

ries     -       -       .       . 

84 

XLVIII.  Objections,  Rulings,Ex- 

XVI.  Rel-hook,     Aspirate 

ceptions,   Exhibits, 

Tick  and  Dot  - 

88 

and  Indices      -       -  277 

XVII.  W-books,    Brief    Way 

XLIX.  Transcripts  and  Profes- 

and Yay    - 

93 

sional  Conduct        -  285 

XVIII.  F-hook  .... 

96 

L.  Systems  and  Improve- 

XIX. N-hook  .... 

100 

ments        .       .       -  290 

XX.       "      ,  Continued    . 

104 

Vocabulary      .       -       .       -       -  297 

XXI.  Shun-hook     - 

108 

Spiritual  Freedom  .       -       -       -310 

XXII.  S-sbun  and  In-hooks  . 

114 

Fac-Siniiles 311 

XXIII.  St  and  Str  Loops  . 

118 

Notes,— 21,  48,  62,  83,  87,  117,  120, 

XXIV.  LengtheningPrinciple- 

123 

132,  137,  141,  156,  220.  . 

XXV.  Halving  Principle 

128 

Suggestions  to  Teachers,- SI,  30, 

XXVI.  Added  D         .       -       . 

133 

31,  .37,  4;^,  49,  53.  63,  75,  91,  93, 

XXVII.  Shortened  Double  Con- 

103,  112,  113,  146. 

INTRODUCTORY  REMARKS. 


I.  Character.  In  this  book,  kind  reader,  you  will  find  no 
new  system.  These  abound  already.  Their  number  in- 
creases. Nevertheless  from  this  incomparable  art  the  peo- 
ple practically  remain  barred,  Stenogaphic  instruction 
books  worthy  the  name  are  few  indeed.  The  craze  for  sys- 
tem-making, in  effect  little  more  than  system-remodeling, 
has  prevailed.  TeacMwf/,  properly,  has  been  neglected.  The 
man  of  genius,  that  is  the  Inventor,  does  his  work  in  an 
upper  region.  The  man  of  talent,  that  is  the  teacher,  com- 
ing after,  devises  means,  like  a  Jacob's  ladder,  by  which  it 
may  be  brought  down  to  the  common  level.  Geniuses  are 
few!  As  teachers,  may  we  not  be  ashamed  to  use  our  tal- 
ents in  spreading  a  knowledge  of  the  good  systems  that 
already  exist.  This  manual,  the  product  of  honest  labor,  is 
at  best  only  an  effort  in  the  direction  of  rendering  stenogra- 
phy accessible  to  the  million.  May  abler  hands  carry  the 
good  work  f  oi'ward ! 

II.  System.  Strictly,  there  are  but  few  systems.  Many 
books,  bearing  other  names,  present  only  the  Pitman  more 
or  less  disguised  and  worked  over.  These  different  systems, 
so-called,  do  not  differ  widely  in  point  of  merit.  They  are 
so  nearly  alike  that  an  adept  in  one  has  little  difficulty  in 
reading  notes  in  any  of  the  others.  There  are  a  few  sys- 
tems, however,  which  differ  radically  from  the  Pitman,  and 
from  each  other.  But  we  regard  the  Pitman  as  vastly 
superior  to  these,  and  firmly  believe  that,  for  all  English 
speaking  countries,  it  is  the  method  of  the  future.  Its 
points  of  excellence  are  reviewed  in  lesson  XXXVIII,  p. 
205.  A  comparison  of  systems  may  be  found  in  lesson  L, 
p.  290. , 

III.  'Teaching.  The  aim  of  this  work  is  to  present  the 
Pitman  system  in  the  concrete — not  merely  in  the  abstract ; 
to  teach  the  how  of  short-hand,  rather  than  the  why  of  it. 


INTRODUCTORY  REMARKS. 


The  method  of  instruction  employed  is  i^raclioal  and  pro- 
gressive. The  principles  are  taken  up  and  explained  in  an 
orderly  manner,  and  the  student  directed  how  to  apply  them 
correctly  in  tlie  work  of  forming  the  characters  rapidly  and 
artistically.  Two  or  tliri^e  new  principles  only  are  intro- 
duced in  a  single  lesson,  and  a  list  of  words  inserted  which 
are  to  be  written  in  accordance  therewith.  The  words 
chosen  for  this  purpose  are  those  in  common  use.  The  drill 
which  enables  the  learner  to  write  and  read  them  with  tlie 
required  speed,  fixes  the  characters  lirmly  in  his  memory. 
No  word  or  phrase  is  introduced  until  the  learner  has  been 
fully  directed  how  to  write  it  in  the  proper  manner.  The 
student  who,  taking  the  lessons  in  turn,  masters  each,  will 
upon  completing  the  course,  be  a  competent  writer  of  short- 
hand. 

IV.  Plan.  Each  lesson  is  composed  in  part  of  one  or 
more  pages  of  engraved  matter.  Each  full  page  plate  con- 
tains, Ist,  a  list  of  words  illustrating  the  principles  found  in 
the  same  lesson  ;  2nd,  a  list  of  word  and  phrase  signs  fall- 
ing under  those  principles  ;  3rd,  also  lists  of  word-forms, 
and  series  of  sentences.  A  key  to  each  plate  appears  on  the 
opposite  page.  A  dotted  base  line  is  used  in  all  engraved 
matter. 

Also,  as  matter  for  writing  practice,  each  lesson  is  sup- 
plied with  a  list  of  selected  words,  a  series  of  phrases,  an 
exercise,  a  speed  semtence,  and  an  engraved  exercise  for 
reading  practice.  Suggestions,  and  hints  to  teachers,  occur 
from  time  to  time  at  the  close  of  the  lesson.  The  exercises 
are  composed  of  sayings  and  proverbs,  carefully  selected 
from  the  best  authors,  ancient  and  modern.  By  writing 
them  repeatedly,  these  wi.«e  maxims  become  familiar,  and 
give  the  student  the  advantage  of  a  mind  stored  with  the 
best  precepts  of  all  countries.  The  course  of  lessons  is  fol- 
lowed by  a  Vocabulary  of  word  and  phrase  signs,  and  diffi- 
cult outlines. 

Hyphens  are  used  to  indicate  which  words  are  to  be 
phrased.    Difficult  words  are  marked  with  a  star,  and  their 


INTROD  UCTOR  Y  REMjLBKS. 


outlines  are  given  in  the  Vocabulary.  As  a  convenience  in 
teaching,  the  word-lists  are  numbered  by  line.  The  three 
figures  given  parenthetically  at  the  close  of  each  exercise 
indicate,  1st,  the  number  of  words  contained;  2nd,  the  min- 
utes and  seconds  in  which  it  should  be  written  ;  3rd,  the 
time  in  which  the  notes  are  to  be  read  afterwards.  To  illus- 
trate, the  figures  "  (175-5-2)"  at  the  close  of  exercise  6,  p.  43, 
indicate  that  the  exercise  contains  175  words;  that  it  is  to 
be  written  in  5  minutes,  and  the  notes  to  be  read  in  2  min- 
utes. As  a  rule,  the  student  will  be  expected  to  write  the 
exercise  in  schedule  time,  before  proceeding  to  the  next 
lesson.  But  this  is  not  required  of  pupils  who  are  quite 
young.  On  the  other  hand,  apt  writers  often  make  better 
time  than  is  here  required. 

While  this  book  is  intended  for  persons  of  all  ages  the 
portion  following  Lesson  XXXII  may  not  be  understood  by 
pupils  who  are  quite  young.  Before  beginning  it,  they  are 
I'ecommended  to  turn  back,  and  go  over  all  the  first  part  of 
the  book  a  second  time. 

V.  Outlook.  Brief  writing  —  indeed  the  real  necessity 
for  it — is  an  outgrowth  mainly  of  very  recent  times.  Won- 
ders have  been  accomplished  in  the  way  of  developing  and 
perfecting  the  system.  Nevertheless  much  room  remains 
for  improvement.  The  value  of  stenographic  writing  as  an 
accomplishment,  and  as  a  part  of  a  practical  business  edu- 
cation, is  so  obvious,  and  the  trials  of  its  utility  so  various 
and  satisfactory,  that  the  demand  for  a  knowledge  of  the  art 
is  spreading  with  an  increased  rapidity.  The  pursuit  of 
stenography  as  a  distinct  calling,  has  grown  beyond  all 
expectation.  Already  in  each  of  the  older  States  and  prin- 
cipal cities,  the  number  of  those  engaged  in  the  short-hand 
writing  business  reaches  into  the  thousands.  The  work  is 
pleasant,  instructive,  and  profitable.  Will  it  remain  so? 
We  will  notice  two  facts  which  in  many  minds  are  the  occa- 
sion for  anxiety  as  to  the  future. 

First.  The  increasing  number  of  students.  But  it  should 
be  borne  in  mind  that  a  large,  perhaps  the  larger  part,  of 


INTRODUCTORY  REMARKS. 


learners  wish  stenography  as  an  accomplishment.  Besides 
thousands  of  young  men  every  year  resign  their  positions 
as  stenograpiiers,  to  enter  some  profession  or  commercial 
enteri)rise.  Fully  as  many  young  women,  also,  reluctantly 
though  it  may  bo! — annually  give  up  short-hand  for  the  more 
tranquil  life  in  a  home  of  their  own.  Other  natural  causes 
also  keep  thinning  the  ranks.  On  the  other  hand,  and  for 
various  reasons  not  necessary  to  enumerate,  the  demand 
for  a  greater  number  of  stenographers  continually  increases. 
We  know  of  nothing  likely  to  check  this  demand;  while  cer- 
tain events,  likely  to  come  to  pass,  as  for  example,  the  per- 
fection of  long-line  telephones,  would  almost  double  the 
amount  of  stenographic  work  to  be  done.  When  the 
knowledge  of  short-hand  shall  have  become  universal,  the 
stenographic  profession  will  still  exist  ;  just  as  book-keep- 
ers would  still  be  needed,  although  every-one  nndtu'stood 
arithmetic  and  the  science  of  accounts.  So  important  has 
short-hand  become,  that  the  time  approaches  when  a  knowl- 
edge of  it  will  be  considered  an  indispensable  part  of  a 
l>usiness  education.  In  deciding  upon  a  course  of  instruc- 
tion for  their  children,  parents  cannot  afibrd  to  overlook 
this  consideration. 

S(ron(l.  The  invention  of  certain  mechanical  contriv- 
ances, known  as  reporting  machines,  including  the  phono- 
graph, etc.,  it  is  thought  by  some  will  ruin  the  reporting 
business.  This  is  only  a  re-echoing  of  the  oft-uttered  cry 
that,  by  reason  of  its  cheapness,  mechanical  must  sui)ersede 
and  do  away  with  manual  skill.  Has  it  done  soV  "The  type- 
writer, it  was  supposed  at  first  would  spoil  the  pen-maker's 
trade.  Statistics  show  more  pens  sold  now  than  ever 
before  !  The  business  of  the  painter  is  helped  rather  than 
hurt  by  the  printing  of  chron)os.  On  every  hand  examples 
of  this  kind  are  seen.  A  machine  cheaper  than  the  pen, 
and  imbued  with  judgment  and  intelligence,  must  be  in- 
vented before  the  educated  stenographer  need  entertain  any 
feeling  of  alarm.  It  is  signilicaut  that  these  anxieties  are 
not  shared  by  the  reporters  themselves. 


INTROB  UCTOR  Y  REMARKS. 


VI.  Style.  Some  styles  of  short-hand  are  briefer  than 
others.  That  the  briefest  is  neces-sarily  the  best  many  igno- 
rant people  foolishly  suppose.  Some  authors  abbreviate 
their  systems  so  greatly  that  a  naturally  slow  person,  after 
long  study,  can  do  verbatim  reporting.  Is  this  necessary? 
Nature  meant  very  slow  people  for  some  other  business. 
Tlie  best  reporters  favor  a  medium  brevity  only,  with  a 
limited  number  of  word  and  phrase  contractions.  It  is 
easier  to  learn,  and  at  the  same  time  enables  a  person  nat- 
urally quick  to  report  a  rapid  speaker.  For  all  puposes, 
and  for  all  people,  this  medium  style  is  best.  The  system  as 
here  presented  can  easily  be  learned  by  any  one  of  intelli- 
gence, and  it  is  amply  brief  for  all  purposes.  Moreover  it  is 
legible,  which  is  not  true  of  the  highly  contracted  styles. 

VII.  To  the  Learner.  If  possible  put  yourself  under  the 
tuition  of  a  competent  teacher.  It  will  save  you  time  and 
keep  you  on  tlie  right  track,  which  is  important.  But  if  you 
have  no  instructor,  you  are  recommended  to  compare  your 
notes  frequently  with  the  engraved  pages.  Criticise  your  own 
work.  At  stated  times  write  as  some  one  dictates  aloud  to 
you,  and  invariably  read  over  your  notes  afterwards. 

VIII.  Acknowledgements.  In  preparing  this  work  a 
thousand  sources  have  been  drawn  from.  While  the  plan  is 
original,  and  shown  to  be  practical  by  years  of  use,  no  claim 
is  made  to  novelty  in  the  matter  of  system.  To  many 
writers,  teachers,  reporters  and  friends  too  numerous  to 
name  here,  the  author  acknowledges  himself  under  lasting 
obligations  for  advice,  help  and  encouragement. 

March,  J^^'i.  E.  M. 


LONG  AND  SHORT  HAND  COMPARED. 

The  chai'acter     y^s ^^^    represents  making.    Separat- 

inj?  the  letters  we  have,  ""^  m  .  a  —  A;  — ^  ng=maki7ig. 

The  sliort  vowel  i  in  ing  is  not  written.  Nor  is  it  strictly 
necessary  to  write  a,  making  usually  being  written  simi)ly 
^~^- — N_^  The  short  method  is  six  times  swifter  than  the 
long-hand,  and  there  are  six  general  principles  by  wliicli  the 
common  system  is  abbreviated,  six  steps,  so  to  speak,  in  the 
ladder  leading  from  the  old  style  up  to  the  new. 

I.  A  letter  for  a  sojind.  In  dough  but  two  sounds  are 
heard,  those  of  daudo;  nevertheless  five  letters,  d-o-u-g-h, 
are  employed  to  express  them.  In  short-hand  but  two  letters 
are  required,  one  for  each  sound,  tlius    j-  dongh. 

II.  A  single  stroke  for  a  letter.    The  long-hand  d  is  written 

with  five  sti'okes  of  the  pen,  while  the  short-hand  j  d  re- 
quires but  one;  the  long-hand  o  requires  four  strokes,  the 
short-hand  -  o  but  one. 

III.  Omission  of  vowels.  It  is  possible  to  write  almost 
entirely  Aviliiout  vowels.  To  illustrate,  this  sentence  is 
easily  decipherable:  "G-d  s-  -d  1-t  th-r-  b-  1-ght,  -nd  th-r-  w-s 
1-ght."    This  principle  is  utilized  in  short-hand. 

IV.  The  use  of  word-signs.  Several  hundred  abbrevia- 
tions, called  word-signs,  are  employed;  e.  g.,  /  ch  for  xvhich, 

r'  lior  will,  • — ^ngiov  thing,  ^  ■?;  for  have,  (   thiov  think, 
I    o  for  before,  etc. 

V.  Phraseography,  or  joining  words  together.  In  long- 
hand, the  pen  is  lifted  from  the  paper  upon  the  completion 
of  each  word.  In  short-hand,  from  three  to  ten  words  are 
written  before  this  is  necessary;  e.  g.,  It-is-hetter  to-have-a 
lion  at-the-head  of  an  army  of  sheep  than-a  sheep  at-the-head 
of-an  army  oflions. 

VI.  The  2ise  of  expedients.  The  most  frequently  recurring 
phrases,  such  as,  in-order-to,  on-the-olhcr-hand,  from-time-to- 
time,  day-after-day,  are  represented  by  brief  signs  which 
express  two  or  more  of  the  principal  words  of  each. 

10 


GENERAL  DIRECTIONS. 

1.  Always  -write  on  ruled  paper. 

2.  Hold  your  pen  in  a  nearly  upright  position. 

3.  Use  good  black  ink,  and  whatever  pen  you  find  most 
satisfactory.  The  "Lady  Falcon"  is  very  good;  also, 
Gillott  Nos.  303  and  404.  The  Esterbrook  school  pen,  and 
certain  Nos.  of  the  Spencerian  are  used  by  some. 

4.  Read  over  at  least  once  everything  you  write. 

5.  Practice  every  day  without  fail,  if  only  a  few  minutes. 

6.  Practice  on  no  matter  not  found  in  your  lessons. 

7.  Write  by  soMwrf— that  is,  what  is  read  to  you.  If  possi- 
ble, get  a  fellow  student  with  whom  to  practice  daily. 

8.  Occassionally  read  over  an  exercise  written  a  week 
previously. 

9.  Each  exercise  should  be  written  slowly  at  first,  gradu- 
ally increasing  the  speed  afterwards. 

10.  Learn  each  word  well,  for  it  is  always  expressed  by 
the  same  character  in  actual  reporting. 

11.  Form  the  habit  of  phrasing,  or  joining  Avords  to- 
gether. 

12.  Write  small ;  remember  the  standard,  one-sixth  of  an 
inch. 

13.  Hold  your  note-book  firmly  by  placing  your  left 
thumb  and  finger  two  inches  above  the  base  line. 

14.  Always  carry  some  short-hand  matter  with  you  to 
study  spare  moments. 

15.  Wlienever  proper  in  writing,  employ  the  characters 
you  have  learned. 

16.  Corresponding  with  other  short-hand  students  is 
earnestly  recommended. 

17.  When  thirty-five  lessons  have  been  learned,  the  stu- 
dent's practice  need  not  be  limited  to  the  exercises  here  given, 
but  easy  newspaper  articles,  the  prose  part  of  school 
readers,  piinted  collections  of  business  letters,  and  published 
reports  of  law  and  convention  proceedings,  may  be  profita- 
bly used  for  this  purpose.  Great  care  sliould  be  taken  to 
write  each  article  properly  the  first  time,  and  to  re- write  it 
afterwards  not  less  than  half  a  dozen  times  with  gradually 

increased  speed. 

11 


DEFINITION  OF  TERMS. 

Stenography.— A  system  of  rapid  writing;  Short-hand. 

Phonography. — Sound-writing;  a  phonetic  system  of  Short-hand. 

Word-Sign,.— Pi.n  abbreviated  outline  from  which  some  of  the  conso- 
nants are  omitted. 

Sign- Word.— A  word  which  is  provided  with  a  sign,  or  abbreviated  out- 
line. 

Phraneograph. — A  character  expressing  more  words  than  one,  formed  by 
writing  a  number  of  words  without  lifting  the  pen. 

Phrase-Sign. — An  abbreviated  phraseograph. 

Phraxeogram.— An  assemblage  of  words  which  are  expressed  by  a 
phrase-sign. 

Con.-<onant  Slem.— Any  \etteT  of  the  consonant  alphabet,  whether  stand- 
ard length,  shortened  or  lengthened. 

Adjunctive  Sign.— Any  character  or  expedient,  other  than  the  letters  of 
the  alphabet,  which  is  employed  to  express  a  consonant  sound ;  e.  gr.,  the 
s-circle,  n-hook,  sl-loop,  emp,  etc. 

Verbatim.— WoTd  for  word. 

iVo/fs'.— Matter  written  in  Short-hand ;  Stenographic  manuscript. 

List-W07'ds.-  Series  of  words  to  be  written  according  to  the  rules  which 
just  precede  them.    See  sections  24  and  .'54. 

Sj)eed  Sentence.— The  sentence  which  is  to  be  written  a  given  number  of 
times  in  one  or  two  minutes.    See  sec.  89. 

Abbreviations.— h  1,  L  2.  L  3,  etc.,  refer  respectively  to  Lines  1,  2,  3,  of  the 
engraved  plates. 

Tijpe- Writer. — Refers  either  to  a  writing  machine,  or  the  person  who 
operates  it.  For  disUnction,  the  operator  is  sometimes  called  a  type- 
writist,  or  a  type-operator.  The  name  "type-writer,"  however,  as  desig- 
nating the  person,  is  gaining  currency,  and  may  well  be  adopted,  since 
writing  machines  are  usually  called  by  a  specific  name,  as  the  Remington, 
Caligraph.  Hammond,  etc. 

Ti/posrript .—lief ers  to  type-written  manuscript,  sometimes  called  simply 
"type-writing."  The  name  Typograph  has  also  been  applied  to  the  instru- 
ment itself. 

—12— 


LESSON  I. 


CONSONANT  ALPHABET — SECTION  I. 
8  3         4  5  6  7 


\p       \b        jt     |(1         /ch       /\      __    k       _g 

2.  For  convenience  the  fifth  lett«r,    /  ch,  is  called  c/iay, 

and  the  eiglitli, (J'ly-     All  these  characters  are  used  in  the 

same  way  as  the  corresponding  long-hand  letters,  with  this 
important  exception,  that  no  sign  is  ever  employed  unless 
the  sound  it  represents  is  actually  heard  when  the  word  is 
spoken.  Hence  in  add  (ad),  there  is  but  onet/;  in  dipped 
(dipt),  but  one p;  in  ditch  (dich),  ^s  omitted  because  silenl; 
in  lack  (lak),  c  is  dropped  for  the  same  reason;  in  dodge  (doj), 
silent  d  is  omitted,  and  g  represented  by  j,  because  j  exactly 
expresses  this  sound;  in  gem  (jem),  g  also  in  short-hand  is 
better  expressed  by,/;  in  cap  (kap),  c  is  not  used  because  the 
sound  for  which  it  stands  is  better  expi'essed  by  k. 

3.  The  first  six  letters,  \p,\b,  \  t,  \d,  /  ch,  /  j, 
are  always  struck  doianwards;  but  horizontal  letters,  as  — k, 
—  g,  are  written  from  left  to  right.  The  letters  which  prop- 
erly express  the  consonant  sounds  of  a  word,  when  connect- 
ed together,  are  called  a  word-form.  This  should  be  executed 
without  lifting  the  j)cn  from  the  paper,  each  successive  letter 
being  written  in  its  proper  direction,  beginning  where  the 

pi'eceding  one  ends.   For  illustration,  see  /       check,  (Line  10, 

Plate  1);  /  jap  (L  11);  ^-^  jacket  (L  12);  \  p>age  (L  13). 
In  some    ^    of    these  ]  words,  as  jack-  /  et,  it  will  be 

seen  that  one  letter  falls  below  the  line;  this  is  a  common  oc- 
currence, and  quite  necessary.  The  rule  for  placing  letters 
is  tluit  the  fimt  downward  letter  should  rest  on  the  line.     This 

requires  that  some  letters  be  written  one  space  above,  as k 

in  cage  (L  13),  which  in  this  case  is  necessary  in  order  that 

/  j,  the  first  downward  stroke,  may  rest  on  the  line.  De- 
vote several  hours  to  tliis  lesson.  Copy  Plate  1  twenty  times. 
Rcmemlier  the  three  rules:  1st.  Practice.  2d.  Practice! 
3d.     Practice  ! 

—14— 


Plate  I, 

P-l    B-3       T-3D-4       CH-5    J-6    K-7       G-8 

iwii   // wii//^ 

2  \\\\\     Mill      ///// 

3     \\\\\       I  I  I  I  I  ///// 

*  w  w  w  w  w  \\  w  w  w  \\ . 

ell       II      II      II      II      11      II      II      II      II 

6     //       //       //    //    //    //      //     //     // 


8  w  //  w  //    w  //    w  // 

9  I   I       =         I   I     ^         I  f      =  11=  II 

10  Ch-K,  check         Il_   l_        l_       A—         I—      /—     /— 

■■-"■  <<<<<<<< 

14  B-J.  budge  J— B.  job\     /         \       /       \      /  \        / 

15  J-  K.  Jack  G— Ch.  Gatch  /        "7        Z—         /         Z—  / 


12  J— K. — T.  jacket 


13P-J.  page;K    J. 


LESSON  II. 

CONSONANT  ALPHABET — SECTION  II. 

4.  Letters  11  and  12  (L  1,  plate  2)  are  named  [  ith  and 
(  the,  the  first  having  the  force  of  th  in  th-'iuk.  or  ho-th,  and 
the  second  the  force  of  th  in  th-em  or  brea-</i-e.  /  Z  (No.  14) 
has  the  force  of  z,  and  is  equivalent  to  s  in  ha-s,  wa-s,  goe-s, 
etc.  Letters  15  and  16  are  designated  ^  ish  and  ^  zhe,  the 
tii'st  having  the  power  of  sh  in  s/i-all  or  fi-s/i,  or  of  ci  in 

vi-ei-ous;  the  second  that  of  s  in  plea-s-ure  or  «  iu  sei-2-ure. 

The  name  of  the   17th  letter  is  /'^  lay.    Letter  21,   called 

> iiig,  is  used  to  express  7ig,  as  in  si-?ig,  hvi-ng,  etc.;  also  7i 

when  it  occurs  before  k  or  g,  as  insi-w-k,  dri-?^-k  (pronounced 

si-w£r-k,  dri-?2£r-k).     Letters  22,  23  and  24  are  named  ^  way, 

f^  y^Vi  d^  hay,  respectively.  W  and  y  in  long-hand  are 
sometimes  vowels,  as  in  cow  or  clay,  and  in  such  cases  the 
short-hand  letters  way  and  yay  should  not  be  used.  W  and 
y  are  consonants  only  when  they  begin  syllables,  and  vowels 
when  they  e?id  them.  ^^  Hay  has  the  force  of  h  in  /j-eat  or 
/t-ead,  but  must  not  be  used  to  indicate  h  in  /)/??/,sic  (the  di- 
graph ^J/i  being  equivalent  to /),  or  in  dough  (in  which  //  is 

silent).  /^  Hay  and  /^  lay  are  written  upivards. 

5.  Beginners  write  too  large.  One-sixth  of  an  inch  is  the 
proper  length  ;  but  young  persons  may  write  larger.  The 
light  lines  should  be  made  as  thin  as  possible,  and  the  shad- 
ed strokes  only  heavy  enough  to  be  readily  distinguished. 
In  these  respects  the  learner's  work  should,  so  far  as  prac- 
ticable, conform  to  that  shown  in  the  engravings  (plates  1 
and  2).  The  earnest  student  will  carefully  compare  and 
rigidly  correct  his  own  exercises  before  submitting  them  to 
his  instructor  for  criticism. 

6.  The  writer  is  very  apt,  at  first,  to  allow  |  t  and  |  d  to 
lean  to  the  right,  and  to  give  too  little  slant  to  the  oblique 
letters.  Give  upright  hitters  a  slight  inclination  in  the 
opposite  direction,  and  the  others  an  extra  degree  of  slant, 
until  the  fault  disappears. 

—16— 


F    9       V-10  TH--11  TH-12  S-13       Z-14  SH-15      ZH-16 

1        ^^  V  (  (  )  )  y  ^ 

L-17     R-18  M-19  N-20  rTG-21     W-22  Y-33       H-"! 

^        /^  ^^         ^         ^  _  ^  r        ^ 


3     F-V 


W^^V.V_V_^^^ 


4    sn-zn     JJJJJJJJJJ 

5    TH-TH,^z(    ())(())  ((        )     ) 

6  L-Y,  R_w  f  r   ^^  rr  ^^  rr  ^>i 


7     M-H-N-NG 


8     RM-ML 


9N-cn,j-MVA         VA       V/.      VA 

11  L-V,Iove;  n-T,hat/^V^    ^       ^^     ^     /^     ^ 

12  M— K— NG  making 

13  P-K— N  — K  picnic^ 


14   M— M— K  mimic 


/juc 


15     ( 

they   /judge    lake  may 


deluge  lovely  lady 


18  REPOBTTNO  STYLE  OF  SnORT-HANl). 

7.  The  pen  may  be  held  between  the  tliunib  and  the  first 
and  second  tiiigers,  not  far  from  the  nib,  and  in  a  nearly  np- 
rijrht  position,  as  shown  in  fig.  J  (plate  2-B).  Stenographers 
often  liold  their  pen  as  shown  in  fig.  K,  and  the  student  may 
sometimes  adopt  this  manner  with  advantage. 

KEY  TO  PLATE  2-B. 

8.  Figures.  A  shows  attitude  of  straight  letters;  B  and  C 
show  direction  of  writing  them,  the  rule  being  toward  the 
centre;  D,  E,  F  and  O  show  attitude  and  curvature  of  the 
bending  stems  ;  H  and  1  the  direction  of  writing  the  curves  ; 
J  and  K  ways  of  holding  the  pen. 

L  1.    Boll   no  may  wake  live  so  long   hotel. 
L  2.    Early  head  bank  anthem    name  thick   shame. 
In  lines  3  to  6  will  be  found,  in   a  different  order,   the 
proper  outlines  for  the  words  in  Exercise  2. 

9.  It  will  be  observed  that  several  different  words  may 

have  the  same  outlirie,   as  | t-k    for  both  take  and  took  ; 

I  g-d  for  guide  and  giddy ;  \—  b-g  for  big  and  beg. 
When  ambiguity  is  likely  to  result,  .some  of  the  vowels  ai"e 
inserted.    (Vowels  are  explained  in  lesson  5.)    The  need  for 


vowels  is  rai-e.     In  the  sentence,    "Tliose    N —  boys   \ 

bread,"  the  context  enables  the  reader  to  determine  when 

this  character  \ signifies  big,  and  when  beg.    Here  b-g 

first  denotes  an  adjective,  and  then  a  verb ;  and  it  is  a  princi- 
ple of  language  that  the  same  character  may  represent  two 
or  more  dill'erent  parts  of  speech  without  danger  of  conflict. 
10.  Straight  letters  should  be  made  without  crook  or 
curvature,  curves  bent  uniformly  throughout,  and  the  shad- 
ed strokes  allowed  to  taper  at  the  extremities.  Words 
whose  outlines  are  horizontal,  as    '    ^^ — s,.^-   making,   or 

.- — ^— -s mimic,  should  be  written  on  the  line.     If  the  first 

stroke  is  upward,  as  in  eTY       hotel,  it  should  begin  also  on 
the  line.    The  system  is  so  philosophically  arranged  that  if  a 


/ 


Plate  2^B. 


P      T     CH 


IJ 


/^ 


,\I/' 


11 
A 


L   L 


'    \ 


V7 


TRANSLATE. 


^  ; 


9  7         10 


11 


127      13^-:/     14  Z'  15/  16 


•20 


RKPOnTTXr,  STYLE  OF  SIWET-nAND. 


shddcd  stroke  he  made  too  light,  or  a  thin  stroke  be  made  too 
heavy,  no  iiiu'ortainty  of  meaning  is  at  all  likely  to  resnlt. 
To  illustrate,  the  sentence;  "It  is  pest  to  bay  as  you  go,"  is  of 
no  doubtful  signification.  In  this  case,  \pand  \  6  are 
interchanged,  which  is  the  practical  result  of  shading  the 
wrong  stem.  It  is  another  principle  of  language  that  both 
sounds  in  any  pair  of  cognates,  as  \jp  and\6,  j  t  and  |  d, 
V^/and  ^  V,  etc.,  may  safely  be  expressed  by  the  same 
sign.  Hence,  strictly,  shading  is  not  necessary  at  all  in  tliis 
system;  but  since  it  materially  improves  the  legibility  of 
short-hand  notes,  it  should  not  be  neglected. 

11.  The  beginner  sliould  spend  some  time  in  outlining 
words  orally,  taking  tlie  following  as  an  illustrative  exer- 
cise :  T-k,  take  ;  bk,  book  ;  p-g  (pronounced  pee-gay)  pig  ; 
b-g,  big;  d-ch,  (pronounced  dee-chay)  ditch  ;  b-j,  budge  ;  j-b, 
job;  t-b,  tub;  k-j,  cage;  p-j,  page;  b-k-t,  bucket;  t-k-t,  tick- 
et ;  j-k-t,  jacket ;  k-b-j,  cabbage  ;  p-k-j,  package  ;  b-t-k,  be- 
take; b-j-t,  budget;  b-d-k,  bedeck  ;  j-j,  judge  ;  d-k-t,  docket. 

12.  The  learner  is  asked  to  read  this  sentence  to  some 
friend:  "  That  larj  fclo  lookt  hi  and  la  for  the  lime  kil  07i  the 
naro  ej  ov  the  Ml.'"  Immediately  afterwards  read,  "  That 
large  fellow  looked  high  and  low  for  the  limekiln  on  the  narrow 
edge  of  the  hill.''''  Would  it  not  be  the  same  to  him?  Or,  do 
you  think  h.e  could  tell  from  your  reading  how  the  words 
were  spelled?  In  the  lirst  sentence  they  are  spelled  more 
nearly  as  they  are  pronounced,  and  one  of  the  ciiief  differ- 
ences between  short-hand  and  long-hand,  so  called,  is  that 
in  the  former  the  spelling  of  a  word  dcjJemls  entirely  upon 
the  particular  kind,  and  the  arrangement,  of  the  sounds  it 
contains.  This  is  not  true  in  common  writing.  In  sound- 
writing  no  more  letters  are  employed  than  there  are  distinct 
sounds  hoard;  thus/o,  foe;  na,  nay;  do,  dovgh;  fahl,  fable; 
mikst,  mixed;  kioil,  quill;  hiven,  tvhen.  There  are  no  silent 
letters  in  short-hand.  Hence  the  usual  manner  of  spelling  a 
word  has  nothing  whatever  to  do  in  determining  the  way  in 
which  it  is  to  be  written. 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  21 


ORAL  EXERCISE. 

13.  K-m,  came;  t-m,  time;  ii-m,  name;  j-m,gem;g-m,  game; 
1-v,  love;  th-f,  thief;  h-v,  heavy;  m-v,  move;  sh-v,  shave; 
m-m-k,  mimic;  k-m-k,  comic;  b-k-m,  became;  d-l-j,  deluge; 
h-t-1,  hotel;  n-g-j,  engage;  s-k-p,  escape;  m-n-th,  month; 
n-th-ng,  nothing;  d-m-j,  damage;  b-ng-k,  bank;  1-ng-k,  link; 
1-f-ng,  laughing;  w-k-ng,  Avaking;  s-s-t-m,  system;  s-t-n-g-r-f-r, 
stenographer;  t-k-s,  tax;  k-w-1,  quill;  h-w-t,  white;  r-zh-r, 
erasure. 

EXERCISE  2. 

14.  1  Being  2  namely  3  time  4  among  5  death  6  ask  7  be- 
came 8  book  9  go  10  bucket  11  be  12  up  13  touch  14  pay 
15  bedeck  16  betake  17  jng  18  dog  19  pitch  20  take  21  keep 
22  dodge  23  pig  24  pick  25  ditch  26  deck  27  came  28  it 
29  polish   30  do    31  also    32  package.        (32—2—1). 

Suggestions. — If  you  meet  with  any  difficulty,  or  if  you 
do  not  liud  short-hand  clear  and  easy,  do  not  for  that  reason 
throw  down  your  pen.  You  cannot  aiford  to  wait  for  your 
class  to  meet,  or  until  your  lesson  by  mail  is  returned. 
Study,  write,  read,  practice;  work  awaj'!  The  oftener  you 
copy  the  characters,  the  better  will  you  understand  the  prin- 
ciples. Obstacles  melt  aAvay  before  an  earnest  worker. 
Leave  no  lesson  until  you  can  say  "  yes  "  to  these  questions: 
Do  you  undei'stand  the  principle?  Can  you  write  the  Exer- 
cise correctly?  Write  it  in  tlie  required  time?  Read  it  after- 
wards?   Have  you  written  it  at  dictation? 

To  THE  Teacher. —  Wh,  x,  and  q  will  embarrass  most  be- 
ginners. The  instructor  should  explain  these  letters,  as  the 
needs  of  the  learner  may  demand.  X  is  equivalent  to  ks, 
since  tax  and  tacks  are  pronounced  the  same.  In  rare  cases, 
cc  is  a  subvocal,  having  the  force  of  gz,  as  in  exainple,  pro- 
nounced egz-ample.  In  quick,  q  is  equal  to  kw ;  thus,  kwick. 
Wh  equals  hw  ;  thus,  h  uttered  before  wile,  the  two  in  quick 
TuccessTon,  produces  while. 


LESSON  III. 

/"  WORD-SIGNS.  ^ 

{  ^ 

I  15.  Key. — 1.  Which  come  for  shall  -ttSWftl  will  have 
them  was.  2.  Him  your  together  «tk~aiitagG  l-sui^^uag^ 
ehangc  Uiink  oLijont  -faithf^tl.  3.  Health  i-sii-ome^  Novem- 
ber effiiiioHt — bee<H«e  clia^Jter.  4.  Especially— #«mtliar 
pi>pi»4ar    he  ir<?ip    never.  / 

Word-Forms. — 5.  Alabama  behead  duet  keg  annul 
period  anatomy  nothing.  6.  Doing  helping  paying 
asylum  fail  gypsy  ink  thumb.  7.  Asiatic  bishop  Fanny 
manual    along    vowel    denial. 

Sentences. — 1.  Tliey  may  wake  up  Dick.  2.  They  have 
enough  cash  for  your  big  Dakota  jol).  3.  No  timid  thief  will 
long  escape  death.  4.  Tiiey  also  think  they  have  enough 
ingenuity.  5.  So  it  may  be  they  will  effect  it.  6.  They  will 
pay  money  into  bank  for  your  November  honey.  7.  Bishop 
Matthew  will  never  deviate.  8.  Never  take  Fanny  mail 
Avhich  came  for  Lilly. 

16.  There  are  several  hundred  short  words,  as  /mi'e,  him, 
which,  is,  will,  for,  etc.,  which  are  very  common.  The 
reporter  must  Avrite  them  over  and  over  again  so  often,  that 
to  save  time  they  are  ex])ressed  by  ubbrcvialed  outlines,  some 

of  the  letters  being  dropped.  Thus  for  is  written  V_  /,  in- 
stead of  ^V^/'%  ^  being  omitted.  Hence  V_ /,  being  an 
abbreviation,  ^    must   be     memorized    as    the    tvord-sign 

for  the  word  for.  Word-signs  are  chai'acters  which  express 
one  or  more  of  the  leading  consonants  of  the  words  they  are 
used  to  represent.  These  characters  are  for  convenience 
called  woid-signs,  and  the  words  represented  l^y  them,  sign- 
words.  For  example,  ^  is  the  word-sign,  and  for  the  sign- 
word. 

17.  These  Sign^^  cannot  be  too  thoroughly  committed  to 
memory,  since  the  ivords  they  rejiresent  (ire  those  which  occur 
most  frequently .  Remember  always  to  use  the  proper  word- 
sign,   and  not  the  full  outline,  whenever  any  sign-word  is  to 


•/ 


1  / 


3  r\ 


L 


r 


^late  3. 

J  J   r 


^V.    VI 


SENTENCES. 


(  (    ^  ^ 


V.    (    ) 


4^/,G(-  \\ 


Y  X  Y_'-t_ 


6 !  /A.  \  r^   ^     /  ^  u 


L 


(  ^ 


VA 

k    (     r  r-     i_^     I  .  ®  (  ri 

®  )    I    ^  \ 
(    r   ^     I  X  ®  (   r   \  ^^ 
Y    \ k    r    -v_  ^^  X 

@\A     7   ^    ^^     I  X  ®"A.    L 


/ 


V 


<?- 


554  REPORTIXO  STYLE  OF  SIIOET-IIAXD. 

be  written.     For  example,    come  should  be    written  — , 

never  ,r-^    ;  which  /,    never    ,;/'^~^      The  word-signs 

given  in  each  lesson  should  be  /  copied  from  tifty 
to  one  hundred  times.  In  this  way  the  pupil  memorizes 
ivhile  lenrning  to  execute  thon. 

18.  Proper  nouns  are  underscored  Avith  a  short  double 
dash,  as  shown  in  Alabama.    L  5. 

19.  The  tick  at  the  beginning  of  ^^  h  should  be  written  in 
a  horizontal  position,  and  not  inclined  in  such  a  manner  as  to 

form  a  hook,  thus  c^T^  It  is  sometimes  inconvenient  to  write 
this  tick  when  h  is  not  tiie  first  consonant  in  the  Avord. 
In  such  cases  it  is  clearly  enough  indicated  by  retracing  the 
preceding  letter  a  short  way,  as  in  behead.     L  5. 

20.  A  single  movement  of  the  pen  is  sufficient  to  indicate 
ditet,  or  keg,  and  similar  words,  the  stroke  tapering  or 
thickening  gradually.  L  5.  The  letter  I  is  sometimes  writ- 
ten downward  (as  in  votvcl,  manual,  L  7),  and  is  then  called 
cl  to  distinguish  it  from  hii/  (upward).  Sh  when  struck  u])- 
ward  is  called  shay.  (See  bishop,  L  7).  Always  use  lay  and 
ish,  unless  el  and  shay  are  specified. 

21.  One  of  the  purposes  in  sometimes  using  el  instead  of 
lay,  and  shay  instead  of  ish,  is"to  secure  better,  that  is  sharp- 
er, angles  at  their  junctures  with  other  letters.  The  legibil- 
ity of  an  outline  depends  to  a  large  extent  upon  its  angular- 
ity.   For  this  reason   a  distinct  angle   should   be  made  in 

joining    (    t7/i  and  V_  cf,  \^  c/and^_^e?z,  (    t7A  and  ^~^i)ig, 


(as  in        \,_^  nothing),  and  other  letters   making    similar 

junctions. 

23.  The  participial  ending  i-n-g,  is  usually  denoted  by  the 
consonant  — ng.  In  some  cases  it  is  more  convenient  to 
express  ing  by  placing  a  large  dot,  its  affix  sign,  at  the  end 
ot  tlie  word,  as  in  doing,  helping,  paying.  (L  6.)  The  dot 
should  be  used  in  all  cases  Avhere  the  use  of  the  stem  ng  re- 
sults in  a  word-form  that  is  either  awkward  or  unangular. 


/ 


REPORTIXG  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  25 

The  dot,  however,  cannot  be  used  for  ing,  the  final  letters 
of  some  nouns,  as  th-ing,  noth-ing. 

23.  Speed  in  short-hand  is  of  no  consequence  unless  what 
is  written  can  be  read  afterwards.  Legibility,  or  read-ability, 
depends  in  part  upon  the  accurate  forming  of  the  characters. 
To  do  tliis  it  is  not  necessary  to  write  them  slowly  ;  on  the 
contrary,  experienced  stenographers  produce  the  moi'e  per- 
fect outlines  with  a  somewhat  rapid  movement,  just  as  an 
experienced  penman  executes  the  most  graceful  curve  by 
a  quick  stroke,  rather  than  by  slowly  drawing  it.  The 
student  should  learn  at  the  outset  to  write  the  characters, 
rather  than  draw  them.  Nevertheless,  the  beginner  needs 
time  at  first,  and  ought  to  form  each  character  a  number  of 
times  with  care  and  deliberation,  until  the  proper  outline  is 
firmly  impressed  upon  his  mind,  before  attempting  to  Avrite 
it  quickly.  Afterwards  write  it  rapidly,  and  continue  doing 
so  until  it  can  be  formed  both  accurately  and  quickly.  All 
beginners  form  the  characters  too  large,  and  are  apt  to  place 
them  too  far  apart.  A  great  saving  of  time,  and  a  consequent 
gain  in  speed,  will  be  the  result  in  the  long  run,  if  the  words 
are  written  both  small  and  closely  together.  The  learner 
should  begin  acquiring  this  habit  now.  The  light  letters 
should  be  quite  thin,  and  very  little  shading  will  be  found 
sufficient  to  distinguish  the  heavy  strokes. 

,       -'  EXERCISK   3. 

24.  1  Wait  2  bulk  3  depth  4  effect  5  effigy  6  error  7  wade 
8  fare  ^  dare  10  farm  11  remedy  Impolicy  13  agency 
14  enougli  15  army  16  delay  17  am  18  waking  19  engage 
20  image  21  inform  22  invoke  23  know  24  comic  25  shadow 
26  share  27  baggage  28  bath  29  below  30  betime  31  buftalo 
32  cab  33  detail  34  dig  35  4k\\\  36  fair  37  far  38  fellow 
39  gash  40  gum  41  gush  42  hack  43  honey  44  hivish 
45  levity  46  link  47  log  48  monk  49  omit  50  pair  51  pang 
52  remove  53  shake  54  sham  55  shove  56  going  57  tank 
58  thief  59  tick  60  timid  61  top  62  vacate  63  fatigue 
64  Jacob  65  Matthew  66  Lilly  67  Lucy  68  Dakota  69  Dick 
70  Jack.     Using  shay  (upward),   71  fish   72  dish  73  push. 

(73—3:30—2.) 


•V 


LESSON 

RAY  (OK   UVWAKD     K),    AND    PlIP^ASE   ■WRITING. 

25.  Key.  1  Arc  wrt'ck  forry  forehead  tyranny  herb 
rub  Rachel  allegory.  3.  Heretic  retire  repair  are-many 
I-say  I-shall  I-guide  I-do  I-am.  3.  He-may  he-Avill  lie- 
maj^-think  he-was  he-has-no  he-is-wrong  he-hurried  he- 
became  he-is  he-has.  4.  You-will  you-know  will-you- 
come  are-3'ou-ready  you-may-go  as-many-as   as-long-as. 

Word-signs.  5.  In  that  I  is  his  as  has  notwithstand- 
ing you  are  rather  ye-prei-umt.  6.  Regular  irregular  leg- 
ible  illegible  dignity    reform   perform    essential    peculiar. 

7.  ^Ligazine  magnanimous  New  York  republic  majesty 
do-as-you  as-you-will  whieii-is-so. 

Sentences.  1.  Timothy  married  Rachel  for-love.  2. 
They  live  in  Alabama.  3.  Jacob  married  Ruth  for- 
money.  4.  Tliey  live  in  Tennessee.  5.  Tliat  match  was 
foolish.  6.  Tliey  both  do  wrong.  7.  Tliey  may  move 
into  Dakota  for  health.  8.  Tom  will  avenge  that 
wrong,  y.  I-admire  them-that-are  upright.  10.  I-abhor 
them-that  do-wrong  for  pay.  11.  It-will-be  no  advantage 
for-them,   notwithstanding  they-may  become  rich. 

26.  /  Bay.  R  is  more  commonly  expressed  by  a  straight 
upward  stroke,  called  ray^  than  by  the  downward  curve  "^ 
ar.  There  are  three  reasons  for  this;  1st,  ray  is  more  quickly 
Avritten;  2nd,  it  more  frequently  secures  angularity  of  out- 
line; 3rd,  it  prevents  many  words  from  extending  too  far 
below  the  line.  The  student  will  hereafter  use  ray  in  all 
cases  where  ar  is  not  specified. 

27.  Phrasing.  In  short-hand  two  or  more  commonly  re- 
curring words  are  often  written  together  without  the  pen 
bring  lifted  froni  the  paper.  A  series  of  words  wliich  may 
thus  be  joined  is  called  a  phrascogi'am,  and  the  character 
which  expresses  them,  a  phaseograph;  thus  the  words,  you- 
may-go,    constitute  a    pluaseogram,    Avhile    the    character 

^■^""^^ is  termed  a  phrasoograph.    Much  speed  is  gained 

hy  phrasing,  with  no  sacrifice  of  legibilit}'. 

—26- 


/ 


3 

4 


r 


1 


n 


(          V.     p      o 
.— i ^. 


3  o .^ 

WORD-SIGNS. 

o     b  .L      o- 


6  , 

7 


^  /7r  i_ 


SENTENCES 


Y 


7    i    J' 
I  /^  vrv  X 


®(  rv  ^ 

^^     x®       (       A 

)   vy^K®  (    \    I    X^  .  ®  (    ^ 
"X     ^     L    Vf  A.X  ®  U.    ^ 

V.        (      /--     X®     t^    ^     VI    X 

\   X  @V\ 


@\^  \     I   X-   V 


/ 


\ 


4-   U 


\ 


^ 


28  BEPORTIXO  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

i.— Ill  plu'aseograpliy,  only  half  the  sign  for  "I"  is  commonly 

written,  whichever  of  the  two  "ticks"  *  or  ',  makes  the 
best  angle  with  the  word  to  which  it  is  joined;  e.  g.,  in  I-guide 
or  I-am  (L  2),  the  douniivard  tick  is  used;  but  Avhen  the 
second  tick  is  employed,  it  is  invariably  struck  tqnvards  as  in 

I-do,  (L2).  With  )  s,  )z,  _J  sh,  and  ^  zh,  the  whole  sign  for 
/should  be  written,  as  in  Lsay,  or  I-shall.    L  3. 

The  sign  /,  when  standing  alone,  or  when  it  begins  a 
phrase,  is  always  written  above  the  line,  and  the  words  com- 
bined Avith  it  aihxpt  themselves  to  its  jjosition,  Examijlc: 
J-am  is  written  above  the  line,  although  am,  when  standing 
alone,  is  i^laced  upon  it. 

28.  He. — In  phrases  he  is  indicated  by  a  tick  precisely 
like  the  latter  half  of  the  sign  for  /,  excepting  that  it  is 
alivays  struck  dowmvard,  as  in  he-became,  or  he-is.  L  -S. 
When  the  tick-sign  for /ie  does  not  make  a*!!  angle  Avith  tlie 
following  Avord,  he  may  be  expressed  by  the  joined  hay,  Avrit- 
ten  only  half  its  usual  length,  as  in  he-hurricd.  (L  3).  It 
will  be  found  couA^enient  occasionally  to  express  he  by  Avrit- 
ing  the  tick  separately,  one  space  above  the  line,  thus,  he. 
When  he  is  attached  to  another  Avord,  hoAvever,  it  has  7io  posi- 
tion of  its  own,  but  adapts  itself  to  that  of  the  Avord  to  which 
it  is  joined;  as,  for  instance,  in  he-may  the  tick  is  Avrittcn 
on  the  line,  Avliile  in  he-was  (L  3)  it  is  necessarily  one  space 
above. 

29.  You. — The  sign  for  you  Avhen  joined  to  other  Avords 
may  be  inverted  if  necessaiy  to  secure  a  good  angle.  See 
you-know,     L  4. 

30.  Ar. — The  verb  are  in  phrases  is  expressed  by  ~^  ar,  in- 
stead of  /  ray,  Avhen  necessary  to  secure  an  angle.  See  are- 
m,any,  L  2. 

81.  Ray  a.nd  diny  are  never  mistaken  one  for  the  other. 
Note  the  folloAving  points  of  distinction  :  Hay  slants  more, 
and  is  a  trifle  longer,  than  chay.  They  are  invariably  Avritten, 
one    ujjward,   and    the  othei*    downward,   and   as  they  are 


y 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


29 


almost  always   joined  to  other  letters  iu    writing  words, 
the  tnamier  of  joining  in^iQ?ites  the  direction ;  fur  example, 

/^     would  not  be  read  ray-lay,  nor    ^  I  chay-te. 

33.  ^  Ar  is  always  used  before  '-"^  m,  never  before  |  t, 
I  d  or  ^^  h,  and  not  usually  after  —  k,  —  g  or  /^  h.  Bay 
is  used  after  <"^  m,  and  before  — ^  n  and  -^-^  ng.  In  begin- 
ning a  word,  either  r  makes  a  distinct  angle  by  junction 

with  a  following  —  k,  —  g,  \  p  or  \  b.  In  such  cases 
~^  ar  is  tised  if  the  vowel  precedes  it,  as  in  arc,  or  herb; 
when  no  such  vowel  occurs,  /  ray  is  employed,  as  in  wreck, 
or  ru-b.  R  at  the  end  of  words  is  usually  struck  uj)ward  if 
followed  by  a  final  vowel,  as  in  ferry.    See  L  1. 

33.  Write,  using  rrc?/;  1  Ring  2  road  3  revive  4  reveal  (el) 
5  revenue  6  ready  7  repeal  8  rash  9  rate  10  range  11  wrong 
13  abhor  13  birth  14  bureau  15  arrive  16  earth  17  march 
18  mark  19  marry  20  married  21  marriage  22  memorial  (el) 
23  merry  24  admire  25  memory  26  mirror  27  narrow 
28  notary  29  period  30  perish  31  rare  32  rarify  33  injury 
34  theory  35  thorough  36  tornado  37  variety  38  victory 
39  hurry  40  poetry  41  Arizona  42  arch  43  burial  (el)  44  bury 
45  carry  46  cherry  47  forge  48  harsh  49  horror  50  inferior 
51  morrow  52  ravage  53  red  54  jury  55  review  56  write 
57  repel  58  revenge  59  revoke  60  revolve  61  rich  62  tardy 
63  terror  64  torch  65  upright  66  urge  67  vary  68  verify 
69  votary  70  wrath  71  wretch  72  notoriety  73  Darius 
74  Ezra  75  Mark  76  Theodore  77  Mary  78  Marion  79  Rachel 
80  Rosa  81  Ruth   82  Barrett.  (82—3—1:30) 


PHRASES. 

34.  As-he  as-it-was  do-so  do-that  do-they  has-that 
have-also  have-become  have-long  I-am-also  I-am-ready 
I-became  I-have  I-know-that  I-was  in-any  in-his  in-it 
in-the-way  in-them  in-which  in-your  may-have  may-never 
take-it  take-that  take-them  it-was. 


30  RKPORTIXG  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAX^D. 

EXERCISE  4.  S' 

35.  1.  Hc-niay-think  he-is  Avroiig.  2.  Are-you-rcady? 
3.  I-am  hunying  iiotwith.staii(!ing3'our  delay.  4.  I-am-goiiig 
into  New-York.  5.  He-will  argue  it.  6.  1-shall  reform  them. 
7.  I-think  he-will-be  popular  enough  as  deputy.  8.  I-say 
Tom  will-do  nothing  for-them.  9.  I-will  inform-yon  that-it- 
may  doforMareh,  never  for  November.  10.  His  daily  ineome 
will  make-him  rieh  enougii.  11.  I-judge  that  The<)(h)re  will 
go  up  into  Dakota.  13.  Among  so-many  your  book  will-have 
no  advantage.  13.  Ezra  Barrett  is  rather  peeuliar.  14.  They- 
nv.xy  never  do-so.  15.  Darius  will-never  mareh  any  regular 
army  into  Arizona.  16.  As-you-may  know  his  help  as  usual 
is  efficient.  (113_4_1 ;  i ,-,) 

30.  Speed  Sentence.— You-may-keep  your  March-maga- 
zine for  Toni  Meredith.  ('^—-1) 


To  THE  Teacher. — Young  pupils,  or  those  not  accustomed 
to  handling  a  pen,  find  curves  more  difficult  than  straight 
etems.  If  in  the  student's  work  these  letters  present  an  ir- 
regular or  cramped  appearan(;e,  the  teacher  may  require 
additional  practice  in  curved  outlines,  as  771-1-1,  n-f-l,  sh-m-l, 
vi-n-J-r,  etc.  Extended  practice  in  Avriting  these  and  similar 
outlines  over  and  over  again  many  times,  will  tend  to  render 
the  curves  flowing  and  even. — Require  every  pupil  to  write 
mostly  with  a  pen;  pencil  Avork  should  be  the  exception. 
See  to  it  that,  in  each  case,  the  pen  is  of  the  proper  stifTness 
to  enable  the  pupil  to  do  the  best  work.  Nor  should  tlie 
learner  ever  be  allowed  to  use  a  cheap  quality  of  paper;  he 
will  do  bad  work,  make  p(jor  progress,  and  get  discouraged. 
It  is  true  economy  to  use  the  A'ery  best  materials  only.  The 
paper  should  always  be  ruled;  but  double  ruling  is  not  neces- 
sary or  best,  except  as  a  guide  to  those  just  beginning  who 
write  too  large  a  hand.  Heavy  foolscap  is  A'ery  suitalde; 
but  when  the  lines  are  far  apart  the  cliaracters  should  occu- 
py less  than  half  the  space  between  them. 


/ 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  31 

Reading  Practice.  The  amount  of  this  that  may  be  neces- 
sary will  depend  on  yourself.  If  you  read  your  own  writ- 
ing with  diflBculty,  you  should  practice  only  so  much  tlie 
more.  Those  who  employ  their  time  mainly  in  writing, 
with  a  view  of  gaining  speed,  producing  inaccui-ate  and 
misshapen  characters  which  they  rarely  attempt  to  read, 
may  rest  assured  that  they  are  making  progress  backwards 
instead  of  forwards.  When  all  the  list  words  of  a  single 
lesson  have  been  carefully  written,  they  should  then  be  read 
over  and  over  again,  until  the  whole  can  be  rendered  in  the 
time  indicated. 

Educational  Value  of  Short-hand.  Short-hand  is  not 
only  valuable  as  a  profession ;  it  is  equally  useful  as  an  accom- 
plishment. No  thinking  man  can  afford  to  be  without  this 
rapid  method  of  transferring  his  thoughts  to  paper.  By 
means  of  it,  first  draughts  of  lettei's  and  articles  are  made, 
and  notes  of  lectures,  business  transactions,  and  private 
memoranda  recorded,  much  more  fully  and  in  but  a  fraction 
of  the  time  otherwise  requii'ed.  Its  great  utility,  both  as  a 
discipline  and  personal  convenience,  is  abundantly  attested 
by  literary  men  of  note  who  are  skilled  in  its  use. 


questions  for  review. 

Which  letters  are  written  downwards? — In  what  direction 
is  k  written? — What  other  letters  are  written  in  the  same 
direction? — In  Notary  (n-t-ray),  which  letter  is  placed  on 
the  base-line? — Name  all  the  letters  which  ai"e  written  up- 
wards.— Spell  exquisite  stenographically. — Name  five  sign- 
words  from  memory. — How  are  proper  names  signified? — 
What  class  of  words  are  represented  by  word-sign's? — In 
wdiat  two  ways  may  the  syllable  i-n-g  be  expressed? — In 
what  respects  are  ray  and  chay  unlike? — Name  three  words 
in  which  ray  is  used; — three  words  iu  which  «r  is  used  in 
preference  to  ray. — Name  the  letters  of  the  alphabet  consec- 
utively. 


LESSON  V. 
LONG  VOWELS. 

37.  Key.  1.  Eat  key  i)eak  oak  lioe  coach  peer  par 
park.  2.  Coop  raw  p.shaw  beach  tame  calm  Maude  yoke 
pool.  3.  Thc-loaf  the-porch  aud-a  aud-the  a-book-and 
a-guide   to-day  to-morrow. 

Sentences.  1.  Thc-yoke  is  heavy.  2.  It-is-a  loaf  of 
dougli.  3.  It-may  thaw  before  to-morrow.  4.  Who-will 
iiiake-a  bowl  of  tea?  5.  Take-the  pole  and-leap  on  to-the 
porch.  6.  Sheep  ought-never  to  roam  too  far.  7.  Your 
yellow  pony  is  calm  notwitlistanding  all-the  uproar. 
8.    The-knavish  hawk  has  both  a-beak  and-a  tail. 

''■     \      \      \.     \-      I-     1. 

Bee         bay  l)ah        taw        tpe        too 


Me  uiay  ma        caw       coe         coo 

39.  The  six  long  vowels  are  denoted  by  a  large  dot  and 
dash  placed  beside  the  consonant  signs  at  three  different 
points,  called  the  Jirst,  second,  and  third  vowe\  places,  being 
respectively  at  the  beginning,  middle  and  end  of  the  stem. 
The  long  sound  of  c  is  expressed  by  putting  a  large  dot  in  the 
first  place,  or  at  the  beginning  of  the  stem,  as  in  bee,  me,  eat 
or  hey;  the  long  sound  of  o  by  writing  the  dash  in  the  second 
place,  or  at  the  ?ntdfZ^e  of  the  letter,  as  in  toe,  coe,  oak,  ov  hoe. 
See  L  1 . 

40.  An  easy  way  to  remember  the  long  vowels,  and  the 

order  of    their   occurence,   is  to    memorize  the   following 
rhjTner 

In  th-e  g-ay  c-a-v 

S-ee  gy-ay  C/.-n-v. 
In  .sm-''f-ll  g-o-ld  b-oo-ts 
T-rt-11  d-o-e  sh-oo-ts. 

41 .  A  word  is  said  to  be  vocalized  when  the  vowel  signs  are 
added  to  its  outline.  A  Nominal  Consonant  is  any  letter,  as 
'  t  or  —  A-  cancelled,  its  office  being  simply  to  indicate  vow- 
el place  when  words  having  no  consonant  are  to  be  written 

as.'./      ah  or  *—/—  awe. 


-f 


y 


y 


Plate  5. 


f 


h 


1 


ir 


3  Vn 

■word-signs. 

the  ought,  who       all         two        too 

a       an    and  •  /  \ 

4  .        .  .  /  N  \ 

alreadyj      before      oh      of         to  or         but        on  ''^-f^^-rr^ 


«    N 


\.l 


SENTENCES. 


should  JuJo'MvA^ 


N  X 


TRANSLATE 


■© 


a/ 


7     ^    V" 


V    ^    I-  / 


^ 


V,  r 


S4  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORTHAND. 


e 
a 
ah 


42.     A  li  C  D 

1st  place.  aw  ^ 

1st    2d     3d 


2d  place. 


I 


3d  place.         «"'     o      oo 

43.  These  dots  and  dashes,  or  the  sounds  they  represent, 
are  denominated^rsi,  second,  and  i/«rrf place  vowels,  accord- 
ing as  they  occupy  the  first,  second,  or  third  positions.  By 
noticing  Figures  A  B  C  D,  above,  it  will  be  seen  that  a 
first-place  vowel  is  written  at  the  beginning,  and  a 
third-place  at  the  end  of  the  stem,  no  matter  whether  the  con- 
sonant is  written  downward,  upward  or  to  the  right. 

The  base-line  has  nothing  whatever  to  do  in  determining 
the  place  of  the  vowel  signs. 

44.  In     I  eat  and  _!_  oak  the  vowels  e  and  o  precede  the 

consonants  |  t  and  —  A-;  hence  the  dot  and  dash  are  writ- 
ten before  the  stems,  e  being  placed  at  the  left  of  t,  and  o 

above  k.  In  |-  toe  and  key,  *  the  vowels  come  last,  and 
for  this  reason  o  is  placed  after,  or  on  the  I'ight  side  of  t,  in 
the  lirst  word,  and  e  after  or  below  k,  in  the  second. 

45.  Dash  vowels  arc  written  so  as  to  stand  out  from  the 
stems  beside  which  they  are  placed,  as  for  example,  in  oak 
and  iriiv  the  dashes  o  and  aw  are  placed  at  right  angles  with 
k  and  r.       \ .       • 

46.  Attention  is  called  to  the  manner  of  writing  ^eer  and 

par  in  L  1 .  If  to  the  word  \.  pa,  r  should  be  added,  the 
character  \*y^  par  would  be  the  result.  But  if  to  the 
word  ./  eer,  p  should  be  prefixed,  the  result  would  be 
\j/^  peer,  written  precisely  the  same  as  par,  just  shown. 

Placing  vowels  in  angles  renders  the  meaning  uncei'tain,  and 
is  also  inconvenent.  To  avoid  this  it  is  necessary  to  observe 
the  rule  that  when  a  third-place  dot  or  dash  occurs  between 
two  consecutive  consonants,  it  is  annexed  to  the  second,  not 
X.oW\Q  first.  For  example  the  first  place  \QiyxG\z  in  6eac^  and 
Maude,  and  the  secondplace  vowels  in  tame  and  yoke  (L  2)  are 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  35 

placed  beside  the  ^rsi  consonant,  while  the  third  place  vowels 
in  coop  and  pool  (L  2)  are  written  beside  the  second.  Th.e  rule 
holds  good  Avhether  a  sharp  angle  occurs  between  the  two 

ems,    or    not;    thus    calm  is    written     '^~^*,    and     not 

47.  Cnuiion.  The  student  must  not  foi'get  that  short- 
hand is  written  by  sound.  Vowels  in  the  sense  here  used  do 
not  refer  to  the  letters,  «,  e,  ^,  etc.,  but  to  the  vowel  sounds 
that  are  acUmlly  heard  in  the  distinct  utterance  of  any 
word.  Hence,'  to  Avrite  a  word  properly,  no  regard  whatever 
should  be  had  to  its  sjicUing.  In  yoke,  for  instance,  there  is 
but  one  vowel,  that  of  o  long;  final  e,  being  silent,  is  notrei)- 
resented.  A  good  plan  is  to  speak  each  word  aloud  before 
writing  it;  or  better  still,  have  the  list  distinctly  pronounced 
to  you  by  another  pei'son. 

48.  Bcmark.  Only  one  out  of  many  hundreds  of  vowels 
is  actually  written  in  taking  short-hand  notes;  but  enough 
more  are  indicated  by  the  manner  of  combining  the  conso- 
nant signs,  to  render  the  system  entii'ely  legible.  The  possi- 
bility of  reading  almost  solely  from  the  consonants  may  be 
shown  by  the  fact  that  a  page  of  print  is  easily  decipherable, 
all  the  vowels  having  been  previously  blotted  out;  for  in 
sucli  cases  the  consonant  element,  which  is  the  more  impor- 
tant, still  remains,  and  the  blots  indicate  where  the  vowels 
are  to  be  supplied.  This  crudely,  and  vei-y  inadequately,  il- 
lustrates the  method  employed  in  short-hand. 

49.  The  vowels  are  used  rarely;  nevertheless  they  must  be 
thoi'oughly  mastered,  in  order  that  they  may  be  inserted 
without  a  moment's  hesitation  when  a  rapid  report  is  being 
made.  The  pupil  is  cautioned  against  forming  the  long-vow- 
el signs  too  small,  a  common  ei'ror,  which  results  in  confus- 
ing them  with  short  vowels. 

The  word-signs  in  this  lesson  are  difficult.  The  memory 
will  be  aided  by  observing  that  each  one  is  in  fact  the  prin- 
cipal vowel-sign  in  the  woi'd  it  represents.  They  are  given 
different  positions  for  the  sake  of  distinction. 


RE  PORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORTHAND. 


50.  The. — Any  one  of  the  three  ticks  which  denote  I  or 
he  may  also  be  used  to  indicate  the,  that  one  always  being 
selected  which  secures  the  best  angle.  This  tick  has  no  posi- 
tion of  its  own.  In  thc-j-iorch,  and  ihe-loaf  (L  3),  the  is  first 
written  above,  and  then  on  the  line. 

51.  A,  an,  and,  in  phrasing  are  all  denoted  by  a  brief  tick, 
written  horizontally  or  vertically  (downward),  as  angle  may 
require,  as  in  a-book-and  a-guide.  See  L  3.  When  either 
tick  may  be  used,  the  horizontal  should  be  given  the  prefer- 
ence. 

52.  The  tick  signs  for  a,  an,  and,  and  the  are  more  com- 
monly used;  the  dots  being  written  when  a  tick  is  inconven- 
ient, or  does  not  join  well.  The  pupil  should  guard  against 
the  common  error  of  forminglthese  ticks  too  lax-ge;  make  them 
as  short  and  litjht  as  possible. 

53.  The  words  which  in  this  book  the  pupil  is  i-equired  to 
vocalize,  are  the  very  ones  which  will  be  most  likely  to  re- 
quire vowels  when  regular  reporting  work  is  to  be~done.  A 
fuller  explanation  of  this  subject  will  be  found  in  Lesson  5. 

Vocalize  the  following  list,  observing  the  rule  explained 
in  section  46  above.  In  the  last  three  lines  the  long  vowels 
only  are  to  be  written. 

54.  1    Ate  tea  ace  saw  sea  low  oaf  foe    ail    ache  gay 

2  aid  dough  awl    ale    lea    ape    Poe    paw    Joe    shoe    eve 

3  thaw  jaw   aim   woe   gnaw  knee   nay   Esau  oar  (ar)  era 

4  (ar)  ado  age  aught  fee  hay    oat  ode  sew. 

5  (1st    place)     Cheek    chalk    heap     heed    tall    leaf    leap 

6  meal  peal  bawl  beak   beam   beer  hawk  deal  kneel   (el) 

7  leak    peach   reap    sheep    team    teeth    wreath    wreathe 

8  Neal  (el)  Paul. 

9  (2nd  place)  Cake  coach  coal   comb  dale  dame  bail  bowl 

10  cape    joke    fame     gale     game    jail    choke    knave    lame 

11  loaf  nail  (el)  pole  porch  vale  abate  bore  (ar)  roam  (ar) 

12  rogue    rope    babe    bait    pole    dome    goal    loathe    pail 

13  poke  pope  rake  robe  tale  tape  vague  Job. 

14  (3d  place)    Tool   root  balm  mar  doom  rood  tomb;  (us- 

15  ing  ar)  lark  tar  czar  tour  jar. 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  37 


16  (Long  vowels  only)    Antique  aurora  (ar)  boquet  foliage 

17  elate   jubilee    oatmeal  parade   pillow    pony   potato  up- 

18  roar  yellow    Ada    Cora  Edith    Eva  Laura  Nora  lower 

19  (ar)  (140-6:45-2:45). 

55.  Phrases.  All-are  all-his  all-my  all-right  ail-that 
all-the-way  all-which  all-you  all-your  aud-have  as-it-should 
befoi-e-his  before-the  before-you  but-a  but-may  but-that 
but-the  but-we  for-a  for-which  has-a  have-a  of-that  of- 
the-way  in-the-way  of-them  on-that  should-be  should-do 
should-never  should-tliey  take-the  to-him  to-live  to-love- 
them  too-many  who-may  who-was. 

EXERCISE    5. 

56.  1.  The-day  is  coming  and  you-may-look  for-a  vic- 
tory before-long.  2.  Should-you-come  to-day  Maude  and- 
Laura  will-maKe  a-boquet  and-an  antique  foliage  Avreath 
for-you.  3.  Are-you-going  to-go  to  sea  to-day?  4.  Paul, 
take  your  oar  and-go-and  row  a-league.  5.  The-knave  is 
taking  coal  into-the  coach.  6.  They-have-a  tall  coop  in-the 
park.  (165-2:30-1). 

57.  Speed  Sentence.  Cora,  you-may-go-and  help  Laura 
make  oatmeal  cake  for  tea.     (3 — 1). 


To  THE  TEACHER. — The  young  learner  and  the  adult  stu- 
dent take  hold  of  short-hand  in  a  manner  entirely  different. 
The  young  pupil  does  not  execute  so  well,  but  takes  more  de- 
light in  the  merely  mechanical  operation  of  writing  and  re- 
writing the  characters  many  times.  The  older  person  forms 
the  outlines  better,  but  dislikes  practice.  He  prefers  to  study, 
while  the  young  student  would  much  rather  spend  his  time 
writing.  This  is  why  in  the  long  run  the  young  succeed 
best.  Short-hand  writing  is  something  to  be  done,  not  mere- 
ly thought  about;  learning  the  art  requires  the  application  of 
the  hand  more  than  the  head. 


^^^.'lafi 


LESSON  VI. 

DIPHTnONGS  AND   THE   S-CIRCLE. 

58.    Key.     1.  Type  voice  vow"boy  oil  cow  Illinois  wide. 

2.  Spy  sauce    doze    ooze    sow  seed    Saul  snail    assignee. 

3.  Spell    search    goes   zinc    zeal  sense    Tom's   bells    ring. 

4.  Owing  owes  owed  wipe  wife  Viola  loyal  twice 
surveyor. 

5.  Phrases.  As-far-as  as-far-as-may  be-such  does-he 
does-never  how-many  iu-any-case  has-he. 

6.  Word-signs.  How  high  now  its  several  special 
subject  advantageous  always.  7.  Knowledge  acknowledge 
January  February  electricity  something  sufficient  forsake 
for-the-sake-of. 

Sentences.  1.  The-savage  toils  a-long-time  before-he 
slays  the  shy  fowl.  2.  The-slave  knows  how  to  sail  the-big 
ship  on-the  sea.  3.  But-the  voyage  to  Hayti  will-be  too-long 
for-the  boy  Guy.  4.  Rufus  may-make  many  rhymes,  but 
it-was  Poe  who  wrote  the  rich  poeti'y  which  all  admire. 

5.  James,  do-you  think  it  will  tire  you  to  carry  this  wide 
vase  two-miles?  6.  I-think  all  of-your  boys  ought-to  come 
to-the  service  on  Sunday. 

DIPHTHONGAL  SCALE. 

^^-  i^  lasin  n-i-ght.  i'^   oi  in  c-oi-l. 

i    otv  in  end-ow.  \}- wimwi-r>e. 

I A  I 

The  diphthongs  i,  oi,  and  ow  are  represented  by  angular 
signs  as  shown  in  ti/pe,  voice,  vow.  L  1.  They  always  point 
either  rip  or  down,  no  matter  whether  the  consonant  beside 
which  they  are  placed  is  slanting  or  otherwise.  J  may  be 
written  in  the  1st,  2nd  or  3rd  vowel  place,  according  to 
convenience,  as  in  spy.     L  2. 

60.  The  triphthong  wi  and  the  three  dipthongal  signs, 
may  occasionally  be  joined  to  consonant  letters  at  the  be- 
ginning or  end  of  words,  as  in  oil,  cow,  wide.    (L  1).     When 

medial,  however,  thej'  cannot  be  joined;  thus, 

—38— 


/ 


*  ^     t     -I      "\      V  ^vT-   </"  fe 

5     " 


PHRASES. 


(j  (j— \      z        VORD-SIGNS.  V. 


/O 


8 .    " 


i    ^    ^    \ .  /  o 


V  f  c    \  C- 


^ 


SENTENCES. 
^ 


)■  .  ®   .    ^        ^'     /A 
/  ^     U/x   ®  A    L    (     I 


40 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SIIORT-IIAXD. 


cannot  be  written    ^/^  ,  since  this  character  would  be 

ambiguous,  expressing  either  co^vl  or  coil. 

61.  The  CiKCLE.  S  and  z  are  denoted  in  outlines  by  a 
small  circle.  This,  when  joined  to  curved  letters,  is  written 
within  or  following  the  direction  of  the  curve,  as  in  sense,  or 
bells.    L  3. 

62.  When  the  circle  is  attached  to  a  straight  letter,  at  the 
beginning  or  end  of  a  word-form,  it  is  always  written  upon 
the  right  of  the  letter  if  downward,  as  in  spell;  on  the  left  of 
upward  letters,  as  in  search;  and  upper  side  of  horizontal  let- 
ters, as  in  goes.     See  L  3. 

63.  The  following  table,  which  illustrates  the  proper  man- 
ner of  attaching  the  circle  to  straight  and  curved  stems, 
should  be  copied  many  times,  until  the  pupil  can,  without 
taking  tliought,  execute  it  properly.  Written  exercises  should 
be  compared  with  it  every  day  until  errors  cease  to  be  found. 
When  joined  to  straight  letters  the  circle  is  struck  with  a  left 
movement,  as  the  letter  o  is  written  in  long-hand.  This  rule 
will  enable  the  learner  to  test  the  accuracy  of  his  writing. 
For  distinction,  s  when  represented  by  the  circle,  is  called 

iss,  and  the  combined  characters  \ ,  f ,  b ,  etc.,  may  be  named 
either  iss4e,  iss-de,  de-iss,  or  ste,  sed,  des,  etc. 


64. 


TABLE  OF   S-CIRCLE  JOININGS. 


65.  S  and  z  being  cognates,  are  both  expressed  by  a  sin- 
gle sign,  namely  the  circle,  with  no  danger  of  ambiguity. 
The  circle  is  not  employed  to  denote  z  when  it  begins  a  word 
asin^wc,  zeal.    L3. 

66.  The  possessive  or  plural  of  a  word,  formed  in  long- 
hand by  the  addition  of  s  or  es,  is  indicated  in  short-hand  by 
affixing  the  s-circle  to  its  word-sign,  or  outline,  as  in  Tom's 
bells  ring.    L  3. 

67.  S  and  z  when  standing  alone,  as  in  ooze  or  sow,  can- 


REPORTINO  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  41 

not  be  represented  by  the  circle,  which  it  is  impossible  to 

vocalize.     L  2.  .p 

68.  The  character  |  is  read  seat,  the  order  of  pronunci- 
ation being,  Jirst,  the  circle;  second,  the  vowel;  and  third, 
the  stem.  S  is  read  first,  although  e  is  actually  placed  be- 
fore, that  is,  at  the  left,  of  it.  If  e  should  be  read  fii-st,  the 
Avord  Avould  be  east;  but  this  plan  would  be  worse,  since  the 
circle  cannot  be  vocalized.  The  stem  J  s  would  have  to  be 
employed  in  east,  as  in  all  woi'ds  where  s  is  preceded  by  a 
vowel.     See  seed,  Saul,  L  2. 

69.  The  vowel  word-signs  i  but  and  '  or  are  not  com- 
monly phrased;  for,  since  a  and  a7id  are  written  in  the  same 

manner,  ambiguity  would  be  the  frequent  result;  thus,  ' — 

would  expi-ess  either  and-go,  or  but-go,  and  /  either  or. 
acknowledge,  or  and-acknowledge. 

70.  Caution. — Beginners  are  disposed  to  write  the  s-cii'cle 
too  large.  There  is  very  little  danger  of  getting  it  too 
small.  The  diphthongal  signs  should  be  made  light,  rather 
small  and  sharp-a7igled.  The  word -sign  „  yori  should  be  a 
complete  semi-circle,  and  quite  small;  not  large  and  flattened 

out,  thus   ^ 

71.  In  forsake,  composed  of  for  and  sake,  the  letter  V_  /is 

used  for  the  first  part  because  it  is  the  sign  for  the 

word /or.  But  in  V/y  /oraye,  which  is  in  no  wise  a  com- 
pound word,  the  first  syllable  for  cannot  be  expressed  by  V^ 
simply.  The  learner  is  cautioned  against  using  word-signs 
in  any  way,  except  to  express  just  those  Avords  which  they 
were  intended  to  represent. 

72.  1    Using    diphthongs,   write:    Tie    pipe    vile     knife 

2  mile   defy    boil  coil    foil  row    toy  vouch  Guy    buy  die 

3  chime  couch   coy   dike    fowl   hide    nigh   owl  foul  pike 

4  pile  rJiyme  shy  sigh  spike  dye  thigh  tire  (ar)  toil  annoy 

5  diet    envoy   royal    Isaac  sour  (ar).    Using    dot   vowels 

6  also;    tli  Elijah  Eliza   Ida  Myra. 


42  HE  PORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

7  Using    the    s-circle:    Case     safe    save    sale     sake    said 

8  same  famous  fix  harness  immense  less  Sabbath  safety 

9  savage  scale  (el)  sell  senate  sketch  service  summer  de- 

10  vise    refuse  police   story  soon    small  smith  sou   smoke 

11  solid  slave   suppose  spell  study    Sunday  space  this  yes 
13  Saturday  cell  cemetery  notice  sex  sink  skip  sledge  slim 

13  sling  slip  spark  spool  such  sun  surface  surge  surpass 

14  survey  swing    Swiss   valise    stay    wages    wax    Horace 

15  James  Rufus  Samuel  Thomas;  (using  ar)  cellar  Caesar 

16  force  spare  sir  eix-cus. 

17  Vocalize:     Lace    seal    seat    site    slow    snow    sail   race 

18  choose   dose  abase  choice  geese  gaze  spoil  vice  pause 

19  seam  scene    raise    voice  invoice  nice   noise  soul  chase 

20  cheese    dice    entice  sage  sauce  siege  slay   vase    sleeve 

21  slope  sly  snail   (el)    snake  soap  sole  sty  repose   Miles 

22  (using  ar)  soar  score  spire.  (168 — 6 — 3:15). 

73.  Phuases.  All-such  all-this  be-said  be-this  before- 
this  do-such  do-this  does-it  does-that  does-the  does-this 
docs-your  for-such  for-this  has-this  have-them  have-such 
have-this  how-may  in-its-own  in-this  is-this  it-makes  such- 
was  to-his  to-this  which-has  M'hich-makes. 

EXEKCISE  6. 

74.  1.  That  boy  of-yours  makes  enough  noise.  2.  Do- 
you  say  he-is  going  to  tie  the-rope  to-the  cow's  neck?  3. 
He  ought  to-make  less  noise  so  that-he-may  keep  his  seat 
in-the  Senate.  4.  May  honesty  be-j'our  policy  notwith- 
standing your  name  may  become  less  famous.  5.  I-will 
help-you  take-an  invoice  of  all-your-stock.  6.  You-should 
never  for-any  reason  or  on-any  day  make-a  foolish  vow. 
7.  Do-you  endorse  the  study  of -such  a  subject  as-this?  8. 
Yes,  and  I-think  you-should  study  it  thoroughly  on-all  days 
but  Sundays.  9.  I-suiipose  you-will  make-it  your  special 
oljject  to  know  it  all  befoi'e  the-month  of  November.  10. 
Several  boys  have  come  to-day  to-sell  milk.  11.  You-will 
have-no  magazine  for  sale  in-this  language  for-several  days. 
12.     It-was  said  in-the   Senate  of-Illinois  that  for  the  space 


BEPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORTHAXD.  43 

of  two  days  all  bells  should  ring  the-alarm.  13.  The  Sen- 
ate of- this  i-epublic  will  long  be  famous  for-its  safe  and-dig- 
nified  policy.  (175—5 — 2). 

75.  Speed   Sentence.    How-many-days   do-you-suppose 
he-will-be  in  surveying  enough  space  for-the  cemetery? 

(5—1) 

76.  TRANSLATE. 


1  ^~\,  \  y°  ""^  /•  V.  r  X 


To  THE  Teacher. — To  the  novice  the  short-hand  letters 
are  all  very  much  alike  in  appearance.  By  holding  up  to 
the  learner  the  features  of  dissimilarity,  each  individual  let- 
ter will  be  more  quickly  recognized,  and  firmly  fixed.  The 
elementary  characters  may  be  differentiated  in  the  follow- 
ing manner:  Consonants.  These  maybe  classified,  1st,  (on 
the  basis  of  form)  into  straight  and  curved;  2nd,  (as  to  size) 
into  light  and  heavy;  3rd,  (as  to  attitude)  into  vertical,  hor- 
izontal and  oblique.  Vowels.  These  are,  1st,  long  and  short; 
2nd,  light  and  heavy;  3rd,  first,  second  and  third  place;  4th, 
dots,  dashes  and  angles;  5th,  simple  and  diphthongal. 


LESSON  VII. 


SHORT  VOWELS. 

77.  Key.  1.  Big  job  beg  cup  tack  ehaggy  echo  poem 
fiat.  2.  Assail  lazy  rose  rosy  sense  essence  race  racy. 
3.    Herb  Arab  array    audit  borrow    buggy  cameo  elbow. 

4.  Word-signs.  We  with  were  would  what  New- 
York-City  public  publish-ed  for-the-purpose-of. 

5.  Phrases.  As-we  for-we-werc  were-it  what-is-it 
what-would-be  with-advantage  would-know  would-rather. 
6.  As-to-do  he-should-bc  for-his-purpose  how-much  how- 
you  think-you-may  what-it-is  does-nothing.  7  and  8.  For 
key  see  list  words  sec  86. 

Sentences.  1.  I-saw  him  buy  a  tall  silk  hat.  2.  We 
shall  sooi"!  dig  a  ditch  along  the  road.  3.  Samuel  Adams 
will  lay  a  gas  pipe  in-it.  4.  What-would  you-like  to-have 
to  eat?  5.  Now  you-may-make  some  coffee  to-take  to-the 
picnic.  6.  I-will  also  boil  some  cabbage  and-take  some 
mellow  peaches.  7.  They-may  thiuk-that-we  live  in-a 
palace. 

78.  SHORT-VOWEL  SCALE. 

I  it        •[  et       \  at       I  ot      -[    ut     _i   oot  (as  in  f-oo-t). 

The  six  short  vowels  hei'e  illustrated  are  indicated  by 
a  small  light  dot  and  dash  written  in  the  three  vowel  places. 
For  example,  a  light  dot  when  written  in  the  second  place 
has  the  force  of  e  in  beg,  and  a  light  dash  the  same  power  as 
M  in  ctqj  (L  1).  A  light  dash,  first  place,  is  equivalent  to 
0  in  Job.  The  learner  will  observe  that  the  short  vowel 
signs  are  quite  small.  This  is  necessax-y  to  render  them 
easily  distinguishable  from  the  long. 

These  mnemonical  rhymes  will  aid  in  recollecting  the  short 
vowels,  and  the  order  in  which  thej'  occur  : 

j  Bill  gets  bat;  j  Lot  cuts  wood. 

(  Kills  red  rat.  |  Dot  does  good. 

79.  By  referring  to  L  1  the  pupil  will  see  that  in  tack  and 
shaggy  the  third-place  vowels  are  locoted  beside  the  second 

—44— 


ilate  T', 

iV_ 

C 

V. 

\    L  ^       ^ 

^ 

2  .K  r 

)  -^ 

-"O      <i_;>       l_p      ^ 

yi  J 

1   4    ^           c 

PHRASES. 

=     e        S 

WORD.SIGNS . 

c 

\i  \^    _^  A- 

■    T  \\V> 

'\ 

\ 

V. 

^V— -V        A^         W—x     "b 

s^ 

'> 

1 

-^     ^       ^-    / 

»^ 

8    /C 

^ 

^^^ 

1  '^ — ' 

^ 

SENTENCES. 

©T  - 

.  v  .  r  ^r~  A 

y®' 

^     «^ 

L-    ; 

C  ■  xi  .®^ 

.u 

• 
N 

>  V 

■ 

• 

X 

\ 

D 

®   _ 

1 

> 

-^ 

'    ] .  ®  u    ^ 

^V 

46 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-BAND. 


consonant,  rather  than  the  first.  This  is  according  to  the 
rule  governing  third-place  vowels,  occuring  between  two 
consonants.  Second-place  short  vowels,  also,  are  appended 
to  the  second  stem,  and  in  this  respect  the  rule  ditiers  from 
that  governing  second-place  long  vowels,  which,  it  will  be 
remembered,  are  written  by  the  first  consonant.  The  fol- 
lowing figures  illustrate  the  entire  rule,  and  will  aid  in 
remembering  it.  The  numbers  1,  2,  3,  represent  first,  second 
and  third-place  vowels,  those  that  are  long  being  signified  by 
the  full-faced  type. 

80.  A  B  C  D 

3 


Beside  the  2nd  consonant  : 
Second-place  short  vowels. 
Third-place  short  vowels. 
Third-place  long  vowels. 


81.  This  rule  for  placing  vowels,  both  long  and  shoi't, 
between  two  consecutive  consonants,  may  be  briefly  stated 
as  follows : 

Write  beside  the  1st  consonant 
First-place  long  vowels. 
First-place  short  vowels. 
Second-place  long  vowels. 

Stated  in  the  fewest  possible  words,  the  rule  is : 
Second-place  long  and  all  first-place  vowels  are  written  by  the 
first  stem,  and  all  others  by  the  second. 

82.  Besides  keeping  vowels  out  of  angles,  a  further  ad- 
vantage of  this  rule  is  that  second-place  vowels,  though  they 
be  insufficiently  or  wrongly  shaded,  are  known  by  the  posi- 
tion they  occupy  by  the  first  or  second  consonant ;  thus  \ 

would  be  read  bake,  because  the  writer  evidently  meant  to 
make  the  dot  large,  since  it  occupies  a  position  where  a  large 
dot  only  could  properly  be  placed.    For  a  similar  reason, 

the  character  \  ,  would  be  read  heck.  The  few  exceptions 
to  this  i-ule  are  given  in  lesson  XXXV.     v  \    , 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  47 

83.  The  vowel  in  herb  (L  3)  is  represented  by  a  second- 
place  dot,  I'ather  than  the  light  dash.  Strictly,  however,  the 
e  in  herb  (and  words  where  it  occurs  before  r)  is  not  the  same 
as  e  in  met,  or  u  in  cup,  although  the  dot,  rather  than  the 
dash,  is  used  in  such  cases.  Other  shades  of  vowel  sound, 
also,  are  unprovided  for  in  the  Scale  ;  but  for  all  practical 
purposes  these  are  indicated  clearly  enough  by  the  signs  for 
those  vowels  which  most  nearly  approach  them. 

r 

84.  In  I"  Dio  it  is  necessary  to  place  two  vowels  on  one 

side  of  a  letter.  Here  '^  i  is  put  nearer  to  |  d  than  -  o, 
since  the  symbols  should  be  written  in  the  same  order  in 
which  the  sounds  occur.     See  also  cameo,  L  3. 

When  two  concurrent  vowels  occur  between  two  conso- 
nants, the  first  vowel  is  placed  by  the  first  stem,  and  the 
second  by  the  last,  without  reference  to  what  pZace  either  of 
the  vowels  may  occupy.     See  poem,  fiat,  L  1. 

85.  Since  every  vowel  is  of  necessity  in  the  first,  second 
or  third  place,  the  stem  j  s  must  be  written  if  a  vowel  occurs 
in  connection  with  it ;  for  if  a  dot  or  dash  were  placed  beside 
a  circle,  there  would  be  nothing  to  show  whether  a  first, 
second,  or  third-place  vowel  were  meant.  Hence  if  s  ispre- 
ceded  by  an  initial,  or  followed  by  a  final  vowel,  the  full-length 
stem,  instead  of  the  circle,  must  invariably  be  used.  See 
assail,  lazy,  racy,  L  2.  This  rule  holds  good  in  all  cases 
whether  the  vowels  are  actually  written  or  riot,  since  the  use  of 
the  stem  in  these  circumstances  indicates  where  the  reader 
is  to  supply  them.  For  example,  the  circle  is  used  in  sense 
and  rose,  but  the  stem  must  be  employed  in  essense  and  rosy. 
SeeL2.        ■:.    ^^".^         ^  ■'      /      s- .^"^  i^«-'-^^  -rr-^-^  '-^^  ^ 

86.  1  Write  :     111  kick  lock  rock   chorus   edge   egg  else 

2  gutss  kiss  mass  haughty  enemy  alas  Asia  gem  valley 

3  malice    autumn    lion    idioin    idiot    maniac    mazy    dozy 

4  posy  daisy  gauzy    dizzy   hazy  noisy  espy  acme  agony 

5  allure    ally  alto    apex  dock    appease   bang  botch    chip 

6  chop    cob    coflee  dairy   duck    dumb   Dutch    epic  essay 


48  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

7  foggy    gang  gas    gaudy  hobby    job   lag    lap   pack    lash 

8  hilc'h    lath  leg    lip  luck    lung    mellow    mess    mob    odd 

9  opera  palace  palm  pith  rack  shock  silk  solemn  Stoic 

10  tally    Adam    Amos    Ellis    Emory    Jesse     Agnes    Anna 

11  Ella  Emily  Emma  Hannah  (using  ar).  arrow  attire  err. 

(96—5—2) 

87.  Phrases.  And-we  as-it-should  for-we  have-we 
such-as  that-you  we-do  we-havc  they-were  we-were  what- 

all     what-do     what-does      with-tho    with-that    would-say 
would-never  how-you. 

EXERCISE    7. 

88.  1.  Rub  your  sore  eye  with-your  ell)ow.  2.  They-that 
talk  of-many-things  eflect  nothing.  3.  Common  fame  is-<v 
common  liar.  4.  You-will-never  sell  your  fowls  on-a  rainy 
day.  5.  Do-you-acknowlcdge  that-the  sky  is  hazy  in  au- 
tumn? 6.  Yes,  but  it-is-never  so  in  summer.  7.  I-have-no 
memory  of  auy-such  tale  as-that  in-your  book.  8.  To  edit 
such-a  book  is-a  big  job.  9.  It-is-in-no-way  sufficient  for- 
this-purpose.  10.  "The-Idiot  and-the  Maniac,"  is-the  sub- 
je(;t  of-niy  poem.  11.  You-may-receive-the  essay  and-take- 
it  to-the  notary.  12.  They  eat  nothing  but  milk  and-eggs 
on-Sunday.  (Ill— 3.-15— 1:30). 

89.  Speed  Sentence.    All-the  ships  of-the  navy  will  soon 

sail  into-the  sea  and  engage  with-the  haughty  enemy. 

(4-1.) 


SuGGESTion. — It  is  well  to  encourage  the  tendency,  which 
is  quite  natural,  of  picturing  in  one's  mind  the  characters 
which  represent  words  heard  spoken  in  convei'sation;  also 
to  cultivate  the  habit  of  mentally  outlining  and  phrasing 
words  and  sentences. — Word  and  phrase  signs  must  be  so 
thoroughly  learned  as  to  be  written  and  read  instantl3^ 
Spare  hours  may  be  given  with  advantage  to  writing  and 
reading  these  abbreviations  over  and  over  many  times. 


EEPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  49 


90.  TRANSLATE. 


=»    \    /  '   ^    ^.    —     t      .      -Ki 


.  ^   °  ^  v^  -V     C    ^    > 


J 


To  THE  Teacher. — Vowels  trouble  most  students,  mainly 
because  they  are  not  well  learned.  But  they  are  so  few  that 
one  can  easily  become  as  familiar  with  them  as  with  the 
faces  of  his  own  brothers  and  sisters.  Vowels  are  so  impor- 
tant that  no  good  teacher  will  omit  a  brief  i-eview  of  them  as 
a  part  of  the  regular  daily  program.  Each  member  should 
be  able  when  required  to  give  the  x)lace,  size,  form,  length, 
and  kind  of  every  one.  This  review  should  be  partly  oral, 
the  long  vowels  for  convenience  being  named,  tee,  tay,  tah, 
taw,  toe,  too;  and  the  short,  it,  et,  at,  ot,  ut,  oat.  The  whole 
class  may  be  called  upon  to  repeat  them  both  forwards  and 
backwards,  individually  and  in  concert.  Then  give  all  first- 
place,  tee,  taw,  it,  ot,  oi,  I;  next  second-place,  and  last,  third- 
place.  Tlie  teacher  will  observe  that  the  more  thoroughly  a 
puioil  learns  a  thing,  the  better  will  he  like  it;  and,  per 
contra,  the  better  he  likes  it,  the  more  he  will  want  to  learn 
of  it.  This  is  true  particularly  of  anything  intrinsically 
scientific  and  beautiful,  as  the  vowel  scale. 


LESSON  VIII. 
CONSONANT  POSITION. 

91.  Key.  1.  King  me  deep  leave  occupy  teach  at- 
tach allowed  attack.  2.  Nigh  away  awake  ahead  July 
purify  ago  nuisance. 

Word-signs.  3.  Common  each  watch  hear  her  ever 
give-n  dollar  thing.  4.  Whom  home  large  much  thank 
youth  hath  had  advertise  advertising.  5.  Anything  En- 
glish-language A.  M.  P.  M.  however  must-be  forthwith  to- 
become  single. 

Sentences.  6.  Talks  on-the  subject  of  electricity  will- 
be  given  in-the-month  of  July.  7.  It-is-a  common-thing 
to  hear  her  laugh  aloud  at-your  huge  fool's-cap.  8.  The- 
Judge  said  that-the  jury  should  occupy  this  cool  room.  9. 
They  will  to-day  say  what-the  damages  in-thls-case  should- 
be. 

Phkases.  10.  By-and-by  by-the-by  by-the-way  in-as- 
much-as  she-shall  a-year-ago  for-a-long-time.  11  Of-the- 
case  as-long-as-it-may  many-think-that  ought-to-be  long- 
enough   shall-never. 

92.  What  is  called  consonant  position  is  a  contrivance 
made  use  of  to  save  writing  vowels  in  a  certain  limited  num- 
ber of  common  words.  With  reference  to  the  line  of  writ- 
ing, words  occupy  three  different  places,  known  as  the  first, 
second,  and  third  consonant  positions.  Second-po,sition  words 
rest  on  the  line.  Most  words  which  have  already  been  in- 
troduced are  of  this  class. 

93.  First-position  horizontal  words  are  written  one  space 
above  the  line,  as  king  and  me.  Other  first  position  words 
are  written  half  a  space  above  the  line,  as  deep,  leave  occupy, 
teach.  Here,  in  each  case,  the  first  descending  letter  rests 
half  a  space  above  the  line.    L  1. 

94.  Third-position  horizontal  words  are  written  just  be- 
low the  line,  as  ago  and  nuisance.  Other  third-p)Ositio7i 
words  are  written  through  the  line,  the  fii"st  descending 
letter  resting  one-half  a  space  below  it,  as  in  awake^  ahead, 

purify.     L  2. 

—50— 


Plate  8. 


k- 


r\ 


r\ 


•WOSD-SIGNS. 

3      —       ' 


^ 


-A i^ 


■jc:s- 


■/--/- k k k ( I- 


6   L    "      \ 


SENTENCES. 


\: 


<i— ^ 


V 

9  c    r 


11 


.o\..\...\, .^ 


1    ■*  /    ^"^    \ 

I  PHRASES.    I         6  ^ 


TBANSLATB. 


) 


V 


z 

X 


/ 


®^^^ 


r 


rv  ^ 


s'X^ 


L- 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


95.  There  are  only  a  few  hundred  words,  all  told,  that 
there  is  any  need  of  writing  elsewhere  than  on  the  line. 
These  are  specified  in  the  lessons  which  follow,  and  should 
be  memorized  by  the  pupil.  It  would  be  inexpedient  at  this 
time  to  attempt  to  exphiin  fully  the  general  theory  of  Con- 
sonant Position.  It  is  sultieient  to  state  that  words  which 
are  written  in  the  Jii'st  x>osition  usually  contain  Si  first  2^1'^cQ 
vowel,  and  tliose  in  the  third  j^osition,  a  thi?'d  place  vowel. 
The  learner,  however,  Avill  distinctly  bear  in  mind  that  it  is 
by  no  means  true  that  all  words  which  contain  j^rsi  or  third 
place  vowels  are  for  that  reason  to  be  put  in  t\ie  first  or  third 
positions. 

96.  The  student  who  consults  other  text-books,  or  a  ste- 
nographic dictionary,  will  find  a  large  number  of  words 
marked  for  the  first  and  third  positions.  It  is  nevertheless 
true,  however,  that  practical  reporters  generally,  no  matter 
what  system  is  followed,  or  text-book  studied,  write  nearly 
all  the  words  on  the  line  in  actual  reporting.  The  notes  thus 
taken  are  perfectly  legible,  although  such  -words  as  music, 
academy,  month,  factory,  etc.,  are  written  in  the  second  posi- 
sion  rather  than  in  the  third.  Our  aim  is  to  teach  the  art  as 
it  is  practiced  by  the  best  stenographers.  This  subject  is  treat- 
ed at  length  in  Lesson  XXXIV. 

97.  1    Write  in  first  j)osition:    Cause  cease  song  these 

2  wise  since    sight    side    seek  sing    ofiiee  city    oflsett  ear 

3  weakness  sin  seen  seem  abide  by  she  ease  easy  easily 

4  enjoy  fall  (el)   feel   (el)  joy  joyous  law   leave  lie   meek 

5  avoid    mill  my    occupy   thy  thee  if    off   pity  see    talk 

6  weak  assign  right  Deity  miss  size;  (ar)  fear  fire. 

7  Third  position:     Allow    at    out    atom  back    cap    catch 

8  aloud    allowed    view    abuse     eulogy    fool    lack    laugh 

9  loose  purity  sat  suit;  (ar)  power  poor  room  our  hour; 
10  thou  use  due  few  issue  outside  await  advice. 

(84—2:30—1:30). 

98.  Phrases.  By-his  by-it  by-many  by-our  by-that  by- 
you  by-your  by-which  by-which-many  by-whicli-you  for-if 


REPOETIXG  STYLE  OF  SHORTHAND.  53 

if-they  in-anything  many-times  my-love  shall-give  she-says 
she- was  with-each  some-may  take-the-case  think-this 
■which-is  which-the-times  as-tliat  for-fear  for-his-advaiitage 
he-has-never  I-beg  I-feel  I-kuow  I-know-nothiug  I-kuow- 
that  I-like  in-effect  iii-his  in-many  in-that-day  is-it  is-it-a 
is-it-as  is-it-his  is-it-you  long-way  many-have  may-also 
no-knowledge  say-so  so-be-it  so-would  was-right  all-is. 

EXERCISE    8. 

99.  1.  Yon-may-write-a  review  of  all  our  many  sayings. 
2.  On-the  fourth  Sunday  of  February  we-were-at-the  smok- 
ing ruins  of-that  large  hotel.  3.  We  all  know-that  fire 
ruins  many  mills.  4.  You-may-write  off  the-eulogy  on-the 
life,  laws  and-power  of-the  Jewish  king.  5.  I-will  carry 
that  small  watch  this  week  and-if-it  keeps  the-i'ight  time  I- 
will  give-you  $25  for-it.  6.  The-huge  earth  moves  along-its 
path  many  miles  an-hour.  (83 — 2:15 — 1). 

100.  Speed  Sentence.  To-sti;dy  the-lives  and -laws  of-the 
Jewish  kings  is  a  common-thing  in  our  day  and-age.      (4 — 1) 


To  the  Teacher: — The  following  items  form  an  impor- 
tant and  indispensable  part  of  the  program  of  evei'y  reci- 
tation. Each  member  should  be  required  to  bring  to  the 
class  for  the  teacher's  inspection  a  carefully  prepared  copy 
of  the  list  words,  exercise,  and  speed  sentence.  It  is  also 
well  to  require  a  long-hand,  or  type-written,  copy  of  the 
Translation.  No  conscientious  teacher  Avill  neglect  to  give 
at  least  a  little  time  to  the  correction  of  each  pupil's  work  at 
evei-y  recitation.  If  the  class  is  large  it  will  be  necessary  to 
correct  such  papers  out  of  class  hours.  The  diflerent  mem- 
bei's  maybe  called  on  miscellaneously  to  read  each  a  sentence 
from  the  translation,  also  from  the  exercise,  also  a  number  of 
the  list  words.  This  must  be  done  promptly  and  without 
hesitation.  Hence  thorough  pi'eparation  before-hand  in  the 
way  of  writing  and  reading  the  lesson  over  many  times,  is 
absolutely  necessary. 


3'/' 


LESSON  IX. 

S-CIKCLE  JUNCTIONS. 

101.  Key.  1.  Desk  deposit  maxim  hasten  lesson  pen- 
cil facility  vessel.  2.  It-is-of-aclvantage  submissive  and- 
Lis-life  atheism  exhibit  Mexico  ba.sk. 

V  WoKD-siGNS.  3.  Us  wli/)se  'trojke  happy  though  whole 
wholly  young  to-lje.  4.  Etc.  (et  cetera)  disadvantage  ex- 
change   post-office  expect  domestic  salvation  holy  own. 

•^  PiiKASES.  5.  At-the-time  by-such  for-the-same-reason 
it-is-ready  it-is-to-be  long-since  it-is-so.  6.  Such-has-never 
wiiich-is-no  who-has-this  with-the-same  would -i-eeeive  this- 
period  which-some.  7,  8  and  9.  For  key  see  list-words, 
sec.  116. 

/  Sentences.  1.  It-is  our  custom  to-sell  for  cash.  2. 
You-will  however  be  allowed  to  exchange  your  map  for-a 
hat  or  cap  or  anything-clse  that-you-may  lack.  3.  The 
rustic  takes  counsel  with-the  judge  for  half-an-hour  but 
says  nothing.  4.  For-some  purpose  he  dispatches  his  son 
to  Cincinnati. 

102.  The  rule  laid  down  in  Lesson  VI.  for  joining  the  cir- 
cle, applies  only  when  s  begins  or  ends  a  word.  When  the 
circle  occurs  at  the  angle  formed  by  the  juncture  of  two 
stems,  however,  it  should  be  written  according  to  the  follow- 
ing directions: 

103.  When  the  circle  is  to  be  written,  1.  At  the  junction 
of  two  straight  letters,  it  should  be  placed  outside  the  angle, 
as  in  desk  or  deposit.  But  when  the  two  straight  letters  are  in 
a  direct  line  forming  no  angle,  s  is  written  on  the  upper,  or 
right  side  of  the  stem,  as  in  Mexico.  2.  At  the  junction  of  a 
straight  letter  and  a  curve,  it  should  be  written  within,  or 
following  the  direction  of  the  curve,  as  in  maxim,  hasten.  3. 
At  the  junction  of  two  curves,  if  it  cannot  follow  the  direc- 
tion of  both,  as  in  lesson,  pencil,  vessel,  it  should  almost  al- 
ways be  written  within  the  first  curve,  as  in  submissive,  athe- 
ism. Sometimes  it  is  more  convenient  to  attach  it  to  the 
second  curve,  as  in  facility.    See  Ls  1  and  2, 

—54— 


dilate  9, 


1  J- 


7 
8>C 


9 


©  L 


..::^..... 


\ 


® 


WOKD-SIGNS, 


'--0 ) \ \ -( 7^---T 

>  4.- >- 


\ 


PHRASES. 


■f- 


WOBD-FOBMS 


■^ 


[— 


r 


A^  -u 


A_    Xf^  v_^  ^-M  ^n  ?  ^ 


SENTENCES. 


i 


^ 


L.     s      "^^ 


Q_l^ 


50  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

104.  These  rules  have  precisely  the  same  application  to 
all  phrases  of  which  s  forms  a  part,  as  iu  U-is-of-adcantayc, 
and-his-life.     L  2. 

105.  la  bask  (L  2),  it  will  be  observed  that  the  vowel  is 

placed  at  the  angle  between  \  b  and k,  which,  it  would 

appear,  is  contrary  to  the  rule  laul  down  in  Lesson  Vll.  But 
if  the  dot  were  placed  at  the  end  of k,  the  order  of  pro- 
nunciation Avould  necessarily  be,  b-s-a-k.  Evidently  the 
rule  in  Lesson  VII  does  not  apply  when  a  circle  occurs  be- 
tween the  two  stems.  In  bask,  and  a  few  similar  Avords,  the 
vowel  must  be  placed  in  the  angle,  that  is  by  the  first  stem, 
so  that  it  will  be  read  before  s.  But  the  occasion  for  vowels 
so  situated  is  rare. 

106.  Beginners  almost  without  exception  write  the  vow- 
el word-signs  too  large.  They  should  be  only  one-fourth  the 
size  of   standard  letters;   e.  g.  i  before,  one-fourth  of  |  d, 

V  to,  one-fourth  of  \  p,  „  you  one-fourth  of  ^-^  m,  etc. 

107.  Placing  the  circh;  between  two  straight  letters,  write: 

1  Custody  dispatch  discuss    dispose   exhibit    di.spel  gazet 

2  gospel  justice   succeed    capacity    Tuesday    bestow    dis- 

3  guise    dusk   gossip    hostile    receipt   rest   less  upset  re- 

4  store  custom  task  rustic  risk. 

5  Between  a  straight  and  curved  letter:    Citizen  desire 

6  desirous   disarm  dislike  excel  Harrison  message  music 

7  resolve  instil    musical    pacific    society   specify   answer 

8  dismiss    visitor   visit    reason    receive   vivacity    honesty 

9  Massachusetts   Minnesota  Erastus  (ar)  Missouri  oHicer 
10  sarcasm  (ar). 

Between  two  curves:    Innocence  insanity  mason  scarce- 
ly Cincinnati  refusal  (el)  license   (el)  oiTensive;  also  Avrite 
sophomore  sorrow  genius  science  sublime  Minneapolis. 
V^3  2^  (69-2:15-1:15). 

108.  Phrases.  Any-business  at-such  at-that  at-this  at- 
your  he-said  it-is-a  of -some  since-that  some-such  take- 
such  that-is-never  that-is-it  this-bill  this-day  this-reason 
this-time  to-receive  to-your  was-some  which-is-thus  who- 
is-the  who-is-it. 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORTHAND.  57 

EXERCISE    9. 

109.  1.  The-citizeu  deposits  his  salary  in-tlie  bank  of- 
Massachusetts  with  scarcely  any  risk.  2.  The  gazette  says 
that  Harrison's  ainny  will  leave  Mexico  on-Satnrday  of-this 
week.  3.  It-will  march  all-the-way  to  Minneapolis,  Minne- 
soto,  by-way  of-Missouri.  4.  The-justice  informs  counsel 
that-they-may  if-they  wi.sh  discnss  the-case  befoi-e-the-jury 
for-two-honrs.  5.  Do-yon-thiuk  that-the  jnry  will  say  that- 
the  youth  is  insane?  6.  Yes,  they-have  already  said-so.  7. 
He-receives  the-message  in  despair.  8.  Many  also  hear  it 
with  sorrow  and-dismay.  9.  The-yoiing  sophomore,  they 
say,  has-a  rare  genius  for  poetry  and-music.  10.  I-hope 
the-saying  has-no  sarcasm  in-it.  11.  I-know,  however, 
that-he  excels  in  science.  12.  He  never  fails  to  exhibit  vi- 
vacity in  society.  13.  Instil  right  maxims  into-the  souls  of- 
our  youth.  14.  You-will  see  that-they  will-be-the  happier 
for-it.  (151—8:15—1:30). 

110.  Speed  Sentence.  I-hope,  however,  that-you-will 
give-the  youth  whom-you  teach  the-whole  story  of  young 
Absolom.  (4 — 1). 

111.  translate. 

©'^   :>    L.^  ^  -  \    ' -71 

-^    \^....^....(D  y  _^  ^ ^r 

'^     '   "  ^  ..:^.....(^....l^...-/.|.... 


LESSON  X. 

PHRASEOGRAPHT. 

113.  Key.  1.  I-tlie  I-do  I-had  give-me  pay-him  alto- 
gether I-thiuk-that  I-know-you. 

Word-Signs.  3.  Law^xT  similar  similarity  influence 
Catholic  speak  speech  spoke.  3.  Because  significant  in- 
significant wliy  Justice-of-the-Peace  continue  falsehood 
company.  4.  Hence  witness  testimony  mostly  may-as- 
well  December  thus  those.  5.  Happiness  holiness  enlarge 
postmark  mistake  if-you-wish  Savior. 

Phrases.  6.  Because-all  because-nothing  because-we- 
have  cause-and-eftect  for-as-much  public-service.  7.  Those- 
days  to-expect  continue-it  to-whom  too-much  was-seen 
what-say-you  which-ropresent.  8.  For-as-many  who-sup- 
pose-that  as-if  as-w  ell-as-usual  as-long-as-it-is  for-the-same- 
i-eason.  9.  Have-seen  have-to-be  that-is-the  they-said-so 
they-speak  this-notice  this-purpose  which-seems.  10  and 
11 .    For  key  see  list  words,  sec.  117. 

Sentences.  1.  Paul,  going  before-the  Justice-of-the- 
peace,  says  that  Miles  carried  off  some  of-his  live-stock. 
2.  Thc-justice  sits  and  hears  the-testimony  of-each  witness 
iu-the-case.  3.  The-lawyer  thinks  it-would-be  of  no  use 
to-make-a  speech  to-the  jury.  4.  The-testimony  shows  him 
to-be  the-thief .    5.     He-is  now  in  jail. 

113.  Every  stenographer  must  decermine  for  himself  the 
precise  extent  to  which  he  can  apply  phraseography  toad- 
vantage.  Many  do  not  phrase  enough;  while  possibly  some 
do  too  much.  Studcmts,  accustomed  in  long-hand  to  disjoin 
words,  invariably  find  phraseography  a  hindrance  at  first; 
but  the  practice,  once  acquired,  lessens  the  labor  of  report- 
ing, and  also  adds  to  speed  and  legibility.  Tliree  words  can 
be  phrased  while  two  of  them  are  being  written  separately; 
hence  the  gain  in  speed.  But  words  separated  by  the  slight- 
est rhetorical  pause,  or  mark  of  punctuation,  should  not  be 
joined  together.  This  adaptation  of  pJiraseofjraiihjj  to  syntax 
renders  short-hand  notes  far  more  legible  than  they  would 

otherwise  be. 

-58— 


2  r\    <^   ^^ 


Plate  10* 


WORD-SIGNS. 


\ 


> 


4      v_9        L_p       cr~\_x 


^  ^. 1  ^ 


^a — 


(;■•■(;■ 


PHRASES. 


f  n 


8 


Y    /  )  SENTENCES.  ^  I     ' 

(D  /    E   .  .2..  J^  ^  b 


11 


x®.!2..  (,   ^ 


-)■- 


\ 


^K®3-^  J  ^  \  '(;_x®'^^/^. 


60  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

114.  The  first  word  of  a  phrase,  which  for  convenience  we 
will  call  the  leader,  should  be  written  in  its  proper  position; 
the  words  which  follow  may  then  be  allowed  to  occupy  what- 
ever position  with  reference  to  the  line  that  the  phrase,  in 
due  course,  may  give  them.  For  example,  I  is  the  leader  in 
I-think-that,  and  I-know-you;  give,  the  leader  in  give-me.  In 
these  sentences,  that,  know,  and  you,  are  thrown  out  of  posi- 
tion, but  the  writing  is  none  the  less  legilde  on  this  account. 
The  real  value  and  beauty  of  phrasing,  and  its  philosophy 
also,  will  be  better  understood  after  the  learner  has  had 
some  experience  as  a  practical  short-hand  writer.  The  sub- 
ject is  more  fully  treated  in  lesson  XLII. 

115.  By  I'eference  to  Ldie,  and  I-had  (L  1),  it  will  be  seen 
that  the  first  word  can  sometimes  be  so  written  that  the 
second,  also,  shall  occupy  its  2)ropcr  i^osition.  Generally, 
however,  the  reader  does  not  regard  the  position  of  words 
after  the  first  or  second,  but  relies  upon  the  context,  which 
is  a  sure  guide.  The  necessity  imposed  on  the  writer  of 
locating  words  out  of  their  proper  position,  occasions  no 
drawback  upon  legibility. 

116.  The  phrase  should  be  discontinued  when  an  unusual 
word  occurs,  or  one  that  must  be  written  in  its  proper  posi- 
tion in  order  to  be  unambiguous.     E.  g.,  give-him,  and  pay- , 
me,  should  not  be  joined,  for  fear  of  conflict  Avith  give-me 
and  2My-him.    LI. 

117.  1  Vocalize:    Male    female    dismay    parody    Caleb; 

2  Ipos.:    sky    cog    knock   mock    nick.     Without  vowels, 

3  1pos.:    oppose    rise    scheme    arise  (ar).    3  pos.:    amuse 

4  accuse  pass  passage  passive  sad  induce  absence  south. 

5  2  pos.:    reach    assume    form    (ar)    evade    series    speed 

6  speedy   sphere    beauty  dominate    alleviate   cavity   cool 

7  Jewish     academy     academic    factory     ensue     disobey 

8  anxious     audacity     besiege     caustic     chastise     luxury 

9  depository    despair  (ar)    expire   (ar)    extinguish*   gasp 

10  Augustus    Justus    disengage    dismal    dissolve    egotism 

11  immensity    maximmn  cohesive   solicit  vestige   veracity 

12  decimal    elastic    exile  felicity   garrison    pacify   parasol 


REPORTIXO  STYLE  OF  SnORT-HAND.  61 

13  spasm    tenacity    velocity    Joseph    assassin    incendiary 

14  muscle  exterior  cancel  (el)  chancellor  (ar)   counsel  (el) 

15  counsellor  (ar)     damsel     domicile     fasten     gymnasium 

16  salary    search    solitary    scarce    (ar)     malicious     select 

17  resume    besides    disease    deceit    deceive  decide   desiern 

18  despise     decease    excite    exceed    false    insight     incite 

19  inside    likewise    business    mix  offence   paradox   Scotch 

20  sleep    sweep    epistle    alike  (el)    misery    reside    resign 

21  revise  righteous  sincere  recite  rejoice  anxiety*  excuse 
23  animosity  casual  casualty    apostle^  subdue  tax  absorb 

23  rescue  reduce  affair  botany  deviate  dialogue    efficacy* 

24  embody   indemnify   ingenuity   intimacy   involve  nonii- 

25  nate     bachelor     beneath     demagogue     dialect     dogma 

26  enigma     epidemic     aesthetic     gypsy*     infect     pathetic 

27  ramify   topic    Anthony    Timothy    Tennessee    Louisiana 

28  apology    oljviate    eminence    apologize     assets     avarice 

29  debase     delicious     depose     diffuse     factious     fictitious 

30  obvious*     paradise     survive     various    vex    severe  (ar) 
81  enforce  (ar)   ethics  poetic.  (187—6—2:30.) 

118.  Phrases.  Because-of  had-the  do-you  have-seen 
those-that  those-which  to-such-a  to-suppose  was-said 
Avhich-is-now  which-is-the  which-shall  Avho-are-they  who- 
come  be-seen  that-day  that-is-it  that-we  that-time  they- 
that  they-thiak-that  to-take  was-it-so  was-it-never  was-so 
which-many  which-may  which-you  will-it-be  you-may 
yon-make  at-those-times  by-as-many  by-reason-of  in-the- 
same-way  it-is-to-be  it-is-long  many-such  many-things 
never-said  of-as-many  of-his-own  of-several. 

EXERCISE  10. 

119.  1.  Your  son  is-a  wise  youth,  because  he-seeks  to-do- 
right.  2.  In  our  city  we-have  much  snow  in-the-month  of 
December.  3.  Joseph  Jackson  the-lawyer  has-a-large  in- 
fluence, and-he-may  resign  his  office.  4.  We-think  of  going 
into-a-business  scheme  together.  5.  Our  affairs  are  now  in- 
such  shape  that-we  may  do-so  if-we-wish.  6.  Your  absence 
in  Alabama  may  restore  your-health,  and-thus  be-the  cause 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAXD. 


of-much  happiness.  7.  How-long-do-you  think  you-will  re- 
side in-the  South?  8.  I-will  leave  for  Dakota  in-the-month 
of  May.  (99-2-1.) 

120.  Speed  Sentence.  As-to-his  design  in-seekiug-the 
house  of-the  justice-of-the-peace,  the-witness  spoke  a-false- 
hood  in-giving  his  testimony  to-the  jury.  (3— 1-) 

121.  TRANSLATE. 


Suggestion.— Most  pupils  press  the  pen  too  hard  upon 
the  paper,  making  both  the  light  and  heavy  lines  heavier 
than  they  should  be.  This  extra  pressure  means,  more  fric- 
tion, more  labor,  more  time,  less  speed.  The  rapid  sten- 
ographer always  touches  the  paper  lightly.  It  is  an  excellent 
plan  to  cultivate  lightness  of  touch  by  frequent  practice  in 
writing  the  tliin  stems  as  fine  as  possible,  executing  them 
rapidly,  barely  touching  the  paper  with  the  pen. 

The  learner  who  also  cultivates  a  compact  style  of  writing, 
will  in  the  end  be  both  more  rapid  and  accurate.  By  com- 
pactness of  style  is  meant  that  the  chai-acters  be  -written  not 
only  small,  but  closely  together.  The  hand-writing  of  most 
all  beginners  is  too  large  and  sprawling. 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  63 

QUESTIONS  FOB  REVIEW. 

How  many  letters  in  the  consonant  alphabet? — Name 
them  consecutively. — Name  the  light  stems; — shaded  stems. — 
What  is  the  rule  foi'  writing  words  with  reference  to  the 
base  line? — What  is  the  proper  length  for  a  stem  (consonant 
letter)?  (See  Sec.  5.) — May  one  outline  represent  more  than 
one  word?  (Sec.  9.) — How  may  ambiguity  be  avoided  in 
such  cases? — What  is  the  value  of  shading?  (Sec.  10.) — Is  it 
strictly  necessary  in  all  cases? — Is  this  system  orthographic 
(following  the  common  spelling),  or  phonetic?  (12.) — Give 
examples  of  the  difference  between  these  two  methods  of 
writing. — What  are  the  equivalents  of  x,  g,  and  wM  (Note, 
p.  21.) — What  is  a  word-sign? — A  sign-word?  (16.) — How  are 
proper  names  indicated?  (18.) — Why  is  el  sometimes  used 
instead  of  layf  (21) — Which  is  the  more  used,  ar  or  rayf 
(26.) — What  are  some  of  the  advantages  of  ray  over  arf — 
What  is  phrasing?  (27.) — Define  a  phraseograph; — a  pihraseo- 
gram. — How  in  phrasing  is /expressed?  (27.) — He?  (28.) — 
You?  (29.) — What  is  the  difference  between  chay  and  rayf 
(31.) — How  are  they  distinguished? — Give  specific  cases 
where  ar  is  to  be  used; — also  ray.  (32.) — What  is  the  number 
of  long  vowels?  (38.) — Give  them  in  order. — How  many 
vowel  places?  (39.) — Repeat  the  rhyme  in  Sec.  40. — Explain 
the  nominal  consonant  and  its  use.  (41.) — How  are  vowels 
placed  with  reference  to  consonants,  in  order  to  be  read  first? 
(44.)— In  phrasing,  how  are  the,  and,  a  and  an  expressed? 
(50-51.)— Name  the  diphthongs.  (59.) — On  which  side  of 
straight  stems  is  iss  written?  (62.) — Curved  stems?  (61.) — 
How  many  short  vowels?  (78.) — Give  them  in  order. — State, 
in  your  own  words,  the  I'ule  given  in  Sec.  81. — When  should 
s  be  expressed  by  the  circle,  and  when  by  the  stem?  (85.) — 
How  many  consonant  positions?  (92-94.) — Describe  each.— 
What  is  the  purpose  of  the  scheme  of  position? — How  is  the 
circle  written  when  it  occurs  between  two  straight  stems? — 
A  straight  stem  and  a  curve?— Two  cuiwes?  (103.) — What 
is  the  fii'st  word  of  a  phrase  called?  (114.) — What  are  some 
of  the  restrictions  placed  on  phrasing?    (115-116.) 


LESSON  XI. 

SEZ-CIRCLE,   EMP  AND  COALESCENTS. 

123.  Key.  1.  Races  chases  pauses  noises  gazes  reposes 
system  necessary.  2.  Enthusiast  success  successes  suc- 
cessor exercises  subsist  Mississippi.  3.  Camp  ample 
temple  thump    sympathize  aml)itious    embark  ambiguous. 

4.  Wet    wed    muse    mule    quack    wood    squeeze    Delia. 

5.  Web  fuse  yam  nephew   Utah  new   (or  knew)  Yankee. 

6.  Walk  wit  weep  York  ague  Aveed  cue  war.    7.    Sweet 
switch  weave   wing  Quebec  liquid  Idaho  Julia. 

Word  and  Piikase  signs.  8.  Important  importance 
improve  improvement  may-be  simple  simi^ly  impossible. 
9.  Temperate  temperance  square  acquit  acute  senior 
Junior  nevertheless.  10.  Failure  uniform  unite  unity 
Europe  quick  howsoever  idea.  11.  Height  higher  white 
eye  yet  ye  year  beyond.  12.  Iowa  highway  highly 
United-States  is-seen  is-said  it-is-simply  this-is.  13.  This- 
system  gives-us  takes-us  loves-us  is-such  as-soon-as  in- 
this-city.  14.  Is-his  (or  his-is,  is-as);  as-has  (or  as-is,  as-his, 
has-his);  because-such  it-is-something  it-is-suflScient  this- 
has-never.     15.    For  key  see  list-words,  sec.  132. 

123.  The  syllables  sis,  sj's,  sez,  ces,  sus,  and  others  similar, 
are  denoted  by  a  circle  formed  some  five  times  lai'ger  than 
the  small  one  representing  s.  See  races,  chases,  system,  and 
all  words  in  Ls  1  and  2. 

134.  The  two  la])ials  \  p  and  \  b,  when  occurring  after 
^— -  m,  are  sometimes  indicated  by  shading  this  curve,  as  in 
camp,  amx>le,  embark.  See  L  3.  This  thickened  m  is  called 
^■^  cmp,  and  has  the  force  of  mp  or  mb. 

125.  The  principles  of  abbreviation  explained  in  this  les- 
son are  also  made  use  of  in  phraseography.  In  7nay-be,  for 
example,  /-^  in,  the  sign  for  may,  is  shaded  to  denote  the 
following  \  be.  Emp  in  this  case  is  in  reality  an  abbi-evi- 
ated  phraseograph,  and  is  called  a  phrase-sign.  The  words 
"is-said"  are  expressed  by  the  phrase-sign  sezde,  which  is 
obtained  by  enlarging  the  circle  in  |    said. 

-64- 


^late  U. 


^    ^    ^    »^    ^    .^^    ^ 


2  p        a_D 

3  ^-^  y^ 

6      \  V^  ^ 

e    -      1      \ 

8 x-^ 


Q D 


V- 


1 


n    V/« 


WORD-SIGNS. 


d-^ 


6"^  --—^ 


14  °  o 

15  -^ 


1 


P  ^  6 


CO  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

KEY  TO  PLATE   11 — B. 

126.    Ls  1,  2,  3.    For  key  see  list  words,  sec.  133. 

Ls  4,  5,  6.     For  key  see  phrases,  sec.  133. 

Sentences.  7.  You-may-write  this  and-all  succeeding 
exercises  with  red  ink  if-you-wish.  8.  We  would  much 
rather  that-you  would  use  simply  the-common  ink  however. 

9.  A-large  lamp  was  sitting  by-the  door  in-the  white  temple. 

10.  That-is   what-the   Yankee's,  Irish  wife  said    she  saw. 

11.  Our  temperance-speaker  is  quick  in  wit,  with-which  he 
unites  much  irony. 

137.  The  time  has  now  come  for  us  to  inquire  into  the 
small  half -circle  word-signs,  some  of  which  are  ^  yet,  *  we, 
'  what,  J  would,  and  „  you.  How  are  they  obtained? 
Let  us  see.  First,  if  to  the  stem  |  t  we  prefix  ye,  the  word 
yet  is  the  result.  Now,  instead  of  using  ^  yay  to  express 
the  y,  the  light  dot  vowel  is  modified,  or  rather  transfoi'med, 
into  a  semi-circle.  This  little  half-circle  represents  the 
double  sound  of  ye  in  the  word  yet,  which  may  be  written 

thus,  '^j  yet.    The  pupil  will  take  notice  that  the  semi-circle 

is  similar  to  the  dot  in  two  respects.  First,  it  is  light,  and 
again,  it  occupies  the  second  vowel-place.  They  differ  only 
in  form,  one  being  a  dot,  and  the  other  a  semi-circle.    The 

word-sign  u  yet  is  derived  by  simply  dropping  the  |  t.  Then 
further, the    sign  '^  beyond  is  derived  by  dropping  all  except 

the  half-circle  in  K  ^  beyond.  Here,  the  half-circle  ex- 
presses thedouble     ^^  sound  yo,  and  differs  in  form  only 

from  the  first-place  light  dash  (which  signifies  the  short 
sound  of  o),  being  like  it  in  respect  to  vowel-place,  and  the 
absence  of  shading.  The  two  semi-circles,  above  described, 
differ  in  this  respect:  That  the  first  bows  downward,  the 
other  upward.  All  semi-circles  in  fact  which  express  the 
union  of  y  with  a  dot-vowel,  bow  downwards,  while  the  y 
dash-vowels  bow  upwards.  W  dot-vowels  bow  to  the  left,  as 
in  wet,  wed;  and  w  dash-vowels  to  the  right,  as  in  wood.  See 
L4. 


lllate  IhB. 


Q_^ 


<3~V^ 


PHRASES. 


^-.i:)/    Z!d     ^^>/   t^     (^    ij>/ 

SENTENCES.  \^ 

y^  ^  <5"^         ^ 

/  -   ^     =   --) • ^^ 


6  U-^ 


8 


^-/-       ^ 

6  ^ 


1.0 >-:;r-°         '^\^  V,         I    X 


11 


-^■-  K/ 


1  / 


TRANSLATB. 


•n-: 


o  .. 


®.        .1       ;  U/ 


.1  V 


...^....n    L 


08 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SIIORTIIAXD. 


The  Boys  and  the  Horse- shoes. 

A  MKMOKY    llELP. 


^ 


as 


Explanation.  The  w-coalescents  are  horizontal, 
distinguished  from  the  y-coalescents,  which  are  vertical,  as 
shown  by  the  arms  of  the  first  and  second  boys  respectively. 
The  Ws  dot  to  the  left,  and  dash  to  the  right;  the  Ys  dot  down- 
wards, and  dash  upwards. 

129.  The  learner  will  distinctly  bear  in  mind  that  the  pre- 
fixing of  w  or  y  to  any  vowel  simply  transforins  the  dot  or 
dash  into  a  semi-circle;  and  this  semi-circle  is  light  or  shaded 
according  as  the  vowel  is  long  or  short,  and  invariably  occu- 
pies t\\Qsame  vowel  position. 

130.  The  coalescent  signs  should  be  formed  as  small  as 
possible,  and  should  be  complete  half-circles,  neither  angular 
OY  flattened  out. 

131.  In  the  following  taijle  the  signs  have  a  force  equiva- 
lent to  that  of  the  full-faced  and  italic  type  in  the  corre- 
sponding words. 

TABLE  OF  COALESCENTS. 


W-SEP 

UES. 

c  we 

J  wa-lk 

c  wi-\h 

2  wo-t 

c  wa-ve 

3  wo-ke 

c   we-t 

3  wo-rst 

c  wa-s 

»  woo 

Y-SER 

c  t-wa-ng 

lES. 

3  woo-\ 

w  ye 

'^  yaw-n 

u  yi-va. 

'^  yo-n 

u  yea 

>y  yo-ke 

w  ye-X. 

'^  you-n^ 

w  ya-rn 

n  you 

u  ya-xa 

n   * 

132.     1    Sez-circle:     Cases     paces     vices     fixes     census 

2  supposes  refuses    notices  decisive    desist  excess    exces- 

3  sive  exercise  exist  hypothesis  necessity  insist  emphasis 

4  emphasize    analysis*  (el)    Texas  Jesus  senses  surpasses 

5  molasses. 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT- HAND.  69 

6  Using  Emp:     Pump    damp    encamp    example*  lamp 

7  lump  sample  sympathy  imbecile*  ambiguity*  embellish 

8  embezzle*  empire  limp  pomp  symbol  Sampson. 

9  Using  coalescents:     Duke   hew  cube  cubic  duel  India 

10  witch     swing     wish     equip     ice     endow     Irish    (shay) 

11  irony  (ar)   item  dew  widow. 

13      (See    Vocabulary   for    outlines.)      Acquiesce     anguish 

13  annual     avenue     barrier     exquisite     genial     ingenious 

14  luxurious  I'equisite  tedious.  (70 — 2 — 1.) 
133.    Phrases.    (The  first  twenty-one  of  these  phrases  are 

engraved  in  Ls  4,  5,  and  6  of  Plate  B,  the  order  of  arrange- 
ment being  different.)  That-this-is-the  this-never  no- 
necessity  was-necessary  this-is-new  this-is-never  it-is- 
unnecessary  it-is-as  is-as-far-as  this-is-nothing  that-it-may- 
be  that-is-now  since-this-is-the-case  that-is-necessary  many- 
cases  if-necessary  in-his-system  have-likewise  for-example 
as-soon-as-that  as-it-may  as-soon-as-the  as-this-is  is-neces- 
sary  it-is-such  such-cases  that-if-necessary  that-this-is-now 
this-is-become  this-is-it  that-is-never  this-is-now  they-never. 


EXERCISE  11. 

184.  1.  Howsoever  much  you-may  wish  to-change  our 
money-system,  the-subject  of-importance  to-discuss  this  year 
is-that  of-temperance.  2.  This-is  our  regular  summer  uni- 
form. 3.  It-is-to-be  seen  in-the  Unitecl-States  camps  always 
at-this-time  of  year.  4.  It-is-never  to-be  seen  in  Europe 
however.  5.  He-loves-us  and-he  shows  his  love  in-all-that- 
he  does  for-us.  6.  This-city  lacks  some-necessai"y  impi-ove- 
ments.  7.  This-system  has  already  come  into  use,  especial- 
ly in  many  of-the  large  cities.  8.  It  will  soon  be  in  common 
use  in-the  United-States.  (98 — 2 — 1.) 

135.  Speed  Sentence.  Temperance  is-animportantitem 
in-the  improvement  of-the  health  of-the  United-States  army. 

(5-1.) 


v^ 


yyy 


LESSON  XII. 

DOUBLE  CONSONANTS. — THE  L-HOOK. 

136.  Key.  1.  Pol  bel  tel  del  chel  jel  kel  gel  fel  vel 
thl  thol  shel.  2.  Blow  bowl  glass  black  settle  sickle 
playful  angle  bushel.  3.  Diploma  collegiate  total  deli- 
cacy Mitchell  Angelica  coeval  mythological  postal. 
4.    Tell  till  blew  apply  able  awful  full  flew  call  clew. 

Word  and  phrase  signs.  5.  It-will  until  at-all  com- 
ply people  belong  follow  angel  capable  challenge. 
6.  Each-will  which-will  children  much-will  equal  difficult 
difficulty  glory  glorious  deliver.  7.  Develop  develop- 
ment humble  neglect  negligent  they-will  as-it-will  such- 
will  tell-us.  8.  Most-likely  collect  recollect  respect  re- 
spectable respectability   collect-on-delivery  (C.  O.  D). 

Phrases.  9.  As-long-as-possible  as-much-as-possible  in- 
its-place  is-it-likely  it-is-difficult  peculiar-people  till-his- 
own-time.  10  and  11.  For  key  see  list  words,  sec.  142. 
^  Sentences.  1.  Philosophy  will  clip  an  angel's  wings. 
2.  You  emphasized  the-wrong  sj'llable  in  class.  3.  This 
will -never  do  at-all.  4.  You-should  use  this-system  as- 
soon-as  you-are  able.  5.  Much-will-be  the-time  that-it-will 
save  you.  6.  The-reason  is  that-it-is-as  speedy  as  any,  be- 
sides being  far  easiex*. 

137.  The  liquids  I  andr,  by  reason  of  their  vowel  elements 
unite  intimately,  or  coalesce,  with  other  consonants  which 
immediately  precede  them.  For  example,  I  unites  very 
nearly  with  p  in  play,  and  with/in  Jly;  r  unites  closely  with 
p  in  j)^y  and  with/in  offer.  These  double-sounds  are  of  very 
frequent  occurrence  in  our  language,  and  are  usually  ex- 
pi'essed  by  a  modification,  or  "hooking,"  of  the  stem  of  the 
first  consonant. 

138.  To  express  an  added  I,  straight  stems  are  formed 
with  a  small  hook  at  the  beginning,  placed  on  the  right,  or 

s-circle  side.    To  illustrate,  \  called  pel,  has  the  force  of 
pi  in  playful,  diploma,  etc.    This  hook  is  written  on  the  co7i- 

cave  side  of  curved  stems,  thus  \^  Jl,  \    thl.    The  letters  of 

—70— 


flate  t2. 


71    ~V 


4  r  r 

woRn-siGNS. 


...vv  ^  ^  ^- 


■f- r- 


\ 


A 


/  "\ 


<: 0 


r 


{  I  ^ 


c   p  /  c 

A  A  M^ 


PHRASES. 


9 


< 


tfORD-PORMS 


r^  A  v_  U, 


11 


A 


SEN 

A 


UA 


SENTENCES. 


^\ 


\  ^s^ 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORTnAND. 


the  1-hook  series  are  named  pel,  bel,  tel,  etc.  See  Ls  1,  2,  and 
3.  These  hooked  or  double  letters  are  vocalized  like  other 
consonants,  as  blow,  glass,  total,  coeval.  But  the  double  let- 
ter is  not  used  if  a  vowel  occurs  between  the  two  consonant 
sounds  denoted  by  it;  thus,  in  bowl,  the  hook  cannot  be  em- 
ployed, because  the  vowel  o  occurs  between  b  and  I.  But  in 
blow,  in  which  the  sounds  of  b  and  I  blend,  the  double  conso- 
nant \  bel  is  used.  The  hook  may  and  should  be  einj)loycd  in 
all  places  where  no  vowel  intervenes  between  any  of  the  double 
consonants,  pel,  bel,  etc.,  given  in  Ll.  Sometimes  the  hook  is 
used  in  cases  even  where  a  short  vowel  comes  between,  as  in 
tell,  till,  full,  etc.  This  is  common  in  words  of  more  than  one 
syllable,  as  delicacy,  collegiate,  L  3. 

139.  The  s-circle  is  pretixed  to  the  double  consonants  of 
the  1-hook  series  by  being  written  within  the  hook,  as  in  settle, 
sickle.  In  such  cases,  in  order  that  there  may  be  space  for 
it,  sis  formed  quite  small  and  somewhat  flattened. 

140.  The  adjective  ending  ful  is  usually  expressed  by  the 
double  consonantyeZ,  as  in  ]}layful. 

141.  The  hooked  consonant  should  be  written  with  one 
stroke  of  the  pen.  By  so  doing,  not  only  is  speed  increased, 
but  the  liability  is  lessened  of  forming  the  hook  too  large  or 
too  cramped. 

143.    1    Write:    Assemble     assembly      available      battle 

2  blame  blameless  blank  blush  cliapel  circle  claim  class 

3  clergy  climax  close  club  clumsy  clothe  declaim  double 

4  emblem    employ  enclose  English  entitle    fable   faculty 

5  festival  imply  implicit  globe   legal  illegal   (el)   inflame 

6  level  local  mingle  admirable    novelty  noble  oblige  ob- 

7  stacle    parable    place    pledge    poetical    radical    reflect 

8  stable   staple  table    technical    initial*     tenable    dimple 

9  unable     syllable    uncle    varial)le     vital     vocal     al)ility 

10  Florida    display    disclaim     disclose     exclaim     invisible 

11  possible    visible     academical     amicable    bashful    Bible 

12  blemish  bliss    block    blossom   cattle    chemical    classify 

13  closet  couple  likely   declivity  despicable  devil  displace 


y  y 


>' 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


14  dissemble     Episcopal    fatal    flesh    fling     flour    fluency 

15  foretell   (ar)    gable  glimpse  gloom  horrible  jingle    joy- 

16  ful  reply   label  miserable    nimble    placid   plague  plank 

17  plastic  plausible   pliable  pliant  plum  plump   plus  rival 

18  shelf  *    shingle  smuggle  stubble   survival  tackle  tangle 

19  terrible   click    tumble  typical    village    vehicle    wrinkle 

20  Clarence  Hannibal  Clara  Flora;  (using  ar)  clear  clerk 

21  declare  implore  deplore  desirable    ramble  in-esistable*; 
23  (vocalize)  applause  ^  bleak  clay    clue   fleece  glue  clump 

23  ply  Abel   Mabel  blue;    1  pos.    clock   clog  gloss  clause 

24  climb  calling    evil    feeble    liable    official*    please    title 

25  idle;   3  pos.   allowable  clash  clasp  pupil  suitable    phil- 

26  osophy*  philosopher*  kill.  (175—6—3). 

143.  Phrases.  All-classes  all-places  all-respects  be- 
cause-possibly  I-call  in-any-possible  is-it-possible  it-is-clear- 
ly  take-place  tell-him  tell-such  tell-them  tell-you  that- 
difficulty  those-places  till-some  till-such  till-that  till-this 
till-you  which-has-possibly  which-possibly  with-equal-ad- 
vantage  with-equal-eflfect  would-possibly. 

y  EXERCISE   12. 

144.  1.  A-snake  declares  war  on-an  eagle.  2.  They  en- 
gage in  fearful  battle.  3.  They  display  no  delicacy. 
4.  They-make-the  air  vocal  with-the clash  of-arms.  5.  The- 
snake  has-the-advantage.  6.  He-will  likely  kill  the-poor 
eagle.  7.  A-rustic  looses  the-coil  of-the  snake.  8.  The 
eagle  flies  away  forthwith.  9.  The-escape  of-the  eagle  in- 
flames the-snake.  10.  His  poison  flies  into-the  rustic's 
water  bottle.  11.  The-rustic  knows  nothing  of-the 
possible  evil.  12.  He  applies  the-bottle  to-his  lips. 
13.  But-the  eagle  flying  back  delivers  him.  14.  He-seizes 
the-bottle  with-his  claws  and-carries  it  up  into-the  sky. 

(103—2—1). 

145.  Speed  Sentence.  They- will  continue  to-come  until- 
you  tell-him  that-it-will  most-likely  be  unnecessary  to-collect 
the-class-together.  \l  (4 — 1). 


Fig.B, 

R-Hook 
L(e£t)-Hand  R(ight)-Haud 

L(ess)  commonly  used    R(epeatedly)  used. 


Semicihcles.  The  very  apt  little  stanza  of  Mr.  Benn  Pit- 
man will  greatly  aid  the  pupil  in  remembering  the  coal- 
escents: 

Floating  boats  are  ye,  yay,  yah; 

Capsized,  are  yaw,  yo,  you. 
Waning  moons  are  we,  way,  wah; 

And  waxing,  waw,  wo,  woo. 


QUESTIONS  FOR  REVIEW. 

What  is  the  relative  size  of  the  sez-circle? — What  syllables 
does  it  represent? — Witliout  referring  to  the  book,  give  five 
words  in  which  this  circle  should  be  used. — How  may  it  be 
employed  in  phi'asing? — What  is  the  name  applied  to  the 
shaded  vif — What  consonant  double  sounds  does  it  repre- 
sent?— How  is  it  i;sed  in  phrasing? — How  many  w-coales- 
cents? — Y-coalescents? — Repeat  all  the  eoalescents  in  or- 
der.— Name  those  which  bow  upwards; — downwards; — to 
the  right; — to  the  left. — What  is  t\\B  formi  of  character  which 
is  used  to  represent  eoalescents? — How  do  they  comi^are 
with  the  vowel  signs  as  to  place  and  shadingf — Name  five 
sign- words  which  are  represented  by  semi-circles. — Name 
the  1-hook  series. — Where  is  this  hook  located  with  reference 
to  straight  letters? — Curved  letters? — In  what  cases  must 
I  be  expressed  by  the  stem  instead  of  the  hook? — Name  five 
words  from  inemory  in  which  the  1-hook  should  be  used. — 
Cite  cases  where  this  hook  is  used  in  phrasing. 

REQUIREMENTS. 

Give  three  words  that  contain  the  sez-circle ; — the  1-hook; — 
emp; — 1-hook  and  iss; — iss  and  emp; — iss  and  sez; — 1-hook 
and  sez. — Render  the  following  skeleton  words:  Iss-k-sez, — 
iss-b-sez-t, — iss-k-emp, — m-l-sez, — pl-sez, — pl-emp, — gl-emp- 
iss, — fl-m-z, — kl-iss-r,— kl-iss-t, — pl-emp, — iss-m-gl. 

To  THE  Teacher. — A  familiar  knowledge  of  the  word- 
signs  is  so  desirable  that  the  pupil  should  be  encouraged  to 
learn  them  as  well  as  the  letters  of  the  alphabet  itself.  Some 
students  commit  them  to  memory  in  the  order  in  which  they 
are  presented  in  this  book.  This  is  far  from  a  waste  of  time; 
indeed,  all  learners  would  find  it  time  saved  in  the  long  run 
to  do  likewise.  Every  teacher  who  intends  using  this  liook 
to  some  extent  is  advised  to  commit  to  mind  the  title  of  each 
lesson  it  contains,  and  in  the  order  given. 


LESSON  XIII. 


K-HOOK  SERIES. — DIV.  1. 

148.  Key.  1.  Per  ber  ter  der  cher  jer  ker  ger. 
3.  Pray  brow  gray  destroy  disturb  exaggerate  program 
crystal.  3.  Cross-eyed  cypress  quaker  trouble  diagram 
criticism  Nebraska    operator. 

Word  and  Phrase  Signs.  4.  Appear  principal  prin- 
ciple practice  practical  liberty  member  remember 
number  brother  degree.  5.  Truth  true  doctor  dear 
(luring  dark  each-ai'e  which-are  much-are  danger  larger. 
6.  Christian-ity  care  occur  cure  accurate  inaccurate 
accuracy  dear-sir  Avithdraw.  7.  Correct  character  liberty- 
of-the-people  liberty-of-the-press  Member-of-Congress 
Member-of-the-Legislature    practicable  proficiency. 

Phrases.  8.  Any-person  I-am-truly  in-the-cliurch  take- 
care  my-dear  Memlier-of-the-Bar  Christian-principles 
many-persons.  9.  All-churches  in-person  may-bring  such- 
appears  take-courage  was-truly  young-person.  10.  For 
key  see  list  Avords,  sec.  152. 

Sentences.  1.  The  eye  sees  what-it  brings  the-power  to 
see.  2.  Truth-and  ceremony  are  two  things.  3.  Characters 
never  change.  4.  Genius  is-the  faculty  of  growth.  5.  Life 
is-a  comedy  to-him  who  thinks,  and-a  tragedy  to-him  who 
feels.  6.  The-truth  of-trutlis  is  love.  7.  The-drama  is-the 
book  of-the  people.     8.     AVhat  vigor  absence  adds  to-love. 

149.  Another  initial  hook,  written  on  the  left  of  the  stem, 
or  side  opposite  the  l-hook,  indicates  the  added  ?•,  and  is 
attached  to  the  eight  straight  letters,  and  to  eight  of  the 
curves.  The  consonants  modified  bj'  the  attachment  of  this 
hook  are  called  per,  ber,  ter,  etc.  L  1.  The  r-hook  should 
always  be  employed  where  no  vowel  occurs  between  the  two 
sounds  expressed  by  the  double  consonant,  as  in  pray,  brow, 
gray.     L.  2. 

150.  The  r-hook  occurs  mostly  at  the  beginning  of  words  ; 

but  sometimes  it  is  to  be  Avritten  medially,  or  in  the  middle 

of  tlie  word,  as  in  destroy,  disturb.     Here  the  circle  is  located 

on  the  left  side  of  the  stem — out  of  its  usual  position — in 

-76- 


I     \     \       ]       ]       /      / 


2 


rt   ^X 


4    !>..A  \  .. 

5      1 ^ ]..     1 


■W0RD-SIGN3 


^  \  7 


'^ 


l^-.  "^ 


^ 


\ 


-.  V  ^  -^  ^ 


1 


PHRASES 


6    WORD-FORMS. 

10  UT  r  i_  V  A  n  ru  ^ 

'■  SENTENCES,      D. 


r>^ 


_      ,      (o 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SUORT-HAND. 


order  that  the  hook  may  be  prefixed  to  t.  Strictly^,  however, 
it  is  not  a  hook,  but  an  offset,  wliich  serves  the  same  purpose. 
The  hook  is  sometimes  expressed  also  by  retracing  the  pre- 
ceding consonant,  as  in  program,  diagram.    Ls  2  and  3. 

151.  It  is  easy  for  the  learner  to  get  the  1  and  r  hooks 
mixed.  Figures  A  and  B  will  be  found  useful  as  memory 
helps.  It  will  be  seen  that  the  1-hook  is  obtained  by  bending 
the  index  finger  of  the  L-Hand  (L-eft  Hand).  On  the  con- 
trary, the  r-hook  is  produced  by  bending  the  first  finger  of 
the  R-Hand  (R-ight  Hand).  As  there  are  more  r  than  I 
sounds  in  our  language,  so  the  r-hook  occurs  more  frequently 
than  the  1;  and  the  r-hand,  also,  is  used  nioi'e  than  the  1-hand. 

152.  1  Write,  using  the  r-hook  and  vowels  :    Brace  breech 

2  bribe  broil  grow    brake  praise   tribe  utter  acre  brawl 

3  capvice    crape    crawl    crew    crow    dray    grape    grass 

4  growl  odor  pauper  powder  prize   prose  pi*y  slaughter 

5  taper  tx'ace  trail  turmoil  ultra  Beatrice  Bertha  Grace; 

6  1  pos.:     Greece    cry    creek    Greek.      Without    vowels: 

7  Abbreviate  approach  appropriate  attorney  break  baker 

8  broke    breathe    brevity    breach    bring    courage    crazy 

9  create  creator    critic  cruel    crusade  currency   decrease 

10  democracy    depress    distress    drug    dress    drill    drink 

11  drop  drum    drunk  educator    embrace  encourage  extra 

12  extreme  proceed  trump    gradual  grasp  gravity  grocer 

13  impi'ess    industry*    industrious*    keeper    labor    ledger 

14  liberal     lucre     ludicrous     major     maker     matrimony 

15  microscope    mistress    neighbor    opei-ate    paper  parallel 

16  precious  presence    press  pearl  prepare    pretty  pi'ecede 

17  process  (sez)  progress  propose  prosper  provoke  redress 

18  reproach  soldier  treason  triumph  vapor  vigor  abridge 

19  April    arbitrary    ardor    ascribe    barber    beggar    betray 

20  produce  brass   broker   broom  brush    butcher  cathedral 

21  charter  chemistry  cherish  copper  courageous*  courtesy 

22  cracker    grub    crimson    criticise*    crook    crop    crucify 

23  crumb    crush    crutch    dexterous    digress    dipper    Peter 

24  garter  gracious  grumble  Hebrew  cream  fibre  manage!'* 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  79 

25  monogram  obstrusive  patrol  intrigue    personate  poker 

26  trustee  trap  track  trim  tropic  trunk  Ambrose  Andrew 

27  Edgar  Patrick;  1  pos.    Agree  crime  try  cross  daughter 

28  draw  dream  dry  across  eager  increase  preacli. 

(187—6—3.) 

EXERCISE  13. 

153.  1.  He-that-takes  a- wife  takes  care.  2.  If-you-would 
create  something,  you-raust-be  something.  3.  Prayer  is-tlie 
voice  of-faith.  4.  All  things  with-which  we  deal  preach  to 
us.  5.  A-Member-of-the-Bar  became  a-Member-of-Congress. 
6.  He-spoke  in  praise  of-the  liberty-of-the-press.  7.  He-said 
that-it-should  publish  but-the  simple-truth.  8.  If  so,  the- 
liberty-of-the-people  would-be  in-no  danger.  9.  The-pupil 
who-wishes  to-become  a-quick  writer  should-practice  daily. 
10.  Dear-sir,  I-am-now  able,  and  I-will  write-you  in-these 
funny  characters  telling  you  the-news.  (104 — 2 — 1.) 

154.  Speed  Sentence.  Your  brother  has-as-much  to-do 
as-a  New-York  baker  at  Christmas-time.  (6 — 1.) 

155.  translate. 

i:.®  .  H  Y  "^  Vp  Ux®_^ 


-O  I  Jy  I O    ....   /  /  X 


®   •.J../^U  V^  x®.S: L^ 

A.I  ....^. .tf. ."../i  4\  I X ©...::£ 


■^lU, 


X 


</- 


LESSON  XIV. 

R-HOOK  SERIES. — DIV.   2. 

156.  Ket.  1.  Fer  ver  thr  ther  sher  zhr  nier  ner. 
2.  Phrase  favor  throttle  bother  harsher  glazier  merge 
machinery.  3.  Virtrinia  either  Thursday  numerous  sugar 
farmer  tiger  generous. 

WoKD-SiGNS.  4.  Every  very  Mr.  mere  remark  remark- 
able more  mercy  humor.  5.  There  their  they-are  other 
from  pleasure  measure  therefore  commercial.  6.  Near 
nor  honor  honorable  manner  owner  universe  universal 
university. 

Phrases.  7.  All-their  any-more  be-sure  each-other 
from-church  in-rcference-to  in-respect-to  from-some-place. 
8.  From-the-place  in-the-same-manner  in-this-manner 
many-more  more-likely  there-is-never  there-is-such  there- 
may-l:)e.     9  and  10.    For  key  see  list  words,  sec.  160. 

Sentences.  1.  So  sad,  so  fresh,  the  daj's  that  are  no- 
more.  2.  You-arrive  at-truth  through  poetry,  and-I  ar- 
rive at  poetry  through  truth.  3.  Lay  a-bridge  of  silver  fcn-- 
a  Hying  enemy.  4.  What-is  becoming  is  honorable,  and 
wliat-is  honorable  is  becoming.  5.  The  eyes  of-other  peo- 
ple are-the  eyes  that  ruin  us.  6.  Wise  judges  are-we  of 
each-other. 

157.  In  writing  the  word  y<_  oval,  the  1-hook  is,  accord- 
ing to  rule,  written  within,  or  on  the  concave  side,  of  the 
curve  V.  The  hook  cannot  be  written  conveniently  on  the 
opposite,  or  convex,  side  of  the  curve.  Then  how  shall  we 
write  over,  where  r  instead  of  I,  is  to  be  expressed  ?    This  is 

done     by    merely    reversing  ^  vl,    the     character  *^  vr 

resulting,  over  being  expressed  thus,  **  i.  The  reversing  of 
fel,  vel,  thl,  etc.,  brings  the  hook  upon  the  left  or  r-hook  side 
of  the  stems.  No  conflict  is  occasioned  thereby,  since  r  is 
not  attached  to  ~^  r  ^  w,   )  s,  )  2.    L  1 . 

158.  To  express  the  added  r,  -—^  m  and  s_^  ?i  are  modified 

—80— 


?3lau  U. 


■) 


v^^  ^^        ^  t^        ^ 

WOKD-SIOTIS.  ^^~^ 


i^  ^ 


')■)'•) ,.  ^  J 


0 

7     ^ 


9 
"A 


-^--   I 


PHRASES. 


>     -f  -   y 


"<;_^ 


^  V-    ^ 


8 


9 


WORD-FORMS. 


-(T^ 


10  \x)    V 

SENTENCES 


1   •^■-  e 


1 


4-  v^^+V"5-^^®^  ^ 

....J...  X 


^.,....> .  ©....1/    ^ 


83  REPORTTXG  FETTLE  OF  SllOTiT-UAXT). 

by  both  prefixing  the  hook,  and  thickening  the  stem;  thus 
'^^  mr,  's-^  nr.    No  ambiguity  results  from  this  shading 

of  the  consonants  m  and  n,  since  no  hook  is  attached  to  either 
mp  or  ng.  See  merge,  machinery,  numerous,  generous.  Ls  3 
and  3. 

159.  In  some  word-forms  containing  mr,  where  it  is  in- 
convenient to  express  the  hook  it  is  entirely  omitted,  thick- 
ened ^-^  m,  (r»p),  being  employed  in  lieu  of  mr,  as  in/arm- 
er.    L  3. 

160.  Write:    1.    Rumor  tremor    Homer  energy*  dinner 

2  banner     exhonorate    lunar    over     tanner     Christopher 

3  Francis   Frank  average*   offer    camphor    Denver  over- 

4  sight   Friday  silver  leisure    pressure  treasure  censure* 
6  exposure  anniversary  diverge   livery  Luther   dislioiior* 

6  pei'verse  throng  verb  verge  verse  Oliver  wager  Artluu* 

7  Roger    Victor     treacherous*     favorite   proverb     prefer 

8  gather    sheriff   three    umbrella    repress    slipper    si)i(ler 

9  tragedy    tragic    traitor     prol)lem*      profess    professor* 

10  prolong  propriety  recur  prairie  preface  premise  preni- 

11  ium  primary   prior.      Vocalize,   throw;    1   pos.     autlior 

12  authority  crisis  (sez),  decree  former  fever  free  preside 

13  prime  minor  oppressive  precise   (sez)  price  Christmas; 

14  3  pos.    address    affirm    presume    scatter    assure    troop 

15  through.  (88  -2 :30— 1 :30). 
IGl.    Phrases.     All-others     be-there     be- very     but-tlieir 

do-their  from-a  from-among  from-every  from-him  froni- 
many  from-oiu'  from-you  from-your  had-their  it-is-their 
there-have  there-was  there-will  there-probably  they-are- 
so  through-many 

EXERCISE   14. 

163.  1.  A-dog  crosses  a-bri(lge  with-a  piece  of  flesh  in-his 
mouth.  2.  He-sees  his-own  shadow  in-tlie  creek  bel  iw. 
3.  He-takos-it  to-be-that  of-some-other  dog  with-a  piece  of 
game  d<)ul>le  his-own  in  size.  4.  He  therefore  drops  his 
piece  and-vigorously  attacks  the-other  dog.    5.    His  desire 


EEPORTING  STYLE  OF  STWBT-HAXD. 


is-to-take  the-larger  pit  ce  from-him.  6.  In-this-way  he- 
loses  both  pieces.  7.  He-loses  that-vvhich  he  grasps  for  in- 
the-creek,  because-it-is-a  shadow.  8.  He-loses  his-own  be- 
cause-the-creek  Avashcs  it  away.  (94 — 1 :45 — :45). 

163.  Speed  Sentence.  I-suppose  he-has  too-much  hon- 
or to-be-the  author  of-such-a  rumor  iu-reference-to  Oliver 
the-philosopher.  (9—2)  ■ 

164.  TRANSLATE. 

x^  _ C.  x®.:n...- V.  °  .: .tr".„.« 


®      ^         '^       ^         '         ^       ^^      c^       -^    . 


®  .-—  -....1.^ 


\    /\      r^  ") 


\ 


^r-^' 


Hints  to  the  Student.  In  learning  the  list-words  a  good 
plan  is  to  write  the  proper  characters  in  a  column  at  the  left 
margin  of  a  sheet  of  practice  paper,  afterwards  filling  out 
each  line  by  writing  the  words  over  and  over,  gradually  in- 
creasing the  speed. 

Always  carry  in  your  pocket  some  short-hand  book,  manu- 
script or  exercise  to  read  at  leisure  moments,  while  traveling, 
waiting  for  cars  or  steamboats,  for  lazy  people  to  keep  ap- 
pointments, or  whenever  an  opportunity  for  a  few  minute's 
study  may  be  had.  The  sign-book  is  suitable  for  this  pur- 
pose. 


LESSON  XV. 
TRIPLE-CONSONANT  SERIES. 

165.  Key.  1.  S-pr  s-br  s-tr  s-clr  s-chr  s-jr  s-kr  s-gr. 
2.  Spi-ee  streak  soaker  cider  suffer  sooner  discourage 
subscribe.  3.  Secrecy  sister  prescribe  disgrace  sacrifice 
separate  disaster  supreme. 

WouD-siGNS,  4.  Express  surprise  suppress  Scriptui-e 
describe    secure    such-are    such-were    external    as-it-were. 

5.  Merciful  mortgage  neighborhood  overwhelm  probable 
probability  proper  projierty.  6.  New-Hampsliire  West- 
Virginia  forgive  America  North-America  South-America 
disappear  disagree.  7.  Everlasting  more-or-less  perhaps 
messenger  apprehend  apprehensive  this-will. 

Phrases.  8.  Very-much  was-as-much  here-and-there 
in-the-manner  I-assure-you  in-each-other  how-vei^y  there- 
possibly.  9.  Nor-is-this  for-some-reason-or-other  nothing- 
more  there-are-some  there-is-as-much  there-is-probably 
Holy-Scriptures.     10  and  11.    For  key  see  list  words,  sec.  169. 

Sentences.  1.  Mai'ch  grass  never  helps  the-farmer. 
2.  In  age  we  suffer  for-the  sins  of  our  youth.  3.  From  say- 
ing to  doing  is-a  long  stretch.  4.  The  stream  comes  to-the 
mill  from  afar.    5.     A  smooth  stream  washes  away  its  banks. 

6.  Give  the-devil  his  due. 

166.  If  to  the  word  pray  the  s-circle  should  be  prefixed, 

the  word  ^  spray  would  result.  If,  however,  the  hook 
should  be  omitted,  and  the  circle  written  in  its  place,  the 

character  °\"  would  result.  This  character  is  used  to  ex- 
press spr;  (it  cannot  be  mistaken  for  \  sp,  since  the  circles 
are  on  opposite  sides  of  the  stem.)    Hence  spra?/  is  properly 

written  \      Time  is  saved  and  nothing  lost  by  the  use  of 

the  triple  consonant.  See  L  1.  All  straight  stems  of  the 
r-hook  .series  arc  modified  in  this  same  manner  to  express  a 
preceding  s,  as  in  soaker,  cider,  L  2. 

167.  But  when  the  circle  is  to  be  prefixed  to       )  fr,  it 

-84— 


3 


^late  15. 

*       WORD-SIGNS.  I 


As ^ 


■^ 


ci_  K^ 


8 


PHRASES. 


-7 


9 


'7    ^7  -^^ ^-i ' 


WOBB-FORMS. 


^ 
D 


10 


[     ^     V 


V 


n 


SENTENCES. 


® 


^ 


1_ 


/ 


Q_9 


®"]  t.  J..^...l 


@-  IL^.. 


80  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

must  be  written  within  the  hook,  as  in  suffer ;  otherwise  it 

would  be  written      )  sr,  and  have  the  force  of  s-r  simply, 

instead  of  s-fr.    The  same  principle  holds  true  of  all  curved 
consonants,  vr,  thr,  shr,  etc.    See  suffer,  sooner,  L  2. 

168.  In  the  outlines  for  a  few  such  Avords  as  discourage 
and  subscribe,  where  it  is  inconvenient  to  write  the  i"-hook, 
it  is  entirely  omitted,  r  being  readily  supplied  from  the  con- 
text. 

1G9.     1  Write :      String     spring     struck    scourge     scribe 

2  sober  suffer  scrub  skirmish  strap  stress  stretch  super- 

3  cede    superstitious    supper    stray    supremacy*;     1   pos. 

4  strike    scream  ;    3  pos.    scrap     scratch    strew.      Using 

5  both  the  1  and  r  hooks:    Agreeable  brutal  clamor  clatter 

6  flatter  flavor   proclaim    travel  triangle    trouble    verbal 

7  calibre  chronicle    clapper  clever    clover  cradle    flutter 

8  girdle  glitter  grajjple    inclosure*  perplex    propel  trifle 

9  triple  tropical  scruple  treble  struggle.    (52 — 1:30 — 1.) 

PHRASES.        /->-  ^'^ 

170.  Which-their  in-favor  nor-such  of-their  such-a- 
manner  that-there-are  their-reasons  there-are-now  there- 
are-pei'sons  thcre-has-never  there-is-nothing  there-is-now 
there-is-possibly  through-as-many  till-their  very-dear  very- 
true  which-their  but-there  do-there  some-reason-or-other 
very-many-of-them  very-rare  till-there  all-probability 
have-probably  may-probably  some-probability  will-perhaps 
will-probably  at-church. 

EXERCISE  15. 

171.  1.  Liars  should-have  quick  memories.  2.  Foiir 
eyes  see  more-than  two.  3.  It-is  unwise  to  sing  triumph 
before  victory.  4.  A-fox  with-a  straw  tail  is  afraid  that-it- 
will  catch  tire.  5.  The-shovel  makes  game  of-the  poker. 
6.  To-a-person  hakiiig  a-pie  you-may-give  a-piece  of-your 
cake.  7.  Such-things  must-be  if-we  sell  ale.  8.  Too-many 
cooks  spoil  the-broth.  (67—1 :  15— :  30.) 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAXD. 


172.  Speed  Sentence.    There-ai-e  many  ways  to  kill  a-dog 
besides  haugiug  him.       /^Y?  (8 — 1) 

173.  TRANSLATE. 


^  .®. 


.!_ 


4)i'  r  Vp   /v  I   > 


®  ^  ^^  .: L^:_^    fx®  ( 


Dictation  Practice. — When  two  or  more  persons  meet 
together  for  dictation  practice  the  following  plan  may  be 
adopted:  Be  seated  all  atone  table.  Limit  your  attention 
to  the  lesson  upon  which  you  may  be  engaged.  Do  not  prac- 
tice for  speed  upon  any  exercise  until  you  have  tir.st  learned 
to  phrase  and  outline  it  correctly.  Each  student  should  in 
turn  read  to  the  otlicr  members  of  the  group,  the  exercise 
l^eing  read,  not  from  the  print,  but  always  from  the  notes 
last  taken.  When  all  the  members  of  the  circle  have  read 
in  turn,  compare  the  last  di'aught  carefully  with  the  original, 
and  repeat  until  errors  cease  to  be  found.  Write  the  list- 
words  a  number  of  times,  reading  them  as  often.  Dictate 
slowly  at  first,  gradually  increasing  the  speed.  Afterwards 
ascertain  which  student  is  able  to  read  the  entire  list  in  the 
shortest  time.  In  dictating  an  exercise,  read  the  sentences 
in  the  natural  way,  not  as  a  clock  ticks,  but  as  they  would 
be  delivered  by  a  public  speaker,  allowing  the  intervals  to 
occur  between  clauses  rather  than  between  words.  When 
the  members  are  not  equally  advanced,  those  Avho  can  do  so 
may  write  each  Avord  or  sentence  dictated  twice  or  three 
times,  or  oftener,  instead  of  once  only.  It  is  by  no  means 
necessary  that  all  the  members  of  such  circle  shall  have  made 
the  same  progress  in  order  to  derive  great  benefit  from  it. 


LESSON  XVI. 

REL-HOOK,   ASPIRATE  TICK  AND  DOT. 

174.  Key.     1.     Mel    nel  rel   ler    hw    hi  hr   hm  hk    hg. 

2.  Camel  tunnel  coral    color    Colorado  analj'ze    sentinel. 

3.  Temporal  globular  release  diagonal  original  millennial 
millennium.  4.  Hail  whisper  harm  hem  humbug  Hershel 
horsewhip  hiccough.  5.  Abraham  mayhem  cahoot  hither 
hoax  hook  liecatomb  homologous.  6.  Likelihood  alcohol 
Hector  harbor  adhere   whiskey  Gaylord. 

Word-signs.  7.  Rely  reliable  real  reality  rail  roll 
rule  railroad.  8.  Railway  railway-car  railing  Jesus-Christ 
Lord-Jesus-Christ  only  imless  behalf. 

Phrases.  9.  It-is-ouly  less-and-less  in-his-behalf  as- 
much-as-we  at-his-own-time  in-as-far-as  lower-and-lower 
in-this-respect.    10  and  11.    For  key  see  list  words,  sec.  178. 

Sentences.  1.  A-tliing  of  beauty  is-a  joy  forever. 
2.  Custom  is-the  law  of  fools.  3.  Faith  is  necessai-y  to  vic- 
tory. 4.  Fear  lias  many  eyes.  5.  Gayety  is-the  soul's 
health,  sadness  is  its  poison.  6.  Her  ample  page  is  rich 
with-the  spoils  of  time. 

175.  An  initial  hook,  written  quite  large  to  distinguish  it 
from  the  w-hook  (explained  in  the  next  lesson),  is  attached 
to  /,  r,  m,  and  n.  The  four  resulting  double-consonants,  sig- 
nifying Ir,  rl,  ml,  and  id  (named  Icr,  rel,  met,  nel),  are  called 
the  Rcl-hook  series.  Since  the  double-sound  lei  does  not 
occur  frequently,  the  compound  stem  obtained  by  attaching 
the  large  hook  to  I,  is  employed  to  represent  the  commoner 
sound  ler,  as  in  color.     See  Ls  1  and  2. 

176.  A  sliort  tick,  signifying  the  aspirate  h,  is  prefixed  to 
I,  r,  m,  k,  and  g.  It  is  so  written  as  to  form  a  sharp  angle 
with  the  stem  to  which  it  is  attached.  It  is  placed  on  tlie 
outside  of  curves,  and  when  joined  to  other  letters  must  be 
perfectly  straight,  to  prevent  its  being  mistaken  for  a  hook. 
See  hail,  whisper,  harm,  etc.     L  4. 

177.  In  Abraham  (L  5)  h  could  not  well  be  used,  since  it 
would  make  an  iiisuiricient  angle  at  its  junction  with  ^— ^  m. 
In  this  and  similar  cases  the  aspirate  is  denoted  by  a  small 

-88- 


Plate  \6. 


._^  ^  ^  ^  ^-  ^ 


WORD-FORMS. 

10  ^-"^z_r 


8ENTENCB9.  \ 


SENTENCES 
\ 


@.:r:.....: 


/" 


D^-  '  r   /T 


-e. 


r  ^ 


^ 


> 


°     y/ 


\r 


u 


90  REPOBTING  STYLE  OF  SHORTHAND. 

dot  written  just  before  the  vowel,  as  in  mayhem,  hither. 
This  dot  is  written  by  the  side,  not  at  the  end,  of  the  dash 
vowels,  as  in  caJioot.    L  5. 

178.  1  Using  the  largo  hook,  write:    Animal  signal  penal 
3  fuially*    family    nouunal  relish   paternal    relic    criminal 

3  colonel     scholar     abdominal     autumnal     barrel     canal 

4  chronology  gallery  polar   plural  analogy*   spinal  relate 

5  temporal*    tribunal    venal  ;     1    pos.    collar     reliance*. 

6  Using  the  tick  :    Holiday  harp  hell  homicide  wheel  whip 

7  whistle    hair    horse.    Vocalize,   hare  heal    whale*    hum 

8  hale  hall  hire  hollow  hag.  (46— 1: 15— :  45.) 

PHRASES. 

179.  Have-only  as-it-seems-to-me  as-much-as-it-is  as- 
much-as-they  as-much-as-was  at-these-times  in-his-own-case 
•in-the-case-of  it-is-also  loiig-time-ago  of-something-to-his- 
advantage  on-such-a  since-it  since-nothing  since-which 
so-it-seems-to-me  such-as-may  such-is-the-case  that-has- 
never  that-is-nothing  that-is-so  that-is-to-be  to-his-advan- 
tage  to-his-knowledge  to-his-own-advantage  to-which-you- 
are. 

EXERCISE   16. 

180.  1.  Unto-the  pure  all  things  are  pure.  2.  For  hope 
is  l)ut-the  dream  of-those-that  wake.  3.  Innocence  is  always 
unsuspicious.  4.  Kings  ought  to-be  kings  in-all  things. 
5.  Knowledge  is  power.  6.  Laugh  if-you-are  wise.  7.  And- 
he  that-lives  to-live  forever  never  fears  dying.  8.  To-live- 
long it-is-necessary  to-live  slowly.  (56 — 1 — :  20.) 

181.  Speed  Sentence.  He  thinks  that-it-is-possible  for- 
the  colonel  to-ride  all-the-way  to  Colorado  on  horseback. 

(5-1.) 

Caution. — Be  careful  to  make  your  hooks  and  circles 
quite  small,  and  avoid  tlie  common  error  of  getting  them  on 
the  wrong  side  of  the  stem. 


REPOBTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-IIAXD.  91 

183.  TRANSLATE. 

©..V...1"..-.) \ ^..     \-.®    '  ^-A    ^...•:^...!.. 


V      X  '^. 1^  «_^ 

V  V  ®-.\..i..z..\ 1..1 


s  ^   r\. 


To  THE  Teacher. — The  zest  which  the  element  of  compe- 
tition lends  to  a  class  exercise,  may  be  utilized  in  the  matter 
of  reading  as  Avell  as  writing.  A  few  brief  directions  are 
submitted  for  the  instructor's  benefit.  First:  Read  an  exer- 
cise plainly  and  slowly  to  the  class.    Those  who  miss  any 

words  may  fill  them  in  afterwards.    The  first  object  is  to  see 

how  many  can  read  it  through,  Avithout  error,  in  a  limited 

number  of  minutes.     Sec^ond:  How  many  can  read  it  through 

without  having  to  pause  at  any  time  more  than  five  seconds? 

Tliird:  How  many  can  read  for  the  space  of  one  minute  witli- 

out  pausing  at  any  time  more  than  three  seconds?    Fourth: 

Who  can  read  the  entire  exercise  in  the  least  time?    Fifth: 

Who  can,  Avithout  error,  cover  the  most  ground  in  thirty  or 

sixty  seconds?    Sixth:  Call  on  a  pupil  to  read  until  he  stops 

three  seconds.    The  person  who  first  sees  an  error  may  be 

allowed  to  continue  in  liis  stead.     Seventh:  To  cultivate  an 

ability  of  daily  use  la  reporting,  mention  some  prominent 

word,  which  occiu-s  but  once  in  the  exercise,  the  point  of 
competition  bemg,  Avho  can  find  it  first  in  his  notes? 

All  these  tests  should  be  frequently  repeated.  The  list- 
words  should  also  be  employed  as  an  exercise  for  these  pur- 
poses. In  all  such  trials  the  learner  must  be  i-equired  to  use 
only  his  own  notes  for  such  reading  and  reference. 


LESSON  XVII. 

W-IIOOKS,    BRIEF   WAY  AND   YAY. 

183.  Key.  1.  T\v  d\v  kw  gw  wl  wr  wm  wn.  2.  Twig 
dwell  quiet  languish  quail  tweezers  twinkle  twill  twitter. 
3.  Wail  swear  swim  wilderness  quorum  welfare  Walter 
Wednesday  willing.  4.  William  choir  wine-glass  squawk 
squash  quoth  wharfage  whale.  5.  Wage  wedge  wave 
un weighed  wax  wag  wad  wot.  6.  Yore  Yates  yarrow 
Yeddo  yacht  yawl  woof  yule. 

Word  and  phrase  signs.  7.  We-are  where  ware  we- 
Avill  while  well  awhile  when  whence.  8.  With-me  with- 
niy  with-him  we-may  we-may-be  with-whom  whenever 
whensoever.  9.  As-well  very-well  where-ever  welcome 
with-reference-to  with-respect-to  commonwealth. 

Phrases.  10.  Everywhere-else  is-it-worth-while  it-is- 
worth- while  on-one-side  that-is-only  this-one-thing  when- 
they-were.  11.  Whereby-you-may  as-well-as  worse-and- 
worse  with-one  working-classes  works-of-God.  12  and  13. 
For  key  see  list  words,  sec.  187. 

Sentences.  1.  We-are  near  waking  when  we  dream 
that-we  dream .  2.  When-you-give,  give  with  joy  and  smiling. 
3.     Necessity  does  everything  well. 

184.  A  large  hook,  signifying  an  added  iv,  is  prefixed  to 
t,  d,  k  and  g.  It  is  struck  on  the  1-hook  side.  The  double 
consonants  thus  formed  have' the  force  of  tw,  dw,  kw  and  gw, 
as  in  twig,  dwell,  quiet,  etc.    L  2. 

185.  For  two  or  three  i-easons  "^  way  and  ^  yay  are 
sometimes  expressed  by  shorter  signs  known  as  Brief  Way 
and  Yay.  Either  of  the  two  horizontal  semi-circles,  c  and 
3  ,  may  be  used  to  express  w,  and  either  of  the  two  vertical 
semi-circles,  ^  or  r.,  may  signify  y.  In  every  case,  choice 
must  be  made  of  that  sign  Avhich  forms  a  good  angle  with  the 
stem  to  which  it  is  prefixed.  See  wage,  wedge,  wave,  yacht, 
etc.  See  Ls  5  and  G.  These  brief  signs  are  chiefly  used  in 
cases  where  ^  iv  and  ^  y  are  not  convenient,  or  when  their 
use  does  not  secure  angular  outlines. 

—03— 


f late  17. 


1  r  r 


c 


r  cX 


[1  P-  h  r-^    V  r^   L_  ^ 


r  cX 


(S~^ 


n^ 


r1  "f<r- 


*^ 


C- 


5       /         /  5^        ^  :^  ^  .11 


WOED-SIGNS. 


10 


'^'  .^v    r^ 

PHRASES. 

'v^  ^f  i/^   "-r  '^  L^  "1 


11 


r 

WORD-FORMS. 

13 


£_^ 


.D 


SENTWCE8. 


V 


94  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SnORT-HAND. 

186.  But  whenever  w  occurs  before  (^  I,  /   r,  ^— ^  m,  or 

V '  «,  the  first  of  the  two  hulf-circles    c  is  used  ;  antl  it  is  so 

modified,  or  adapted,  whoH  joined  to  these  letters,  as  to  form 
ail  initial  hook,  as  in  wl,  wr,  ■win,  ivn.  L  1.  It  is  important 
to  clearly  understand  that  this  hook,  which  is  derived  from 
the  bi'ief  w,  is  itself  the  lo,  and  after  the  analogy  of  the  s-cir- 
cle,  is  read  before  the  consonant  stem  to  which  it  is  prefixed. 
This  hook  ditiers  from  the  r-hook,  or  the  large  w-hook,  just 
explained,  for  instance,  in  this  respect,  that  in  c —  acre,  r  is 
read  after  k,  whereas  in  c_^  wine,  the  hook  w  is  read  before  n. 
See  wail,  swear,  swim,  etc.  Ls  3  and  4.  The  aspirate  tick 
may  be  prefixed  to  the  w-hook,  as  in  wharfage,  whale.    L  4. 

187.  Using  tw,  dw,  etc.,  write  :  1  Quill  squeal  squirm 
3  squeak    squad    squaw     squirrel*    squash    quiz     Guelph 

3  quizical    e(iuatoi^     quake    quietly  squabble  squib    quip 

4  quiver    quill.       W-hook:       Wealth     wall    ware    beware 

5  worm  wolf  swoon  Edwin  worker*  won  willingly*  work 

6  worth  worthless  worthlessly  worthlessness  worthy  well 

7  willing    window  one    wear  warm    acquire    weary    wool 

8  Wales  wane   wean   willow  wire.  .  (50 — 1:15 — :45.) 

PHRASES. 

188.  Any-one  by-one  for-one  if-we-are  it-is-one  no-one 
of-one  one-way  one-of-these-days  nor-which  this-one 
when-it  when-shall  when-that  when-they  while-they 
worth-notice  worth-while  as-well-as-possible. 

EXERCISE  17. 

189.  1.  The-laborer  is  worthy  of-his  hire.  3.  In-love 
we-are  all  fools  alike.  3.  He  who  aspires  to  nothing,  who 
creates  nothing,  is  unworthy  of-living.  4.  Love  may  hope 
where  reason  would-despair.  5.  He-is  no  fox  that  hath  but- 
one  hole.  6.  When-tlie  wine  is-in  the-wit  is  out.  7.  Stay 
but-a  while,  you  lose  a-mile.  8.  There-is  but-one  Paris. 
9.  We  place  a-signal  flag  of  red  color  on-the  railroad  near- 
the  tunnel  to  signify  danger.  10.  The-teacher  ofters  a-prize 
for-an  exercise  tliat-is  really  correct.  11.  It-is-a  family  horse 
of  bay  color,  and-every  pupil  should  try  to  win  it  if-possible. 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


95 


12.  There-is-no  harm  in-having-a  holiday  once-in-a  while. 

13.  But  it-would-be  well  if-the  scholar    should-take-them 
only  rarely.  (136—2:15—:  45.) 

190.  Speed  Sentence.    Beware  of  sitting  by-the  railway- 
ear  window  while  we-are  crossing  over  the-dangerous  bridge. 

(6-1.) 

191.  TRANSLATE. 


6^^b 


<^^ 


c-^ 


] 


^  ^ p...'  ®  ^  i^iLl  f  \...^,^A. 

A   T .  ®  •  s  ..A. !....zz:f . 

\     ^     1>t    ' 


To  THE  Teacher.— Time  is  valuable,  and  too  much  of  it 
must  not  be  spent  in  waiting  on  students  who,  for  any  rea- 
son, have  not  learned  the  lesson  well  enough  to  read  off  any 
portion  of  it  instantly  when  called  upon.  The  learner  who 
is  dull,  but  earnest,  deserves  the  teacher's  indulgence;  but 
the  idler  must  not  be  allowed  to  waste  time  which  belongs  to 
the  class. 


LESSON  XVIII. 

F-HOOK. 

192.  Key.  1.  P-f  b-f  t-f  d-f  ch-f  j-f  k-f  g-f  h-f  r-f. 
2.  Cough  cave  puff  beef  tough  deaf  chaff  Jove  huff' 
roughs.  3.  Hoofs  strives  relief  dwarf  prophesy  havoc 
rove   heave  provincial. 

Word  and  phrase  sig*s.  4.  Onght-to-have  whatever 
it-would-have  out-of  which-ouglit-to-have  whichever 
which-have  which-would-have  prove  approve.  5.  Such- 
ought-to-have  sucli-have  such-would-have  each-will-have 
which-will-have  much-will-have  careful  belief  believe. 
6.  Differ  different  difference  try-to-have  poverty  derive 
twelve  it-will-have  set-off  set-forth.  7.  Which-are-to-have 
which-were-to-have  such-are-to-have  such-were-to-have 
govern  government  said-to-have  whoever  who-have. 
8.  Just-had  laws-of-life  laws-of-health  is-said-to-have  ever- 
lasting-life ever-and-ever  forever-and-ever. 

Phrases.  9.  Must-come  inust-have  so-much  I-am-sat- 
isfied  by-wire  by-rail  telegraphic-messages.  10.  To-which- 
you-refer  course-of-business  agreeable-to-you  how-many- 
passengers  by-express  those-who-tiave  we-always. 
11.  Right-away  right-of-way  this-property  House-of -Repre- 
sentatives by-United-States-express  common-carrier  dur- 
ing-the-summer-season. 

Sentences.  1.  Poverty  and-love  are  difficult  to  hide. 
2.  True  love  never  grows  hoary.  3.  If  Jack  is  in  love  he- 
is  no  judge  of  Jill's  beauty.  4.  He  who-would  have  love 
must-give  love.  5.  He  that  hath  no  jealousy  hath  no  love. 
193.  The  hooks  that  have  been  learned  in  the  past  few 
lessons  are  termed  initial  hooks,  because  they  are  written  at 
tlie  beginning  of  letters.  Final  hooks  are  those  which  are 
placed  at  the  end  of  stems.  The  first  of  these,  called  the 
f-hoot,  is  attached  to  straight  consonajits  only,  and  has  the 
force  oiforv.  See  cough,  cave,  puff ,  etc.  L  3.  This  hook 
is  invariably  written  on  the  right-hand,  or  circle  side,  of  the 
stem,  and  is  used  only  in  connection  Avith  the  ten  straight 
letters  shown  in  L  1.     A  following  s  may  be  expressed  by 


Jllate  18. 


i\  \    I    I    /    /     ^    ^     /     / 

I  "WmiTl-CITnVCl  ' 

^  ^  ■-/- ^  -\,- 


WORD-SIGNS, 


/ 


^ ^-: ^-   ^      -^■ 


\>   'v 


6   L    I     L  }......  \   }.. C    [ L  I 


2 
< 


c 


c       t 


PHBA8E3, 


10 


e 


U- 


"7 


11 

SEKTENCES, 


y 


o 


/- 


^       X 


Y< 


® 


k- 


f  ■--(■•■■ 


98  REPORTINO  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAN-D. 

writing  the  circle  within  the  hook,  as  in  hoofs,  strives.    L  3. 

194.  The  fact  that  either  one  of  any  pair  of  cognate  sounds 
may  be  represented  by  the  same  sign,  with  no  (hxnger  of 
ambiguity,  has  been  fully  shown  in  tlie  case  of  the  circle, 
which  is  sometimes  used  for  s  and  sometimes  for  z,  as  sense 
may  demand.  This  plan  is  safe  because  .s  and  2;  are  similar 
sounds.  So  also  are  f  and  v.  Hence  no  uncertainty  of 
meaning  results  from  using  a  single  hook  to  expi'ess  both,  as 

in  the  sentence,  "They  may  well  '=~^,  considering  their  cause 
of  ^~^."  It  is  easy  to  determine  here  when  the  short-hand 
character  "= — '  should  be  read  grief,  and  when  grieve. 

195.  Since  this  hook  is  attached  to  straight  letters  only, 

the  stems  V f  and  V.  '^  must  be  used  whenever  forv  are 

to  be  added  to  any  curved  letter;  for  example,  ^rl     knave  is 

written  with  the  stem  ^  v,  for  the  reason  that,  according 
to  the  rule,  the  hook  cannot  be  attached  to  the  curve  ^^ — n  to 
express  the  following  v.  F,  like  the  circle  s,  is  written  on 
the  left,  not  the  right-hand  side,  of  up-strokes.  See  rove, 
heave,  L  3. 

196.  Using  the  f-hook,  write:    1  Cuff  root  devout  crave 

2  hive  bereave  beverage    bluff  cavalry  cavil  deaf   dwarf* 

3  gave    glove    gruff   incentive    octave    primitive    province 

4  river  rough  scoff  sensitive  strife  strive   David  Stephen; 

5  1  pos.   drive  gi'ieve  grief.  (30 — :40 — :20.) 

PHRASES. 

197.  Be-satisfied  they-believe  think-perhaps  this-diffi- 
culty  to-satisfy  you-refer  book-keeper  charge-(of-the)- bus- 
iness half-rate  of-importance  by-telegram  for-the-mail 
how-many-cases  in-error  in-this-case  over-charges  sample- 
cases  telegraphic-dispatches  this-claim  time-table  very- 
important  very-irregular  very-regular  very-many  your- 
reply  your-telegram. 

EXERCISE  18. 

198.  1.    Beauty  buys  no  beef.     2.    Love  knows  no  meas- 


BEPORTTNG  STYLE  OF  SnORT-HAND.  99 

lire.  3.  Likely  lies  in-the  mire  while  iinlikely  goes  over. 
4.  The-devil  was  sick,  the-devil  a-monk  would-be.  5.  The- 
devil  grew  well,  the-devil  a-monk  was  he.  6.  Yon-may 
safely  give-a  rope  to-one  who  talks  of  hanging.  7.  Fish  and 
visitors  smell  in  three  days.  8.  What  once  were  evils  are 
now  the-manners  of-the  day.  9.  Joys  are  our  wings;  sor- 
rows are  our  spurs.  (75 — 1:15 — :25.) 

199.  Speed  Sentence.  Yon-must-be  governed  by-the 
laws-of-health  if-you-would  have  relief  from  sickness  and- 
distress.  (5 — 1.) 


200. 

©A      1- 


1 


.  A  J... .  ®.L.  u  "^  )  ^ 
<^  .2....  u  'u  ^  ®  •  J'  ^ 


z 

X 


> 


r  I  ®:.::r:...2...^^  9 

2 r: i".®,^, 


LESSON  XIX.      <  /     _ 

N-HOOK. 

201.  Key.  1.  P-n  b-n  t-n  d-n  ch-n  j-n  k-n  g-n  h-n 
r-u.  2.  Tone  I'oan  twine  queen  Eugene  adjourn  econo- 
my bi'ain.  3.  Sustain  stricken  abstinence  cistern  strain 
chagrin  tangible  Unitarian.  4.  Henry  discipline  barbar- 
ian  tenacious  Conrad  Michigan  sudden   Spanish. 

WoKD  AND  PHKASE  SIGNS.  5.  Happen  puuishment 
spoken  begin  begun  began  religious  religion  general 
imagine.  6.  Denominate  denomination  denominational 
providential  doctrine  darken  eternal  benevolent  benevo- 
lence. 7.  Question  questionable  western  northwestern 
European  such-a-one  at-length  determine.  8.  Circum- 
stance circumstances  beneficial  larger-than  rather-than 
again-and-again  over-and-over-again  Washington. 

Phrases.  9.  As-far-as-can  as-far-as-you-can  as-much-as- 
can  as-much-as-can-be  as-soon-as-can-be  as-soon-as-it-can- 
be  been-done  been-taken.  10.  Can-you  have-spoken  who- 
has-done  nor-can  it-is-plain  so-that-there-has-been  call- 
upon.    11  and  12.    For  key  see  list  words,  sec.  203. 

Sentences.  1.  If-you-wish  to-marry  suitably,  marry  your 
equal.  2.  There-is-no  fear  in  love.  3.  Hope,  alas,  it-is  our 
waking  dream.  4.  How  populous,  how  vital  is-the  grave. 
5.     Humor  is  wit  and-love. 

202.  The  next  final  hook,  signifying  n,  is  annexed  to  both 
straight  and  curved  stems.  When  joined  to  straight  letters 
it  is  written  on  the  side  opposite  the  f-hook,  as  in  tone,  roan, 
twine,  L  2.  The  n-hook,  when  attached  to  up-strokes,  is 
necessarily  placed  on  the  right-hand  side,  as  h-n,  r-n,  L  1. 

203.  Vocalize:    1  Cain  chain    dawn  dine  pain   rainbow 

2  stain  spine  tone  bane  bean  bone  dean  deign  pan  pin 

3  tin  pine  reign  Jane  Jean  join  keen  coin  dainty  can- 

4  opy    marine    acorn    spoon    beacon.     Without  vowels: 

5  Again  been  can  run  stone  ten  pen  gain  abstain  bunch 

6  burn  corn  cotton  deacon    surgeon  denounce*  abandon 

7  detain    pinch  disdain    kitchen  Latin    mechanic    mourn 

8  obtain    ton    candy    hen    upon    skin    done    open   span 

—100— 


\  \    J   J   y  y  - 


j- 


j 


L-  C 


y       y^ 


^  /" 
■^ 


■-^      „  WORD-SIGNS.  /  / 

\ .7?-...  -,  i    ■/  y 


»-^ -V- 

eJ i. 


8 

9 
10 

11 
12 


PHRAS2S. 

a — D  0^ 3 


-J---^ i 3 


V  ^ 


^ 


■WOBD-rOUM8, 


^ 


SENTENCES. 


) 


r. 


r   L 


c-^'^ 


X-.    X®   ^ 

1    -/v 


'rV: 


102  REPORTIXO  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAXD. 

9  cannon    sponge    ordain    origin    pagan    reckon    weapon 

10  retain    scorn*    taken    turn     obstinate     torn     vacancy* 

11  denote    wagon    ribbon     banish     waken     barn*    beckon 

12  tinge    bench     born     bounty    canton     canvass     captain 

13  chicken  chin  county  cunning  den  din  disjoin  expunge 

14  foreign*     hurricane     laconic     maiden     mitten     panic 

15  Austin    Dan    John    enjoin    gone    attain;    3  pos.     June 

16  brown  town   down;    (using  ar)   organ   Oregon;    (1-hook) 

17  cliapkxin'^   planet    blown  glen    plunge  Blanch;    (r-hook) 

18  drone    branch    libertine    ti'ain    drench    stricken    groan 

19  grown  trench  retrench  virgin  chronic.    (135 — 3 — 1:30) 

PHRASES. 

204.  As-has-been  which-has-been  as-well-as-can-be  as- 
well-as-it-can-be  be-done  be-so  but-can  can-be  can-do 
can-have  can-it  can-it-be  can-never  had-been  has-been 
has-done  have- been  have-done  have-taken  how-can  such- 
a-plan  such-as-can  such-can  such-has-been  that-has-been 
that-plan  they-have-been  this-has-been  till-then  to-whioh- 
you-can  upon- which  was-done  which-can  you-may-then. 

EXERCISE  19. 

205.  1.  Pain  may-be-said  to  follow  pleasure  as-its  shadow. 

2.     Peace  is  rarely  denied  to-the  peaceful.    3.    Pity  is  akin 

to-love.     4.   Pity  is  love  when  grown  into  excess.     5.  Prayer 

is  to  religion  what  thinking  is  to  philosophy.     6.    To-pray  is 

to-raake    religion.      7.    Ue-that-has-uo    cross    deserves    no 

crown.    8.    The-Bible  is-a  window  in-this  prison  of  hope, 

through  which  we  look  into  eternity.     9.     Nothing  speaks 

our  grief  so  well  as-to  speak  nothing.     10.    Speaking  much 

is-a  sign  of-vanity.     11.  The-soul  knows  no  persons.     13.  He 

who-is  in  evil  is  also  in-the  punishment  of-evil.     13.     The- 

rose  is  fair,  but  fairer  we  it  deem,  for-that  sweet  odor  which 

doth  ia-it  live.     14.     Keep  true  to-the  dreams  of-thy-youth. 

(128— 2— :40.) 

206.  Speed  Sentence.  It-has-been  spoken  again-and- 
again  by-the  chaplain  that-the  doctrine  of-the  Christian- 
religion  is-that  life  is  eternal  rather-than  a-brief  span  only. 

(7-2.) 


REPORTINO  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


103 


207. 

®C    ) 
^  1 


TRANSLATE. 


\, 


^     ^     !.  X®  "   ^"N, 


-^~i>  N       <5_^     X 


©i. 


i- 


^  ^ -^  y 


'    U  K®  ^  r  ]-/  ^  X© 


Q«P 


To  THE  Teacher. — A  pleasant  i-ecreation,  and  valuable 
discipline,  are  both  combined  in  the  following  described  ex- 
ercise, designed  to  cultivate  verbal  memory.  Pens  should  be 
laid  aside  by  tlie  class,  and  close  attention  given.  One  of  the 
exercises  in  this  book  may  be  selected  for  the  purpose.  Read 
off  distinctly  a  short  sentence.  Call  on  a  member  to  repeat 
it.  If  he  fails  in  the  slightest  particular,  pass  to  the  next. 
Bear  in  mind  tliat  one  of  the  chief  purposes  is  to  impress 
upon  the  pupils  the  importance  of  jjreci^ion  in  reporting. 
Not  only  must  the  pupil  return  the  identical  words,  but  repeat 
them  in  the  exact  order  in  which  they  were  pronounced  by 
the  instructor.  Gradually  proceed  to  longer  sentences. 
After  a  few  drills,  some  pupils  will  be  able  to  give  back  sen- 
tences containing  thirty  or  forty  words.  Occasionally  read 
two  short  sentences,  requiring  the  learner  to  repeat  both, 
giving  the  last  one  first. 


LESSON  XX. 

N-HOOK,  CONTINUED. 

208.  Key.  1.  V-n  th-n  z-n  zh-n  ng-n  mp-n  w-n  y-n. 
2.  Fawn  noun  varnish  menace  fringe  iron  financial  al- 
manac. 3.  Means  thence  mechanism  density  dense 
chance  transpire  resistance.  4.  Punctuate  punctuation 
June  than  examine  fancy  intrinsic  minsti'el.  5.  Learn 
amanuensis  tavern  silence  ransom  Kansas  ci^edence  ven- 
geance. 

Word  and  phrase  signs.  6.  Men  man  human  audi- 
ence providence  opinion  union  heathen  within.  7.  Heaven 
organize  darkens  darkness  upon-his  opens  some-one  our- 
own  experience.  8.  Obedience  responsible  more-than  at- 
once  every-one  cross-examine  human-life  deliverance. 

Phrases.  9.  For-instance  in-his-situation  all-your-own 
by-liis-oj)inion  by-some-means  by-means-of  have-shown 
human-being.  10.  In-his-opinion  in-the-mean-time  no- 
more-than  this-instance  all-circumstances  working-man 
all-situations.     11  and  12.    For  key  see  list  words,  sec.  213. 

Sentences.  1.  Kings'  chaff  is  worth  other  men's  corn. 
2.  A-man  may  love  his  house  well  though  he  never  rides  on- 
its  roof.  3.  It-is  rare  to  see  a  rich  man  religious.  4.  No 
man's  religion  ever  survives  his  morals. 

209.  The  n-hook  is  also  attached  to  curves,  as  in  faxon, 
noun,  varnish,  etc.,  L  2.  Since  a  hook  can  conveniently  be 
written  only  within,  or  following  the  dii'ection  of  a  curve, 
but  one  hook  can  be  attached  to  this  class  of  letters.  This 
hook  is  properly  chosen  to  express  n,  rather  than  ./  and  r, 
for  the  reason  that  n  occurs  much  more  frequently  than  both 
the  other  two. 

210.  When  the  n-hook  is  joined  to  a  curve,  a  following  s 
may  be  expressed  by  placing  the  circle  within  the  hook,  as  in 
means,  thence,  mechanism,  L  3.  At  the  end  of  a  word,  how- 
ever, the  two  consonants  ns  are  expressed,  after  straight 
letters,  by  locating  the  circle  on  the  n-hook  side,  as  in  dc7ise, 
chance,  resistance,  L  3.     But  when  ns  follows  a  curve,  the  cir- 

-  104— 


Plate  20* 


1  V:,  (l  J  d/  v_^  .— 


3:2.. 


c 


a/ 


(T        ^-^  k^ 


^ 


WORD-SIGNS. 


•i 


7  *^ 


3---3- 


^   A  -  -J- 

d     PHRASES.  ^  V 


_     ^ 


^ J" 


10 


11 


-— c^ 


WORD-FORMS. 


SENTENCES,  <^  ^ 


r-./-..-v  A    t 


.,:. 


®  t 


1.  // 


/ 


® 


--^ 


y  ^ 


.Z--....^°   ^ 


lOf) 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


cle  is  necessarily  written  within  the  hook,  as  in  V^  vines;  if 

written  otherwise  it  would  express  Vd  '^^'^'^  instead. 

211.  But  this  pi'inciple  does  not  apply  when  n  is  medial, 
that  is,  occurring  in  the  middle  of  a  word,  even  though  joined 
to  a  straight  stem.  See  mechanism,  density,  L  3.  To  illus- 
trate, the  character  — 3 is  ambiguous,  for  it  may  be  read 

cither  k-skr  or  kns-k.     To  avoid  this,  k-skr  is  written      ■  g — 

and  kns-k  thus:  '  ^ —  When,  on  account  of  the  i)ecidiar 
formation  of  an  outline,  the  hook  cannot  Avell  be  written,  n 
is  often  entirely  omitted,  as  in  transpire,  L  3.  In  such  cases 
n  is  supplied  readily  from  the  context. 

213.  The  n-hook  is  frequently  made  use  of  in  phrasing  to 
express  than,  one,  and  own,  as  in  some-one,  our-own,  more- 
than,  Ls  7  and  8. 

213.    1  Using  the   n-hook:      Lean     loan     Ethan     Julian 

2  Adaline    Maine    main    known    none    coffin    campaign* 

3  cognoman    dominion*    earn   (ar)     finish*     infancy     ar- 

4  range*  (ar)    Italian  lengthen    machine    maintain*  man- 

5  age    minute     saloon    Monday     monarch*    monotonous 
G  Roman    season*    sermon  (ar)    situation    then   specimen 

7  villian    vain    anonymous    German    French    London  ad- 

8  monish    anion    arraign   (ar)    battalion    brilliancy*    cle- 

9  niency  diminish    diminutive  domain    feminine  finance* 

10  frown    fun     infringe    launch     lone    lunch     minimum* 

11  monopolize     monopoly     moon     muslin      ocean     omen 

12  orphan     outline     permanence     million*     phenomenon* 

13  Prussian  raven    refine  refrain  shun    summon   sunshine 

14  tavern*    thin    throne    tuition*    urn   (ar)    van      vanish 

15  venom    vine    violin     workman     Aaron     Allen     Alonso 

16  Benjamin    Franklin*  Jonathan    Napoleon    Nathan    Or- 

17  lando  Solomon    Helen  Josephine  Lillian  Susan;    1  pos. 

18  even    evening    often    line    mine    mean    meaning    tine 

19  shine  thine;    3  pos.    noon    fence    lance    opulence    pesti- 

20  lence    ransom*  renounce*  patience    excellence*  thence 


REPOBTING  STYLE  OF'  SHORT-HAXD.  107 

21  violence    France  silence   lonesome    specimens    cadence 

22  decadence  glance  guidance  occurrence*  bronze  prince 

23  residence  resistance  semblance  tense  distance  pretence 

24  expense     trance    transitory    dense     instance     dispense 

25  extensive  eloquence*  disdains  detains  Lawrence  Penn- 

26  sylvania*      Wisconsin*;     3  pos.     chance     dance     towns 

27  appliance    transpose     transpire     organism     transverse 

28  transcribe.  (161—3—1:30.) 

PHRASES. 

214.  All-means  and-then  by-the-raeans  by-which-means 
do-you-mean  for-even  have-known  in-mine  in-vain  many- 
a-man  my-oijinion  one-maa  some-means  some-one-or-other 
sons-of-meu  such-a-man  than-in-the  that-a-maa  this-eveu- 
ing  this-opinion  wliat-man  what-means  working-man 
which-is-known  will-thence   within-a  that-is-necessary. 


215.  TRANSLATE. 


K    (^  ^x® 


) 


108  B EPOETIN G  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

EXERCISE  20. 

216.  1.  Men  are  April  when-they  woo,  December  when- 
they  wed.  2.  All  of-heaveu  Avc-have  below.  3.  Nothing 
maintains  its  bloom  forever;  age  succeetls  to-age.  4.  To 
err  is  human,  to  forgive  divine.  5.  Many  men  know  how 
to-flatter,  few-men  know  how  to-praise.  6.  Learn  to-labor 
and-to  wait.  7.  No  man  flatters  the-woman  he-truly  loves. 
8.  Love  is-a  reality  which-is  born  in-the  fairy  regions  of 
romance.  9.  Shallow  men  believe  in  luck;  strong  men  be- 
lieve in-cause-and-effect.  (83 — 1:15 — :25.) 

217.  Speed  Sentence.  Every-one  who-begins  the-study 
of-human-life  will  believe  more-thau  ever  before  in  Provi- 
dential guidance.  (5 — 1.) 


LESSON  XXI. 


SHUN-HOOK. 

218.  Ejey.  1.  Caution  auction  passion  option  station 
separation  section  secretion  occupation.  2.  Aml)ition 
remuneration  translation  missionary  relations  associations 
veneration  abbreviation.  3.  Diction  election  portion  re- 
ception obligation  fraction  suspicion.  4.  Dictionary 
exhibition  restriction  plantation  dejection  section  pro- 
jection. 5.  Transgression  assertion  exceptional  additional 
prevention  discrimination  subscription.  6.  Injunction 
sanction  function  opei'ation  oppression  temptation  j)re- 
sumption. 

Word  and  phrase  signs.  7.  Confession  generation  ob- 
jection expression  information  i-evelation  revolution  sus- 
pension perfection.  8.  Dissatisfaction  destruction  delib- 
eration examination  cross-examination  explanation 
inclination.  9.  Invention  reduction  reformation  repre- 
sentation signification  connection  determination. 

Phrases.  10.  All-directions  all-stations  by-permission 
rising-generation  there-is-occasion  for-collection  I-have-no- 


1  J. 


5 


1-^  )^  7^  ^  ' 


7^ 

WORD-SIGNS.     C\ 


~D 


:  7 


8 


vo  ^    \j 


r' 


D 
J 


i  K. 


5 


9    ^Aj   /t     /Aj  /Ao 

PHRASES. 


""-D 


10 


%  J  v> 


U  /         SENTENCES.  2> 

....1...^...  ^  to  -^  ^  ® '  ^  L 


.©  1 


\^  \^  j\ 


IV       \o 


110  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

objoction.  11.  Desire-to-say  by-special-train  ansM'ering- 
your-many-inquirics  please-acknowledge  wholesale-prices 
it-is-generally.     12.    For  key  see  list  words,  sec.  222. 

Sentences.  1.  Education  is-tlie  chief  defence  of  nations. 
2.  Love  is-the  piety  of-the  affections.  3.  All-is  holy  where 
devotion  kneels.  4.  We  ask  advice,  but  we-mean  approba- 
tion. 5.  Truth  makes  the-face  of-that  person  shine  who 
speaks  and-owns  it. 

219.  A  large  final  hook,  corresponding  with  the  rel-hook 
in  size,  is  nsed  to  denote  the  frequent  endings,  tion,  sion, 
cion,  cian,  etc.  This  hook  is  writtenwilhiyi,  or  on  the  e-on- 
cave  side,  of  curves,  as  in  ambition,  remuneration,  transla- 
tion, L  2. 

220.  In  caution,  auction,  passion  and  option  (L  1),  the  shnn- 
hook  is  attached  to  straight  stems,  and  is  written  on  the  side 

^opposite   the  voivel   (except  in  cases  where  there   are  two 

vowels,  as  in  [j  addition,  when  the  hook  is  struck  on  the 

circle  side).  This  mile  applies  when  the  straight  stem  is  pre- 
ceded by  no  letter,  hook,  or  circle.  But  when  such  stem  is 
preceded  by  another  consonant  sign,  it  will  be  found  the 
more  convenient  to  strike  the  hook  on  the  side  opposite  what- 
ever sign  may  so  precede.  Referring  to  L  1,  it  is  seen  that 
the  hook  in  section  is  on  the  lower  side  of  k,  because  the  circle 
is  above  it,  while  the  reverse  is  true  in  secretion.  In  occupa- 
tion the  hook  is  at  the  right  of  p,  k  being  on  the  left.  See 
also  L  3.  By  observing  this  rule  the  writer  may  more  easily 
preserve  the  straightness  of  the  stem.  This  may  be  illus- 
trated by  writing  section  a  number  of  times,  placing  the  hook 
first  above  and  then  below  k.  In  dictionary,  L  4,  shun  may  be 
struck  on  the  upper  side  of  k,  so  that  r  may  be  more  easily 
written. 

221.  To  express  these  various  syllables,  this  hook  some- 
times represents  shii,  as  in  mission,  and  sometimes  zhn,  as  in 
vision.  K,  following  ng,  is  often  omitted,  as  in  injunction, 
sanction.    L  6. 

223.     1  Placing  shun  on  the  circle  side,  write:    Omission 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  Ill 

2  attention    animation    dissipation    definition*  dissension 

3  designation    desolation    devotion    discussion    elevation 

4  evasion    expedition    intimation  rational    irrational  lini- 

5  itation     motion    locomotion    nation     notation     oration 

6  repetition  revision  selection  session  submission   ammu- 

7  nition      dictation      dimension      amputation      ascension 

8  assassination    assimilation    coalition    decapitation   deki- 

9  sion  division  emulation  expectation  exultation  invasion 

10  isolation     location     negotiation*     observation     pension 

11  petition     population    resolution    resurrection     solution 
13  violation    volition     mission     occasion    vision     addition 

13  dissolution    reputation;    (1-hook)    declamation    acclama- 

14  tion     exclamation     inflammation;     (r-hook)     depression 

15  emigration  impression  probation  prosecution  profession 

16  provision  aggregation  promotion  celebration  digression 

17  exportation    extermination    nutrition    penetration    per- 

18  petration   persecution    preservation    profusion  progres- 

19  sion     suppression     supervision     termination*     creation 

20  approbation. 

21  Plaeings/m»on  the  n-hook  side,  write:  Auction  passion 
23  exception    execution     education     induction    invocation 

23  restitution    section    crucifixion     institution     aspiration 

24  restoration     adoration     abduction     adoption     affection 

25  benediction    benefaction    edification    expiration    faction 

26  infection     fiction     siJecification     substitution     vacation 

27  variation   visitation  diction    agitation  elocution  avoca- 

28  tion,  (l-hook)   exclusion  reflection*  recollection*  classi- 

29  fication     exploration     explosion     application;     (r-hook) 

30  crucifixion  friction  attraction  prolongation. 

(133—3—1:30.) 

PHBASES. 

223.  Every-direction  in-the-direction  one-instance  to- 
mention  would-mention  would-occasion  because-that-can- 
be  railroad-man  by-the-train  early-train  for-the-mail-train 
mail-train  through-train  a-few-days-ago  at-your-expense 
at-the-same-price     wholesale-rates      I-know-there-has-been 


112  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SnORT-HAND. 

no-instance  in-the-morning  in-manj^-instances  that-is-a- 
question  that-it-must-be-done  there-has-been  would-happeu 
woukl-instance. 

EXERCISE  21. 

224.  1.  Whatever  is  popuhir  deserves  attention.  2.  I- 
know  no-manner  of-speaking  so  offensive  as-that  of  giving 
praise  and-closingit  with-an-exception.  3.  Tlie-only-things 
in-which  we-ean-be-said  to-have  any-property  are  our-actions. 
4.  Strong  reasons  make  strong  actions.  5.  Affectation  dis- 
covers sooner  wliat  one  is  than  it-makes-known  what  one 
wonid  fain  appear  to-be.  6.  No  decking  sets  foi'th  anything 
as-much-as  affection.  7-  Wo-are-never  like  angels  till  onr 
passion  dies.  8.  Charity  is-a  wish  for-a  perfect  education. 
!).  Take  away  ambition  and-vanity  and-where  will-be  your 
heroes  and-patriots?  (101— 1:30— :40.) 

225.  Speed  Sentence.  The-lawyer  makes  objections  to- 
the  cross-examination  foi'-the-reason-that-it-has-no  relation 
to-the  examination-in-chief,  (4 — 1.) 


To  the  Teacher. — The  short-hand  reporter  must  be  able 
to  write  many  thousands  of  different  words,  but  nine-tenths 
of  all  the  writing  he  does  consists  in  taking  down  over  and 
over  many  times  only  a  few  hundred  very  common  words. 
Evidently  the  lirst  requisite  to  skill  in  stenography  is  a  high 
degree  of  familiarity  with  just  this  class  of  woixls  and  phrases. 
The  reporter  writes  is,  may,  will-be.  Lean,  do-not,  hundreds 
of  times  to  ocean,  extracting,  calibre,  indigo,  delve,  etc.,  once. 
He  may  take  time  occasionally  to  write  a  hard  word  in  long- 
hand, but  he  will  fail  almost  certainly  if  he  is  obliged  to  hes- 
itate for  an  instant  before  writing  one  of  these  frequent 
words  or  phrases.  Hence  the  Teacher  will  drill  his  classes 
daily,  and  require  the  pupil's  practice  to  be  devoted  mainly 
to  this  class  of  words. 


EEPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORTHAND.  113 

326.  TRANSLATE. 

®  (yl.±  Tx .  ^ .  \-^  X  ®  ^  [__^_, 

'v   n  \  i-~  ^  I  °  •!  ..2.-X 

b 

To  THE  Teacher. — The  radical  difference  ia  principle  be- 
tween initial  and  final  hooks  may  be  illustrated  by  showing 
that  vowels  do  not  occur  between  the  two  consonants  repi-e- 
sented  by  initially  hooked  stems;  whereas  a  vowel  always 
does  and  always  must  occur  between  every  stem  and  any 
final  hook  (?»,/,  or  u,)  which  may  be  attached  to  it. 

A  Useful  Reading  Test. — Dictate  a  few  sentences  back- 
wards. Phrasing  is  not  to  be  employed  in  writing  them. 
Call  on  the  pupils  to  read  their  notes  backwards.  This  will 
cause  the  meaning  to  appear.  For  occasional  practice  this 
is  excellent.    The  dictation  should  of  course  be  slow. 


LESSON  XXII. 

S-SHUN  AND   IN-HOOKS. 

237.  Key.  1.  Imposition  physician  decision  precision 
civilization  dispensation  transitions  cessation.  3.  Enslave 
unsalable  inscribe  inspiration  inseparable  insecurity  in- 
solence. 3.  Unscrupulous  unsociable  insomnia  uncere- 
monious insoluble   insurnn^tion   insatiable. 

Word  and  phrase  signs.  4.  Unseasonable  unscriptural 
unsellish  in-some  in-as-many  in-consideration  in-his-usual. 
5.  In-liis-expression  in-his-experience  in-seeming  in-his- 
description  in-his-life   in-expressing  in-describing. 

Phrases.  6.  In-auy-position  in-succession  that-supposi- 
tion  in-some-cases  give-possession  judges-decision  my-own- 
supposition.  7.  All-expenses  all-sums-of-money  fee-simple 
notary-public  any-thing-else-that  cau-you-remember  knowl- 
edge-and-belief.  8.  Personal-knowledge  cause-of-action 
legal-representative  from-your-own-knowledge  I-will-ask- 
you  for-trial.    9  and  10.     For  key  see  list  words,  sec.  230. 

Sentences.  1.  Bvery-man  at  forty  is  either  a-fool  or-a- 
physician.  2.  He  that  knows  nothing  knows  enough  if-he 
knows  how  to  keep  his  tongue.  3.  When  a-fool  has  spoken 
he-has-done  all.  4.  The  unlucky  man  breaks  his  neck  upon- 
a  straw.  5.  An  Englishman's  house  is-his  castle.  6.  There- 
is-never  enough  whei'e-nothing  remains. 

328.  Any  one  of  the  syllables  denoted  by  the  shun-hook, 
when  it  occurs  after  an  s-circle,  may  be  expressed  by  con- 
tinuing the  stroke  until  a  small  hook  is  formed  on  the  side 
opposite,  as  in  imposition,  physician,  decision,  L  1.  The 
leai'ner  is  cautioned  to  write,  not  merely  a  straight  tick,  but 
a  well  bent  hook,  or  oval,  as  if  al)out  to  forna  another  circle. 
See  L  1.  The  plural  is  formed  by  writing  the  circle  within 
the  hook,  as  in  transitions. 

229.  A  small  hook-sign,  called  the  in-hook,  employed  at 
the  beginning  of  certain  w(n*ds-forms,  denotes  in,  en  or  un. 
S6e  enslave,  unsalable,  L  2.  This  hook  is  used  instead  of 
^-^  n  when  followed  by  a  circle  and  curve,  with  which  the 
stem  would  not  join  conveniently.     The  n-hook  is  also  used 

—114— 


Pate  22* 


d) 


ja-sic!Ns.\ 


n    ^. 


^    5 


J 


/tr~N 


c^    d^ 


& 


JD 


rii;iASES. 


J2— e 


\ 


8 


9 


J 


1 


tf— t) 


- .  u 

®'V,.,.L.40..L±3^..\x(l)</  ' 


10 :. ^^ 

SENTENCES. 


O 


^^_9 


^ 


J 


L  X 15 


>  r  X  ®  . 


o 


116  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-BAND. 

in  connection  with  tlie  ti'iple-consonant  series,  as  in  inscribe, 
inspirntion,  inseparable,  L  2.  This  hook  should  be  written 
small,  and  well  curved. 

230.  1  Write:   Deposition  dispositions  accession  position 

2  positions    propositions    sensation'*    supposition    civiliza- 

3  tion   exposition   procession    requisition   succession   vex- 
i  atiou  di.'?pensation;   1  pos.   opposition  acquisition;  3  pos. 

5  accusation   possession   possessions. 

6  Also  write,   using  the   proper  hooks:    Curtain    drain 

7  drove    engrave    explain    grain    graphic    grave     matron 

8  patron    plain    plenty    pronounce*    prudence    utterance 

9  restrain     train     A^enerablo     worn     decline     economical 

10  tribune    incline    woman*  criterion    demonstration*  fur- 

11  niture*  paragraph*  reference*  transgress  transmission; 

12  1  pos.   qualification*  women*  clean  cleave  clime  green; 

13  3  pos.  crown  drown  plan  traffic  administration*. 

(62— 1:30— :45.) 
PHRASES. 

231.  Would-expect  you-expect  all-claims  at-my-office 
give-notice  original-owner  at-what-time  can-you-recolleet 
tell-the-jury  know-all-men  law-journal  personal-property 
take-notice  legal-profession   how-loug-have-you. 

EXERCISE  22. 

232.  1.  As-the  fool  thinks,  so  the-bell  tinks.  2.  Custom 
will  make  a-man  live  in-a  lion's  mouth.  3.  Three  pei'sons^ 
if-they  unite  against  a-tovvn,  will  ruin  it.  4.  Liberty  and- 
Union,  now  and-forever,  one-and  inseparable.  5.  Keep  a- 
thing  seven  years  and-then  in-some-way  it-will-be  of  use  to- 
you.  6.  Innocence  and-mystery  never  dwell  long  together. 
7.  It-is-a-poor  wit  that-lives  by  borrowing  the-inventions 
and-decisions  of -others.  8.  Never-make  business  an-excuse 
to-decline  the-offices  of-humanity.  9.  Flattery  is  base  coin 
to-which  our  vanity  gives  currency.  10.  For-him  who  does 
everything  in-its  proper  time,  one  day  is  worth  three. 
11.    Custom  is-the  plague  of  wise-men  and-the  idol  of-fools. 

(124— 1:45— :50.) 


REPORTING  STYLE  OP  SHORT-HAND.  117 

233.  Speed  Sentence.  The-physician  says  that  in-his- 
experience  he-has-liad  occasion  many-times  to-prescribe  to- 
men-and-women  of  all  nationalities.  (4 — 1.) 

284.  translate. 


To  the  Student. — Do  not  neglect  your  orthography. 
English  spelling  is  a  horrible  image,  but  one  which  the  sten- 
ographer is  obliged  to  face.  Many  good  writers  fail  to  hold 
a  situation  on  account  of  deficiency  in  this  branch.  It  is 
only  a  matter  of  prudence  to  improve  yourself,  if  lacking  in 
this  respect.  Learn  to  spell  by  writing;  with  the  pen,  rather 
than  the  tongue.  Written  and  oral  spelling  are  two  different 
things. 


118  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

LESSON  XXIII. 
ST  AND  STR  LOOPS. 

235.  Key.  1.  List  must  stump  stage  disposed  justify 
against  gestation.  2.  Boaster  obstruction  distribution 
stranger  illustration  spinster  strong  strength.  3.  Gesture 
manifest  enlist  stubborn  statistics  digestion  honestly  dis- 
traction. 

Word  and  phrase  signs.  4.  First  at-first  by-the-tirst 
at-the-tirst  almost  next  next-time  just-Avhat  post-pone. 
5.  Must-like  must-make  we-must  north-west  Baptist  one- 
of-the-most  one-of-the-best.  G.  For-the-first-time  Constitu- 
tion-of-the-U.-S.  circumstances-of-the-case  suggestion  sten- 
ography stenographer  stenographic.  7.  One-or-two  two- 
or-three  three-or-four  four-or-five  five-or-six  six-or-seven 
seven-or-eight.  8.  As-fast-as  by-way-ol-illustration  from- 
first-to-last  just-been  almost-always  he-supposed  most- 
important.  9.  Ohio  mystery  extraordinary  in-reply-to 
in-response-to  everlasting  must-expect. 

Phrases.  10.  We-love  as-well-as-most  before-Christ 
just-now  just-as  must-necessarily  must-also.  11.  Must- 
never  to-the-best-advantage  one-must  such-as-must-be  be- 
supposed  must-generally  it-is-generally.  12.  For  key  see 
list  words,  sec.  238. 

Sentences.  1.  The-first  blow  is  half  the-battle.  2.  When 
it  rains  in  August  it  rains  honey  and  wine.  3.  The  hen 
which  cackles  most  lays  least.  4.  Life  is  real,  life  is  earnest. 
5.    No  fool  can  keep  silence  at-a  feast. 

236.  jSis  very  often  followed  by  t,  forming  the  consonant 
double-sound  5^,  of  very  frequent  occurrence  in  our  language. 
To  express  this  added  t,  the  s-circle  is  elongated,  as  in  list, 
must,  stumi^.  This  loop,  called  ist,  is  made  quite  narrow,  and 
extends  to  the  middle  of  the  stem.  Zd,  which  is  a  cognate 
of  st,  is  also  denoted  by  this  loop,  as  in  dlsjjosed.  Like  the 
circle,  ist  may  be  followed  by  the  s-shun  hook,  as  in  gestation; 
and  implies  n  by  being  located  on  the  n-hook  side  of  straight 
letters,  as  in  against.    L  1. 


illate  23. 


/j     ^    J'    \/"    V^    j^Tkr" 


•WOFD-SIJiNS 

4        ^ 


k ^ ^■ 


5    ^ 


cr^ 


^^ 


=A 


S,    U  c^   /^  ...!!::...:  =^   =-^ 


w^ 


-  --"^ 


9  z-- .c:!? .ze...  '=A  H 

SENTENCES. 


1  ^V.-^ 


120 


REPORTINO  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


237.  1st,  when  written  somewhat  longer  and  considerably 
broader,  denotes  the  added  r,  as  in  boaster,  obstruction, 
stranger,  L  3.  This  large  loop  we  call  ister.  It  also  may  be 
followed  by  the  s-shun  hook,  as  in  illustration,  and  implies  n 
when  struck  on  the  left  side  of  the  stem,  as  in  spinster.  The 
learner  is  cautioned  to  write  ister  with  attention  to  length 
rather  than  breadth,  to  prevent  its  being  mistaken  for  sez. 
To  secure  facile  outlines,  the  s-cii-cle,  instead  of  the  loop,  is 
often  used  in  phrasing,  as  in  must-like,  must-make,  L  5. 

238.  1  Vocalize:    Beast    boast    coast    feast    ghost    host 

2  post  toast  taste   steal  waste  steel;  1  pos.   moist  steam 

3  steep  accost.    Without  vowels:    Placed  cast  chest  dust 

4  fast    guest    haste    just    list  arrest  (ar)    detest    disgust 

5  dishonest    earnest    harvest    disposed    infest    invest    in- 

6  vestigation*  molest  must  most  pretext  stage  star  state 

7  stead  stole  stop  stomach  store  test  testify  text  utmost 

8  vast  west  stump    destiny*  adjust  bequest*  twist*  best 

9  bust  digest  fist  forest  inquest*  jest  nest  request  robust 

10  rust   statesman*   statute    stem    stern    stiff   sting   stitch 

11  storm  stubborn  stuff  stumble*  vest  worst  wrist  August 

12  cost    least    still    stock    style    honest   honestly*;    3  pos. 

13  last    past    stamp    attest;    (r-hook)    breakfast     distrust 

14  trust    intrust  breast    abreast  crest    frost    grist    inerust 

15  protest  priest;  (1-hook)   blest;  (n-hook)  dentist  fantastic 

16  manifest. 

17  Also  write:    Cluster    lustre    master    monster    plaster 

18  Sylvester    minister*    register    bluster    strange;    8  pos. 

19  administer  abstraction.  (123 — 3—1:30.) 

PHRASES. 

239.  All-the-rest  at-most  be-pleased  have-just  I-am- 
pleased  I-must  it-is-just  it-is-most  must-mean  must-receive 
their-most  they-must  must-take  so-must  so-you-must  very- 
best  what-most  wliich-must-be. 


240.     1. 


EXERCISE  23. 

The-i^resence    of-those    whom 


we-love    is-as    a- 


REPORTINO  iSTYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  121 


double  life;  absence  iu-its  anxious  longing  and-sense  of  va- 
cancy is-as  a-foretaste  of-death.  2.  We-that-live  to-please 
must  please  to-live.  3.  It-is-best  to-be  witli-those  in-time 
that-we  hope  to-be  with  in-eternity.  4.  They-that  govern 
must-make  least  noise.  5.  Grace  was  in-all-her  steps,  heaven 
in  her  eye.  6.  By  gaming  we  lose  both  our  time  and-treas- 
ure,  two  things  most  precious  to-the  life  of-man.  7.  Genius 
always  gives  its-best  at-lirst,  prudence  at-last.  8.  Haste 
is-of-the  devil.  9.  Though  I-am-always  in-haste,  I-am-never 
in-a-hurx-y.  10.  Men  love  in-haste,  but-they  detest  at-leisure. 
11.  Hope  is-a  lover's  staif.  12.  That-man  lives  twice  that- 
lives  the-first  life  well.  13.  The-grave  is-a  common  treasury 
to-which  we-must  all  be-talien.  14.  Choose  always  the-way 
that  seems  the-best,  liowever  rough  it-may-be. 

(165—2:15—1:15.) 
241.    Speed  Sentence.    One-of-the-best  and-most  earnest 
of -the  ministers  in-the  North-west  has-just-been  advanced 
to-a  higher  post.  (5—1) 


The  Type-Writer. — Type-writing  is  much  more  rapid, 
and  in  various  ways  far  superior  to  pen  work.  A  knowledge 
of  this  art  itself  is  very  valuable,  and  has  become  entirely 
indispensable  to  the  professional  Stenographer.  The  Private 
Secretary  is  almost  invariably  required  to  make  use  of  a 
writing  machine  in  preparing  transcripts  and  copies.  He  is, 
moreover,  expected  to  be  familiar  witli  its  operation  before 
he  accepts  a  situation,  and  skill  in  manipulating  it  should,  if 
practicable,  be  gained  while  the  course  in  Stenography  is 
being  taken. 

There  are  a  dozen  or  more  different  kinds  of  writing  ma- 
chines. Some  of  the  cheaper  instruments  do  good  work, 
but  lack  in  speed,  a  requisite  entirely  indispensable  when 
used  in  connection  with  short-hand.  The  Remington  is  used 
most.  There  are,  in  fact,  so  many  ofiices  supplied  with  this 
excellent  type-writer,  that  it  would  be  policy  for  every 
stenographer  to  learn  to  operate  it,  even  though  he  should 
own  or  use  some  other  style  of  machine.  If  you  have  no 
machine  to  practice  on,  send  for  a  draught  of  the  key-board, 
and  thoroughly  learn  the  location  of  each  letter. 


TRANSLATE. 


242 


.■^- ^■■■■■■^-  ^  L  ^  ®  ~^  ^  •■-•••I 


3 


( 


<r^ 


^         '    ...^,...    ^     X  ®..v..Xp 


.^^. 


...\>     x@    \ 


r 


/-6 


/*  X  @  a_D  ....^..„„r!!.  ^    U;  x®"^ 
i;...^....r  ^  .  i-x@^  1^    I 


-t? 


"  \  /^....i^,   ^-..C::. 


y 


3)  r^  ^  .r    ' 


LESSON  XXIV, 
LENGTHENING  PRINCIPLE. 

243-  The  writing  of  a  curve  double  its  usual  length  signifies 
the  addition,  first,  of  thr  (see  L  1),  second,  tr  (see  L  2),  and 
third,  dr  (see  L  3).  The  writer's  aim  should  be  to  write  the 
lengthened  curve  more  than  twice  its  usual  length,  rather 
than  less,  in  order  to  obviate  any  liability  there  may  be  to 
confound  it  witli  standard  letters.  For  convenience  long 
curves  are  named /ei!k^r,  vctter,  thetter,  metter,  etc.  These  in 
proportion  to  their  length  are  bent  much  less  than  standard 
stems.    To  illustrate,  metier  extends  but  a  trifle  further  above 

the  line  than  m,  as  the  figure  .^-^ — -^  shows.  The  occa- 
sions for  lengthening  y  and  zh  are  very  rare.  Lengthened  I 
adds  tr  only;  for  if  the  numerous  words  containing  l-thr  and 
l-dr  also,  were  expressed  by  lengthening  I,  it  would  be  too 
much  burdened  with  values. 

244.  The  lengthened  mp  adds  r  only,  signifying  mpr  or 
mbr,  as  shown  in  L  4.  Lengthened  ng  adds  kr  or  gr  only. 
See  L  5. 

245.  The  three  consonant  positions  are  the  same  for 
lengthened  as  for  standard  length  hoi'izonal  stems.  Down 
strokes  are  written  in  the  following  manner:  1  pos.,  on  the 
line;  2  pos.,  one-half  below  the  line;  3  pos.,  two-thirds  below 
the  line.  See  w/dther,  water,  fatter,  L  6.  For  upstrokes, 
1  pos.,  beginning  half  a  space  above  the  line;  2  pos.,  begin- 
ning on  the  line;  3  pos.,  beginning  half  a  space  below  the 
line.     See  lighter,  later,  latter,  L  6. 

246.  A  suffix  may  be  expi-essed  by  adding  a  consonant 
sign  to  a  lengthened  letter,  as  in  L  7.  When  fi  stem  is 
lengthened,  the  vowels  are  always  read  before  the  added  thr, 
tr,  etc.;  but  the  final  hook  or  circle  is  not  pronounced  until 
afterwards.  L  8.  For  example,  in  eastern,  the  final  ?i  is  not 
pronounced  until  after  t7-;  in  Jurtherance,  ns  is  not  read  until 
after  thr. 

247.  This  principle  is  utilized  to  quite  an  extent  in  phras- 
ing.   (See  Ls  10  to  13.)    Lengthening  a  curve  adds  there,  their, 

-1^3- 


134  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  STIORT-nAND. 


or  other.    Final  ng  is  sometimes  lengthened  to  add  there  or 
their.    See  L  12. 

248.  Key.  1.  Father  mother  weather  further  further- 
more another.  2.  Letter  reporter  material  entirely 
legislator  oyster.  3.  Order  surrender  calender  murder 
Avander  shudder.  4.  Timber  chamber  cumber  pamper 
lumber  damper.  5.  Conquer  anger  banker  finger  hun- 
ger longer.  G.  Whither  water  fatter  lighter  later  latter. 
7.  Rendered  orderly  loitering  tenderness  waterfall  Moth- 
ers. 8.  Entrance  furtherance  eastern  northern  southern 
lantern  obliteration.  9.  Flatter  stronger  whether  swifter 
central  diameter  immaterial. 

Phrases.  10.  For-their  have-their  may-there  from-there 
in-their  some-other.  11.  Stronger-than  have-their-own 
some-other-one  further-than  live-there  was-there.  12.  Liv- 
ing-there making-their  think-there-is  if-there-were  in-their- 
case  no-longer-than.  13.  At-one-another  for-their-satisf ac- 
tion in-their-possession  neither-of-them  such-matters 
through-their   whether-or-not. 

Sentences.  1.  It-is-a  well-known  saying  that  murder 
will  out.  2.  Hunger  makes  raw  beans^  sweet.  3.  One  bar- 
ber shaves  another. 

249.  1  Write:    Centre  eccentric  enter  hinder  hindrance 

2  material  maternal  matter  literal  render  senator  tender 

3  thunder    thermometer    wonder    yonder    entire    neither 

4  neutral  caster  eastern  thither  voter  nitre  mitre  mutter 

5  sifter    smatter    laughter    Anderson    Alexander  re-enter 

6  hunter     sunder     slender     winter     bewilder      smother 

7  swifter    literary    alter     chronometer     temper    slumber 

8  limber    amber    cucumber    hamper    distemper    scamper 

9  cumber  sombre  angry  anchor  tinker  clinker  hanker 
10  rancor  drinker  handkerchief.  (60 — 1:20 — 1.) 

phrases. 

250.  AU-the-matter  another-instance  another-opinion 
another-question  another-time  enter-into  for-their-sake 
fur-there-has-been    foi-there-is  for-there-were    in-such-mat- 


plate  24^ 


1. 

2 


■•>-^ -^ 


A^ 


U-^. 


126  BEPORTING  l^TYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


ters  in-their-opinion  in-their-place  no-further  of-the-matter 
one-another  that-is-another  there-is-another  to-have-their 
what-matter  what-was-the-matter  whenevor-there-has-been 
wlienever-there-occurs  think-there-has-never  think-there- 
has-bcen. 

EXERCISE  24. 

251.  1.  To  step  aside  is  human.  2.  Music  washes  away 
from-the  soul  the-dust  of -every  day  life.  3.  Obstinacy  is 
ever  most-positive  when-it-is-most  in-the-wrong.  4.  They- 
who  forgive  most  shall-be-most  forgiven.  .5.  Passion  co.sts 
me  too-much  to-bestow  it  upon  every  trifle.  6.  To  climb 
steep  hills  requires  slow  pace  at-first.  7.  Every  noble  work 
is-at-first  impossi1)le.     8.     Time  is  generally  the-best  doctor. 

9.  Ill-poetry,  which-is  all  fable,  truth  is  still  the-perfection. 

10.  Poetry  is  truth  dwelling  in-beauty.  11.  Ye  stars,  that 
are-the  poetry  of-heaven.  12.  Praise  is-only  praise  when 
well  addressed.  13.  Solid  pudding  against  empty  praise. 
14.  Live  this-day  as-if-the  last.  15.  Who-makes  tlie-fairest 
show  means  the-most  deceit.  16.  Small  service  is  true  ser- 
vice while  it-lasts.  (131—1:45—1.) 

252.  Speed  Sentence.  The-senator  calls  a-swifter  re- 
.porter  into  another  chamber  to-further  the-taking  of-testi- 

mony  in-the  murder-trial.  (5 — 1.) 


Nomenclature. — It  is  a  matter  of  considerable  importance 
in  teaching,  that  the  more  common  elements  of  the  .system 
lie  provided  with  suitable  names.  These  names,  if  charac- 
tcnistic,  will  be  easily  remembered  by  the  learner,  and 
abridge  and  give  precision  to  the  teacher's  work. 

The  1-hook  series  may  be  designated,  pel,  bel,  tel,  chel,  vel, 
etc.,  the  r-hooks,  per,  dor,  jer,  ther;  n-hooks,  pen,  ben,  fen, 
.shen;  f- hooks,  pef,  tef,  jef,  hef.  Stems  doubly  hooked,  plen, 
dref.  Hen,  mern,  delf,  twen,  kwef,  wern;  'also,  kayshun, 
beeshun,  veeshun,  velshun,  pershun,  nershun,  relshun.etc. 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


127 


The  circles  are  called  iss  and  sez.    The  loops,  ist  and  ister. 

Lengthened  curves  may  be  signified  by  adding  ter  to  the 
letter  to  be  doubled;  thus,  emter,  enter,  efter,  ithter,  way  ter, 
veeter,  etc. 

The  teacher  will  not,  however,  overlook  the  fact  that  when 
the  jjupil  hears  spleji,  or  any  other  mere  name,  he  does  not 
picture  this  character  in  his  mind  as  clearly  as  Avhen  he  sees 
it  plainly  written  on  the  blackboard.  His  mental  grasp  of 
the  system  is  yet  too  imperfect.  Hence,  use  names  sparingly, 
and  chalk  liberally.  Blackboard  illustrations  impress  the 
learner's  imagination  most  forcibly,  and  he  gets  a  clearer 
idea  of  the  teacher's  meaning,  and  remembers  it  longer. 


253.  TRANSLATE. 

®  ^-^   <^_,^  .-::f. .-..-  "^  1    V^  /- 

Vs     c;   ..C  X  ®  ^     ^     ^ — -6      ~" X 


r  ^ 


L 


~/\. 


I     r 


I  LESSON  XXV.  ^^ 

HALVING   PRINCIPLE.  I 

254.  Key.    1.     Bit    bed  cut    code    gait    art  quote    slate 
.  start    about    act.      2.      Bolt    giant    violet    twilight    exert 

merit  uncertain  suspect.  3.  Adjacent  debtor  inhabit 
I  circuit  educate  precept  prerogative  nutshell.  4.  Captivate 
legitimate  strict  reciprocate  transmit  discredit  pre-emi- 
nent. 

Word  and  phrase  signs.  5.  Without  almighty  em- 
phatic nature  natural  posterity  after  afternoon  somewhat 
is-it  as-it  use-it.  6.  Yesterday  intellect  heart  associate 
sometime  intelligence  intelligible  interchange  territory 
or-not.  7.  Heretofore  manuscript  postscript  hesitate  for- 
j  it  better-than  in-the-second-place  human-nature. 

Phrases.  8.  After-which  at-the-present-time  it-is-better- 
than  at-times  quite-certain  thought-we-were  almost-certain 
after-we-have  quite-as-well.  9  and  10.  For  key  see  list 
words,  sec.  260. 

Sentences.  1.  I-love  sometimes  to-doubtas-well-as  know. 
2.  Habit  is-the  deepest  law  of  human-nature.  3.  If  fame 
is  only  to-come  after-death  I-am  in-no  hurry  for-it.  4.  Every- 
man is-the  architect  of-his-own  fortune.  5.  Where  no  hope 
is  left  is  felt  no  fear.  6.  Let  them  obey  who  know  how  to 
rule. 

255.  One  of  the  most  useful  contrivances  in  the  entire 
system  is  that  by  which  a  letter,  when  shoi-tened  to  half  its 
usual  length,  is  made  to  express  an  added  t  or  d.    Thus, 

.  \  b,  when  shortened  in  this  manner,  is  read  \  bt,  as  inbii, 
or  \  bd,  as  iu  bed;  —  k,  when  halved,  has  the  force  of  M, 
as  it  cut,  or  kd,  as  in  code.  Tand  d  are  the  most  frequently 
recurring  consonants,  and  being  cognates,  or  similar  sounds, 
no  ambiguity  results  from  the  expression  of  both  by  the 
same  contrivance. 

256.  Learners  are  cautioned  not  to  write  the  shortened 
letters  more  tlian  half  the  usual,  or  standard  length,  else  the 
two  will  become  confounded.  The  practice  of  the  writer 
should  be  rather  to  form  these  brief  signs  a  trifle  less  than  the 

—128— 


plate  25* 


\ 


e~     ^ 


\    —    —     —      "> 

3  ^    1^  .^  "Y     L      \    V^   ^ 

W0KD-8taNS. 

/         '^       ^^                                    \                                           0^  > 

5      V.      V.  ^^       w       V)         V_     V^,^_;7 

^    PHRASES. 


.1... 


I 


^ 


[     -^^ 


/' 


V 


10 


/u_/\  ^ 


<^ 


®..:f 


-TV. 


SENTENCES. 


^ 


Cy 


A  N 


130  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

standard  length.  To  avoid  confusion  not  only  must  the 
halved  letters  7iot  be  too  long,  but  those  of  standard  length 
also  should  not  be  too  short. 

257.  Shortened  curves  are,  in  proportion  to  their  length, 
bent  somewhat  more     than  full  lengths;  as  an  illustration, 

it  will  be  seen  tiiat  ,^  mt  extends  almost  as  far  above  the 
line  as  /— -  w.  This  practice  adds  to  the  angularity  of  many 
word-forms. 

258.  First  position  words  composed  entirely  of  shortened 
stems,  or  of  a  mixture  of  half-length  and  horizontal  letters, 
are  written  one  full  space  above  the  line,  as  in  bit;  third  posi- 
tion words  are  written  almost  entirely  below  the  line,  as  in 
about,  act. 

259.  In  gait,  L  1,  it  will  be  seen  that  the  added  t  is  pro- 
nounced after  g,  but  not,  however,  until  the  vowel  a  has 
been  sounded.  The  rule  is,  read  all  vowels  before  pronounc- 
ing the  t  or  d  expressed  by  the  shortening  principle. 

260.  In  the    following    list    t  is    indicated    by    halving: 

1  Vocalize:    Boat   boot    coat    cat  vault    sect    mate    dolt 

2  nut    saint  dote;    1  pos.   cheat.    Without  vowels:    Date 

3  get    bet    debt    hate    late    net    met  let    fate  note    vote 

4  sent    left    lift    accent    enact   exact    tact    adopt    better 

5  insect    accept    acceptable     insei't    little     result    smart 

6  limit    motive   native   rabbit  recent  arithmetic  alphabet 

7  instigate  assent  artifice  agent  intimate  repeat  promote 

8  capital*    locomotive    certify*    certificate*    mathematics 

9  ratify    petrify    rusticate     support    reject    auditor    (ar) 

10  remit  (ar)     imitate     report     magnetic    resolute    resort 

11  adjunct    agitate  cognate    cottage    dogmatic  export    ex- 

12  tinct  inject  intact  peasant  submit  musket  theft  upstart 

13  captive  certain*  circuit*  deb:ite  decent  deject  designate 

14  desolate  eject   elect  (el)    except  execute  habit  habitual 

15  eminent    emulate    erect  (ar)    estate*    innocent    iri'itate 

16  legislate    originate    sentence*    abject    Handet;    (1-hook) 

17  implicate    ])]easant    vegetable    duplicate  fluent;    1  pos. 

18  client  climate;    (r-hook)  intricate    present   private  pro- 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  131 

19  duct    promote  pi-ospect   protract  subtract    tract  traus- 

20  late  attribute  bracelet    precinct  project   restrict  thrift 

21  tribute  decrepit  affirmative*  aggravate  appreciate* 
23  October  credit  deprecate  detract  extract  transcript* 
23  approximate.  (145—3—2.) 

PHRASES. 

261.  After-a  after-that  after-the  at-present  be-certain 
be-thought  better-than  better-way  does-not  future-time 
has-not  have-no-doubt  have-sent  have-thought  I-am-quite- 
sure  I-thought-that  is-not  no-doubt  not-a-man  not-enough 
not-possiblj  not-much  not-that  not-understand  present- 
instance  present-time  so-little  think-there-is-not  that-such 
that-which  which-must-not. 

EXERCISE  25. 

263.  1.  Always  rise  from  table  with-an  appetite  and-you- 
will-never  sit  down  without-one.  2.  When-we  feel  a  strong 
desire  to-thnist  our  advice  upon  others,  it-is  usually  because 
we  suspect  their  weakness;  but-we  ought  rather  to  suspect 
our-own.  3.  To-be  happy  we-must-be-true  to  nature  and- 
carry  our  age  along  with  us.  4.  Beauty  is-a  possession  not 
our-own.  5.  The-beautiful  are-never  desolate,  but  some-one 
always  loves-them.  6.  It-is-betterfor-a  young-man  to-blush 
than-to  turn  pale.  7.  Every  Christian  is  born  great,  be- 
cause-he-is  born  for-heaven.  8.  That-which-is-so  universal 
as  death  must-be-a  benefit.  9.  We-speak  of  educating  our 
children.    Do-we  know  that  our  children  also  educate  us? 

10.  Fortune  is-the  rod  of-the  weak  and-the  staff  of -the  brave. 

11.  The-chains  of  habit  are  generally  too-small  to-be  felt 
until-they-are  too  strong  to-be-broken.  12.  Keep  thy  heart 
with  all  diligence,  for-out-of-it  are-the  issues  of-life. 

(174—2:15—1:30.) 

263.  Speed  Sentence.  We- will-certainly  be-able  very- 
soon  to-make  verbatim-reports  of-the  eminent  speakers  in- 
the  debate  by-means-of-the  stenographic  art.  (4 — 1.) 


133 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORTHAND. 


264. 


TRANSLATE. 


®. 


J 


fj^ 


1 


D  If   r  \  ...t)...^r 


X  @  r 


r  \ 


Correspondence.— Letter- writing  in  ,«;liort-hand  is  no 
more  interesting  than  itislielpfnl  to  the  learner.  You  will 
naturally  write  more  carefully  when  you  expect  that  your 
letter  will  be  read  by  some  one  at  a  distance;  and  this  prac- 
tice will  in  time  give  you  a  habit  of  accuracy.  The  perusal 
of  the  letters  you  receive  will  prove  a  most  valuable  drill  in 
reading.  You  will  be  compelled  to  rely  entirely  ui)on  the 
short-hand  notes;  whereas,  in  reading  what  you  have  j)revi- 
ou.sly  written  yourself,  you  are  aided  in  a  measure  by  mem- 
ory. It  is  a  mistake  to  suppose  that  you  must  c(miplete  your 
course  before  undertaking  such  a  corresjiondence.  The 
better  plan  is  to  begin  early,  writing  a  mixed  hand,  that  is, 
all  the  words  stenographically  that  you  ar(;  able,  and  the 
balance  in  long-hand.  Two  points  are  to  be  guarded: 
1st.  Do  not  put  words  that  you  have  not  learned  into  short- 
hand. 2nd.  Do  not  fail  to  employ  characters  for  all  words 
that  you  have  learned.  Your  instructor  will  be  able  to  fur- 
nish you  letters  of  introduction,  particularly  if  you  are 
taught  by  mail. 


LESSON  XXVI. 


ADDED   D. 


265.  Wlien  t  or  d  is  followed  by  a  final  vowel,  it  cannot 
properly  be  expressed  by  the  halving  principle;  for  if  it  were 
so  indicated,  it  wonld  be  impossible  s.o  to  place  the  final 
vowel  that  it  would  be  read  last.  To  illustrate,  t  in  might 
may  be  expressed  by  shortened  m;  but  the  employment  of 
the  stem  t  in  mighty  indicates  the  fact  of  a  following  vowel. 

266.  Shortened  consonants,  when  standing  alone,  are 
usually  employed  to  denote  words  that  contain  but  one 
vowel;  for  example,  half-length  cZ  is  used  for  fZa/e,  while  in 
edit  full-length  dt  must  be  written.  This  rule  applies  also  in 
writing  voiVZ,  avoid,  bate,  abate,  etc.  L  1.  Increased  legibil- 
ity is  thus  secured,  since  the  reader  is  expected  to  supply  but 
one    vowel    when    a     shortened   consonant    stands  alone. 

267.  The  plural  of  —  coat  is  expressed  by  affixing  the  cir- 
cle s,  thus  -f  coats.  This  is  simple  so  far  as  the  writer  is 
concerned.  But  the  reader  is  liable  to  miscall  it  coast,  sup- 
posing that  the  circle  s  is  to  be  sounded  before  the  added  t. 
The  invariable  rule,  however,  is  to  read  t  Jirst  and  s  last.  If 
s  actually  occurs  before  t,  the  loop  should  be  employed,  as  in 

--=  coast. 

268.  Outlines  composed  entirely  of  horizontal  shortened 
letters  are  usually  writen  in  the  first  position  when  the 
accented  vowel  is  first-place,  as  in  void,  esteem,  sivift.  The 
halving  principle  is  used  to  express  the  past  tense  of  regular 
verbs,  as  obliged,  avoided,  stopped. 

PHEASES. 

269.  Future-time  if-it-were-only  of-its-own  could-have-it 
this-world's-goods  good-time  many-facts  mutual-friend 
certain-causes  bad-example  good-opportunity  could-not- 
be-made  would-not-have-been. 

—133- 


134  REPOnriNG  STYLE  OF  SIIOnT-HAXI). 


270.  Key.  1.  Miglit  mighty  date  edit  void  avoid  bate 
abate  gate  agate.  3.  01)liged  avoided  stopped  stood 
covered  comrade  infidel  betide  esteem  immature.  3.  Evi- 
dence fortune  per-cent  swift  rlietoric  susccjjtiljle  .iudicial 
integrity  catalogue.  4.  Estimate  ultimate  evident  Con- 
necticut adjudicate  captivate  multii)]y  w(Mit  acquiird 
between.  5.  Intentional  perpetual  apart  al)stract  hermit 
antagonism  Presbyterian  prominent  return.  6.  Heat 
taught  sort  assimilate  athlete  dissipate  exult  ostentatious 
added.  7.  Schedule  seldom  despite  mutual  necessitate 
beautiful  delicate  district  integral.  8.  Prejudice  transact 
promulgate  federal  iutoleralde  acquaintance  wayward 
photograph  intention.  9.  Advocate  defective  splendid 
distinct  distribute   stimulate  instruct  invested. 

Word  and  phrase  signs.  10.  Feature  future  fact  as- 
tonish astonishnicnt  establish  establishment  onward  wis- 
dom quite  history  world.  11.  If-it  it-ought  it-w^iuld 
it-had  at-it  do-it  had-it  of-it  have-it  have-had  people-of- 
God.  12.  Historian  Act-of-Congress  at-all-events  east- 
and-west  fear-of-God  good-and-bad  in-the-world  all-the- 
world. 

Phrases.  13.  As-good-as  as-good-as-possible  could-never 
could-not  God's-love  church-of-God  in-which-you-are-en- 
gaged  what-did.  14.  Was-reccived  which-is-intended 
which-made  cinild-nevertheless  as-good -as-it  if -it-did  it-is- 
admitted  that-is-intended.  15.  For  key  see  list  words, 
sec.  271. 

271.  1  Added  d:    Bed   could   good   shade  stood  decided 

2  comrade    method*  instead    evidence*    educated    invade 

3  infidel. 

4  In  the  following  list  both  t  and  d  are  expressed  by 
T)  halving:     1  pos.    east    l)o(tom    got    did   liglit    bid    God 

6  meet    invite   might    indeed  fit    knot   ligiitning    lot  soft 

7  spot.    Vocalize:    feat    beat    naught    caught  fought    dot 

8  tight    deed    shot    niglit    slight    knot    soft    lecd    knight 

9  neat  salt  sheet  spite  steed  tide;  2  pos.   accelerate  per- 


plate  26* 


8 


^   3-  V-  ^  -/\ 


10 

11 

12 
13 
14 


WORD-SIGNS. 


,i..i..)  ) r:. 


-    L     ^ 


6/ 


^ 


CLO         cup 


b--  ^  S- .... 

-TV 


„.  .......  ^ 


A 


15  _±___^___^ _-^;_  \yy   ^ 


S 


L 


Q-'v—-^ 


136  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORTHAND. 

10  c'(Mit:ige    rapid    notify    dispute     active    actual*    admit 

11  cupidity    molt  dissect    dissent    expedite   extort    heredi- 
13  tary   plionetic    stupid   fault    appetite;    3  pos.    act  adapt 

13  apt    doubt  foot    mutual    bad    adult    adejjt    absent    fat 

14  mute;  (sez-circle)  systematic*;  (1-hook)  article*  doul^tful 

15  emblematic      hospitable      notable;      (r-hook)      (iodfrey 

16  crabbed    crescent    proximate    lubricate    dramatic    encr- 

17  vate  pi'omote  integrity;  1  pos..  prominent;  3  pos.  atti-act 

18  attractive;    (rel-hook)    relent    multiplication;    (w-liook) 

19  upward*    went    wan-ant    quantity*    reward    acquainlcd 

20  Edward;     1  pos.    wind,   inward     awkward    wild    Mard 

21  wield;    3  pos.    backward    outward;    (f-hook)    indefinite* 

22  defective;    (n-hook)    manipulate    patern    tenant   candid 

23  longitude  mandate  opponent  benefit;  (shun-hook)  dedi- 

24  cation    litigation    intentional    estimation*;    (loops)    ob- 

25  struct     investigate*      stipulate;     (past    tense)      packed 

26  molested     trusted     manifested      transci'ibed     displayed 

27  employed       adopted      dispatched      solicited      specified 

28  searched  risked  kept;   (halving  principle  applied  twice) 

29  capitulate    recapitulate   estimate   illegitimate  (el)  detect 

30  mutilate  fortunate*  protect*  deduct   latitude  rectitude 

31  cataract;  1  iJos.   intent*  mitigate;  3  pos.   aptitude. 

(150—3—2.) 

EXERCISE   26. 

272.  1.  The-good  is  always  beautiful,  tho-beautiful  is 
good.  2.  Goodness  is  beauty  in-its-best  estate.  3.  Men 
often  make-up  in  wrath  what  they  want  in  reason.  4.  Let 
not  the-sun  go  down  upon  thy  Avrath.  5.  All  things  are 
artificial,  for  nature  is-the-art  of-Ciod.  G.  Biography  is-the 
liome  aspect  of  history.  7.  The-desire  of  knowledge,  like 
tliirst  of-riches,  increases  ever  with-the  acquisition  of-it. 
8.  Life  is  like  wine;  he  who-would  drink  it  ])ure  must  drnin 
it  to-the  dregs.  9.  Literature  is-the  thouglit  of-tliinking 
souls.  10.  Doing  good  is-the-only  certainly  happy  action 
of-a-mau's  life.  11.  A-life  that-is-worth  living  at-all  is  worth 
writing   minutely.      12.     The-universe    would-not-be    rich 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  137 

enough  to  buy  the-vote  of-an  honest  man.  13.  Character 
is-a  perfectly  educated  will.  14.  It- were  joy  to  die  if-there- 
be  gods,  and-sad  to-live  if-there-be  none.  15.  It-is-better 
to-desire  than  to  enjoy;  to-love  than  to-be  loved. 

(168—2—1:15.) 

273.  Speed  Sentence.    True  wisdom  is  to  know  what-is- 
best  worth  knowing,  and-to-do  Avhat-is-best  worth  doing. 

(6-1.) 

274.  TRANSLATE. 


Key-Book. — Every  student  should  make  a  key-book  for  his 
own  use.  For  this  purpose  take  a  well  bound  blank  book,  of 
a  good  quality  of  ruled  paper. 

After  your  work  has  been  corrected,  copy  the  exercises, 
list-words,  and  translations,  all  in  proper  order,  with  an 
Index  showing  the  page  upon  which  the  key  for  each  partic- 
ular lesson  appears.  A  book  of  this  character,  if  carefully 
made,  and  diligently  used  for  the  purpose  of  i-eference,  will 
greatly  facilitate  the  progress  of  its  author,  and  make  of  him 
a  more  accurate  reporter. 

An  occasional  discrepancy  will  be  discovered  between  the 
outlines  here  taught,  and  those  given  in  the  Pitman  Diction- 
ary. Our  rule,  however,  has  been  not  to  depart  from  this 
generally  accepted  standard,  only  in  those  few  instances 
where  we  believed  there  was  good  ground  for  it. 


LESSON  XXVII. 

SHORTENED  DOUBLE  CONSONANTS. 

275.  Key.  1.  Glad  brought  spread  gratitude  degen- 
erate ovei'take  remonstrate  discreet  secret.  2.  Enameled 
cultivate  British  secretary  overture  multiform  predomin- 
ate virtual  seclude.  3.  Chnid  suftered  shrewd  effort 
l)redicate  threat  sacred  verdict  vertical.  4.  Deplete 
exclude  migrate  destroyed  graduate  demonstrate  fertile 
pervert  penetrate.  5.  Illustrated  cupboard  virtuous 
freedom  frustrate  scrutiny  chartered  glide  scattered. 

Word  and  phrase  signs.  6.  Particular  opportunity 
part  party  creature  according  aceortling-to  virtue  child 
spirit  delight  guilt  guilty.  7.  Partake  majority  minority 
calculate  political  prosperity  circulate  co-operate  hundred. 

8.  In-his-secret    as-great-as  from-it  able-to    Great-Britain 
for-the-most-part     in-order-that     in-oi'der-to     iu-regard-to. 

9.  Till-it    tell-it    told    until-it    at-any-rate    able-to-give-it 
with-regard-to  at-all-its  at-all-times  toward  towards. 

Phrases.  10.  Able-to-thiuk  be-able-to  British-America 
be-told-that  for-my-part  Court-of-Justice  holy-spirit  I-am- 
able-to  with-regard-to-it. 

Sentences.  1.  Angels  are  bright  still,  though-the  bright- 
est fell.  2.  Many  delight  more  in  giving  of-i^resents  than-in 
pacing  debts.  3.  A-book  ma3'-l)e  as-great-as  a-battle. 
13,  14  and  15.     For  key  see  list  words,  sec.  277. 

276.  Letters  of  the  double  and  triple  consonant  series  are 
also  shortened  to  denote  the  addition  of  t  and  fZ,  as  in  glad, 
brought,  spread,  enameled,  etc.  Ls  1  to  5  inclusive.  The 
learner  will  observe  in  the  examples  given  that  both  sounds 
expressed  by  the  double  consonant  are  pronounced  before 
the  added  t. 

277.  1  Using  the  1-hook  and  vowels:    Plate    blade   plat; 

2  1  pos.    fleet  flight    bleed  clod;    (without  vowels)    inflate 

3  blood  glad  flood  cultivation*  include  preclude  replied 

4  tumbled  coupled    displayed  tangled    entitled   employed 

5  smuggled  doubled  assembled  rambled  pamphlet;  1  pos. 

—138— 


1      c_ 


ir 


A  ~ 


-e_ 


WORD-SiaNS. 


6     "^     % 


^. 


/^  '\    [> 


\. 


^-A 


./ 


cr 


8  ....^.....  o-o       ^        <v         '^A 


9 1...  r     r I \^      <^. 


1        % 


FHTKASES. 

10     ^     \ 


G         t-15 


SENTENCES. 


?: 


^  </! 


r... /. ^  I,  X  ® 


— Vl^ 


18 

14 
15 


WORD-FORMS. 

^    ^    ^     ^     J, 


A 


I 


>  ^         <i:    V-, 


^A" 


140  HE  PORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

6  plead   blot  plot;    (r-hook)  vocalize:    trait  brute   prayed 

7  crowed     cried;     1  pos.     creed    trite;     (without  vowels) 

8  gatliered     labored     prospered     papei-ed     uttered     shirt 

9  tempered    altered    betrayed    muttered    offered    silvered 

10  measured  treasured  record*  clamored  flattered  traveled 

11  troubled   flattered   glittered  hammered    scrupled    arbi- 
13  trate    aristocrat*    culprit    perpetrate    vibrate    great  re- 

13  treat  regret  grade  grateful  celebrate  democrat  credible 

14  degrade    defraud    hatred    emigrate    third   trade    hypo- 

15  crite  gratify  bread  dread  intrude  tread  spread  straight 

16  Elbert    Frederick    Richard     Robert     Gertrude     Albert 

17  Alfred.  (94—2—1:30.) 

PHRASES. 

278.  Able-to-agree  able-to-do  according-to-a  all-particu- 
lars be-called-upon  be-cousidered  be-greatly  called-upon 
for-great  great-aftairs  great-applause  great-danger  great- 
deal  great-dift'erence  great-difficulty  great-favor  great- 
many  great-men  great-nation  great-opportunities  great- 
pleasure  great-principles  great-respect  great-truths  great- 
value  have-greatly  have-told  I-am-afraid  I-am-told  in-a- 
great-measure  in-the-street  in-this-world  may-greatly  to- 
be-able-to  freedom-(of-the) -press  gather-together  great-ad- 
vantage. 

EXERCISE  27. 

279.  1.  To-do-an  evil  action  is  base;  to-do-a  good  action, 
without  incui'ring  danger,  is  common  enough;  but  it-is-the. 
part  of-a  good-man  to-do  great  and-noble  deeds,  tliough-lie- 
I'isks  everything.  2.  Men  resenil)le  the-gods  in-nothing  so- 
much  as-in  doinggoodto-their  fellow-creatures.  3.  Heaven 
from-all-creatures  hides  the-book  of  fate.  4.  A-good  heart 
will  at-all-times  betray  the-best  head  in-the-woi-ld.  5.  The- 
greatest  trust  between-man-and-man  is-the-trust  of  giving 
counsel.  6.  The-next  dreadful  thing  to-a  battle  lost  is-a 
battle  won.  7.  It-is  seldom  the-case  that  beautiful  persons 
are  otherwise  of-great  virtue.    8.     When  clouds  are  seen 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  141 

wise-men  put  on  their  cloaks,    9.    There-can-be  no  Chris- 
tianity where-there-is-no  charity.  (134 — 1 :30 — 1 .) 

280.  Speed  Sentence.  You-should  cultivate  a-good- 
memory  in-order-that  at-all-times  you-may-be-able-to-report 
the-exact  evidence  which  in-courts-of -justice  is-sometinies 
given  at-the  rate  of  two  hundred  a-minute.  (3 — 1.) 

281.  TRANSLATE. 


Items  of  Interest. — It  has  been  observed  that  the  pen  of 
the  long  experienced  stenographer  follows  the  speaker  al- 
most automatically.  It  is  indeed  true  that  the  reporter  can, 
to  a  certain  extent,  take  notes  while  thinking  of  something 
else.  Stories  are  told  of  brilliant  young  writers  taking  a  nap 
in  the  middle  of  a  speech,  without  losing  a  single  word  that 
fell  from  the  orator's  lips.  Some  stenographers  interest  them- 
selves  with  experiments  as  to  how  extensive  arithmetical  cal- 
culations can  be  made  while  writing  one  hundred  words  a 
minute.  Many  i-eports  have  been  taken  entirely  in  the  dark; 
also,  by  reporters  who  were  obliged  to  stand,  holding  their 
note-books  against  the  wall. 


LESSON  XXVIII. 

HAXF-LENGTH   FINAL   HOOKED   STEMS. 

283.  Key.  1.  Blind  lend  paved  petitioned  meant 
mitten  funds  drafts  bends  grand.  2.  Round  around 
drift  dental  talent  superintendent  stimulant  suspend 
counter  random.  3.  Equivalent  strengthened  Ireland 
relevant  supplicant  frequent  insolvent.  4.  Landscape 
dependent  craft  hint  foiuitain  surround  silent  candor 
event.  5.  Phantom  country  mankind  expedient  Atlantic 
identity  suspend  announcement.  6.  Gentle  authentic 
plunder  blend  bland  frantic  ornament. 

Word  and  phrase  signs.  7.  Prophet  profit  infinite 
derivative  temperament  testament  intelligent  island  gen- 
tlemen gentleman  imagined.  8.  Cannot  can-it  may-nt 
behind  be-nt  which-ouglit-nt  which-nt  which-hd-nt 
whieh-wd-ut  which-ought-to-hv-hd  wliich-hv-hd  which-wd- 
hv-hd.  9.  It-ought-nt  it-nt  it-wd-nt  it-hd-nt  did-nt  do- 
nt  had-nt  it-ought-to-hv-hd  it-wd-hv-hd  such-ought-to- 
hv-hd  such-hv-hd  such-wd-hv-hd.  10.  Will-nt  which-are-nt 
whieh-wei'e-nt  dare-nt  upon-it  on-the-one-hand  it- 
will-not  gave-it  give-it  we-are-nt  were-nt.  11.  It-wi.ll- 
hv-hd  which-will-not  have-not  such-are-not  such-were'-nt 
on-cither-hand  on-the-other-hand  they-are-nt  there-would- 
nt  why-nt  in-point-of-fact. 

Phrases.     12.    According-to-agreement    at-the-same-mo-^ 
mcnt    cannot-expect    did-not-entirely    do-not-say    huni«yf- 
kind  if-it-did-not  such-may-not-be. 

Sentences.  1.  We-must-always  be  doing  or  sufi"ering. 
2.  The-entire  ocean  is  affected  by-a  pebble.  3.  Beauty 
lives  with  kindness.  4.  You  do-not  believe;  you  only  believe 
that-you  believe.     L  15.     For  key  see  list  words,  sec.  284.    ''. 

283.  Stems  to  which  a  final  hook  is  joined  are  also  halved, 
both  stem  and  hook  being  read  before  the  added\t  or  d,  as  in 
blind,  lend,  jaatJccZ,  petitioned.  Meant,  for  instance,  is  ex- 
pressed by  the  shortened  -—^  vin,  which  is  equivalent  to  7nn-i. 
Here  the  character  vnn  is  regarded  as  indivisable,  and  is  pro- 

—142— 


plate  28* 

3      C_^       ^        v^  O^         V^         X        ^^ 

.    u^    ^  ^    -^      k-     p  ? 


^     /^ 


6        ^^-^        

/    ■WORD-SIGNS. 

8.Z.. -.    ^  ....^ V......Z.../... L  6 

</   ^  ^ 

9..i.     J ^ ^\       J i^ ..^........^.      A 

10  /^    ^  U      N>       ^    ,..f....  ^  ...."T^. ^ 

11  C  ..^     ^      <^      ^. _..!      D       D ."^..  ^^ 

^; -:>      PHKASES.  '^ 

- .].,^r-\-^    J...^..   ^      ^ 

SENTENCES.       U  ^  y  -"-r5  -y 

,6  -V,  -^  ^    ^    /I    1^  -f  ...b. -b... 


144  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

nounced  first.  In  such  case  it  is  not  allowable  to  sound  t 
immediately  after  w,  as  in  viet,  and  before  the  reading  of  n 
e\i)rossed  by  the  final  hook.  Hence,  in  mitten  (L  1),  and 
similar  words  in  wliich  t  occui's  before  the  sound  indicated 
by  the  final  hook,  the  halving  principle  cannot  be  applied. 

284.     1  Write:     1  pos.     gift    mind    appoint*    kind    drift; 

2  (n-hook)  count  tent  faint    fund  lent  mend  paint  A'ent 

3  dent  tend    rent  lend    bound  bend    round  spend  stand 

4  repent    amend    extent    fount     indent     mound     refund 

5  vacant    violent    moment    accident    disappoint    disband 

6  husband    ancient  potent    infant  lament    mount   nioun- 

7  tain  patent   patient  payment    ardent  enchant  demand 

8  extend    tendency*  depend   movement   valient   resident 

9  serpent    servant    argument  excellent*  basement    atten- 

10  tive    coincident    detriment   urgent    encounter    discount 

11  impotent  deiinquent*  distant  document  cogent  instant 

12  elephant  enactment  repugnant  opulent  incident  amaze- 

13  ment  romantic*  solvent  subsequent*  observant  abscond 

14  memorandum*  Maryland  Eichmond  Edmund  Omnipo- 

15  tent;     (using  el)    elegant    element    aliment     boundless 

16  incidental    bundle    candle;    (using  ar)    indenture    sur- 

17  mount  venture  remnant  remainder  slander*  Raymond 

18  Roland;    1  pos.     bond    fond    augment   joined    occupant 

19  joint    point   bind    find    kind    appoint    diamond;    8  pos. 

20  amusement    apparent   rudiment    expand    land    account 

21  pound  band  cant;  (n  and  1  hooks)  plant  blunt  applicant 

22  supplicant    gland    plunder*  (ar)    blunder  (ar);    (n  and  r 

23  hooks)  grand  brand  front  vagrant  grand-jury  president 

24  encouragement    frequent*  predicament    precedent    pi-e- 

25  vent     reprimand     superintend*     transparent     flagrant 

26  profound  divergent  fragrant  pretend  fragment  brilliant 

27  Ingredient;     1   pos.     grind      immigrant     print;     3  pos. 

28  ground;    (n  and  f  hooks)    pavement    extravagant    cove- 

29  nant    achievement    reverend;    (n-hook  twice)     counte- 

30  nance*  tangent  penitent  liniment  monument  mendicant 

31  abundant*;    (initial  n-hook)    insolent  insolvent;    (princi- 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORTHAND.  145 


33  pie  applied  twice)    respondent    redundant    dependent* 

33  candidate    resentment*    sentiment    amendment*    vindi- 

34  cate;   1  pos.   treatment  appointment*  predominant*. 

(181—4—3.; 

PHRASES. 

285.  According-to-agreement  all-mankind  bj-his-own- 
statement  cannot-be  cannot-become  cannot-do  cannot-go 
cannot-make  cannot-receive  cannot-take  do-not-doubt  do- 
not-admit  do-not-be  do-not-know  do-uot-necessarily  for-a- 
moment  had-not-known  have-found  I-dai'e-not  in-a-mo- 
ment  in-an-instant  in-judgment  my-mind  on-aecount-of- 
many  on-this-poiiit  some-cannot  they-will-not  tliis-depart- 
ment  this-did-not  this-point  to-the-account-of  very-fre- 
quently  we-do-not  what-cannot  to-which-it-may-not  tliis- 
country  depend-upon-it  great-extent  which-is-believed 
you-are-determined. 

EXERCISE  28. 

286.  1.  Idlers  cannot-find  time  to-be  idle,  or- the  indus- 
trious to-be  at-leisure.  2.  How  slow  the-time  to-the  warm 
soul  that  in-the-very  instant  it  forms  would-execute  a-great 
design.  3.  Nature  has  inclined  us  to-love-men.  4.  In  life 
we-shall-find  many  men  that-are  great  and-some-men  that- 
are  good,  but-very  few-men  that-are  both  great  and-good. 
5.  A-man  is  sure  to-dream  enough  before-he  dies  without- 
making  arrangements  for-the-purpose.  6.  Good  counsels 
observed  are  claims  to-grace.  7.  If-there-is-anything  that 
keeps  the-mind  open  to-angel  visits,  and-repels  the-ministry 
of  ill,  it-is  human-love.  8.  Age,  that-lessens  the-enjoyment 
of-life,  increases  our  desire  of-living.  9.  We-do-not  count 
a-man's years  until  he-has-nothing-else  to-eount.  10.  There- 
is-no-such-thing  as  chance;  and-what  seems  to  us  merest 
accident  springs  from-tlie  deej^est  source  of-destiny.  11.  Do- 
not-ask  if-a-man  has-been  through  college;  ask  if-a-college 
has-been  through-him,  if-he-is-a  walking  univei-sity. 

(182—2—1:15.) 


146  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

287.  Speed  Sentence.  The-greatest  events  of-an-age 
ai'e-its  best  thoughts.  It-is-the  nature  of-thought  to-find  its- 
way  into-action.  (5 — 1.) 

288.  TRANSLATE. 


V    T    ^  "^  ^    °  c/C 


<r^ 


\ 

-  -A- --^ 


^..-..1.®  I,   °  ^...v-..^  ^  ^  . 


"^' 


■1 


®  ^  ..1.1.  r  rv  1®^   . 


"J 


\  „..Z! £....  ^  _    V 


-O         X 


To  the  Teacher. — Dictate  the  following  sentence  to  the 
class,  requiring  tiie  pupils  afterwards  to  read  it  backwards  : 
Receive  than  give  to  blessed  more  is  it  that  believes  world 
the  tribe  that  all  and  envy  hatred  jokes  practical  sarcasm  of 
matter  the  in.    Noel  Random. 


LESSON  XXIX. 

HALF-LENGTH   L,    K,    M,    N. 

289.  1^  i,  ^  r,  ^~^  m,  ^^^  n,  are  tliickened  when  halved 
to  express  d,  as  in  redd,  failed,  made,  need,  L  1.  This  prac- 
tice adds  to  the  legibility  of  short-hand.  The  characters 
thus  produced,  rid,  ^  rd,  ^^  md,  ^w  nd,  will  not  be  mis- 
taken for  shortened  /^  2/.  "^  ''''.  ''^  "'i^  and  — "iig,  for  the 
reason  that  these  four  letters  are  not  halved,  except  in  a  few 
specified  eases,  as  allcmjit,  wheat,  longed,  L  2.  The  down- 
Avurd  I  is  always  used  when  shaded  to  express  d,  as  in  failed. 
These  letters,  however,  are  not  shaded  to  indicate  d  when 
either  the  w  ov  n  hook  is  attached,  as  in  wild,  arraigned, 
mind,  wend.    Also,  I  is  struck  upwards  after  ws,  and  hence 

cannot  be  shaded  to  express  d,  as  in  ^—^    mislaid. 

290.  A  final  half-length  j  t,  denoting  lute,  hide,  or  ted,  is 
disjoined  in  some  cases  in  order  to  render  it  distinguishable, 
as  in  institute,  treated,  multittide,  L  1. 

When  reading  half-length  stems,  not  only  the  s-circle,  but 
the  st-loop,  is  pronounced  after  t  or  d  has  been  sounded,  as 
in  midst,  didst,  greatest,  L  3. 

291.  When  one  or  several  hooks,  circles  and  vowels  are 
appended  to  a  shortened  stem,  the  order  of  pronunciation  is 
a  source  of  some  little  embarrassment  to  most  beginners. 
Just  where  or  whc7i  to  sound  the  t  is  the  question.  To 
further  clear  away  this  difliculty,  let  us  analyze  the  outline 

/^  restraints.     Directing    our    attention  to  the    second 

syllable,  we  find  in  addition  to  a,  six  consonants  all  expressed 
by  one  movement  of  the  pen.  The  consonants  of  this  syllable, 
s-t-r-n-t-s,  are  expressed  in  this  manner:  s-t-r  by  the  triple 

consonant  |  str,  n  by  the  final  hook  (implied),  t  by  the 
shortening  principle,  s  by  the  circle.  Here,  t,  as  in  all  such 
cases,  is  sounded  before,  immediately  before,  the  final 
s-circle.    It  may  seem  a  little  extraordinary  that  f  (which  is 

—147— 


148  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

expressed  by  halving)  should  occur  between  wand  s,  although 
tliese  two  sounds,  w.s,  are  both  indicated  by  a  single  sign, 
namely,  the  s-circlo,  strurk  on  the  left  side  of  the  stem.  This 
may  ajDpear  complicated,  but  it  is  not  really  so;  the  observant 
learner  will  not  be  embarrassed  by  it.  Bear  distinctly  in 
mind  that  the  final  circle  is  always  read  last,  and  that  t  is 
sounded  just  before  it.  When  no  linal  circle  occurs,  then  t 
is  pronounced  last,  that  is,  after  the  stem  and  all  appended 
hooks,  circles  and  vowels  have  been  sounded. 

293.  Key.  1.  Institute  treated  multitude  read  failed 
made  need  laid  yield.  2.  Wild  around  mind  wend 
attempt  wheat  longed  herald  standard  coward  defend. 
3.  Midst  didst  greatest  Indiana  aflbrd  ordinance  re- 
demption modern   index  undoubtedly  prompt. 

WoKD  AND  PHRASE  SIGNS.  4.  Immediately  under  hand 
hold  held  lord  word  heard  hard  individual.  5.  Down- 
ward forward  undergo  afterward  behold  short-hand 
hand-in-hand  before-hand  great-extent  Word-of-God. 
6.  Hazard  hand-writing  landlord  understand  greater-than 
ladies-and-gentlemen    advancement    hardware     handsome. 

Phrases.  7.  May-not-be  Mr. -President  words-of-my- 
text  words-of-our-text  this-will-not  been-understood  for- 
the-Word-of-God  what-in-the-world.  8.  Need-not  through- 
the-world  under-such  world-of-natuie  world-to-come  of- 
which-it-raay-not-be  you-will-uot  if-it-do-not.  9  and  10.  For 
key  see  list  words,  sec.  294. 

Sentences..  1.  The-path  of  glory  leads  but  to-the  grave. 
2.  He-makes  no  friend  who-neverhad-a  foe.  3.  Every-man 
desires  to-live  long,  but  no  man  would-be  old.  4.  By  stops 
we-may  ascend  to  God.  5.  They  say  women  and-music 
shonld-never  be  dated.  6.  Where  there-is-no  hope  there- 
can-be  no  endeavor.     7.    Few  people  know  how  to-be  old. 

293.  It  is  often  inexpedient  to  use  a  half-length  letter  when 
the  angle  formed  by  its  juncture  with  another  consonant 
is  not  sufficient  to  render  it  readily  distinguishable;  e.  g.,  in 

/         looked,  the  shortened  k  should  not  be  used,  since  the 


1 

2 

0      <:!-' 

3 

?....>.....  e=        ^^ 

4 

WORD-SIGNS. 

r 


-4- 


"V^ 


r       r 


■^     ^ 


">"■ 


V    >  ^  ^    ^  -f  ^ 


^ 


-f 


PHRASES. 


8  -^....-^ 

WORD-FORMS,  ty 


r 


/ 


10   C^     V  ^w^   V 

SENTENCES. 


-^ 


I   > 


^ 


^- 1 


\ 


r     X 


\ 


5  (  ^  ..!Z. 


\  I, 


-^  .  ®..v^A 


150  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-IIAXD. 

combination  l-kt,  when  wiitten  quickly,  would  have  the  ap- 
pearance of  lengthened  I.  For  similar  reasons  the  halved  sh 
should  not  be  used  after  I;  11,  f,  or  v  after  t  or  d;  i  after  i  or 
d,  or  k  after/ or  v. 

294.  1  Using  Zc?,  write:    Load    scold  lead    fold  manifold 

2  mould  Springfield  unfold  old  load  sold  crawled  drilled; 

3  1  pos.    lead  leader    mild  field;    3  pos.    loud    lad    mood; 

4  {?'d)    absurd    deplored     beard    yard    Leonard     sword; 

5  1  pos.    kindred  read  (verb)    redeem;    {md)  mud  modify 

6  meditate*  blamed  inflamed  claimed  blossomed  drummed 

7  toiled    meddle;    1  pos.    medium*  modulation    mid    mid- 

8  night     middle     midst    model    moderate;    3  pos.     mad; 

9  {/id)    defend     end    endless*    send     defendant*    ascend 

10  ascendant    descend    descendant    endeavor*    indolence* 

11  indolent  indigent  indivisible  indulge*  reasoned  inde- 
13  pendent*  errand    transcend;    1  pos.    need    needless  (el) 

13  needle  (el)    Indian    indicate*    indication    intend;    3  pos. 

14  sand;     (disjoined  ted)    dated    destitute    dreaded;    3  pos. 

15  attitude.  .  (79—1:45—1.) 

PHRASES. 

295.  Have-believed  in-the-country  in-the-land  my-good- 
friend  some-account  they-did-not  we-had-not  be-made 
do-not-understand  have-understood  I-am-informed  I-un- 
derstood  my-owu-understanding  should-understand  this- 
understanding  under-which  under-this  which-is-undei\stood 
under- the-present-circnmstances  absolutely-indispensable 
do-not-understand    world-(of)-fashion  world-(of)-spirits. 

EXERCISE  29. 

296.  1.  Adversity  is-the  trial  of-principle.  2.  Without- 
it  a-man  hai'dly  knows  whether  he-is-honest  or-not.  3.  Act 
well  at-the  moment  and-yon-have  performed  a-good  action 
to  all-eternity.  4.  For-my-own  part  I-had-rather  be  old 
only-a-short-time  than-be  old  before  I-really  am  so.  5.  A- 
merry  heart  doeth  good  like-a  medicine,  but-a  broken  spirit 
drieth  the-bones.    6.     Heaven's  eternal  wisdom  has  decreed 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  151 

that  man  of  man  should-ever-stand  in-need.  7.  Hatred  is 
always  honest,  rarely,  if-ever,  assumed.  8.  So-much  can- 
not-be-said  for-love.  9.  O,  how-much  more  doth  beauty 
beauteous  seem  by-that  sweet  ornament  which-truth  doth 
give.  10.  There's-a  divinity  that  shapes  our  ends,  rough 
hew  them  how  we-will.  11.  Genius  makes-its  observations 
in  short-hand;  talent  writes-them  out  at-length. 

(141—1:30—1.) 

297.  Speed  Sentence.  The-great  man  is-he  who  in-the- 
midst  of-the  crowd  keeps  with  perfect  sweetness  the-inde- 
pendence  of  solitude.  (5 — 1.) 

298.  TRANSLATE. 


.1.,  ^.....e:l_A.,  ®  ^  L  u  V  I 


LESSON  XXX. 

INTERVOC  ALIZ  ATION . 

299.  Key.  1.  Choor  Abigail  Mai^grave  gill  fill  Palgrave 
chart  chill.  2.  Cork  gold  ruling  tolerable  purchase 
armful  sport  accord.  3.  Child  signature  require  foil 
fowl  lecture  qualify  picture.  4.  Coi-e  gall  shoal  epicure 
prevail  jealous  school  corporal.  5.  Persevere  correspon- 
dent preliminary  fur  gal  carve  nurse  encore.  6.  En- 
gineer pilgrim  utility  volume  balcony  partial  Delaware 
guilt.  7.  Miracle  skill  delicate  derange  falter  Virginia 
secure  security.  8.  Legislature  derogatory  mortal  ordin- 
ary voluntary  moral  insurance  Baltimore.  9  to  13  inclu- 
sive.    For  key  see  list  words,  sec.  303. 

Sentences.  1.  In  a-better  world  we-will-find  our  young 
yeai's  and-our  old  friends.  2.  The  child  is  lather  of-the 
man.    3.    Admiration  is-the  daughter  of  ignorance. 

300.  Any  letter  of  the  dou1)le  or  triple  consonant  sei'ies 
may  be  intervocalized,  by  which  is  meant  the  vowel  may  be 
placed  in  such  a  manner  as  to  be  read  between  the  two  con- 
sonants. E.  g.,  c —  ^"''i  with  the  dash  vowel  I  o  struck 
through  it,  is  read  ^-f-  core.  Here  the  vowel  is  read  after  k 
and  before  r.  Second  and  third  place  vowels  are  struck 
through  the  stem,  but  first-place  dashes  are  written  jms^  before, 
as  in  gall,  L  4.  When  a  dot  vowel  is  to  be  written,  a  small 
circle  is  used  instead,  and  placed  before  the  stem  if  long,  as  in 
cheer,  Abigail,  Margrave;  and  after  it  if  short,  as  in  gill,  L  1. 

301.  This  principle  is  not  of  frequent  application;  it  is, 
however,  essential  thoroughly  to  learn  the  signs  here  ex- 
plained. One  advantage  secured  by  the  principle  of  inter- 
vocalization  is  the  use  of  briefer  outlines  than  would  other- 
wise be  admissible.  Since  it  is  the  rule  not  to  form  any 
outline  too  brief  for  vocalization,  the  sounds  expressed  by 
the  double  consonant  stems,  pr,  tr,  pi,  tl,  etc.,  would  have 

to  ■•:" -vritten  with  the  long  ~^  r  or  (^  Hn  many  cases -where! 
the  hooks  may  now  be  used  instead.  In  moral  (L  8),  for  ex- 
ample, the  outline  mr-l  is  proper,  since  it  will  admit  of  voeal- 

—152— 


^late  30. 


y  V 


2 


8-        ^    V       0/      /° 


t—      /f^ 


b         e. — (. 


V 


^ 


6 


X 


r°  "t^^  V 


1       o    ^— 
8    /V-l 

WORD-FORMS 


Ik 


-^- ^- 


9 


10 


l_n       ^       >^       <^    X^^        "^ 


V-N 


^ 


1   1:+- 


\/ 


.,n\;/,-Xj7 


O 


.2    ^-e"    .r-^ 

SENTENCES.  ^ 


•  /" 


UP  "  \ 


154  REPOnTINO  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

izaiion;  othei'wise  the  r-hook  could  not  be  employed. 

302.  The  double-length  curves  may  be  iiitervocalized  by 
striking  the  vowel-sign  through  the  stem,  as  inS'^ -^entire. 

303.  1  Intervocalize:    Cur    cull    gull    fort    board    port 

2  chart    dirt    purse    spur    terse    course    college    impulse 

3  infer  infirm  invalid  curb  North*  morality  shirk  pursue 

4  corner  ridicule  darling  sharp    thirst  till  term  agricul- 

5  ture*    capture    cargo     culture    decorum     calico     distil 

6  parlor*   porter    portray    purple    turkey    valid    George. 

7  Without  vowels:  elaborate*  enormity  demoralize*  jour- 

8  ney    nerve    nervous    nourish    perceive    perjure    person 

9  endorse    pursued    I'ecall    regulate*  telegram*  Thursday 

10  vulgar  corporate  incorporate  director  divulge  farthing 

11  marble     marshal*     nursery     nurture     obscure     parcel 

12  shark    singulai'*   torpedo    valedictory    vinegar    volcano 

13  Charles;    (sez)    persist    paralysis    parenthesis;    (f-hook) 

14  gulf  turf  telegraph  imperative  narrative;  (n-hook)  bur- 

15  den    margin    pardon    pertain    diligence    jurisprudence 

16  terminate      German     bargain     cosmopolitan     galvanic 

17  Mormon   northeastern*  Morgan;  (shun-hook)  perception 

18  circulation*    partition    jurisdiction    corruption    regula- 

19  tion*;  (rel-hook)  journal*  normal  personal*  ijhrenology; 

20  (halving)     carpenter     garment     departure    (ar)     invert 

21  market  merchant  merchandise  mercantile  (el)  particle 

22  partner    regard    record    transport    Vermont    Pittsburg 

23  deliberate*  correspond*  correspondence    default  forbid 

24  parliament  persecute  portrait  purport  recorder  scarlet 

25  told  velvet    Arnold.  (139—2:45—1:30.) 

PHRASES. 

304.  In-course-of  it-is-calculated  political-agitation  po- 
litical-power so-sure  that-is-where  towards-it  towards-such 
towards-another  towards-that  towards-the  towards-this 
very-short  very-sure  which-surely  as-it-certainly  as-little- 
as-possible  between-the  between-which  by-which-it-seems 
by-which-it-was  East-Indies  for-the-present  very-certain 
future-time  if-it-be   if-it-does  if-it-is-not   if-it-is-possible  if- 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


155 


it-were  in-fact  it-is-better-than  it-is-no-doubt  seems-to-me 
more-eertaiu  must-uot  no-better-tlian  not-absolutely  not- 
geuerally  ought-to-be. 

EXERCISE  30. 

305.  1.  Action  is  eloquence,  aad-the  eyes  of-the  ignorant 
more  learned  than  their  ears.  2.  It-is  often  better  to-have- 
a-great-deal  of  harm  happen-to-one  than-a-little;  a-great-deal 
may  arouse  you  to-remove  what-a-little  will  only  accustom- 
you  to  endure.  3.  There-is-nothiug  that-makes-its-way 
more-directly  to-the  soul  than  beauty.  4.  We-make  way 
for-the-man  who  boldly  pushes  past  us.  5.  Your-little  child 
is-your-only  true  democrat.  6.  Childhood  shows  the-man 
as-tlie-morning  shows  the-day.  7.  Defeat  is-a  school  in- 
which  truth  always  gi'ows  strong.  (101 — 1:10 — :45.) 

306.  Speed  Sentenxe.  Rich-men  without  wisdom-and 
learning  are-called  sheep  with  golden  fleeces.  (9 — 1.) 

307.  BUSINESS  LETTERS. 

{To  be  phrased  by  the  student.) 

CixcrNNATi,  March  18,  1886. 

Messrs.  W.  Frothingham  &  Co.,  Louisville,  Ky. 

Dear  Sirs: — We  shall  ofler  to-morrow,  March  19,   at   41 

net,  by  case  only,  our  entire  stock  of  Bunnell  fancy  prints, 

embracing  all  the  seersuckers,  satines,  and  special  styles. 

We  shall  be  pleased  to  have  your  house  represented. 
Very  truly  yours, 

Donaldson,  Bogardus  &  Co. 

308.  Newark,  N.  J.,  June  23,  1886. 
E.  D.  Gildersleeve,  Esq. 

Dear  Sir: — Orders  received  and  shall  have  prompt  atten- 
tion. We  did  not  expect  to  stop  at  all,  but  owing  to  removal 
will  have  to  suspend  about  one  week  after  July  4th.  Any 
orders  up  to  that  time  we  can  fill  as  usual.  Owing  to  in- 
creased trade,  and  not  having  room  enough,  we  have  built  a 

factory  which  we  will  occupy  about  July  10th. 

Yours  very  truly, 

McNeil,  Anderson  &  Co. 


156  REPORTiyO  STYLE  OF  SHOET-UAND. 

309.  TRANSLATE. 

\^  ..:::f ^ '^  .®\  n    \^    ^ 


.6)      V 


A  \  '''^         X 


e^  ....V-  X  @  o        -n-    r      N —     tf-N  .. 

^  ..^.....  ®  ./    T  c   c-  ...2?... ,   c-  ...2:... 


The  "  Five  Rules  "  of  the  American  Spelling  Reform 
Association:  1.  Use  /  for  p/i  sounded  as  f,  as  in  alfabet, 
fnntom,  Jilosoft/,  telegraf,  etc.  2.  Use  i  for  d  or  ecZ  final 
sounded  as  t,  as  in  stopt,  pyft,  lockt,  crost,  pusht,  pitcht,  jfixt, 
etc.  3.  Drop  a  from  dlgraf  ea  sounded  as  short  e,  as  in 
birth,  heel,  helth,  steel,  etc.  4.  Drop  silent  e  final  in  a  short 
syUabl,  as  in  hav,  giv,  liv,  forbad,  hostil,  infinit,  activ,  etc. 
5.  When  a  word  ends  with  a  dubl  letter,  omit  the  last,  as  in 
eb,  ad,  staf,  eg,  shal,  wil,  tel,  etc. 

The  "Ten  Words:"    Tho,  thru,  wisht,  catalog,  definit, 
hav,  giv,  liv,  gard,  ar. 


LESSON  XXXI. 

PREFIXES. 

310.  The  commonest  prefixes  and  affixes  are  provided 
with  brief  signs,  the  greater  number  of  which  are  joined  to 
the  main  outline. 

List  ofjirejixes:  Con  com  cog  counter  contra  contri  con- 
tro  circum  self  inter  intra  anti  magna  viagni  super  mat 
■post. 

Con,  com  and  cog  are  indicated  by  a  dot,  as  in  compress, 
conduce,  cognition.  L  1.  In  most  cases,  however,  tliis  dot  is 
entirely  omitted  with  no  loss  of  legibility.  In  such  cases  the 
safest  pi-actice  is  to  refrain  from  phrasing  with  preceding 

words.      To    illustrate,    (^    they -complain   should    not    be 


^ 


phrased,   whereas  k     they-plan  should  be.     The  fact  that 


coinplain  is  not  joined  to  they  is  indicative  of  the  prefix  co7i, 
and  the  dot  sign  need  not  be  written. 

Con,  com,  cog,  when  medial  are  expressed  by  separating 
the  preceding  from  the  following  portion  of  the  word,  as  in 
accommodation,  accompany ,  etc.,  L  4. 

Counter,  contra-i-o,  are  indicated  by  a  slanting  tick,  as  in 
countermarch,  contradiction,  contribution,  L  1. 

Circum,  self,  are  denoted  by  the  s-circle,  as  in  self-con- 
sciousness, circumvent,  L  2. 

Inter,  intro,  anti,  ante,  are  denoted  by  the  shortened  n, 
joined  to  the  remaining  part  of  the  word,  as  in  interview,  in- 
troduce, antiseptic,  L  2. 

Magni,  magna,  may  be  indicated  by  the  disjoined  m,  as  in 
magnify,  L  2. 

Mai,  post,  super,  are  commonly  expressed  by  the  characters, 

c;^^   ml,  \o  ps,     \^  sp)r,  as  in  malcontent,  p)0stman,  supervene, 

L2. 

Prefix-signs  should  always  be  written  previously  to  forming 
the  remaining  portion  of  the  word.     Speed  is  interfered  with 

-157— 


158  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORTHAND. 

when  the  reporter  must  go  back  and  place  these  marks  after 
the  body  of  the  wortl  has  been  Avritten. 

311.  Key.  1.  Compress  conduce  cognition  accommo- 
date recommend  countermarch  contradiction  contribution. 

2.  Interview  introduce  antiseptic  self-consciousn<'ss  cir- 
cumvent     magnify       mal-content      postman       supervene. 

3.  Commit  commodity  contemporary  conquest  communi- 
ty commentary  confess  compensate.  4.  Accommodation 
accompany  reconstruct  recognition  excommunicate  in- 
comprehensible conjunction  inconsistent.  5.  Counter- 
balance counterpart  interpose  interrogation  internal  in- 
terrupt antiquary  discontent  interest.  6.  Conunission 
compensation  contempt  command  confidence  composition 
constitute  commencement  conductor.  7  to  10  inclusive. 
For  key  see  list  words,  sec.  312. 

WoKD-siGNS.  11.  Circumstantial  malpractice  construc- 
tion constructive  incompetent  consequence  consequent 
consequential.  12.  Unconcern  comprehend  comprehensive 
antiquity  antiquarian  consider  consideration  reconsider 
confidential. 

Phrases.  13.  For-a-consideration  I-am-content  in-his- 
opinion  in-his-own-interest  it-is-interesting  under-any-cir- 
cumstances  every-circumstance  that-conclusion. 

Sentences.  1.  Active  natures  are  rarely  melancholy. 
2.  Our  actions  are  our-OAvn,  their  consequences  belong  to 
Heaven.    3.    Love  is  incompatible  with  fear. 

313.  In  the  following  list,  the  prefixes,  printed  in  italics, 
are  to  be  represented  by  the  signs  just  explained.  The  sylla- 
bles enclosed  in  brackets  may  also  be  written,  but  as  tliese 
are  common  words,  the  prefix  signs  are  usually  omitted 
altogether. 

1  Co?^^-pass    com-pose     (con)vict     (con)tinual  (el)    (con)- 

2  temporary  (emp)   i?i<er-pose  con-sole    inlcr-i'&XG*  circum- 

3  navigate  co?z-ceit  co?i-ciliate  co?i-demn  de-com-pose  dis- 

4  oom-pose  dis(con)tinue   tnter-nal*  re-co^r-nize  re-cow-cile 

5  seZ/-'ish*    un(con)scious    a?z^i-thesis    comm-ittee    corn-pile 


-7 

1  \)    Ln    'v:? 


ilate  3U 


U    ^ 


CT^ 


•-^      ..'."rrci... 


4      J 
5\ 


/^         /<3 


\ 


-^ 


6    ^^        \        U       _ 

WORD-FORMS. 


\ 


9    -^       V 


^ 


e~^ 


WORD-S£CJNS. 

11   J" 


12 
13 

©■ 


") 


1   t  /I 


J 

SENTENCES. 


■ — R-W 


d 


160  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

6  co7i-cede    mis-cow-ceive    (com)pare    counter-check    post- 

7  paid     co»-spire     (coii)veyaiu'e     con-\okc     (e()m)parison 

8  co/i-ceive    (con)form    (cou)scientious*   (con)scious  (con)- 

9  sist;    1  pos.    consign    con-cc-dX  countersign;    3  pos.    co7i- 

10  duee    (eoii)sume   inter-yiew,    (1-hook)  co«-stable  in-com- 

11  parable    in-cow-ceivable    (accom)plish*    (com)pel    (con)- 

12  flict*  intcr-xn\;   (r-liook)   con-cur    con-fer  circum-ierence 

13  iii-com-prehensible    pre-co?z-ceive    self-contvol    (cou)firm 
1-1  (cou)gress     (con)trary     (con)verse     enter-^vise*;     3  pos. 

15  (coii)sti'ue    mis  co?J-strue;    (f-hook)  (con)servative    (ooii)- 

16  trive    (con)tnvance;    (n-hook)    (con)tain    (con)tains  C07i- 

17  fine    cotinier-hsdance*    contra-vcne    iii(con)venience    re- 

18  com-pense    (com)panion     (com)plain    (con)cern*     (con)- 

19  science  (con)stancy  (con)strain  (c()n)venience*  (con)vince 

20  e^iief-tain    ijiter-xene;    1  pos.    coujitei'-nune;    (shim-liook) 

21  (com)  mission    (com)petition    (con)fession    coiinter-action 
23  re-cowm-endation*  awii-cipation    (com)plexion    (con)ces- 

23  sion  (con)elusion  (con)demnation   (con)solidation    (con)- 

24  viction  (con)templation  (emp)  inter--preta,tion  (com)bina- 

25  tion  (eon)dition    (con)ceptioa    co fitri-] jution    co?z-version 

26  inter-jection  (con)gregation;    1  pos.   (com)pletion;  3  jios. 

27  co?i-fusion    (com)passion;     (s-shun-hook)     (com)position; 

28  (st-loop)  con-test  co?i-trast   co??^-posed  cow-gestion*  co7i- 

29  text     (con)stitution*;     (halving)     circtims-pect     com-bat 

30  (con)template    (emp)      (com)raent     (con)duct     (con)sent 

31  co7i-cevt    (con)descend    (con)sult  inter-dict    dis(con)nect* 
33  co?«-patible        i?ico7u-plete*        inter-sect        mis(con)duct 

33  rcconirn-end*   self-esteem*    anti-clpate    anti-dote    (con)- 

34  duct  non-core-ductor*  (com)parative*  (com)plicate  (com)- 
3.")  pliment  (con)sonant*  (eon)sti'uct*  (eon)tact  (con)tribute 

36  co«/!rn-dict;    1  pos.    counter-feit   co??i-plete     (con)venient 

37  intcrr-ogiition*;      3    pos.       (con)clude       (comm)unicate; 

38  (r-hook)    (com)fort    coti-vert  (con)gratulate*    (con)gratii- 

39  lation      i7iter-\n-et;      (n-hook)      corn-pound     (con)tingent 

40  (dis)cow-tent    (con)tent    (con)straint    (com)plained    (con)- 

41  fident  (con)sistent*  (con)stant   (cou)stautly*  (con)tent. 

(167—3—1:30.) 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SIIORT-UAND.  ICl 

PHRASES. 

313.  Every-consideration  great-interest  I-am-considered 
in-circumstances  in-his-interest  into-consideration  some- 
consideration  take-into-consideration  that-circumstance 
this-circumstance  tliis-conclusion. 

EXERCISE  31. 

314.  1.  No  man  should-be  so  taken-up  in-the-search  of- 
truth  as  thereby  to  neglect  the-more-necessary  duties  of 
active-life ;  for  after-all  is-done  it-is  action  only  wliich-gives 
a-true  value and-commendationto-virtue.  2.  No-one  knows 
what  he-is  doing  while  he-is  acting  rightly,  but  of  what-is 
wrong  we-are-always  conscious.  3.  Prosperity  is  too  apt 
to-prevent  us  from-examining  our  conduct,  but-as  adversity 
leads  us  to-think  properly  of-our  state,  it-is-most  beneficial 
to  us.  4.  Our  dependence-upon  God  ought-to-be  so  entire 
and-absolute  that-we  should-never  think-it-necessary  in-any- 
kind-of  distress  to-have  recourse  to-human  consolations. 
5.  He  who-would  pass  the-declining  years  of-his-life  with 
peace  and-comfort  should  when  young  consider  that-he-may 
one-day  be  old,  aud-remember  when-he-is  old  that-he-has- 
once-been  young.  6.  The-integrity  of-men  is-to-be  meas- 
ured by-their  conduct,  not-by-their  profession.  7.  He  who- 
has  lost  confidence  can  lose  nothing-more.  8.  Confidence 
in-conversation  has-a-greater  share  than  wit.  9.  The  con- 
science is  more  wise  than  science.  10.  He-is  richest  who-is 
content  with-the  least,  for  content  is-the-wealth  of  nature. 

11.  Reasonable  men  are-the-best  dictionaries  of -conversation. 

12.  Silence  is-one-great  art  of-conversation.  13.  Fear  God 
and-keep  his  commandments,  for-this-is-the  whole  duty  of 
man.  14.  Gain  may-be  temporary  and-uncertain;  but  ever 
while  you-live  expense  is  constant  and-certain;  and-it-is 
easier  to  build  two-chimneys  than-to-keep  one  in  fuel.  15.  If- 
a-good  face  is-a-letter  of-recommendation,  a-good  heart  is-a. 
letter  of-credit.  16.  The-worth  of-a  state  in-the-long  run 
is-the-worthof-the  individuals  composing  it.  17.  Liberality 
consists  less  in-giving  much  than-in  giving  with-discretion. 


162  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

18.  The-human-race  is-in-the-best  condition  when-it-has-the 
greatest  degree  of-liberty.  19.  While-we-are  reasoning  con- 
cerning life,  life  is  gone.  20.  Prudence  and-love  are  incon- 
sistent; in-proportion  as-the  last  increases  the-otherdecx'eases. 
21.  The-most  manifest  sign  of  wisdom  is  continued  cheer- 
fulness. (364—4:30—3.) 

315.  Speed  Sentence.  He-is  happy  whose-circumstances 
suit  his  temper;  but  he-is  more-excellent  who-can  suit  his 
temper  to  any-circumstances.  (5 — 1.) 

316.  TRANSLATE. 


®  ^  /  _   I   S-w    v/  »  ®  \  ..!^ 

.\...> .  @  ..:^...  V....: ?• 


if 


Phrasing. — It  sometimes  transpires  in  reporting  that  a 
phrase,  which  extends  below  the  line,  vill  be  intersected  by 
another  phrase  in  the  line  beneath.  Of  this,  however,  there 
are  no  bad  consequences. 


LESSON  XXXII. 


AFFIXES. 


317.  List  of  affixes:  Ing  ings  ship  Me  My  ility  ality 
arity  self  selves  ful  hood  soever  ture  ly. 

The  dot,  circle  and  tick,  are  used  to  denote  ing,  ings  and 
ing-the  respectively,  in  cases  where  the  letter  ^~^  ng  cannot 
conveniently  be  joined,  as  in  preserving,  castings,  doing-the, 
LI. 

The  s  and  sez  circles  denote  self  and  selves,  as  in  himself, 
ourselves. 

Ship  is  expressed  by  sh,  as  in  friendship.  But  in  order  to 
avoid  unsuitable  outlines,  sh  is  sometimes  disjoined,  as  in 
lordship,  courtship. 

The  endings,  ility,  ality,  arity,  are  signified  by  the  detach- 
ment of  any  letter  from  the  preceding  part  of  the  word,  as 
in  barbarity ,  fidelity ,  instrumentality,  L  2. 

The  terminations.  Me,  My,  ful,  are  often  indicated 
by  b  and/ simply,  as  in  admissible,  disgraceful,  Ls  3  and  4. 

Milt,  when  written  separately  from  the  preceding  part  of 
the  word,  indicates  mental,  as  well  as  mentality,  as  in  instru- 
mental, L  3. 

Hood  is  denoted  by  d,  usually  joined,  as  in  womanhood. 

The  ending,  soever,  is  written  sv,  as  in  whensoever,  L  4. 

Tiire  is  expressed  by  tr,  as  in  structure,  L  1. 

When  rendered  desirable  by  convenience  or  angularity, 
final  I  is  disjoined  to  express  ly,  as  in  vastly,  beastly,  L  3. 

The  prefix  and  affix  signs  cannot  of  course  be  employed 
when  the  syllables  they  represent  are  independent  words,  as 
ship,  con,  self,  counter,  etc. 

818.  1  Write:  BohW-ity  vit-ality  staJo-ility*  instrument- 
3  ality  legib-ility  Yeliah-UUy  iamili-arity  cast-ing  observ- 

3  i7ig  hnst-i7igs  disgrace-/;/i  seusi-ble  advisa-6Ze  jour-self* 

4  it-self  ^rieat-hood  v/ho-soever*  host-ility;  1  pos.  myself* 

5  thyself  divisi-6Ze;    3  pos.    ourselves*  admissi-6Ze  town- 

6  shijy;     (halving)     hospit-rtZ%     indWidn-ality*     hardship 

7  lord-ship  courtship  partuer-s/jip  accounta-6Ze  admitt-w^ 

—163- 


164  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-BAND. 

8  bleed-^?^5'  trevit-ing  putt-w^f  plead-n^^rs  debat-mp'  dread- 

9  ing     fuuda-?ne?z<aZ*     ovna.-mental*     supple-wew^ai!    regi- 

10  mental   AQiiA-mental   e\e-mcntal   horsemanship  scholar- 

11  ship     workman-shij)     fellow-ship    wheve-soever*    wiiich- 
13  soever  whomsoever.  (49 — 1 — :30.) 

319.  Key.  1.  Preserving  castings  doing-the  himself 
ourselves  accountable  lordship  friendship  graceful  struc- 
ture. 2.  Fidelity  individuality  barbarity  credulity  hos- 
jiitality  formality  instrumental  legibility.  3.  Vastly 
beastly  i*egularity  illegibility  Intellectuality  womanhood 
disgracelul  township  courtship.  4.  Whensoever  ostensi- 
ble citizenship  engravings  fixture  manhood  childhood 
admissible  yourselves. 

Phrases.  5.  Political-principles  short-space-of-time  as- 
little-as  by-which-it-may-be  by-which-it-would-be  for-some- 
time  if-it-is  it-is-absolutely-necessary.  6.  Let-us-be  most- 
natural  must-not-be  present-question  such-is-not-the-case 
this-is-not-the-case  thought-we-were  to-state. 

Sentences.    1.    No  sensible-person  ever  made-an  apology. 

2.  To-love-one  that-is  great  is  almost  to-be  great  one's-self. 

3.  No  man  was  ever  so-much  deceived  by  another  as  by 
himself.    4.    Self-trust  is-the  essence  of  heroism. 

PHRASES. 

320.  Take-some-time  that-does-not  that-thought  there- 
certainly  there-is-absolutely  there-is-no-doubt  there-might 
they-are-certain-that  they-are-sometimes  they-thought  this- 
has-not  this-is-inteuded  this-is-uo-doubt  this-is-not  this-no- 
doubt  thought-this  to-certain  to-prevent  to-which-it-can 
to-which-it-is  to-which-it-may  very-certain  was-no-doubt 
we-thought  what-might  which-is-no-doubt  which-must-not 
who-had-not  without-doubt  Avithout-his-knowledge  without- 
it  without-such  without-that  without-their  without-them 
without-this. 

EXERCISE   82. 

321.  1.    The-more  a-man  denies  himself  the-more  he-shall 


3  y  y  y^\^  r^  ^    y ^...  ^ 

PUKASES.  \  \ 

(  ^         SENTEN'CES. 

©^  "\J:r.._  V7  .®/\^  *■  ^    ° 

\  TRANSLATE. 

\ 0  Vi        C  b        X 


1G6  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


obtain  from-God.  2.  He-that-has-never  known  advei'sity  is 
but  half  acquainted  with  others  or-with  himself.  3.  Beauty, 
like  truth  and-justice,  lives  withiu-iis;  like  virtue  and-like 
moral  law,  it-is-a  companion  of-the  soul.  4.  Man  believes 
himself  always  greater-than  he-is,  and-is  esteemed  less-than 
lie-js-woi'th.  5.  Without  content  Ave-shall-find  it  almost  as 
difficult  to-please  others  as  ourselves.  6.  Dignity  consists 
not  in-possessing  honoi's,  but  in-deserving  them.  7.  Econ- 
omy is  of-itself  a-great  revenue.  8.  The-best  and-highest 
part  of-a-man's  education  is-that-which  he-gives  himself. 
9.  The-more  you  speak  of-yourself  the-more  you-are-likely 
to-lie.  10.  All-men  would-be-master  of-others,  but  no-man 
is  lord  of-himself.  11.  No-man  is  ha^py  who  does-uot- 
think  himself  so.  13.  Think  wrongly  if-you  please,  but 
in-all-cases  think  for-yourself.  13.  Do-not  speak  of-your 
happiness  to-a-man  less  fortunate  than  yourself. 

(172—2—1:30.) 

322.  Speed  Sentence.  Every-personhas-two  educations, 
one-of-which  he-receives  from-others,  and-one  more-impor- 
tant which  he-gives  himself.  (5 — 1.) 


QUESTIONS   FOR  REVIEW. 

Name  the  initial  hooks.  Name  the  final  hooks.  Give  a 
word  in  which  the  f-hook  should  be  used;  the  shun-hook; 
the  w-hook ;  the  r-hook ;  the  n-hook  ;  the  1-hook.  In  what 
cases  is  the  s-circle  written  within  the  hook,  and  when  is 
the  hook  changed  to  a  circle  to  indicate  that  s  is  to  be  added? 
What  is  a  triple  consonant?  Give  three  words  containing 
one  of  these.  Give  three  words  in  which  the  st-loop  is  used; 
the  sti'-loop.  Three  words  in  which  the  lengthened  curve  is 
used  to  express  the  added  tr  ;  dr ;  thr.  What  is  tlie  halving 
principW?  What  does  it  express?  In  what  manner  is  this 
applied  to  Z,  r,  m  and  n?  Which  is  pronounced  first,  the 
added  t,  or  a  hook  which  is  attached  to  a  shortened  stem? 
When  intervocalizing  a  word,  how  is  a  dash-vowel  written? 
—a  dot-vowel?  Give  three  words  containing  prefixes; 
three  containing  affixes. 


LESSON   XXXIII. 

VARIABLE  LETTERS. 

324.  L,  B,  and  Sh  are  called  variable  letters,  because  they 
are  struck  both  upward  and  downward.  The  choice  is  in  the 
main  governed  by  a  few  simple  rules.  The  up-strokes  are 
known  as  lay,  ray,  and  shay;  the  down-strokes,  el,  ar,  and  ish. 
The  first  two  of  the  upward  {lay  and  ray),  and  the  third  of 
the  downward  strokes  {ish),  are  employed  so  much  more 
commonly  than  the  others,  that  the  learner's  best  plan  is 
simply  to  commit  to  mind  the  exceptional  cases  in  which  these 
remaining  three  {el,  ar,  and  shay)  are  used.  Right  at  the 
outset  it  should  be  observed  that  the  selection  of  any  one  of 
these  letters,  instead  of  its  mate,  is  in  order,  first,  to  secure 
angulai'ity ;  second,  to  indicate  the  location  of  certain  vowels, 
thus  increasing  legibility,  third,  to  give  greater  ease  of  exe- 
cution. It  is  not  deemed  expedient  to  point  out  the  various 
rules,  with  the  numerous  exceptions  thereto,  by  which  each 
individual  outline  is  governed.  By  such  the  student  would 
be  not  so  much  aided  as  bewildered. 

325.  It  is  a  principle  of  short-hand  to  write  syllables, 
rather  than  words  or  letters.  This  in  a  large  measure  deter- 
mines the  choice  of  r  and  I.  When  these  occur  in  the  middle 
of  a  syllable,  they  are  usually  expressed  by  hooks,  as  in 

\ com-pZi-cation,  ^^L      re-tn-bution;  if,  at  the  begin- 


ning  of  a  syllable,  the  up-strokes  ray  and  lay  are  commonly 
used,  as  in  \/  pro-rogue,  ,___j\f~  un-/ove-ly;  if,  at  the 
end    of    a    syllable,    the    down-strokes    ar   and  el,    as    in 


> 


dis-arr-ange,  y    in-eMgible. 


Note  will  be  taken  that  in  the  names  of  these  letters,  lay, 
ray,  el,  ar,  the  consonant  begins  or  ends  the  word  in  con- 
formity with  this  rule. 


—167- 


108  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

326.  1.  Key.  Ledge  Lehigh  repeal  rage  Rome  alkali 
alike  elect  early  ark.  2.  Alight  elbow  arch  arrive 
cherry  faro  chair  fair  pompadour.  3.  Curl  scroll  score 
declare  choir  mire  cohere  roar.  4.  Rowley  scaly  folly 
Conley  kingly  wrongly  bile  assail.  5.  Fill  veal  rill  cool 
scowl  Ariosto  Mozart  closer  miser.  6.  Spinner  joiner 
Stanley  blandly  spindle  meaner  chaffer  jovial.  7.  Re- 
cover engraver  gruffly  scorn  turn  burn  bei'eave  observe. 

8.  National  Congregational  rational  tush  dish  fish   fishy. 

9.  Mulish  shell-fish  finish  vanish  shaker  sugar  babyish. 
Phrases.  10.  You-are  are-you  are-they  are-many  are- 
such  as-many-as-are  this-will  this-will-not.  11.  Will-there 
as-many-as-will  I-shall-have  you-shall-have  shall-there-be 
there-shall-be  shall-greatly  it-shall-never. 

12.  Lucy  Elsie  lack  alack  long  along  ledgy  elegy. 
13.  Lame  alum  logical  illogical  lament  element  artis- 
tically artistical.  14.  Race  erase  rest  arrest  auditory 
auditor  resolute  irresolute.  15.  Sorrows  source  rock 
arc  tarry   tear   chary    chore. 

RULES. 

327.  1.  Wlien  Z  or  7*  begins  a  word,  strike  it  upward,  as  in 
ledge,  Lehigh,  repeal,  rage. 

Exception.  To  secure  angularity,  use  ar  if  it  is  followed 
by/— -s  m,  as  in  Home.    L  1. 

2.  When  either  of  these  letters  is  preceded  by  an  initial 
vowel,  use  the  downward  stroke,  as  in  alkali,  alike,  elect, 
early,  ark.    L  1. 

Exception.  When  either  is  immediately  followed  by  a 
downward  letter,  use  lay  or  ray,  even  though  it  is  preceded 
by  an  initial  vowel,  as  in  alight,  elbow,  arch,  arrive.    L  2. 

3.  When  r  is  the  last  consonant,  but  followed  by  a  vowel, 
use  ray,  as  in  cherry,  faro.  When  r  is  the  last  consonant, 
and  not  followed  by  a  vowel,  iise  ar,  as  in  chair,  fair.    L  2. 

Exceptions,  (a)  Final  r,  however,  should  be  struck  up- 
ward, even  though  not  followed  by  a  vowel,  in  cases  where 


plate  33* 


1  /y  r^^^-^  "^^  < 


8    cH- 


r  ^ 


A 


rv^v  .y 


^T^ 


y 


■O        ^v 


7 

8 

9 

10 


.y  v  V  w 

^  J^  ^  ^  X  r   ^ 


^  ^  4 

11  r^  (T-^   J  .^yV. 


12 


13 


/^ 


.4  /<"    •"^-    X    ^ 

16     V<?  °^        /  ~^ 


170  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

the  use  of  ar  would  carry  the  word  two  spaces  below  the  line, 
as  in  2)ompadour. 

{b)  At  tlie  end  of  words  always  use  ray  after  c — •  kr  and 
o —  skr,  as  in  curl,  scroll. 

(c)    At  the  end  of  words  use  ar  after  q —  sk,  c —  kl,  <e ski, 

and  C kw,  as  in  score,  declare,  choir. 

id)    Ray  is  always  used  after  ^^  tn,  <^  hay  and  /  ray, 

as  in  mire,  cohere,  roar,  L  3. 

4.  When  I  is  the  last  consonant  and  followed  by  a  vowel, 
lay  should  be  used,  as  in  Bowley,  scaly,  folly. 

Exception.    After  ^ '  n  and  ^^  ng  always  use  el,  whether 

followed  by  a  vowel  or  not,  as  in  Conley,  kingly,  wrongly,  L  4. 

5.  Final  I  is,  indeed,  most  commonly  struck  upward,  even 
though  not  followed  by  a  vowel,  as  in  bile,  assail;  but  when  not 
folloAved  by  a  final  vowel,  is  always  struck  downward  after 
V^  y,  ^  ?;,  /  ray,  —  k,  and  q —  sk,  as  in  fill,  veal,  rill, 
cool,  scowl,  L  5. 

HOOK  AND  CIRCLE  BIODIFICATIONS. 

328.  These  rules  are  affected  to  some  extent  by  the  inter- 
vention of  the  s-circle  and  final  hooks  between  I  and  r  and 
the  stems  which  immediately  precede  them. 

1.  The  occurrence  of  a  circle  between  two  letters  does 
away  the  need  of  an  angle  otherwise  necessary.  For  exam- 
ple, ars  may  safely  be  written  before  t,  as  in  Ariosto,  though 
t  cannot  follow  ar  standing  alone.  In  Mozart  and  m,iser,  the 
occurrence  of  the  circle  renders  it  practicable  to  use  ar, 
which  is  desirable  in  these  cases.    Instead  of  using  ar  after 

c kl,  the  intervention  of  o  iss  makes  it  desirable  to  write 

ray,  as  in  closer.  Hence  the  occiirrence  of  the  s-circle  in  such 
connection  does  away  the  necessity  of  keeping  angularity  in 
view  when  choosing  between  upward  and  downward  I  and  r, 
L5. 

3.  The  occurrence  of  a  final  hook  (n,f,  or  shn)  in  connec- 
tion with  the  stem  which  precedes  I  or  r,  has  much  to  do 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SUORT-HAND.  171 

with  determining  tlie  direction,  upward  or  downward,  of 
tliese  letters.  In  most  such  cases  it  is  convenient  to  strike 
them  in  one  direction  only,  as  will  be  apparent  to  the  writer. 
For  example,  the  n-hook  occurring  after  \  p,  \  t,  /  ch 
and  their  cognates,  must  necessarily  be  followed  by  ar  or  el, 
as  in  spinner,  joiner,  Stanley,  blandly,  L  6.    After  ■^~:>  mn, 

also,  ar  should  be  used,  as  in  meaner.    After  ^  chf,  ^  jf, 

ar  or  el,  as  in  chaffer,  jovial.    After  — ^  kf,  — ^gf,  ^  hf,  and 

/  rf,  always  use  lay  or  ray,  as  in  recover,  engraver,  gruffly, 
L7. 

3.  When  r  is  the  last  stem,  and  followed  by  an  n-hook, 
ray  should  have  the  preference,  as  in  scorn,  turn,  hum,  L  7. 

4.  When  ?' is  followed  by  final /or  ??,  the  upward  stroke 
should  invariably  be  employed,  in  order  that  the  hook  may 
be  used,  as  in  bereave,  observe,  L  7. 

5.  The  shn,  similarly  to  the  n  and  f  hooks,  in  some  cases 
determines  the  choice  of  I  or  r,  as  in  national,  Congregational, 
rational,  L  8.  Here  the  final  stems  would  be  struck  in  a 
direction  just  opposite  were  it  not  for  the  fact  of  the  shn- 
hook.    L  8. 

329.  ISH  AND   SHAY. 

(a)  After  ]  t  and  j  d  write  shay,  as  in  tush,  dish.  There 
are  but  few  exceptions  to  this  rule  which  angularity  renders 
necessary. 

(6)  Write  shay  after  ^  /,  as  in  fish,  unless  it  is  followed 
])y  a  vowel,  when  ish  should  be  used,  as  in  fishy,  L  8. 

(c)  Use  shay  both  before  and  after  lay,  as  in  mulish,  shell- 
fish, L  9. 

{d)    Use  shay  after  V^  fn  or  \o  vn,  as  in  finish,  vanish. 

(e)  Use  shay  always  before  c —  kr  or  c —  gr,  as  in  shaker, 
sugar,  L  9. 

(/)  Also  use  shay  when  necessary  to  prevent  word-forms 
from  extending  too  far  below  the  line,  as  in  babyish,  L  9. 


172  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORr-HAND. 


PHRASING. 

330.  The  rules  here  given  as  to  upward  and  downward 
strokes  govern  also  in  plirasing.  Angularity  and  ease  of 
execution  are  the  two  important  points  to  be  kept  in  view. 
The  phrases  given  in  Ls  10  and  11  will  illustrate  sufficiently. 

PHRASES. 

331.  By-which-it-can  by-which-it-is  present-interest  very- 
little  there-are-certainly  there-certainly  too-little  please- 
ackuowledge-receipt  heavenly-Father  I-am-iu-favor  in- 
answer-to-yours  owners-risk  there-soraetimes  that-is-thought 
adjust-the-matter  give-the-matter  in-answer-to  to-your- 
credit  fill-your-order  we-have-placed  we-shall-be-pleased 
call-your-attention  you-will-please  at-some-other-time  b}-- 
reason-of  can-be-raised  did-you-make  does-not-take-place 
do-you-remember  for-that-reason  for-their-services  great- 
number  how-is-it  I-am-inclined  I-am-informed  I-am-going. 

333.  EXERCISE  33. 

New  ITORK,  March  16,  1886. 
Messrs.  Roussel  &  Hicks,  71  Broadway,  City. 
Gentlemen:— The  S.  S.  "Enchantress  "  now  in  Baltimore, 
reports  ready  for  coal  to-moi-row,  Saturday,  8  a.  m. 

My  agent  telegraphs  me  that  Meredith  cannot-give  "  En- 
chantress "  berth  before-Monday.     Bad  outlook  for  coal. 

This-delay  means  demurrage  for  me  to  pay  to-the  steamer. 
Please  do-your  utmost  to-make-the  loss  as  light  as-possible. 

Yours  truly,  etc. 

{To  bex)hrased  by  the  skident.) 

Pittsburgh,  July  10,  1886. 
Mr.  Robert  Simpson,  Box  2.725,  New  York  City. 
Dear  tiir:—\i\  reply  to  your  letter  of  the  17th  Inst,  we  have 
wired  you  quoting  angles  at  3i  ets.  per  lb.;  bars,  2  cts.,  card 
rates;  all  net,  delivered  at  Columbus.  If  immediately  re- 
ceived the  order  can  be  filled  with  prcnnptness.  The  other 
articles  called  for  we  do  not  make.   The  above  price  includes 

^"we  have  yours  of  the  17th  inst.,  enclosing  draft  for  $70,000 
This  amount  has  been  placed  to  your  credit  on  account,  with 
tinnks  Very  truly  yours, 

^^'^"^^-  ^         ^  ^  (190-2—1:30.) 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  173 


333.  TRANSLATE. 

N  22/86. 


1  ■ 
^/  )X   ^  l^^^  ^    Y 


LESSON  XXXIV. 

THEORY  OF  CONSONANT  POSITION. 

884.  Much  misapprehension  in  regard  to  the  ti'ue  use  of 
consonant  position  prevails  amongst  students,  teachers  and 
reporters.  The  real  importance  of  position  is  not  over-esti- 
mated, but  the  extent  to  which  this  contrivance  should  be 
applied  is  misunderstood.  The  short-hand  writer  ought,  of 
course,  to  make  use  of  position  only  so  far  as  it  is  found 
practical,  necessary,  and  safe,  and  not,  for  the  sake  of  a  theory, 
write  a  vast  number  of  words  in  a  difficult  position  when  no 
positive  advantage  is  to  be  gained  by  it.  Let  it  be  distinctly 
understood  right  at  the  outset  that  if  the  vowel  in  the  ac- 
cented syllable  of  a  word  happens  to  be  a  first  or  third  place 
vowel,  the  word  is  not  simply  on  this  account  to  be  written  in 


174  REPORTINO  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

thQ  first  or  third  position.  Oiriy  a /ew  worc^s  comparatively 
are  in  fact  written  in  the  first  and  third  positions,  the  very 
great  majority  being  placed  in  the  second  j)ositio?i,  that  is,  on 
the  line.  To  illustrate  the  relative  importance  of  the  second 
position,  it  may  be  compared  to  the  main  line  of  a  railway, 
the  remaining  positions  being  little  more  than  mere  side- 
tracks. 

335.  The  plan  of  placing  words  above,  through  or  below 
the  line  was  devised  as  a  means  of  indicating  certain  vowels, 
in  order  to  save  the  time  otherwise  necessary  to  write  in  the 
dots  and  dashes.  But  it  is  only  a  small  number  of  words, 
however,  that  need  vocalizing;  and  it  is  only  a  portion  of  this 
small  number  that  are  capable  of  being  vocalized  in  this  way. 

KEY. 

336.  Sentences.  1.  Books,  like  our  friends,  should-be 
few  and  well  chosen.  2.  Every  great  book  is-an  action, 
and-evei'y  great  action  is-a-book.  3.  Judges  and-seuates 
have-been  bought  for  gold.  4.  Genius  finds  its-own  road 
and-carries  its-own  lamp.  5.  The-scenes  of  childhood  are- 
the  memories  of  future  years.  Ls  5  to  9  inclusive  to  be 
translated. 

Phrases.  10.  Generation-after-generation  in-the-nature- 
of-things  if-it-is-not  for-it-is-not  for-it-is-no  in-fact  east- 
and-west  east-to-west.  11.  I-trust-not  between-us  ought- 
not  of-its  of-itself  at-the-same-time  let-us  let-us-try  all- 
states.  13.  As-a-matter-of-fact  ordinary-circumstances  in- 
his-circumstances  it-is-certain-that  in-comparison-with-that 
let-us-consider  I-am-convinced.  13.  For-their-own-interest 
in-conclusion  I-am-concerned  with-one-consent  these-cir- 
cumstances  this-is-certain  '  who-shall-not.  14.  By-itself 
advertisement  Gulf-of-Mexico  against-it  registered-bonds 
gold-bearing-bonds  eye-sight.  15.  Anywhere-else  nowhere- 
else  in-the-couutry  it-is-no-longer  for-theii'-purpose  abie- 
to-make  if-I-am-not. 

337.  In  order  to  set  forth  in  a  conci'ete  manner  the  appli- 
cation of  the  principle  of  position,  a  list  of  characteristic 


®v^ 


ilate  34. 

SENTENCES. 

\'^  V.  =H«®^  ""   L.^>_/b^^x 

TRANSLATE. 

®v  ^-,  [  ^  -  ^  .^  V®^  ^ 

^   c-\   ^   ^ 


C 


R 


®  •  { 

10 


h 


\ 


<l 


FHRASBS. 


W>  ^"-^.^ 


•I  QJ^       X 


i,V^^  ^  "^    u^    ^    ^     ^ 


12 


J 


]7i;  REPORTIXG  STYLE  OF  SHORT IIAXD. 


words  will  be  taken  up  and  the  best  means  of  expressing 
tiiein  discussed.     These  words  are: 

Victim  torch  risk  clash;  big  beg  bag;  dignity  dig  dog; 
sell  cell  silly;  sketch  scotch  leave  love;  cite  set  suit;  do 
day  Dow;  see  saw  say  so  sue  us;  fie  boo  gee  thaw  ice 
shy  soup  sack  coon;  in  any  no  know;  men  man  human; 
ever  her  home  though  thus  much  hope  young;  kriock 
mist  mimic  meek  gnaw  key;  Micliael  Nichols  Gilman; 
presumably  phraseology  ingenuity  lawlessness  purification, 

338.  Beginning  with  the  first  four  words,  victim,  torch, 
Hsk,  clash,  it  is  plain  that  the  unvocalized  outlines  are  amply 
legible.  Nothing  would  be  gained,  and  it  is  entirely  unnec- 
essary to  write  the  first  three  words  in  the  first  position,  or 
the  last  one  in  the  third  position.    These  outlines  cannot  be 

read    any    other    way    than       — ]        victim,      ]^    torch, 

y^ —  risk,  '^~~1  clash.  This  is  Avhy  vowels  are  unneces- 
sary, and  the  very  reason,  too,  why  there  is  no  need  whatever 
of  placing  them  elsewhere  than  on  the  line. 

339.  Taking    next    the    words,    \ big,    \ —     beg, 

\ bag,  it  will  be  found  that  although  all  have  the  same 

outline,  there  is  no  need  of  vowels,  since  no  two  are  the  same 
part  of  speech,  the  first  being  an  adjective,  the  second  a 
verb,  and  the  third  a  noun.    In  such  cases  no  ambiguity  can 

possibly  arise;  to  illusti-ate,  Ns — =>  could  not  be  read 

beg  gun,   or  bag  gim;  ^~-~.^_^       \ would   not  be  read 

money  beg,  etc.  Hence,  if  vowels  are  unnecessary,  observing 
position,  that  is,  wi'iting  big  above,  and  bag  through  the  line, 
is  equally  useless.  It  takes  time,  and  to  that  extent  impedes 
the  writer;  it  is  unnecessary,  and  hence  bad  practice.  (The 
words  bug  and  buggy  should  be  vocalized,  to  avoid  a  possible 

conflict.)    I Dignity,    \ dig,  \ dog,   have   a  uniform 


BEPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAXD. 


outline,  but  these  words  differ  so  much  in  meaning  that  they 
fall  under  the  rule  just  stated.     Uiider  this  rule  also  come 

o      sell,  o      cell,   C     silly,    /     sketch,   X    scotch,  etc. 
3-10.    The  next  three,  touch,  teach,  attach,  we  find  are  all 

verbs,  and  of  the  same  kind  (transitive).    Hence,  if     J  t-ch, 

the  outline  common  to  all,  were  written  in  the  second  posi- 
tion for  each,  and  without  vowels,  serious  conflict  would 
frequently  arise.  To  avoid  this  teach  (containing  [x  first-place 
vowel)  is  written  in  the  first  position,  and  attach  (containing 
a  third-p)lace  vowel)  in  the  third  jyosition.  The  writer  is  de- 
layed much  less  by  the  writing  of  a  word  in  position,  than 
by  putting  in  a  vowel  afterwards.  Upon  this  fact  depends 
chiefly  the  value  of  the  scheme  of  three  positions.    Under 

A. 

this   rule  come    also  the   verbs,  leave  (1  pos.)    and 

f\    love  (3  pos.);  ..L  cite  (1  pos.),  I    set  (2  pos.),-.p-^"*^ 
(3  pos). 

341.  In  I  do,  I  day,  and  [\  Dow,  the  last  is  vocalized  for 
the  reason  that  the  principle  of  position  is  not  employed  in 
expressing  prober  names.  The  simple  stem  )  s  is  employed 
in  see,  saw,  say,  so,  use,  us,  the  lirst  two  being  written  in 
the  first,  and  the  last  two  in  the  third  position.  Say  and  so 
are  so  frequent  that  it  is  found  expedient  to  strike  us  through 
the  line,  although  the  vowel  is  second  place. 

342.  Position  cannot  safely  be  used  to  indicate  vowels  in 
words  that  are  short,  or  but  little  used;  particularly  those 

IV 

containing  but  a  single  consonant  letter,   such  as   V_  fie. 


\^    boo,     y*    gee,    (      thaw,     )   ice,    _y     shy,    \ 


soup>, 


Q .  sack, — =  coon.    Itisherenecessary  to  express  the  vowels, 

and  to  do  so  the  dots  and  dashes  must  be  written. 

343.    In  the  next  group,   ....  in,  any,^^^no,^ know. 


178  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

the  second  word,  any,  containing  a  second-place  accented 
vowel,  is  nevertheless  written  in  the  first  position  to  avoid 
conllict  with  no,  a  woi'd  of  opposite  meaning,  but  the  same 
part  of  speech.  Here  no,  a  more  frequent  word  than  any,  is 
given  the  easier  jwsitioti,  namely,  on  lite  line,  where  nearly 
all  words  of  frequent  occmn'ence  are  written. 

344.  A  further  illustration  of  this  principle  may  be  found 

in  ....  meji,  ■''~^  ma^z,  >^'  Imman,  occupying  respectively 
the  first,  second,  and  third  positions.  In  all  such  cases  the 
commonest  ivord  is  placed  on  the  line,  the  less  frcqiicnt  in  the 
first,  and  the  least  frequent  in  the  third  position.  It  is  in  ac- 
cordance with  this  principle  that  ever  and  her  (second-place 
vowels),  are  assigned  to  the  first  position;  and  home,  though, 
thus,  much,  hope,  young  (also  second-place  vowels),  are 
assigned  to  the  third  position. 

345.  Outlines  containing  only  horizontal  or  half-length 
stems  ai'e  almost  invariably  written  above  the  line  if  the  ac- 

^ —  --"^ 

cented  vowel  is  first-place,  as  in    knock,  mist, 

mimic.    This  rule  applies  although  the  vowels  are 

actually  written,  as  in  .* meek, gnaw,   .'..,.    key. 

Proper  names    also  come,  under  this    rule;    for    example, 

Michael,   Nichols,  Oilman.      This 

practice  is  accounted  for  largely  by  the  fact  that  it  is  a  very 
easy  matter  to  write  horizontal  letters  in  the  first  position, 
which  requires  the  pen  to  be  carried  no.  higher  than  when 
executing  second-place  upward  or  downward  stems.  Vocal- 
ized words  are  then  read  much  easier  in  cases  where  the 
vowel  signs  are  not  written  accurately  in  place,  as,  for  ex- 
ample,   . .' would  easily  be  read  meek,  for  make  would 

in  no  case  be  put  above  the  line. 

346.  Lengthy  word-forms,  with  scarcely  any  exceptions, 
are  Avritten  on  the  line,  no  matter  what  the  accented  vowel 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  179 

may   be,    as    in       ^  /     phraseology,      V~^     presumably, 

^-^  ingenuity.    Legibility  would  not  be  increased  in  any 

degree  by  writing  such  words  in  any  other  position. 

347.  Position  is  indicative  of  but  one  vowel  only  in  any 
particular  word,  and  for  this  reason  it  need  not  be  observed 
except  in  wvitlnf^  monosyllables  and  dissyllables.  A  few  long 
derivatives  are  located  ofi'  the  line,  in  order  to  preserve  the  po- 


sition of  their  primitive;  illustration,   lawlessness; 

p)uriJication. 


348.  From  these  observations  are  deduced  the  following 
rules: 

1 .  Words  that  are  plainly  legible  in  the  second  position,  without 
vowels,  are  written  uniformly  on  the  line.  Illustrative  words: 
Dislike  dismiss  picnic  deceive  legal  Bible  reveal  blank 
district  design  decide  cloth  batch  clear  vital  desire  deny 
chatter  deliver  define  distrust  battle. 

2 .  Several  words,  different  parts  of  speech,  but  having  the  same 
outline,  are  all  tvritien  usually  in  the  same  position.  Illustrative 
words:  Inch  notch;  several  savior;  deal  daily;  small 
smell;  field   failed;   bath  both. 

3.  Words  that  are  both  short  and  of  frequent  occurrence  may  be 
written  out  of  the  second  position  to  indicate  a  first  or  third  place 
accented  vowel.  Illustrative  words:  These  sight  ofiice  olfset 
easily  least  abuse  issue  outside  plan  past. 

4.  Lengthy  outlines  and  infrequent  words  are  written  in  the 
second  position,and  the  vowels  inserted  when  necessary.  Illustra- 
tive words:  Vast  star  cast  stitch  plaster  elegant  slay 
disband  voice  seige  soil   entice. 

5.  An  exception  is  made  in  favor  of  horizontal  word-forms, 
which  are  placed  in  the  first  position  whenever  the  accented  vowel  is 
first-jylace,  tvhether  written  or  not.    Illustrative   words:     Sick 


180  EEPOETING  STYLE  OF  SHOET-HAND. 

nigh  sneak  seem  honest  mist   cost  midst  mind  syndicate 
sink  medium. 

6.  The  principle  of  position  is  not  applied  in  writing  proper 
names.    Miles  Clyde  Hotter  MeClure  Root  Hiigel. 

7.  In  a  number  of  cases  an  outline,  especially  a  word-sign, 
whose  principal  vowel  is  second  place,  is  written  nevertheless  in  the 
first  or  third  position,  to  avoid  conflict  with  a  more  frequent  second- 
position  word  having  the  same  outline.  E.  g.  Ago  apply  issue 
own  away  awake  July. 

8.  Position  is  used  quite  extensively  for  the  reason  that  the  com- 
paratively small  number  of  words  falling  under  the  above  rules  are 
all  of  very  frequent  occurrence,  and  it  is  essential  always  to  give 
them  their  proper  place.    E.  g.    The  •  is    I    me    of    at    about. 

9.  Half-length  words,  derived  from  full-length  outlines,  retain 

the  same  consonant  position  as  their  primitives.    E.  g.    ^     Com- 

plained,  ^    played,  ^   remembered,        numbered,  ...  tried. 

10.  Half-length  outlines  are  written  one  full  space  above 
the  line  if  first-position,  and  entirely  below  the  line  if  third  position. 

E.  g.     ^^     Meet,  ^  did-not,  .  doubt,    .     found. 

PHRASES. 

349.  All-that-has-been-done  does-not-come  does-not-exist 
has-not-yet-been  have-been-taken  has-not-only  how-little 
I-am-disposed  in-the-course-of-my  in-their-report  in-this- 
instance  iu-this-shape  in-this-way  into-the-country  it-can- 
not-be  it-has-beeu-found  it-has-not-only-been  I-think-that- 
it-is  it-is-not-true  it-may-be-true  it-is-not-done  it-may-be- 
true  it-may-be-maintaiued  shall-be-received  it-should-be- 
come-necessary. 

EXERCISE  34. 

350.  New- York,  June  26,  1886. 
Messrs.  S.  T.  Horne  «fe  Co.,  Pittsburgh,  Pa. 
Dear-Sirs: — ^Your-favor  of-the  24th  inst.  I'eceived  and-con- 

tents  noted.    The-box  of  residuum  has  come  to  hand.    This- 
is-certainly  not-the-result  of-the  use  of -our  oil;  but-is-no- 


REPORTING  STtLE  OF  SIIORT-IIAND. 


181 


doubt  caused  by-the  impurities  in-the-water  you  speak  of, 
which  gradually  collect  in-the  cylinder  and-which-would-bc- 
present,  no  matter  what  grade  of  oil  were  used.  We-shall- 
turn  it  over  at-once  to-our  chemist  for  close  analysis,  and- 
will  report  to-you  as-soon-as  we  ascertain  the-result.  Of- 
one-thiug  you-may-be-sure,  it-is-not-caused  by-the  oil.  We 
await  reply  to-our  respects  of-the  22nd  inst. 

{To  be  phrased- by  the  student.) 

Dear  Sir: — Inclosed  please  find  invoice  and  B.  L.  of  goods 
shipped  Mr.  James  H.  Canfield  on  the  8th  inst.  Also  find 
directions  for  applying,  which  please  forward  Mr.  Canfield, 
as  we  have  not  his  P.  O.  address.  Not  being  acquainted 
with  Mr.  Canfield,  or  his  commercial  standing,  we  have 
charged  the  shipment  to  you,  in  pursuance  of  instructions 
given  us  by  your  representative. 

(196—2:30—1:30.) 


351. 


TRANSLATE. 


LESSON  XXXV. 

VOCALIZATION. 

352.  Key.  1.  Being  bayonet  Daugherty  poem  dual 
boa  clayey  laity  stoic.  2.  Powell  Howell  Rowell  tower 
bias  Hyatt  piety  joyous.  3.  Inaugural  error  glue-factory 
fire-eater  mill-owner  headache  inane.  4.  Cube  tube 
view  mew  dew  Jew  few  lieu.  5.  Idiot  Sulliote  carrion 
sermon  meteor  tare  cliair  ask  task.  6.  Goest  fealty 
coagulate  pcan  vowel  towel  dower  variety.  7.  Oyster 
islo  awning  Ed.,  etc.,  (vowels  to  be  written  previously  to 
the  stems). 

Sentences.  1.  Heaven  lies  about  us  in  our  infancy. 
2.  Conscience  warns  us  as-a-friend  before  it  punishes  us  as- 
a-ju(lge.  8.  Hope  is  like  a-bad  clock,  forever  striking  the- 
hour  of  happiness  whether  it-has  comeor-not.  4.  The-first- 
and-last  thing  which  is  required  ol  genius  is-the-love  of-truth. 

5.  Christ  saw-much  in-the-world  to  weep  over  and-mueh  to 
pray  over,  but  he-saw  nothing  in-it  to-look  on  with  contempt. 

6.  Advice  is  seldom  welcome. 

Phrases.  14.  In-their-own  in-any-event  in-such-a-way 
a-just-answer  as-a-matter-of-course  capital-stock  charge- 
of-the-matter.  15.  Charge-of-the-business  condition-of- 
affairs  just-about-as-good-as  first-class-i'ate  just-taken 
knowledge-of-the-matter  second-hand. 

353.  Very  few  vowels  are  written.  Whole  pages  of  short- 
hand notes  ai'e  taken  without  one  dot  or  dash  appearing. 
The  vowels  are  there,  nevertheless.  The  I'eader  does  not  see 
them,  but  observes  the  effect  which  these  same  vowels,  acting 
as  invisible  forces,  have  in  giving  sliape  to  the  consonant 
outlines.  These  consonant  outlines  are  so  pliant,  that  within 
certain  limits  they  readily  assume  whatever  form  the  vowel 
element  of  the  words  would  indicate;  just  as  a  large  piece  of 
bark  would  inform  us  of  both  the  size  and  kind  of  the  unseen 
tree  upon  which  it  had  grown.  A  knowledge  of  vowels  is 
important,  because  woi'd-forms  to  a  great  extent  depend 
upon  the  number,  order,  and  character  of  these  elements. 

354.  The  student's  chief  concern  is  to  know  when  to  write, 

—182- 


f  late  35. 

'     ^     k    \       ^     \. 


k 


^. 


^^ 


^ 


J^ 


©^ 


r 


SENTENCES. 


V 


184  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SIIORT-IIAND. 

and  when  not  to  write,  the  vowel  sounds.  He  can,  however, 
be  supplied  with  no  specific  rule.  He  must  exercise  his  own 
judgment  in  applying  this  general  rule,  viz.:  In  reporting, 
insert  as  many  vowels  as  may  be  strictly  necessary  to  render  the 
notes  easily  decipherable  when  the  transcript  is  afterwards  made. 
More  vowels  than  these  are  superlluous,  and  ought  not  to  be 
written.  Just  what,  however,  is  meant  by  "  easily  decipher- 
able?" Some  persons  require  the  notes  to  be  pretty  fully 
vocalized,  or  they  find  themselves  at  sea  when  the  report  is 
to  be  rewritten.  There  are  some  few  writers  who  dispense 
with  vowels  almost  entirely.  They  form  their  characters 
well,  choose  accurate  outlines,  and  bring  to  bear  an  excep- 
tional judgment  and  memory  in  writing  out  their  reports 
afterwards.  Those  who  use  vowels  to  quite  an  extent  learn 
to  depend  on  them,  and  the  practice  becomes  necessary 
mainly  through  force  of  habit. 

355.  There  are  a  few  general  principles,  however,  which 
should  govern  all  writers.  To  illustrate,  we  will,  for  con- 
venience, divide  all  words  into  three  classes: 

1st  class.  This  comprises  those  words  whose  consonant 
outlines  are  fortunately  so  full  and  characteristic,  as  to  ren- 
der the  word  plainly  legible  without  the  aid  of  a  vowel. 

The  following  words  will  illustrate:  [ Traffic,  \_v  striv- 
en, 4  charter,      '-'^  sermon,  J — -  desk.    Ordinarily,  to  write 

a  single  vowel  here  would  be  bad  practice.  The  consonants 
tell  plainly  what  the  words  are.  When  this  is  the  case  vowel 
signs  are  only  in  the  way.  To  be  more  specific,  let  us  exam- 
ine a  few  of  the  principal  means  by  which  vowels  are  indi- 
cated, hj  the  manner  ot  combining  consonants.  First,  it  would 
be  utterly  needless  to  write  a  final  vowel  in  y-^~~^  money. 


racy,  )  m,azy,         V.  coffee,  c\^  heavy,   for  the 

long  n,  s,  z,  f,   and  v,   clearly  signify  a  foUowing  vowel. 
Otherwise  hooks  and  circles  would  be  used.     Likewise  in 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-nAND.  185 

escape  and  ^     esx)y,  the  initial  vowel  is  plainly  indi- 

cated  by  the  use  of  j  s  instead  of  the  circle.  The  employment 
of  stems  for  I  and  r,  where  the  hooks  could  be  written,  indi- 
cates that  a  vowel  precedes,  as  in  \y7  porch,  \/  bulk. 
This  is  also  true  of  the  loops,  lengthening,  shortening,  and 
other  abbreviating  principles.  The  writer's  rule  should  be 
to  compel  consonant  signs,  so  far  as  possible,  to  express 
vowel  sounds  also;  vowels  so  expressed  need  not,  of  course, 
be  written. 

356.  2nd  class.  This  includes  a  much  smaller  number  of 
words,  which  are  always  to  be  vocalized.     To  this  class  be- 

A 

long  such  words  as  I"    dope,   /   coach,  vj      foul,  "~i~  echo. 

These  words  require  vowels,  because  their  outlines  are  so 
meagre.  When  standing  alone  they  would  be  either  ambig- 
uous, or  indefinite.  This  class  is  composed  of  words  having 
only  one  or  two  consonants,  containing  usually  a  long  vowel. 
They  are  not  words  that  recur  frequently.  When  one  of 
these,  however,  is  repeated  a  number  of  times  in  a  single 
report,  the  vowels  may  be  omitted  after  the  second  wi'iting, 
particulai'ly  if  the  writer  is  pressed  for  time. 

357.  3rd  class.  This  embraces  quite  a  numerous  list  of 
words  which  sometimes  are,  and  sometimes  ai'e  not  to  be 
vocalized,  depending  upon  the  connection  in  which  they 
occur.  Take  the  word  box,  for  example,  in  the  sentence, 
"  He  brought  home  a  box  of  candy."    Here  no  vowel  is  neces- 

'\       A 

sary.    But  in  the  sentence,  "c;^  ^ — °    .■^^-     c~\     x" 


the  character  \ o  b-ks  could  also  be  read  books.    Hence, 

in  these  circumstances,  a  vowel  is  necessary  to  render  the  out- 
line unambiguous.  Illustrative  words:  Tomb  mope  jog 
croak  outch  moth  moist  quake  coke  cloy  plow  glue 
moan  soak  rout  sofa  chyle  chyme.    In  general  it  may  be 


180  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

observed  that  when  the  vowels  in  a  word  are  neai'ly  equal  in 
number  to  the  consonants,  a  few  of  them  should  be  expressed; 
not  so,  however,  if  the  consonants  greatly  predominate. 

358.  Perhaps  there  is  no  word  whatever  but  that  in  rare 
contingencies  may  need  a  vowel  for  some  purpose  or  other. 

The  character  v^  as  here,  standing  entirely  alone,  could 
be  read  either  never,  or  envy.  Both  7nay  and  him  require 
vowels  in  the  sentence,  "  I  wisli  you  to  write  may,  not  him.'''' 
So  common  a  word  as  out  demands  a  vowel  in  certain  con- 
nections,   as    in    the    sentence,     "    i  s         .    \        " 

-^    ^  ^^>^ 

Without  a  vowel  it  may  be  read  at. 
In  a  few  rai*e  cases  a  vowel  is  written  within  the  large 

e„.e,e,  as,  ,o.  example.  "P  e.W,  V  ,r.cise.  When 
unruled  paper  is  used,  which  is  seldom  necessary,  however,  a 
number  of  first  and  third  position  words  will  require  vocal- 
ization. 

Nothing  short  of  experience  and  observation  will  teach  the 
young  reporter  just  to  what  extent  he  ought  to  insert  vowels 
to  render  his  reports  intelligible  to  himself.  The  difficulty  he 
finds  in  reading  certain  outlines  will  cause  him  to  vocalize 
them  when  next  they  occur.  Gradually  also  he  learns  to 
drop  vowels  Avhich  he  does  not  find  helpful  in  transcribing. 
Stenegraphers  in  time  acquire  an  intuitive  faculty  telling 
them  as  they  write,  no  matter  how  swiftly,  that  this  word  or 
that  requires  a  vowel,  or  else,  in  the  peculiar  connection  in 
which  it  occurs,  its  meaning  will  be  doubtful  afterwards 
when  the  tracks  of  his  flying  pencil  are  being  translated 
into  "English." 

359.  Considering  the  form  and  function  of  the  vowel 
signs,  it  may  be  observed  that  the  dots  and  clashes,  like  the 
sounds  they  represent,  are  simple.  Whereas,  the  more  com- 
2^lex  sounds,  known  as  co')nj)ound  vowels,  are  symbolized  by 
compound  characters,  namely,  small  angular  marks  and  semi- 
circles.   There  is  an  actual  contact  of  the  vocal  organs  when 


REPORTIXO  STYLE  OF  STTOnT-ITAXD.  187 

the  consonants  are  produced.  For  this  reason  they  are  more 
definite  in  character  than  the  vowel  sounds,  which  are  pro- 
duced without  such  contact.  It  is  possible,  by  means  of  the 
vocal  organs,  to  proiluce  an  almost  infinite  A'ariety  of  shades 
of  vowel  sound.  It  is  probable  that  as  language  improves, 
additional  vowels  will  be  brought  into  use.  The  tendency 
toward  an  increase  has  already  given  rise  to  a  number  of 
distinctions,  out  of  which  much  unprofitable  discussion  has 
grown,  as  to  the  precise  number  of  vowel  sounds  comprised 
in  the  Englisli  language. 

360.  There  are  a  few  shades  of  vowel  sound  for  which  the 
Pitman  vowel  scale  does  not  provide  symbols.  Nor  is  tliis 
necessary.  E  in  certain  is  clearly  enough  indicated  by  the 
light  dot  which  represents  e  in  wet;  a  in  air,  by  the  lai'ge  dot 
representing  long  a  in  mate;  a  in  ask,  by  the  sign  for  a  in  cap. 

361.  A  few  additional  signs  are  here  presented  for  the  ex- 
pression of  concurrent  vov.-els,  as  oo-i  in  gluey,  written  *- — t., 

or  a-e  in  gayety,  written  ^  '  instead  of  *  •]  This  sign,  <, 
y^YiQw  23oiniing  to  the  left,  expresses  a  long  dot-vowel,  followed 
by  any  short  vowel;  when  pointing  to  the  right  it  indicates  a 
long  dash-vowel,  followed  by  any  short  vowel.    L  1. 

If  both  the  concurrent  vowels  are  long,  which  rarely  occurs. 


each  must  be  written  separately,  as  in  i   inchoate,  or 

'\  coeval.     If  one  is  a  diphthong,  a  following  short-vowel 
may  be  indicated  by  a  slight  tick  attached  to  the  dighthongal 

sign,  as  in  ^^     Rial,  ^    j    moiety. 

363.    A  few  exceptions  are  to  be  noted,  to  the  rule  for  plac- 
ing vowels  between  two  consecutive  consonants: 

(a)  When  the  rule  would  throw  the  vowel-sign  into  an 

angle,  rendering  it  ambiguous,  as  in  -^-> — (,.     Maxley,  not 

written  '^~--~^ 

(b)  If  the  word  is  compound,  each  part  should  be  vocalized 


188  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


separately,  as  'v  ^  plough-share,         \  cowboy. 


(c)    The  separate  parts,  when  they  are  quite  distinct,  or 
the  components  of  a  derivative  word,  are  vocalized  separate- 


\ 


ly,   as  in  (j.  uninstanced,  /  ^         Lulu-kmd,      ^\    excit- 

able.   The  assignment  is  also  governed  to  some  extent  by 
syllabication;  to  illustrate,  canonade  is  written       ^1  not 

^^     The  advanced  writer  may  safely  use  his  own  best 
judgment  in  this  matter. 

363.  Means  have  been  provided  for  expressing  a  vowel 
which  occurs  between  circles  and  the  eshun-hook,  as  a  in 
compensation;  but  in  no  case  whatever  is  this  necessary.  It 
will  aid  the  reader  if  he  will  remember  that  there  is  always 
a  vowel  to  be  supplied  between  a  circle  and  this  hook,  and 
that  without  a  single  exception,  this  vowel  is  either  long  a, 
as  in  compensation,  short  i,  as  in  suppositio7i,  or  short  e,  as  in 
possession. 

364.  A  few  remai'ks  concerning  diphthongs  and  coales- 
cents  are  in  place  here.  A  diphthong,  literally  double-sound, 
is  supposed  by  most  persons  to  he  two  sounds  in  one,  whereas 
it  is  in  reality  a  glide,  or  sort  of  leap,  from  one  sound  to  an- 
other. In  producing  it  the  vocal  organs  undergo  a  constant 
and  rapid  change  of  ijosition.  Hence  a  diplithong  might 
properly  be  called  a  curved  sound.  But  the  vocal  organs  re- 
main in  -a.  fixed p)osition  Avlule  producing  what  may  be  termed 
elementary  vowels,  and  on  this  account  the  dots  and  dashes 
might  be  considered  as  representing  straight  sounds.  They 
are  capable  of  prolongation,  while  the  diphthongs  are  not. 

The  aspirate  dot  may  precede  diphthongs  and  coales- 
cents,  also,  as  in  -c]  tuhcl,  '^|  height.  Since  no  other  char- 
acter is  similar  to  ^  I,  it  may  be  written  in  the  1st,   2nd 


REPORTIXQ  STYLE  OF  SIIORT-HAXD.  189 


or   3rd  place,   according  to  convenience,   as  in  "^^  nigh^ 

\/^  belie. 

365.  Tiie  consonants,  w  and  y,  known  as  coalescenis,  are 
not  strictly  independent  sounds,  but  are  rather  a  kind  of 
accent,  or  sharpening  impulse,  by  which  any  vowel  may  be 
modified.  It  may  be  said  that  w  gives  a  stress,  or  accentua- 
tion, to  the  vowel  by  means  of  the  lips;  whereas  y  sharpens 
the  vowel  by  means  of  the  palate  and  tongue.  The  character 
,,  u  is  employed  to  express  both  the  coalesccnt  n,  as  in  youth, 
and  the  diphthong  ew,  as  in  view.  There  is  a  real,  though 
but  slight  difference  between  these  two  sounds.  To  render 
this  distinction  more  apparent,  add  t/i  to  view,  thus,  viewth. 
From  this  subtract  v,  and  the  remaining  letters  spell  iewifi, 
which  in  pronunciation  plainly  differs  from  youth. 

366.-  Observe  the  following  rules  as  to  the  manner  of 
placing  the  vowels : 

(a)  First  and  second  place  initial  vowels  can  best  be 
written  previously  to  the  remaining  part  of  the  word. 

{b)  The  dash  in  such  words  as  v.  foe,  \  bow,  should  be 
struck  downwards. 

387.  Unaccented  and  Obscure  Vowels.  An  instructor 
of  short-hand  is  not  so  much  concerned  in  pointing  out  wliat 
are  the  precise  sounds  in  any  word,  as  in  teaching  how  best 
to  express  them.  Nevertheless,  a  few  observations  relative 
to  Avhat  are  called  obscure  vowels  are  in  place.  Every  writer 
is  occasionally  i-equired  to  represent  words  with  exactness, 
the  vowel  as  well  as  the  consonant  elements.  But  vowel 
sound  is  so  intangible  that  the  keenest  ear  is  sometimes  un- 
able to  determine  the  precise  quantity  and  quality  of  the 
minor  shades.  When  written  at  all,  these  are  usually  ex- 
pressed by  proximate  signs.  For  example,  the  following 
words,     fully    vocalized,     would     ordinarily    be     written, 

^.  vented,  X/^  polar,  /M°  la,ter,  ^      refer,  l/\  ierri- 


190 


REPOETIXG  STYLE  OF  SHORTHAND. 


conformity. 


conformation.    But  good 


speakers  do  not  pronounce  them  so.  Vented  is  pronounced 
ventd;  polar,  po/r;  later,  Intr.  Also,  Bibl,  collr,  contentd, 
stratm,  deacn.  In  conform' it  ion,  the  second  vowel  is  not 
broad  o,  as  in  wrong,  but  short,  as  o  in  lot.  Hereo  receives 
neither  the  primary  nor  secondary  accent,  and  as  a  rule  un- 
accented voAvels,  like  those  italicised  in  the  derivative  words 
given  below,  though  marked  long  in  dictionaries,  are  in  real- 
ity short. 

In  refer,  e  is  short.  In  the  following  list  the  italicised 
letters  are,  in  correct  speech,  given  the  short  sound:  ylvail, 
defend,  reduction,  await,  conformation,  progression,  exposi- 
tion. In  terrible,  z  does  not  represent  either  the  long  or 
short  sound  of  i.  It  is  a  slight,  indefinable  sound,  classed  by 
lexicographers  as  obscure.  Terrible  Avould  be  pronounced 
the  same  though  spelt  terrrrble,  terreble,  terroble,  or  terr//ble. 
Likewise  stratum  could  be  spelt  stratnn,  stratcm,  stratom, 
stratam.  The  italicised  letters  in  the  following  list  are  also 
more  or  less  obscure:  Confoi'mity,  presentable,  radical, 
chaplani,  intang;'ljle. 

Notwithstanding  these  statements,  the  most  convenient, 
and  perhaps  the  most  sensible  rule,  in  vocalizing,  is  to  follow 
the  guidance  of  a  standard  dictionary.  Exceptions  need  be 
made  only  when  exactness  is  required. 

PHRASES. 

368.  I-have-also  I-may-have-seen  in-all-its-bearings  in- 
all-other-respects  in-all-probability  in-any-degree  in-any- 
other-country  in-any-other-manner  in-any-other-v/ay  in- 
every-case  in-every-respect  in-favor  in-so-many-words  in- 
substance  in-its-nature  in-its-own-way  in-that-matter  in- 
that-respect  in-that-shape  in-that-way  about-as-much-as 
better-kind  bettei'-way  condition-of-our  condition-of-their 
just-about. 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SUORT-HAND.  191 

369.  EXERCISE  35. 

Dear-Sir: — We-have-a  car  of  hominy  chop  en  route,  which- 
will-arrive  iu-two-or-three  days  ami-will  sell  you  several 
tons  of-same  at  $10.75,  sight  draft.  Will  send  sample  in  day 
or  two;  have-none  on-hand  at-present.  We  credit  your  acct. 
with  $1.00  on  last  100  bu.  of  oats  as  requested,  and-hope 
same  will-be-satisfactory.     Yours-truly,  etc. 

Dear-S«r;— Replying-to-your-favor  of-the  6th,  we-beg  to 
say  that  if-the  S.  S.  S.  is-in-good  condition  we-have-no-ob- 
jeetion  to-receiving  it  back,  provided,  of-course,  that-it-is 
returned  without  expense  to  us.  We  regret  to  say  that-we- 
have-no  demand  for-the  Hamilton  troches. 

Your  account  has-now  been  credited  $15  on  Winslow's 
syrup,  as-per  your-card  of-the  2d. 

Yours-very-truly,  etc. 

(150— 1:45— -.45.) 

370.  TRANSLATE. 

\  )  A-^  ly  ^  ^     I^~^  <^  >  27  c 

V  ^^-^  ^        I        ,,  o 

I    .1     ^-^V        cK  lo  X.  X  .<v..-.- 

V 


^  ^ 


I 


^ 


LESSON  XXXVI. 


PRIMITIVE  AND   DERIVATIVE. 

371.  Key.  1.  Mean  meaning  meaningly  meaningless 
meaner     meanest     meanness     meanly     demean     meant. 

2.  Cai'e  caring  uncaring  careless  carelessly  carelessness 
careful  carefulness.  3.  Plain  plains  complain  complainant 
complaining  plainer  plainest  plainness  plainly.  4.  Do 
does  doing  done  undo  undoing  undid  undone  doest  doer 
did  didst.  5.  Settle  settles  settled  settling  settler  settle- 
ment unsettle  unsettled.  6.  Sale  sales  salable  unsalable 
seller  selling  undersell  sold.  7.  Knife-grinder  planing- 
mill  cutting-box  street-car  market-basket  hen-roost  coast- 
survey.  8.  Shooting-star  short-winded  dog-collar  flower- 
pot hail-storm  sheep-iJen.  9.  Express-car  button-hole 
wild-cat  chess-board  cuff'-holder  mail-carrier.  10.  Drug- 
store hay-stack  drum-stick  live-stock  rain-cloud  chairman 
easy-chair. 

Phrases.  11.  It-will-be-maintained  it-would-not-take  I- 
will-not-undertake  if-it-be  so-as-to-be-able-to  uuder-cii'cum- 
stances  we-are-satisfied  we-do-uot-undertake. 

Sentences.  1.  It-has-been  well  observed  that  few  are 
better  qualified  to  give  others  advice  than  those-who-have 
taken  the-least  of-it  themselves.  2.  Our  happiness  in-this- 
world  depends-upon  the-aflfections  we-ai'e   able-to   inspire. 

3.  He  who  purposes  to-be  an-author  should-first-be-a  student. 

4.  No-man-can-be  brave  who-considers  pain  to-be  the-great 
evil  of-life,  nor  temperate,  who  considers  iJleasure  to-be-the 
highest  good. 

372.  It  can  be  demonstrated  that  the  outline  ^"^v^^  m-nst 
(for  meanest)  can  be  written  a  trifle  quicker  than  the  outline 
"""^  mn-st.     A  one-minute  test  of  eacli  will  show  that  the 

first  can  be  written  the  greater  number  of  times.  The  latter 
form,  ^^  mnst,  however,  is  the  accepted  outline  for  mean- 
est. There  are  two  reasons  for  this.  First,  it  is  easier  read. 
This  is  owing  to  the  fact  that  the  mind  is  already  familiar 
with  • — li  vin  as  the  outline  for  the  primitive  word  mean, 

— 1!)-2  - 


plate  20. 


^ru 


-^". 


"~^ 


4  I    L    !    J     ^    ^.   ^     ^     L    L^  '    ^^ 

5  r    e    r    r    t^   ^  ^^    ^ 


u 


lU        ,     ■'^  \ 


s 


p        [  SENTENCES, 


y^    ^ 


|.L.^      ^  6.®^^Xl^v_^^. 


\. 


V 


^ 


194  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SnORT-IIAND. 

from  which  is  obtained  the  derivative  word  meanest.  The 
outline  for  any  derivative  word  may  be  quickly  deciphered, 
as  soon  as  that  part  of  the  outline  which  expresses  the  prim- 
itive is  recognized. 

In  the  seconil  place,  it  is  more  quickly  written.  This  may 
appear  unreasonable,  since  it  has  been  ardmitted  that 
-^~\_^  m-nst'is  the  moi'e  facile  outline.    But  in  '    ^^  meanest, 

the  reporter's  first  and  instantaneous  thought  is,  how  to 
write  ""^  mean,  and  next  est;  and  he  has  the  woi'd  entirely 
written  in  the  time  it  would  take  to  determine,  mentally, 
that  m-nst  would  be  the  easier  to  execute.  For  the  same 
reason  it  is  better  to  write  m,eaner  and  meanly  by  the  outlines, 
mn-r  and  m.n-1,  rather  than  by  m-wr  and  m-nl.  In  this  list 
(L  1)  it  will  be  observed  that  tXiafonns  are  determined  partly 
by  the  sound,  partly  by  the  sense,  or  meanijig;  that  is,  when 
there  is  nothing  to  prevent,  words  of  similar  meaning  are 
expressed  by  similar  outlines.  This  is  called  writhig  by  an- 
alogy, which  experience  proves  to  have  several  advantages. 
In  general,  derivative  words  are  written  in  analogy  with  their 
primitives,  the  derivative  being  expressed  by  simply  prt^aim^' 
or  affixing  certain  signs  to  the  primitive  word-form.  See 
Ls  2 — 6.  It  is  important  to  preserve  intact  the  primitive 
word-forms;  hence,  the  parts  of  derivative  words  are  some- 
times   separated,   as  in   ..^_^  p*    unsettle,  * — <'      uncivil,     in 


preference  to  "^jV"  and    ^~-f 


373.  Write:  Great  greatly  greater  greatness;  nice 
nicer  niceness  nicely  nicety;  free  freely  freer  frees  free- 
ing freed  freedom;  joy  joys  enjoy  enjoyed  enjoyer 
enjoying  joyous  joyously  joyousness  joyful  joyfully  joy- 
fulness;  gain  gains  gainer  gaining  gainful  ungainly 
regain  regaining  gained  ungaining;  grow  grows  grower 
grown  grew  ungrown  ungrowing;  slave  slaves  slaved 
slaving  slaver  enslaving  enslaved  enslavement  enslaver; 
make    makes    maker    making     makest    remake    unmake 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  195 

made  unmade;  keep  keeps  kept  keeping  keeper  keepest 
unkept;  stone  stoner  stoncst  stones  stoned  nnstoued 
restone  restoned   stony  stonier  stoniest. 

374.  For  precisely  the  same  reason,  compound  words  are 
to  be  written  by  simply  joining  the  two  word-forms  together, 
neither  outline  being  impaired.  Tlie  characters  thus  pro- 
duced are  easily  read,  because  each  outline  is  as  easily 
recognized  as  when  standing  alone.  This  practice,  also,  is 
favorable  to  speed,  since  not  the  least  premeditation  is  re- 
quired.    The   consonants  in  the  word  *^\     overdrawn,   are 


vord  <^ 


vrdrn,   and    these  could    be   expressed  by   the    character, 
^^•'^  vrd-rn;  but  this  woukl  be  a  very  improper  outline  for 

overdrawn;  it  is  neither  analagous  or  suggestive.    For  the 
nor    y  wash-tub,  J*  wa-sM-b. 


'■< 


"Write:  Battle-flag  wax-work  eating-house  saloon-keeper 
house-dog  house-top  quick-sand  pen-wiper  sea-coast  ship- 
load mail-car  band-wagon  pencil-case  drag-tooth  horse- 
racing  horsemanship  Sunday-school  class-room  church- 
choir  basket-picnic  vinegar-barrel  mouse-trap  jug-handle 
giant-powder  spell-bound  horror-stricken  curb-stone. 

Compound  words,  however,  should  not  be  phrased  when 
unangular  joinings  result.     See  Ls  8  and  9. 

Write:  House-fly  hay-rack  time-piece  watch-chain 
horse-fly. 

375.  In  a  few  exceptional  cases  the  form  of  one  of  the 
component  words  is  moditied  in  order  to  render  a  suitable 
joining  possible.  In  L  10  the  form  of  the  outlines  for  store, 
stack,  stock,  chair,  etc.,  are  changed  for  this  reason. 

There  are  two  important  exceptions  to  this  rule  governing 
derivitive  word-forms.     The  first  is  the  requirement  of  an- 


196  BEPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

gularity,  which  is  the  chief  pre-requisite  in  all  good  short- 
hand  writing.      To    illustrate,    in    moderator,   the    outline 


md-rt-r  must  be  discarded  for  the  more  angular  form 
^-v-^^J  md-r-tr.    On  the  same  principle  we  write  |     „  edu- 


cator,   Vj,  voter,  y^\i  artist,  etc. 


M 


h 


The  second  exception  is  the  req\\\vexa.e\itot  facility .  Many 
times  a  derivitive  may  be  as  clearly  and  more  quickly  ex- 
pressed by  a  simple  modification  of  the  primitive  word-form. 

For  illustration,  editor  is  written  V  d-tr,  not  j     d-t-r;  teacher 

is  written    L  t-chr,  instead  of      j   t-ch-r;  walker      \ —   not 

w-ic-r;  sadder  is  written  1    not  sd-r. 
In  the  Solemn  Style,  the  consonants  are  fully  expressed; 

e,  g.,        K  goetli,         \  keepest,  (  lookest,   —0^    goesi, 

^"^  prayeth. 


376.    SiGN-woED  Derivatives.    A  good  number  of  words 
Avhose  primitives  are  expressed  by  abbreviations,  are  formed 

irregularly;  for  example,  ^..  here,   primitive,  /V        hereto- 


fore,   derivative;    v^    hand,    y^^^    handy;    collect, 

I  collector.  Also  see  Vocabulary  for:  Descriptive 
emphatically  fewest  improved  changed  largest  majestic 
dismember  methodically  ministei'ed  objective  particularize 
particularity  peculiarity  performed  regularity  specially 
specialty  subjective  wilt  youngest  expected. 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  197 

The  past  tense  is  expressed  by  the  loop,  the  disjoined  ted, 

and  by  halving;  e.  g.,    ^  exjyress,    \  expressed;  \   object, 

\j  objected;   .^^    enlarge,    enlarged;    \   remember, 

A  remembered. 

Write:  Appeared  applied  belonged  happened  unheard 
unnumbered  owned  unpeopled  disqualified  valued  ac- 
knowledged allowed  (l-d)  considered  described  developed 
governed  measured. 

The   words    dated,  gifted,   delighted,   are    better    written 

,       -s|      r,  than  by  the  characters    L  ^'      j,  although 

in  each  ease  an  extra  t  is  expressed.  Not  only  are  the  out- 
lines briefer,  but  the  exact  primitive  word-forms  are  pre- 
served. This  rule  may  be  applied  in  expressing  the  past 
tense  of  verbs  generally,  whether  they  are  sign-words  or  not; 

e.  g.,  \  appointed,  \.  subjected,  \^^  dis-spirited,  ^  culti- 
vated. By  far  the  greater  number  of  sign-word  derivatives 
are  formed  in  the  usual  way,  by  simply  attaching  the  proper 
affix  or  prefix. 

Example,  ^)  endeavor,  \J>,  endeavored;  folloiv,  ....fol- 
lowed; N  principle,  — A  unprincipled;  y  angel,  '^ y 

^  X  \  \ 

archangel;  ^  appoint,  °  appoints;  comply,  °  compli- 
ance. 

377.  "Write:  Non-appearance  brotherly  characterize 
characterizes  christianize*  collects  collecting  constitu- 
tional dearest  delighting  deliverer  demoralization*  de- 
scription* unessential  familiarity  fewer  ungentlemanly 
governor*  handsome  hardness  highest*  unimaginable 
largeness  ministerial*  numberless  impractical  unpracticed* 


193  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


improper  profitable  unquestionable*  dissatisfy*  shalt* 
unspeakable  speechless  spiritual""  unspoken  insufficient 
valuable  virtuous  whilst*  hesitation*. 

PHRASES. 

378.  It-should-not-extencl  it-is-plain  it-will-be-seen  it- 
will-be-worth  it- will-receive  it-will-require  it-would-be- 
likely  I-understand-it  I-will-ask  I-wnll-make  1-will-therefore 
I-wish-to-make  I-shall-enter  in-his-own-nanie. 

379.  EXERCISE  36. 

New-York,  December  23,  1883. 

To  Ocean  Steamship  Companies: 

Refering  to-the  accompanying  notice  to-Emigrant  Book 
Agents  (Miscellaneous  Cii'cular  No.  269),  and-in-order-that- 
we-may-have  similarly  a-comi^lete  list  of-the  outstanding 
orders  issued  by  Steamship  Lines,  we-have  to-request  that-a 
statement  be-prepared  by-your  company  and-furnished  to 
us,  early  in-January,  of  outstanding  orders,  both  prepaid 
aud-European,  issued  previous  to-January  1st,  1883. 

The-following  information  should-be  embraced  in-your 
statement:  The-date  and-number  of-each  order;  in  whose 
tavor  di"awn;  destination;  number  of  passengers;  rate  and- 
amount  of -fare. 

In-this-connection  -vvill-you  please  advise  us  whether  it- 
will-be  possible  for-you  to-f  nrnish  similar  statements  monthly 
thereafter?  Such-statements  would  greatly  facilitate  the- 
transaction  of  business  in-case-of  change  of-fares  or-rate 
of-commission,  and-enable  us  to-deal  with  questions  arising 
from-such  changes  more  intelligently,  and-it-is-believed, 
more  advantageously  to  all-parties. 

Please-answer  this-communication,  and-send  statements 
to  Mr.  Albert  Fink,  Commissioner. 

Respectfully-yours, 

General  Passenger  Agents. 

(190—2:30—1:15.) 


TRANSLATE. 


380 


^ — ^  ...^...  QU 


y^ 


X 


^  'A  xi  —.L  n  i. :±::!. 1  r- 


-1.  \ 


^ 


:i 


"■i^.r 


s  ? 


)  c 


r 


e^     0  >j    ^..4...  / 


V^   °   /^ 


<2^ 


V 


^ 


~r 


X   


^ i ^.... 


.:7:.....i 


O.-...   C-D 


y 
4..  J 


^   c     >, 


^         ^  <o 


/ 


LESSON  XXXVII. 

SYLLABICATION. 

381.  Key.  1.  Plen-ty  chos-en  re-frain  pro-found  can- 
did sei'-mon  vix-en  spleu-did  stru-ggle.  2.  Ter-min-ate 
will-ing-ly  I'e-cov-er  caun-ou-ade  re-du-pli-cate  ca-li-bre 
Bra-ttle-bo-ro.  3.  Ex-ter-min-ate  trou-ble-some  ex-ca-vate 
des-ig-nate  ty-po-graph-er  oc-ta-gon  fan-tast-ic.  4.  Freed-om 
ret-urn  det-ach  dus-ly  chea-pen  ve-ri-fy  dee-per  bran-chcs 
man-if-old.  5.  Ex-trav-a-gant  occ-ii-pant  def-i-nite  ex- 
per-i-ment     mon-stros-i-ty    phot-o-graph-er    chro-nol-o-gy. 

6.  Bulk     fork    march  forge     milk     forth     birth     roared. 

7.  Stu-dy  stead  stayed  ous-ted  bread  bored  bir-dic 
bo-rrow-ed.  8.  Wor-ker  pur-chas-er  di-gest-ive  dis-tur-ber 
re-fus-al  sol-dier  la-bor-er. 

Phrases.  9.  Somewhere-else  which-would-be  "vvhich- 
would-make  which-had-been  which-has-just-been  all-you- 
wish  no-mo re-than-you-can  did-you-wish. 

Sentences.  1.  A-mau's  character  is-the  reality  of  him- 
self; his  reputation  the-opiniou  others  have-formed  about- 
him;  character  resides  iu  him,  reputation  in  other  people; 
that-is-the-substance,  this-the  shadow.  2.  A-small  leak  will 
sink  a-great  ship.  3.  A-fool  may-make  money,  but  it  needs 
a  wise-man  to-spend  it.  4.  All  is-uot  gained  that-is  put 
into-the  purse.  5.  Tell-your  secret  to-your-servant  and- 
you  make-him  your-master.  6.  If-you-would  have  a-thing 
well  done,  do-it  yourself. 

383.  Referring  to  the  words  found  in  Ls  1  and  2,  it  will  be 
found  that  there  are  as  many  stems  exactly  as  there  are  sji- 
lables,  that  is  to  say,  a  consonant  letter,  or  stroke,  for  each 
syllable  of  each  Avord.  This  is  not  a  mere  coincidence.  It 
holds  true  with  the  greater  number  of  words.  What  is  the 
explanation?  In  the  first  place,  only  one-third  of  all  the 
consonant  sounds  are  indicated  by  stems;  the  remaining  two- 
thirds  are  expressed  by  adjunctive  signs  so  called,  that  is, 
hooks,  circles,  loops,  etc.  A  certain  number  of  stems  must 
be  used,  however,  not  simply  as  objects  to  which  these  ad- 

—200— 


^rate  37. 


^  ^    V 


.~T 


V. 


^  L 


-^    y^ 


2  L^    r^ 


%-v 


8 


® 


C7 


9    (5-^/^ 

SENTENCES.     \ 


PHRASES. 


V^ 


.;^~V 


\  ^  <y\ 


^~^ 


uy 


-->.~^ 


'V 


^ 


) 


\ 


C    p^x® 


^     ^>-:3 


oy 


^ 


x®^ 


C^   X  ®^^     ^ 


n      \.x(^ 


^  J    I    r  X 


203  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


junctive  signs  may  be  attached,  but  as  affording  a  means 
also  of  vowel  representation.  A  vowel  can  be  appended  to 
a  consonant  stem,— bnt  to  nothing  else.  Hence,  since  the 
number  of  vowels  and  the  number  of  syllables  are  of  necessity 
always  equal,  the  number  of  syllables  and  the  number  of 
stems  are,  logically,  equal  also. 

383.  An  additional  feature  of  importance  is  to  be  ob- 
served; all  the  elements  of  sound  which  are  grouped  into  one 
syllable,  are  usually  expressed  by  a  si7igle  stem  with  its  ap- 
pendages,  that  is,  vowel  signs,  hooks  and  circles.    To  illustrate, 

in  1_^  striven  the  first  syllable  striv  is  expressed  by  |  t  and 
its  appendages,  while  the  syllable  en  is  represented  by  the 
stem  --^n,  which  is  entirely  distinct  from  the  first  stem. 
Also  in  jilen-ty,  and  ter-min-ate,  the  different  parts  of  the 
consonant  outlines  are  as  distinct  from  one  another  as  are 

the  syllables  themselves.    Thus,  \  pZcji   1    ty,    ji  p/e?z«2/,  or 
T   ter  '""b    min  '     ate,     l—^  terminate.      It  would   be  im- 

r 

proper  to  write  these  words  otherwise,  as,  for  example. 


stri-ven,  or 


ter-mi-nate.    The  point  of  practical 


value  to  be  observed  by  the  writer  is  this:  So  far  as  possible 
choose  outlines  which  are  adapted,  in  the  manner  just  indicated, 
to  the  syllabication  of  the  words  they  represent;  that  is  to  say, 
make  a  single  stem,  and  its  appendages,  express  all  the 
sounds,  and  those  only,  which  oCcur  in  the  particular  syllable 
you  are  writing.  For  example,  see  ex-ca-vate,  des-ig-nate, 
ty-po-graph-er,  etc.,  L  3.  Illustrative  words:  Cir-cle  pro-pose 
sca-tter  wor-thy  te-rri-ble  bliss-ful  ser-vice  cov-er  ma-ker 
brace-let  ±Jroad-way  re-cord.    See  also  L  8. 

384.  To  this  rule  there  are  two  exceptions.  The  first  is 
occasioned  by  a  requirement  of  brevity.  Return,  for  in- 
stance, is  not  written    -"'i/^  re-turn,  but  V^  ret-urn, 


REPORTTXG  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAXD.  203 


which  is  the  more  desirable  outline.  So  freedom  is  written, 
freed-om  {frd-m,  see  L  4),  instead  of  free-dom  {i.  e.,  fr-d-m). 
The  illustrative  words  in  L  4  show  the  number  of  syllables 
and  stems  to  be  equal,  a  result  obtained  by  the  manner  of 
syllabising  each  word;  thus,  chea-pen,  ve-ri-fy,  instead  of 
cheap-en,  ver-i-fy. 

385.  The  consonant  stem  and  its  appendages  is  sometimes, 
for  convenience,  called  a  stenogru])hiG  syllable.  When  prac- 
ticable, the  stenographie  and  orthographio  syllables  should 
correspond  with  each  other.  Otherwise  a  re-syllabication  of 
the  word  must  take  place.  A  syllable  is  defined  as  a  number 
of  sounds,  all  of  which  are  uttered  with  one  articulation. 
An  important  fact  in  this  connection  must  not,  however,  be 
overlooked.  When  a  word  of  several  syllables  is  pronounced, 
it  is  impossible  to  say  to  Avhat  particular  syllable  some  of  the 
consonant  sounds  belong.  For  instance,  in  strip-ling,  or 
stri-pling,  or  stripl-ing.  In  pronouncing  pendant,  there  is 
nothing  whatever  in  the  si^oken  word  to  indicate  that  d  be- 
longs to  the  first  syllable,  or  to  the  last.  In  dictionaries, 
woi'ds  are  divided  into  syllables  on  a  basis  of  sense,  or  mean- 
ins:;  while  short-hand  syllabication  is  more  a  matter  of  sound; 
or,  it  may  be  said,  still  more  a  matter  of  form  in  the  construc- 
tion of  outlines. 

386.  It  often  happens  that  vowels  must  be  placed  on  each 
side  of  a  stem,  since  many  syllables  contain  a  vowel  only, 
and  no  consonant,  as  in  ex-trav-a-gant,  occ-ti-pant.  (See  L  5.) 
Here  there  are  fewer  stems  than  syllables.  On  the  other 
hand,  many  word-forms  cannot  be  abbreviated  sufficiently  to 
reduce  the  separate  strokes  to  the.  number  of  vowels,  as  in 
bulk,  fork,  etc.,  L  6.  In  L  6  the  words  are  all  monosyllables, 
each  requiring,  however,  three  stems  for  its  exj^ression. 
Still  again,  there  are  a  few  words  containing  one  consonant 
only,  but  with  three  vowels,  as  I-o-iva,  i-de-a,  a-re-a,  i-o-ta. 
On  the  Avhole,  a  careful  examination  will  show  that  tliere 
are  nearly  as  many  stems,  or  stenographic  syllables,  as  there 
are  vowels,  or  orthographic  syllables.    The  result  of  a  com- 


204  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

parison  would  be  affected  materially  by  the  various  devices 
for  expressing  two  syllables  with  one  stroke,  as  in  mat-ter, 
fash-ion,  go-est,  mas-ter. 

387.  Short-hand  writing  is  suggestive,  and  hence  the  more 
legible — in  this  regard,  that  as  the  sounds  are  grouped  in  pro- 
mmciation,  so  the  signs  are  grouped  in  writing.  The  con- 
sonants may  be  said  to  cluster  around  the  voAvel,  which  is 
the  heart,  or  centre,  of  the  syllable;  and  in  a  similar  manner 
the  brief  signs  cluster  about  the  stem  to  which  they  are  ap- 
pended, 

PHRASES. 

388.  So-long-a-time  such-as-are  such-as-can  such-as-was- 
made  take-place  takes-up  take-possession  there-is-no-such 
there-will-never  there-would-not-now  they-can-make  they- 
can-receive  they-can-now  to-believe  to-its  to-make-men- 
tion  to-that-extent  that-is-all  that-it-is-claimed  that-is-the- 
case  very-clear  very-long-time  we-have-received  wd-shall- 
be-able-to-make  liquor-dealers  liquor-sellers  long-before 
legal-profession  may-have-seen  may-not-liave  morning- 
business  more-tlian-that  national-bank  national-defence 
native-land  not-very-long-ago  nor-is-it-necessary  purchase- 
money  relied-upon  shall-be-liable  should-have-had  so-as- 
to-make  so-as-not-to-make  so-long-as-it-is. 

389  EXERCISE  37. 

(To  be  phrased  by  the  student.) 

Indianapolis,  Ind.,  April  4,  188G. 
To  Whom  it  may  Concern: 

Tlie  bearer  hereof,  Mr.  Henry  Hopkins,  has  been  in  our 
employ  for  five  years  past  as  confidential  clerk  and  book- 
keeper. We  have  always  found  him  faithful  in  the  discharge 
of  his  duties,  courteous  and  o))liging,  aiul  alive  to  the  inter- 
est of  his  employers.  Mr.  Hopkins  is  a  superior  accountant, 
and  well  qualified  to  discharge  any  of  the  duties  he  may 
undertake.  It  gives  us  pleasure  to  recommend  him  to  any 
wlio  may  require  such  services,  knowing  that  he  will  be 
found  reliable  in  whatever  capacity  he  may  be  engaged. 

Yours,  etc. 

(100— 1:10— :40.) 


TBANSLATE. 


390 


J..:s;. 


-?-■ 


so  A  ..  \.  Ss^....f....l  -  \}~- 


19 


A/ 


o/^. 


^^ 


/A^^  A 


.^......:fr...  ^ 


-D     X 


Q^       /-, 


QJ^    /^ 


\ 


•-■■)  "^ 


)•  \ 


•^-A 


X 


LESSON  XXXVIII. 

GENERAL  PRINCIPLES. 

391.  Key.  1.  Editoi'  debtor  auditory;  spinney  aspen 
spin;  stop  estop  steep.  2.  State  estate  situate;  pearly 
peril  poorly;  Clara  clear  color.  3.  Crown  cranny  corn; 
Saturday  stiu'dy  stride;  straight  start  strata.  4.  Crowd 
carried  Corday;  briar  brewery  barrier;  prate  pretty  up- 
right. 5.  Great  gritty  garrote;  manilla  manual  meanly; 
meant  minuet  minute.  6.  Cant  county  aconite;  policy 
place  police;  Stella  settle  still.  7.  Easter  story  star; 
wrecked  Orcutt  rocket;  around  round  ruined.  8.  Tent 
tenet  attenuate;  sent  senate  ascent;  Scott  socket  asked. 
9-13.    For  key  see  list  words,  sec.  404. 

Phrases.  14.  How-long  during-tbe-winter-season  satis- 
factory-manner last-mail  first-class  first-class-goods  joint- 
committee  Board-of -Trade.  15.  On-the-west-side  Articles- 
of-Association  bill-of-sale  court-of-justice  articles-of-agree- 
ment  accoi'ding-to-your  we-raay-be-able-to  relatiug-to-the- 
subject. 

392.  A  Scientific  System.  To  be  broadly  capable,  read- 
ily acquired,  and  easily  remembered,  a  short-hand  system 
must  be  scientific,  not  merely  expeditious.  A  collection  of 
arbitrary  expedients,  if  sufficiently  large,  may  serve  for  re- 
producing ordinary  discourse;  but  the  inventiveness  of  the 
reporter,  or  the  old  cumbersome  long-hand,  must  be  resorted 
to  when  newly  coined  words,  unusual  proper  names,  tech- 
nical tei-ms  or  provincialisms  are  encountered.  A  system,  to 
be  scientific,  must  have  a  basis  of  principle;  be  so  related  to 
known  sciences  as  to  be  quickly  apprehended;  so  facile  as  to 
be  equal  to  any  emergency  of  speed,  dialect,  borrowed  Avords, 
or  foreign  name  or  accent.  The  Pitman  Phonography  meets 
these  i-equirements.  No  matter  what  changes  the  language 
may  undergo,  it  will  be  iiupossible  for  it  to  extend  beyond 
the  capabilities  of  this  far-reaciiing  system.  It  is  adapted, 
first  of  all,  to  the  human  voice  in  general,  and,  incidentally, 
to  the  English  language  in  particular.     The  scientific  char- 


plate  38. 


3  c — z)         c- 


^      ^ 
^ 


5.n  _xi  .^'^^-r^r^^7 

8    J         ^ 


e-/ 


M    1, 


WORD-FORMS. 


^ 


10 


11 


12 


13 


14 


15 


V 


'   /    I 


PHRASES. 


l^' 


fc/^   V   ^r\ 


^;5i_D  ^;;51 Q_D 


</ 


^ 


r 


^ 


REPORTINCr  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


acter  of  the  system  will  appear  more  clearly  from  the  fol- 
lowing considerations: 

393.  Correlation.  The  twenty-four  consonants  are  di- 
vidtd  into  several  classes,  according  to  their  nature  and 
quality.  The  first  eight  are  termed  ex2)lodenis,  sometimes 
called  abrujHs.  The  sounds  which  these  letters  express  are 
blunt,  not  capable  of  being  prolonged.  All  remaining  letters, 
except  w,  y  and  k,  are  designated  as  co7itinuants,  by  which 
is  meant  that  the  sounds  they  express  are  capable  of  being 
prolonged,  or  continued.  They  are  properly  represented  by 
curved,  or  yielding,  stems. 

The  second  classification,  which  affects  most  consonants, 
is  into  subvocals,  as  b,  d,  v;  and  surds,  as  x>,  f,  t.  The  first 
class,  or  heavy  sounds,  are  represented  by  shaded  letters; 
whereas  the  surds,  or  light,  breath  sounds,  ai*e  appropriately 
expressed  by  thin  stems.  Looking  further,  it  will  be  observed 
also  that  i)  and  b,  t  and  d,  f  and  v,  s  and  z,  etc.,  are  similar 
sounds,  both  letters  of  each  pair  being  articulated  with  the 
same  vocal  organs,  the  only  difference  being  that  in  each 
case  the  first  is  light,  and  the  second,  heavy.  P  and  b  are 
similar  sounds  in  these  respects,  that  both  are  labials,  or 
lip-sounds,  and  both  explodents;  and  the  two  characters  by 
Avhich  they  are  represented  are  alike  in  respect  to  slant  and 
straightness.  They  differ  in  this  respect  only,  that  the  first 
is  light,  and  the  second,  heavy;  whereas  their  stems  differ  in  a 
similar  manner,  the  first  being  thiii,  and  the  second,  thick. 
The  same  observations  apply  to  t  and  d,  eh  and  j,  f  and  v, 
and  the  other  pairs  of  consonants. 

The  long  vowels,  also,  are  properly  expressed  by  shaded, 
and  the  short  by  light  signs.  Diphthongs  are  compound 
sounds,  and  their  symbols  likewise  are  double,  two  in  one. 

394.  Economy.  Certain  sounds,  it  is  well  known,  ai-e 
much  more  frequent  than  others.     T  and  s  occur  the  of tenest. 

B  and  n  are  far  more  common  than  I,  /or  j.  The  signs 
which  represent  the  frequent  sounds  are,  as  a  rule,  easier  to 
execute  than  those  which  express  sounds  less  common.    For 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  209 

example,  t  is  written  more  quickly  than  r  or  sh,  and  s  than/, 
etc.  But  in  order  to  provide  a  still  more  expeditious  way  of 
writing  the  most  frequent  sounds,  a  series  of  adjunctive 
signs,  sometimes  called  the  short  alphabet,  has  been  devised. 
S  consequently  may  be  written  in  four  different  way;  by  tin; 
two  circles,  s  and  scz,  and  tlie  two  loops,  st  and  str;  t  likewise 
by  four  methods;  viz.,  the  two  loops,  the  lengthening  and 
the  halving  principles;  n  by  the  «,  shun,  eshun  and  in  hooks; 
r  by  the  r-hook,  str-loop,  and  lengthening  principle.  Another 
fact  which  still  better  illustrates  the  economy  of  the  system 
is  the  ingenious  method  of  vowel  indication,  which  consists 
in  skillfully  combining,  or  mixing,  the  signs  of  the  long  and 
short  consonant  alphabets,  for  the  purpose  of  expressing, 
without  having  to  write,  many  of  the  vowel  sounds.  The 
adaptability  of  the  system  as  a  means  to  an  end,  is  evidenced 
by  the  list  of  abbreviations  which  have  been  fitly  chosen  to 
express  those  common  words  and  phrases  of  which  the  bulk 
of  colloquial  speech  is  composed. 

395.  Adaptability.  The  fact  that  no  two  persons  write 
long-hand  alike,  that  the  different  styles  of  long-hand  are  as 
various  as  the  writers  are  multitudinous,  plainly  points  to 
the  truth  that  a  short-hand  system  may  be  well  adapted  to 
one,  or  a  few,  and  still  not  suited  to  all,  or  many.  For  con- 
venience, we  will  roughly  divide  short-hand  writers  into 
three  classes:  The  artistic,  the  swift,  and  the  m,edium.  The 
writer  belonging  to  the  Jirst  of  these  classes  has  a  good  eye, 
steady  nerv'e,  and  if  he  possesses  a  retentive  memory,  can 
attain  a  high  speed.  By  writing  a  small  hand,  and  making 
use  of  many  contractions  and  phrases,  he  makes  good  what 
he  lacks  in  natural  quickness. 

The  second  writes  a  large  hand,  but  is  so  exceedingly 
quick,  mentally  and  manually,  that  he  can  report  easily, 
forming  the  characters  quite  large,  phrasing  but  little,  and 
employing  a  limited  number  of  word-signs.  Abbreviating 
devices  do  not  interest  him,  because  he  does  not  need  them. 

The  third  combines  in  a  certain  measure  the  qualities  of 


210  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT HAXD. 

the  other  two.  The  great  majority  of  writers  are  comprised 
in  this  class.  Many  of  the  best  stenographers  come  nude  r 
the  first  or  second.  The  pliability,  so  to  speak,  of  the  Pitman 
sj'stem  is  shown  by  the  fact  that  persons  thus  variously  en- 
dowed may  readily  adapt  it  to  their  own  peculiar  faculty  or 
use.  It  is  worthy  of  mention  that  the  success  of  a  writer 
depends  in  a  measure  upon  the  particular  author  he  chooses 
to  follow.  Only  persons  who  belong  to  the  class  hrst  men- 
tioned should  attempt  Graham.  A  pei'son  of  the  class  next 
described  is  able  to  report  with  a  connective  vowel  system 
even,  such  as  Lindsley's  or  Pernin's.  In  a  few  cases  such 
pei'sons  have  attained  verbatim  speed  with  the  tedious  Cor- 
responding Style.  The  first  named  usually  prefers  a  pen, 
while  a  pencil  is  often  used  by  the  class  next  mentioned. 

396.  Mentality.  It  is  an  instructive  fact  that  the  pen 
produces,  in  the  aggregate,  a  longer  line  each  minute  when 
writing  long-hand,  than  Avhen  writing  short-hand.  A  com- 
parison of  the  two  methods  shows  that  writing  long-hand 
requires  more  labor  and  less  thought,  and  short-hand  more 
thought  and  less  labor.  The  first  operation  is  the  more  phy- 
sical, the  latter  is  more  mental.  Reporting  in  short-hand  is 
not  so  mucii  a  question  of  swift  muscular  action,  as  one  of 
how  to  keep  the  pen  moving.  Short-hand  differs  radically 
from  long-hand. in  this  impcn-tant  regard,  that  in  the  former, 
every  tick,  dot  or  stroke,  means  something;  hence,  thought 
is  required.  To  render  the  system  more  speedy,  it  is  not 
needful  to  curtail  the  length  of  line,  but  to  remove  whatever 
impedes  the  facility  with  which  it  may  be  executed.  It  is  a 
serious  mistake  to  adopt  numerous  small  and  delicate  char- 
acters for  the  sake  of  mere  lineal  brevity.  That  kind  are 
commonly  more  difficult  to  form,  and  hence  occasion  a  loss, 
instead  of  gain,  in  time  and  speed.  They  must  be  formed 
slowly  to  be  legible;  hence,  their  employment  either  retards 
speed,  or  endangers  accuracy.  No  outline  is  good,  if  writing 
it  swiftly  is  pretty  sure  to  mar  its  form.  For  this  reason  a 
long  outline  is  often  preferable  to  a  short  one. 


REPORTiyG  STYLE  OF  SIIORT-IIAND.  211 

397.  Context.  Some  persons  not  versed  in  short-hand 
object  to  the  method  as  unsafe,  since  context  must  be  relicnl 
upon  as  an  aid  to  legibility.  It  is  well  known,  however,  that 
law  proceedings,  public  speeches,  etc.,  are  rei^orted  every 
day,  and  reproduced  with  absolute  precision.  It  is  interest- 
ing to  note  a  fact  not  comnionly  observed,  that  context  is 
employed  to  fully  as  great  an  extent,  also,  in  reading  long- 
hand. Take  an  ordinary  hastily  written  manuscript,  and 
conceal  all  but  a  single  letter.  The  reader  cannot  in  half  the 
cases  determine  Avhat  it  is.  In  very  many  instances  an  en- 
tire word  could  not  even  be  guessed  at,  if  it  were  removed 
from  its  place  in  the  sentence.  What  is  context?  A  word 
mispronounced  in  conversation,  or  indistinctly  heard,  is 
readily  understood  by  the  hearer.  It  may  usually  be  supplied 
even  if  entirely  omitted.  This  is  an  hourly  occurrence.  The 
conjiection  is  a  reliable  guide.  To  illustrate  the  same  princi- 
ple, you  would  be  safe  in  assuming  that  a  man  were  an 
Irishman,  though  you  met  him  at  night,  providing  the 
occurrence  Avas  on  a  street  in  Dublin,  and  you  heard  his 
voice.  The  nationality  of  a  man,  the  family  of  an  animal, 
the  species  of  a  plant,  the  kind  of  a  liquid,  the  distance  of  an 
object,  are,  for  all  ordinary  purposes,  mentally  determined 
by  this  kind  of  indirect  or  circumstantial  evidence.  All 
things  within  our  knoAvledge  are  pervaded  hj  the  idea  of 
relation,  consistency,  sequence.  This  principle,  when  ap- 
plied to  language,  is  called  context.  When,  in  reading  print, 
the  mind  grasps  completely  the  meaning  of  the  Avords,  a 
conscious  expectancy  precedes  the  eye,  and  a  new  phrase  or 
sentence  is  half  read  before  it  is  seen.  In  the  affairs  of  life, 
and  in  the  work  of  a  student  in  particular,  tliis  perception 
gives  an  immense  advantage.  It  is  not  a  luatter  of  accident, 
but  of  culture,  mental  training.  The  short-hand  writer  who 
attends  strictly  to  the  meaning  of  what  he  writes  when  iiis 
notes  are  taken,  and  keeps  his  mind  rigidly  fixed  on  the  im- 
port of  the  language  when  he  transcribes,  will  accomplish 
infinitely  more  than  the  merely  mechanical  reporter.    This 


213  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

qualification  is,  indeed,  one  of  the  rare  secrets  of  success  in 
the  stenographic  pi'ofession. 

398.  Reading  by  Consonants  is  only  one  of  the  many 
applications  of  this  principle.  It  is  sur^jrising  the  extent  to 
which  the  trained  writer  is  able  to  indicate  the  vowel  ele- 
ments by  means  of  a  proper  choice,  and  apt  combination,  of 
the  long  and  short  signs.     Let  us  take  a  more  concise  view  of 

this  subject.    Long  ^— >?z  must  be  employed  in  V_;,^i^  funny, 

to  give  place  for  the  final  vowel;  while  in  V^  ^?<w  the  hook 
should  be  used,  because  no  vowel  follows  n.  The  first  word- 
form  V_j^|v  may  be  said  to  be  open,  i.  e.,  ojyen  to  vocalization; 

while  Vs  fu7i,  so  far  as  a  final  vowel  is  concerned,  is  con- 
sidered dosed.  Now,  all  consonant  outlines  are  open  more 
or  less,  and  the  extent  to  which  they  should  be  left  open  de- 
pends almost  entirely  upon  the  number  and  location  of  the 
vowels  which  any  given  word  contains.  An  outline  is  the 
more  02)e?i,  when  it  contains  a  greater  number  of  stems;  and 
the  more  closed,  depending  on  the  num))er  of  short  or  ad- 
junctive signs  used  in  it.  The  rule  is  to  write  the  word-form 
the  7no7'e  open,  the  greater  the  number  of  vowels  to  be  ex- 
pressed.   This  is,  moreover,  as  much  a  matter  of  manner  as 

of  extent.    To  illustrate,  in  ^)  Austin  (stn)  we  have  the  long 

s  and  the  short  7i;  while  in  (O  stony  (also  stn)  we  have  the 
short  s  and  the  long  7i.  Hence,  the  outline  must  be  Iclt  open 
at  those  partimilar  p)oints  where  the  voivels  occur.  Where  no 
vowels  occur,  the  outline  should,  if  possible,  be  closed. 
Then  the  I'eader,  the  momenthis  eye  meets  an  outline,  knows 
precisely  where  vowels  are,  and  where  they  are  not  to  be, 
supplied.  A  short-hand  sentence  may  be  compared  to  a 
string  of  different  colored  beads,  in  reading  which  a  vowel 
is  to  be  supplied  for  each  white  (or  blank)  bead.     So  far  as 


BE  PORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  213 

consonant  outlining  is  concerned,  the  principle  is  the  same 
whether  the  vowels  are  actually  written  or  not.  Thus 
-^~\_^  many  must  be  written  with  long  n;  otherwise  it 
would  be  mistaken  for  men.  Ordinarily  it  is  bad  practice  to 
write  a  word-form  too  brief  for  vocalization,  or  more  open 
than  is  required. 

The  vowel  element,  although  invisible,  is  in  reality  the 
m,ould  which  gives  shape  to  the  characters,  and  at  the  same 
time  the  keyhy  which  to  unlock  the  translation. 

Keeping  in  view  this  guiding  principle,  the  student  will 
understand  the  application  of  the  following 

399.  RULES 

governing  the  choice  between  long  and  short    consonant 
signs. 
1.    Circles.    If  5  is  the  first  consonant,  but  preceded  by  a 

vowel,  as  in    } escajye,  or  the  last  consonant,  followed  by 

a  vowel,  as  in  '      )   glossy;  or  if  in  any  case  it  is  preceded 

by  two  concurrent  vowels,  as  in         /   chaos,  the  long   )  s  is 

always  employed.    In  all  other  circumstances  use  the  circle. 

The  large  circle  is  nearly  always  used  for  ss,  sz,  etc.,  when 

the  intervening  vowel  is  short;  unless  there  are  no  other 

consonants  in  the  word,  as  J'  says,  or   J   sis. 

3.  L  AND  R  Hooks,  {a)  When  I  or  r  immediately  follows 
any  consonant  to  which  a  hook  may  be  attached,  use  the 
hook,  unless  the  r  may  be  better  expressed  by  the  str-loop. 
(6)  When  a  long  vowel  intervenes,  use  the  stem,  (c)  When 
a  short  vowel  intervenes,  use  the  hook,  except  in  words  of 
one  syllable,  when  the  stem  is  usually  employed. 

3.  F  AND  N  Hooks,  (a)  The/hook  is  attached  to  straight 
letters  only.  (6)  F  and  v  when  final,  notfolloived  by  a  voivel, 
are  expressed  by  hooks;  if  a  vowel  follows,  use  the  stem. 


214  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

(c)  When  occui'ring  in  the  middle  of  a  word,  use  the  hook, 
unless  angularity  requires  a  stem. 

4.  Loops,  {a)  The  consonants  si  or  zd,  when  consecutive, 
are  usually  expressed  by  the  loop.  (6)  When  oecurring 
medially,  the  loop  is  also  used  whenever  angularity  will  ad- 
mit; c.  gr.,  /^  suggestion;  hut  \^  vested,  wot  Ri  (c)  If  s^ 
is  preceded  by  an  initial,  or  followed  by  a  final  vowel,  the 
loop  cannot  be  used;  e.  g.,    j  testy,  not      o       {d)    Tlie  str 

loop  is  almost  invarial3ly  employed  at  the  end  of  words, 
rarely  ever  initially  or  medially. 

5.  Lengthened  Curves.  Some  restrictions  are  placed 
upon  the  use  of  lengthened  letters,  (a)  If  a  word-form  con- 
taining a  lengthened  curve  will  admit  of  two  readings,  with 

the  liability  of  conflict,  as  \  father,  fetter,  the  less  com- 
mon word  must  be  written  otherwise.  (6)  It  is  customary 
in  cases  of  conflict  to  give  the  preference  to  words  which 
contain,  1st,  tr,  2nd,  dr,  3rd,  thr.    Examples,  ^      "-\  matter, 


madder,  \    order,     ^)    Arthur,    /         •  letter, 


()  leather,  etc.    (c)    The  safest  plan  is  to  employ  this  prin- 
ciple in  connection  with  those  words  only  which  are  quite 
common,     {d)    This  principle  is  used  very  sparingly  in  out- 
lining proper  names. 
6.    Halving,    (a)    All  letters  are  commonly  halved  except 

^  ^>  ^  2/)  ^  "^P  and  -^-^  ng.  Of  these  the  last  two  are 
shortened  in  a  number  of  words;  the  first  in  three  or  four 
cases  only,  {b)  (^  I,  '~\  r,  ^—  m  and  ■^^  n,  are  shaded 
when  shortened  to  add  d.  (c)  When  a  stem  to  which  a  cir- 
cle is  suflixed  is  halved,  t  is  invariably  read  before  s.     (d)  Any 


BEPORTINO  STYLE  OF  SHORT-UAKD.  215 

liooked  stem  may  be  halved,  t  being  sounded  after  all  the 

/looks  have  been  read,  (e)  Shoi'tened  /  7'ay  is  never  used 
standing-  alone.  (./)  When  t  is  followed  by  a  final  vowel,  it 
cannot  be  expressed  by  the  shortening  principle,  (g)  When 
a  word  of  two  syllables  contains  only  one  consonant  besides 
t,  the  halving  principle  is  not  employed.  (A)  The  principle 
is  not  applied  in  cases  where  the  stem,  by  being  shortened, 

is  thus  rendered  indetinitc,  as  shortened  /;  in  v —  effect 
In  this  case  tlie  resulting  word-form  lias  tlie  appearance  of 
lengthened/.  (0  Ordinarily,  a  consonant  in  one  syllable  is 
not  halved  to  express  a  t  which  belongs  to  a  following  syllable. 
400.  Fig.  1.  Fig.  3. 


Right  curve.  Left  curve. 

Referring  to  Fig.  1,  it  will  be  seen  that  in  executing  it  the 
first  stroke  is  the  downward  ^  r;  following  this  w^e  have 
^  sh;  afterwards  (^  Z,  r-^  m,  )  s,  etc.  These  are  right 
curves,  that  is,  arcs  which  are  the  components  of  a  circle 
written  to  the  right.  A  full  list  of  right  curves  is  as  follows: 
cS,  ish,  lay,  ar,  m,  z,  zh,  w,  and  mp.  List  of  left  curves:  /,  ith, 
n,  el,  shay,  v,  the,  ng,  and  y. 

401.  Those  words  whose  stems  are  all  curves  of  one  kind, 
that  is,  either  left  or  right,  are  more  easily  written  than 
mixed  words,  whose  stems  are  partly  right  and  partly  left. 
The  only  exception  is  what  is  called  the  compound  curve; 

e.  g.,   v_^->   name,  V^^  far,    _y      shell,    y--^^^  many,  etc. 

Illustrative  words  having  left  outlines:  V^  faith, 
^"'V.  enough,  ^..^^  q    ^   venison,  \o  vessel.    Eight  outlines: 


216  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

<—~J      ynail,  r  lame,  J  share,     }n\  resume^  {^  also. 


The  Avords  given  are  more  facile  than  the  mixed  outlines, 
famous,      v^y^.^^      uoiloving,      V^^     facility, 


thump. 

It  is  according  to  a  dynamical  law  that  when  the  pen  has 
struck  a  curve  in  a  certain  direction,  either  right  or  left,  the 
imi)etus  given  it  will  carry  it  forward  more  easily  in  the 
same  direction,  while  a  change  of  direction  incurs  a  sliglit 
loss  of  energy,  and  hence  of  time  and  speed.  This  priueiph' 
is  general  in  its  application,  and  is  employed  quite  exten- 
sively in  the  construction  of  word-forms.  The  choice  be- 
tween el  and  lay,  ish  and  shay,  and  the  location  of  the  shun- 
hook,  are  usually  decided  by  it. 

403.  The  principle  of  right  and  left  applies,  in  fact,  to  all 
short-hand  characters  which  are  not  simple,  unmodified 
straight  stems,  as^^p,  I  I,  /  J-  To  illustrate,  the  stem 
I    st  may  be  classed  as  left,  because  the  circle  is  struck  in 

that  way;  whereas  ]  str  is  right,  tlie  cii'cle  being  written  in 
the  reverse  direction.  Figs.  3,  4,  5  and  6  show  movements 
of  which  the  right  and  left  circles  are  i^arts. 

Fig.  3.  Fig.  4.  Fig.  5.  Fig.  6. 

^  ^  ^-  (§_ 

Right.  Left.  Right.  Left. 

Hence,  natm^ally,  in  swift  writing  there  is  a  tendency  to 
bend  the  t  in  str  slightly  to  the  right,  making  it  appear  like 

)  s.    This  effect  is  quite  unavoidable  in  very  rapid  execution . 
But  an  opposite  circle  added  to  either  curve  counteracts 

this  tendency.    Thus,  in    J   stns,  or  \  strs,  t  maintains  its 

straightness,  no  matter  how  quickly  the  characters  arc 
written. 

The  stems    \  tr  and  [    tl  are  also  right  and  left,  for  the 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


m 


reason  that  the  r  and  I  hooks  are  parts  of  right  and  left  cir- 
cles.   All  r-hook  stems  are  right,  and  all  1-hook  stems  left. 
Also,  all  n-hook  straight  stems  are  right,  and  f-hook  stems 
left.    The  principle  applies  to  all  hooks,  loops  and  circles. 
Examples  of  right  stems: 


J    ^    y    °^ 

Examples  of  left  stems: 

/  ^  ^       ^  ^ 

Examples  of  componnd  stems: 

Difficult  to  execute: 
Easy  to  execute: 
Difficult  to  execute: 


1      ,^-=       % 


e D 


«^^ 


Easy  to  execute: 


403. 


APPLICATIONS. 


(a)  J?Z,  a  left  curve,  should  be  used  after  the  left  curves 
/  and  n;  while  lay,  a  right  curve,  should  be  used  after  the 
right  curves  r,  m,  and  s.  (6)  Ar,  a  right  curve,  should  be 
used  after  the  right  curves  lay,  w,  and  ish.  (c)  Shay,  a  left 
curve,  is  more  easily  written  after/ than  the  right  curve  ish. 

404.  Write:  Fadge  dovetail  in  loco  homologous  paucity 
qmd  pro  quo  mediocre  nullification  confoundedly  pro 
tanto  ne  plus  ultra  subaltern  dequantitate  supernumerary 
residual  subtrahend  rive  craunch  amalgamate  in  toto 
cap-a-pie  discumbency  flagelliform  hatchet-faced  baluster 
terra  firma  epigastric  hypochondriac  cornea  oesophagus 
pylorus    pulmonary    ventricle    tricuspid    larynx    clavicle 


218  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT  HAND. 


phalanges  subclavian  molar  cerebellum  intercostal  bi- 
cuspid pliiloprogenitiveness  bronchial  pericordium  thorax 
vertebras  spinal-column  pettifogger  eureka  cyclopedia 
ignoramus  antiquarian  ex-ollicio  clodhopper  screwdriver 
pharmacopolist  helter-skelter  pilaster  cuspidate  navicular 
pentapetalous  sycamore. 

405.  EXERCISE  38.  _ 

{To  he  phrased  by  the  student.) 

THE    "immortal  NINE." 

Owing  to  serious  illness,  resulting  from  the  excitement  and 
overwork  of  the  canvass,  1  did  not  reach  Washington  till  the 
lyth  of  I>ecember — just  in  time  to  cast  my  vote  for  speaker 
on  the  fifty-sixth  ballot  in  this  first  important  "  dead-lock  " 
in  the  organization  of  the  House.  With  the  exception  of  two 
Indiana  members,  1  had  no  personal  acquaiiitance  in  either 
branch  of  Congress,  and,  on  entering  the  old  Hall  of  llepre- 
sentatives,  my  first  thought  was  to  find  tlie  Free  boil  Mem- 
bers, whose  political  fortunes  and  experience  had  been  so 
similar  to  my  own.  The  seat  of  Mr.  Giddings  was  pointed 
out  to  me  in  the  north-west  corner  of  the  Hall,  where  I  found 
the  stalwart  champion  of  fi-ee  speech  busy  witli  his  pen.  He 
received  me  with  evident  cordiality,  and  at  once  sent  a  page 
for  the  other  free  soil  members.  ISoon  the  "Immortal  Nine," 
as  we  were  often  sportively  styled,  were  all  together:  David 
Wilmot,  of  Pennsylvania,  then  famous  as  the  author  of  the 
"proviso,"  sliort  and  corpulent  in  person,  and  emphatic  in 
speech;  Preston  King,  of  New  York,  with  his  still  more  re- 
markable rotunility  of  belt,  and  a  face  beaming  with  good 
humor;  the  eccentric  and  witty  "Jo  Root,"  of  Ohio,  always 
ready  to  break  a  lance  witli  the  slave-holders;  Charles  Allen, 
of  Massachusetts,  the  qui(!t,  dignified,  clear-headed  and 
genial  gentleman,  but  a  good  fighter  and  the  unfiinching 
enemy  of  slavery;  Charles  Durkee,  of  Wisconsin,  the  fine- 
looking  and  large-hearted  philanthropist,  whose  enthusiasm 
never  cooled;  Amos  Tuck,  of  New  Hampshire,  amiable  and 
somewhat  feminine  in  appearance,  but  firm  in  purpose;  John 
W.  Howe,  of  Pennsylvania,  with  a  face  radiant  with  smiles 
and  good  will,  and  full  of  anti-slavery  fervor;  and  Joshua  R. 
Giddings,  of  Ohio,  with  his  broad  shoulders,  giant  frame, 
unquenchable  love  of  freedom,  and  almost  as  familiar  with 
tlie  slavery  question  in  all  its  aspects  as  lie  was  with  the 
al])habet.    These,  all  gone  now  to  their  reckoning,  were  the 


REPORTiya  STYLE  OF  SHORT-IIAXn. 


219 


elect  of  freedom  in  the  lower  branch  of  this  memorable  Con- 
gress. They  all  greeteil  me  warmly,  and  the  more  so,  per- 
haps, because  my  reported  illness  and  doubtful  recovery  had 
awakened  a  peculiar  intei^st  in  my  fortune  at  that  time,  oa 
account  of  the  political  situation,  and  the  possible  signifi- 
cance of  a  single  vote.  John  P.  Hale  happened  to  enter  the 
hall  during  these  congratulations,  and  still  further  lighted 
up  the  scene  by  his  jollj'  presence;  while  Dr.  Bailey,  of  the 
"National  Era,"  also  joined  in  the  general  welcome,  and  at 
once  contirmed  all  the  good  opinions  I  had  formed  of  tliis 
courageous  and  single-minded  friend  of  the  slave.  I  Avas 
delighted  with  all  my  brethren,  and  at  once  entered  fully 
into  their  plans  and  counsels. — Selected  from  the  "  Political 
Recollections"  of  George  W.  Julian. 

(466—5:30—3:30.) 


406. 


TRANSLATE. 


^ 


C 


^. 


13/86. 


J 


V 


r\  o<i 


LESSON  XXXIX. 

NAMES  AND   NEGATIVES. 

407.  Key.  1.  ABCDi;iFGHIJKLM. 
2.  NOPQRSTUVWXYZ.  3.  Burns  Barnes 
Morse  Morris  Paul  Peel  Boyle  Bailey  Greely  Gurley. 
4.  Beecher  Holmes  Carlyle  Cicero  Gough  Hughes  Karnes 
Moore.  5.  Steele  Smiles  Clay  Jones  Mirabeau  Guizot 
Byron  Hume.  6.  Benjamin  Brewster  Alexander  Arnold 
Bancroft  Chesterfield  Mitchell  Sherman.  7.  Shakespeare 
Webster  Emerson  Jeflerson  Hawthorne  Napoleon  Demos- 
thenes. 8.  Oakland  Omaha  Boulder  Cedar-Rapids  Des- 
Moines  Wheeling  Topeka.  9.  Kansas-City  Chambersburg 
Boston  Clinton  Waterbni'g  San-Francisco  Cleveland. 
Translate  Ls  10-13.  14.  Mortal  immortal  moral  immoral 
legal  illegal  regular  irregular.  15.  Immovable  illiberal 
irredeemable    immutable   unnecessary   else -than  less-than. 

proper  names. 

408.  The  following  sentence  will  be  found  slightly  ambig- 
uous:        ^V^       J  i       J      v, ^         L-       "^^^ 

/^  ^ .      ''       V— ^  X         It   may  be    translated, 

"The  Monthly's  Table  of  Contents  contains  another  of  the 
dozen  poems,  also  an  article  on  bacon."  For  "dozen"  the 
reader  may  insert  "  Addison,"  and  write  "Bacon"  with  a 
capital.  Tiie  correct  meaning  will  then  appear.  Here  the 
writer  should  have  vocalized  Bacon,  and  underscored  Addi- 
son, as  well  as  MontliJy''s.  Also,  if  time  permitted,  Addison 
should  have  been  interlined  in  long-hand.  Proper  names 
are  arbitrary,  as  to  the  manner  both  of  spelling  and  jironun- 
ciation.  The  reporter  hears  new  ones  every  day,  and  they 
are  likely  to  give  him  some  trouble.  This  is  partly  on  ac- 
count of  the  fact  that  names,  considered  merely  as  words, 
have  a  meaning,  as  Brow7i,  Bacon,  Bice,  etc.  This  meaning 
has  no  connection,  however,  with  the  subject  matter;  but  the 
reader  is  apt  at  times  to  confound  common   and  proper 

—220— 


plate  39. 

x.\  )  I  •  V  _  /  '  /—  r  ^ 


11  '^     ^V^ 


L^    <i^    (TT^^    ^     /-<?-vi      Jj 


13 


O^ 


14     c-^ 


WORD-FOBMS, 


^ 


15 


rv-^-A^^f  f 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


nouns,  if  the  outlines  foi'  the  latter  are  not  chai-acterized  in 
some  way.  The  underscore,  whicli  signities  primarily  that  a 
capital  is  to  be  used,  serves  this  purpose.  There  are  many 
proper  names,  however,  which,  on  account  of  their  meagre 
outlines,  I'equire  vocalization;  for  example,  Steele,  Clay, 
Hume,  etc.  (L  5.)  The  underscore,  however,  is  not  neces- 
sary when  the  name  is  vocalized.  (Ls  4  and  5.)  Vowels  are 
always  to  be  used  if  the  outline  is  in  the  least  ambiguous;  as, 
for  example,  k-pr,  which  would  signify  either  Gowper,  or 
Cooper.    L  3. 

409.  If  a  proper  name  occurs  a  number  of  times  in  a  single 
report,  the  writer,  particularly  if  pressed  for  time,  may  omit 
these  features,  writing  the  consonant  outline  merely.  Every 
name  that  is  in  any  way  peculiar  should,  when  practicable, 
be  written  in  both  long-hand  and  short-hand  the  first  time  it 
occurs  in  any  report.  The  long-hand  gives  the  sjiellincj, 
which  the  short-hand  does  not  do.  The  short-hand,  however, 
gives  the  pronunciation ,  to  which  it  is  well  known  the  long- 
hand often  gives  hardly  a  clue.    If  in  Court,  for  instance, 

Miss  .___/^    X  should  be  called  as  a  witness,  and  her 

name  written  in  short-hand  only,  the  proper  spelling,  Coralie 
Both,  would  not  be  known  when  the  notes  came  to  be  tran- 
scribed. In  proper  names  both  the  spelling  a.xwXpi'^onnnciation 
are  important,  and  the  name  is  not  expressed  entirely  unless 
it  is  written  by  both  methods.  When  the  spelling  cannot  be 
had,  the  vowels  should  be  written  very  carefully. 

410.  Initial  letters  are  written  in  the  manner  indicated 
in  Ls  1  and  3.  It  is  entirely  unnecessary,  and  hence  im- 
proper, in  writing  names,  to  place  a  period,  that  is,  the  small 
cross,  after  each  initial  letter.  Names  that  are  so  common 
as  to  be  familiar  to  every  one,  as  'New  York  City,  Smith, 
Chicago,  London,  etc.,  need  not  be  either  vocalized  or  under- 
scored. 

411.  Names  are  so  numerous  that  a  vocabulary  of  them 
could  not  well  be  memorized;  and  this  would  be  unnecessary, 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  223 

since  the  practical  writer  may  readily  invent  sufficiently  in- 
telligible outlines  for  the  mostdillicult  of  them.  The  halving 
principle,  circles,  loops,  and  other  adjunctive  signs,  should 
be  employed  more  sparingly  than  when  writing  common 
words. 

POSITIVE   AND   NEGATIVE. 

413.    The  positive   words,  sane,   temperate,  piety,  tiscful, 
proper,  are  expressed  by  the  characters  q_j^  L—^  \ 

The  negatives  are  wi'itten  ^--Jli/  insane,        U-^  intemperate, 
impiety,     ^v^    useless,     '^^^^\.       irnp)roper.    In    most 

cases,  as  here,  the  negative  is  expressed  by  a  prefix  or  affix 
attached  to  the  positive  word-form.  To  this  rule  some  ex- 
ceptions are  made  in  favor  of  positives  which  begin  Avith 
Z,  r,  m  or  n,  negatives  of  which  are  formed  by  prefixing  il, 
ir,  im  and  uu,  as  in  legal,  illegal,  regular,  irregular,  moral, 
immoral,  necessary,  unnecessary .  See  Ls  14  and  15.  It  will 
be  observed  that  while  a  distiuct  syllable  is  prefixed  in  each 
case,  the  consonant  elements  are  not  increased;  for  example, 
immoral  is  simply  moral  with  the  short  i  sounded  before  it. 
There  are  three  different  methods  of  distinguishing  between 
positives  and  negatives  of  this  class  of  words: 

413.  1.  By  writing  the  negative  in  the  fi,rst  position,  and 
the  positive  in  the  second,  as  in  inortal,  immortal,  L  14. 
Illustrative  words:  Material  iramaterial  morality  immor- 
ality materialism  immaterialism   moderate  immoderate. 

414.  2.  By  vising  uiJ-strokes  for  the  positive,  and  down- 
strokes  tor  the  negative,  as  in.  legal,  illegal.  Write:  Legiti- 
mate illegitimate  logical  illogical  repressible  irrepressible 
resistible  irresistible  retrievable  irretrievable. 

415.  3.  By  reduplicating  the  initial  consonant,  as  in  im- 
movable,  illiberal.    L  5. 


224  EEPORTINO  STYLE  OF  SHORTHAND. 

416.  4.  Vowels  also  are  sometimes  employed  for  this 
purpose  in  phrases,  as  in  dse-tluni,  less-t/noi.    L  15. 

417.  Write:  Measurable  immeasurable  memorial  im- 
memorial uerve  unnerve  natural  unnatural  refutable 
irrefutable  reverent  irreverent  revocable  irrevocable 
neighborly    unneighborly. 

PHRASES. 

418.  What-do-you-mean  we-shall-do  what-extent  what- 
I-am  what-I-desire  wliat-I-find  what-I-meant  wliat-I-said 
wliat-shall-be  what-was-necessary  what-would-be-said  what- 
would-be-the  which-has-been  who-would-know  why-is-it 
will-be-satistied  will-not-be-taken  will-not-get-it  would- 
accept  would-not-be-respectable  v^ould-not-be-responsible 
a-great-many-of-his  ahead-of-you  ahead-of-your  all-we-wish 
another-advantage  another-day  any-more-than-I-can  any- 
way-you-can  any-vvay-at-all  because-you-have  because-we- 
have  because-we-do  because-it-can-be  consider-their  con- 
sider-your  consider-the-matter  consider-that-matter  entire- 
business  entire-contx'ol  entire-season  entire-year  entirely- 
different  entirely-in-their-hands  entirely- (a)-matter  entire- 
ly-in-their-possession  for-a-long-time  long-while  look-into- 
the-matter  satisfactory-way  several-months-ago  see-what- 
can-be-done  shall-be-pleased  several-years-ago  short-pei'iod 
take-advantage  take-this-occasion  take-this-matter  when- 
ever-it-is-convenlent. 

419.  EXERCISE  39. 

"Vocalize:  Beaumont  Blair  Colton  Congreve  Dryden 
Erasmus  Hale  Hazlitt  Knox  Martineau  Pope  Rousseau 
Seneca  Shelley  Taylor;  (without  vowels)  Andrews  Aris- 
totle Bentham  Bentley  Berkeley  Blackstone  Bolingbroke 
Burgess  Burton  Carleton  Cervantes  Chalmers  Channing 
Chirendon  Cobden  Coleridge  Cromwell  Descartes  Diogenes 
Douglas  Drummond  Erskine  Evans  Fenelon  Francis 
Fuller  Gibbon  Goldsmith  Harrington  Herbert  Hogarth 
Hopkins  Hudson  Huxley  Irving  Johnson  Juvenal  Kings- 


REPORTIXQ  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  225 

ley  Lambert  Lessiiig  Longfellow  Macaulay  Macken/ie 
Mason  Mereditli  Miller  Morgan  Nelson  Parker  Pascal 
Petrarch  Plutarch  Porter  Roljertson  Robinson  Rogers 
Raskin  Russell  Sheridan  Spurgeon  Sterling  Strickland 
Tennyson  Turner  Voltaire  Warburtoa  Warren  Wesley 
Whipple  Wordsworth. 

Vocalize:  Albany  Ann  Arbor  Augusta  Austin  Beloit 
Dayton  Detroit  Dover  Elmira  Hobokeu  Houston  Kala- 
mazoo La  Crosse  Mobile  Peoria  Racine  Salem  Savannah 
Syracuse  Toledo  Troy;  (without  vowels)  Ashland  Atchison 
Athens  Atlanta  Baltimore  Battle  Creek  Belfast  Belleville 
Bethlehem  Bowling  Green  Bridgepni-t  Brooklj'u  Buflalo 
Cambridge  Camden  Canton  Carbondale  Central  City 
Chattanooga  Chillicothe  Columbia  Columbus  Concord 
Council  Bluffs  Crawfordsville  Dallas  Danville  Davenport 
Dubuque  Easton  East  Saginaw  Elgin  Evanston  Fall-River 
Fitchburg  Fond-du-Lac  Fort  Wayne  Galesburgh  Galveston 
Georgetown  Grand  Rapids  Hannibal  Hartford  Haverhill 
Holyoke  Hj'de  Park  Indianapolis  Jackson  Jersey  City 
Keokuk  Lafayette  Lancaster  Lawrence  Leavenworth 
Lewiston  Lexington  Little  Rock  Lockport  Memphis  Mer- 
Iden  Milwaukee  Minneapolis  Montgomery  Muskegan 
Muscatine  Nashville  Newark  New  Bedford  New  Haven 
New  Orleans  Norwich  Patterson  Pawtucket  Petersburgh 
Philadelphia  Pittsburg  Portsmouth  Pouglikeepsie  Provi- 
dence Quincy  Richmond  Rochester  Rock  Island  Sacra- 
mento Salt  Lake  City  San  Antonio  Scranton  Shenandoah 
Springfield  St.  Joseph  St.  Louis  St.  Paul  Terre  Haute 
Trenton  Utica  Vicksburg  Waltham  Washington  Wil- 
mington Worcester.  (211—3:30—2:30.) 

420.  New-York,  Dec.  5th,  1886. 

Mr.  Chas.  C.  French, 

Dear-Sir: — With  cordial  acknowledgments  for-past  favors, 
the-uudersigned  respectfully  solicits  contributions  of-private- 
ly  received  marine  and-commercial  news. 

Our-members,  rej^resenting  as-they-do  most  of-the  ocean 
commerce  of-the  country,  are  daHy  receiving  from-their  cor- 


226  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SIWRT-HAXD. 

respondents  a-laro^e  mass  of  advanced  marine  information — 
arrivals,  sailings,  charters,  clearances,  disasters,  vessels  in 
port,  etc. 

The  Maritime  Exchange,  as-the-chief  bureau  of-marine 
news  in-tlie  United-States,  is  naturally  the-central  point 
wliere-such  early  intelligeuce  should-be  collecteil  and-classi- 
lied.  Its  daily  accumulation  there  will-not  only  bene  lit  the- 
members  at-large,  but  strengthen  the-resources  of-the  asso- 
ciation, in-which  each-member  is  interested.  Its  subsequent 
publication  will,  moreover,  prove  a-boon  to-the  families  of- 
the  crews. 

Blanks  to-f  acilitate  reports  will-be  gladly  sent  on-applica- 
tion. 

By-order  of-the  board-(of)-directors. 

F.  W.  Houghton, 
Superintendent. 


(150—1:45—1.) 


431.  TRANSLATE. 


Note. — As  a  matter  of  convenience,  and  for  the  purpose 
of  equalizing  the  speed  in  dictating,  the  remaining  Exercises 
are  marked  in  the  following  manner:  Full-faced  figures, 
(1),  (2),  (3),  etc.,  are  used  to  set  off  portions  of  the  Exercise 
Avhich  are  to  be  read  m  the  same  number  of  minutes.  The 
work  of  a  minute,  also,  is  subdivided  into  quarters  by  accents, 
thus,  first  quarter';  second  quarter'';  third  quarter'". 


LESSON  XL. 

EXPEDIENTS  AND  PUNCTUATION. 

423.  What  is  termed  an  exj)cdient  belongs  properly  to 
phraseography.  It  is  a  very  special,  and  somewhat  arbitrary, 
mode  of  phrasing.  The  utility  of  the  expedients  here  pre- 
sented is  couhned  mainly  to  a  few  particular  branches  of 
reporting,  but  may  occasionally  be  emi)loyed  by  evei"y  writer. 

423.  1.  Of-tue.  These  words  may  be  expressed  by  placing 
two  word-forms  in  close  proximity  to  each  other.  This  ex- 
pedient, however,  should  be  u.sed  only  ft)r  the  expression  of 
very  common  phrases,  or  groups  of  words,  such  as,  wcallh- 
of-the-iialio7i,importance-of-ihe-subJect,  etc.  SeeLl.  Write: 
Season-of-the-3'ear  day-of-t he-week  sijeech-of-the-president 
day-of-the-month  question-of-the-day  subject-of-the-debate. 

424.  2.  Fkom-to.  The  prepositions  from  and  to,  when 
they  occur  in  the  class  of  phrases  exemplified  in  L.2,  are  ex- 
pressed by  the  fact  of  proximity,  similar  to  L  1.  The  essen- 
tial ditFerence  between  these  two  expedients  is  that  in  L  1  the 
two  words  are  different  from  each  other,  while  in  L  2  it  is  al- 
ways the  same  word  repeated.  Write:  From-street-to-street 
from-State-to- State  from -sea-to-sea  from-door-to-door. 

425.  3.  After.  Writing  one  character  near  and  some- 
what below  the  preceding  signifies  that  after  is  to  be  supplied, 
as  in  day -after-day,  L  3. 

426.  4.  By.  Writing  a  word  somewhat  above,  but  near 
the  preceding,  indicates  that  by  is  to  be  supplied,  as  in  L  4. 
In  Ls  3  and  4  it  will  be  observed  that  the  second  word  of  each 
phrase  is  alwaj's  a  repetition  of  the  first. 

427.  5.  Scriptural  AND  Other  References.  Ihe  Book 
or  Yolume  is  indicated  by  a  figure  in  tlie  first  position,  the 
Chapter  by  a  figure  in  the  second  position,  and  the  Verse  or 
Section  by  a  figure  in  the  third  j^osition.  See  L  5.  This  ex- 
pedient is  quite  essential  in  some  branches  of  reporting. 
Write:  Exodus,  13  chap.,  8  verse;  2  Kings,  3  chap.,  16  verse; 
Matthew,  6  chap.,  6  verse;  Carlyle's  French  Revolution,  vol. 
3,  chap.  9,  sec.  12;  (referring  to  law  reports)  80  New  York, 

page  160,  paragraph  3. 

—227- 


228  REPORTIXCr  STYLE  OF  SHORTHAND. 


428.  6.  Society.  The  letter  )  •s%  struck  through  the  pre- 
ceding stem,  signifies  6'oa£%.  SeeL6.  Write:  Geological- 
Society  Philological-Society  Sewing-Society  Literary-So 
ci(ity  American-Bible-Society  American-Tract-Society  As- 
tronomical-Society Geographical-Society  Foreign-Mission- 
ary-Society. 

429.  7.  Company.  In  a  similar  manner  an  intei'secting 
—  A;  indicates  Comimny.  L  7.  Write:  American-Oil-Com- 
pany Rolling-Mill-Company  Manufacturing-Company  Amer- 
ican-Express-Company British-Americau-Fur-Company 
Mexican-Central-Railroad-Company. 

430.  8.  Association.  An  intersecting  _J  sh  is  employed 
to  ex'^i-ess  Association.  See  L  8.  Write:  Ticket-Brokers'- 
Association  State-Editorial-Association  Bankers'-Association 
Firemen's  Association  County-Fair- Association. 

431.  Key.  1.  Hour-of-the-day  wealth-of-the-nation  im- 
portance-of-the-subject  solemnitj'-of-the-occasion  death-of- 
the-king  merits-of-the-case.  2.  From-house-to-house  from- 
town-to-town  from-place-to-place  from-day-to-day  from- 
time-to-time  from-hand-to-hand  from-year-to-year.  3.  Day- 
after-day  week-after-week  month-after-month  State-after- 
State  year-after-year  volufne-after-volume  hour-after-hour. 
4.  Day-by-day  page-by-page  word-by-word  sentence-by- 
sentence  step-by-step  Inch-by-inch.  5.  1  Corinthians,  3 
chap.,  16  v.;  2  Peter,  1  chap!,  7  A'.;  Gibbon's  History,  vol.  3, 
chap.  40,  sec.  4.  6.  Ph(Mietic-Society  Historical-Society 
Medical-Society  Stenographic-Society  Philosophical-Society 
Short-Hand-Society.  7.  Railroad-Company  Lumber-Com- 
pany Coal-Company  Mining-Company  Publishing-Company 
Canal-Company.  8.  Iron-Dealer's-Association  Liquor- 
Dealer's- Association  Young-Men's-Chi-istian-Assoeiation 
American-Ball-Club-Association  Teachers'-Association. 
Translate  Ls  9-13. 

Phrases.  14.  First-instant  for-some-time-past  official- 
correspondence  sent-by-last-mail  telegraphic-communica- 
tions.    15.    Your-last-letter    because-you-can-be    monthly- 


Plate  40* 


1  ..^.1 a^   ^\ 


Po     ^-  ^ 


\ 
/ 


<i^_p 


e.^v_P 


y 


. 


^ .... 


^ 16  "f 


2 


6 


A.     ^/-> 


-.V  3 

1 ....  )  ^  40..... 

7  4 


-^A. 


^ 


TRANSLATE.  \  ^  ^ 


PHRASES. 


14    (^       ^^^"^'"X 


15 


\ 


'^, 


7-/ :^€- 


230 


EEPORTIXG  STYLE  OF  SIIORT-HAXD. 


Statement    much-as-we-cau    much-larger    much-worse-thau 
real-estate. 


43J. 


MARKS   OF   PUNCTUATION. 


Periods. 


X 

y 

X 

i     Semi-colon. 
X      Interrogation. 
Exclamation. 

Parenthesis. 

Dash. 
■%:    Asterisk. 


^    Underscore. 
~     Hyphen. 

Quotation. 
Laughter. 

-     Italics, 
^s    Capitals. 


Accent. 


(^^~^    Parenthetical  Ellipse. 

433.  The  dot,  or  long-hand  period,  cannot  be  employed  in 
short-hand  on  account  of  conllict  with  the  dot-sign  for  a  and 
and.  Partly  to  avoid  such  conflict,  and  partly  to  secure 
more  facile  signs,  punctuation  marks  diflfering  somewhat 
from  those  in  common  use  are  emploj-ed  in  short-hand.  As 
to  the  period,  the  reporter  may  choose  for  Iiimself .  The  first 
is  the  most  artistic,  but  the  second  and  third  are  quicker 
Avritten.  The  sign  for  laughter  is  made  use  of  in  reporting 
speeches  and  conventions.  To  avoid  conflict  with  the  hori- 
zontal marks  used  in  long-hand,  t-wo  and  three  lines  (instead 
of  one  and  two),  are  emploj-ed  in  reporting  to  signify  italics 
and  capitals.  The  accent  mark,  written  just  below  any  pai't 
of  an  outline,  signifies  that  the  syllable  so  marked  is  to  be 
accented,  or  italicised,  as  in  the  sentences: 

"  V     p  ^  I, 

II 
"  I  said  ?<?z-necessary,  not  necessary." 

11    J     ^^ 


BEPOBTING  STYLE  OF  SffOBT-HAXD.  231 

'  'She  softly  exclaimed,  Good-?zessr'    The  parenthetical  ellipse 
is  emploji'd  when  a  few  words  onl}'  are  to  be  enclosed. 

434.  These  marks  are  used  mostly  iu  correspondence  and 
composition ;  only  to  a  limited  extent  in  actual  reporting. 
In  rapidly  taken  notes  the  serai-colon  is  indicated  by  a  space 
of  an  inch  or  more.  When  notes  are  taken  at  verbatim 
speed,  little  opportunity  is  allowed  for  punctuating,  the  only 
practical  method  l)eiiig  to  leave  spaces  to  corres])ond  with 
the  speaker's  i)auses,  and  insert  the  proper  marks  afterwards 
when  transcribing. 

PHRASES. 

435.  After-train-time  be-good-enough  by-wire  cannot- 
account  cannot-answer  cannot-do-so  fii'st-intimation  fur- 
ther-particulars further-reply  great-delay  I-am-in-corre- 
pondence  I-have-sent-it  I-have-telegraphed  in-certain-cases 
in-my-letter  little-danger  many-circumstances  money- 
market  my-letter  send-a-telegram  no-account  no-intention 
official-statement  other-circumstances  referring-to-my-letter 
sample-cases  short-notice  since-received  state-reasons  to- 
have-that-sent  under-the-circumstances  under-the-circum- 
stances-(of-the)-case  under-peculiar-circumstances  very- 
correct  very-good-character  very-important-letter  we-are- 
in-correspondence  we-are-in-communication  we-have-sent 
your-letter  your-reply  your-telegram. 

436.  EXERCISE  40. 

Nem'-York,  August  1,  1888. 

W.  H.  Powers,  Esq.,  Pasgr.  Agt.  W.,  St.  L.  &  P.  R.  R., 
Toledo,  O. 

Dear- Sir/ — The-efForts  of -this  committee  looking  to -reform 
in-the-methods  of-conducting  passenger  business  have-been 
to-a-certain-extent  unfavorably  aflected,'"  and  in-some-cases 
neutralized  by-the  action  of-roads  beyond-the  territory 
traversed  by-their-lines,  who  continue  to  pay  large  sums'''''' 
in  commissions  to-agents  and-ticket  brokers  in-the-east, 
whereby  tlie-proper  distribution  of-the  business  between-our- 
own  companies  is  threatened  (1). 


282  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

The-time  has  arrived  when,  on-account-of-the  peculiar 
geograpliical  aspects  of-the  territory  traversed  by-these 
lines,  it-is-impossible''  for-themto-carry  out  the-reform  they- 
have  attempted,  with-justice  to-each-other,  so-h)ng-as-the 
lines  in-the-west  and-south''''  beyond-the-territory  referred 
to  continue  to-pursue  their-present  methods. 

The-committee  believe  that  connecting  lines  are  anxious 
to-be  reli<>ved^'''  of-the-expense  attaching  to-a  condition  of- 
"war,  whether  carried  on  uiuler-the  forms  of-war  or  peace. 
They  have-made-a  strong  (2)  effort  to  stop  the-payment  of- 
commissions  at  differential  fare  points  in-the-east;  they  ob- 
ject decidedly  to-other-lines  continuing  a-practice''  Avhich 
tends  to-render  their  efforts  abortive,  and-they  urgently  re- 
quest that-you-ref  rain  from-the-payment  of -commissions  at- 
those-points/'  They-will  highly  appreciate  your  support 
and-co-operation . 

Enclosed  herewith  please-find  copy  of-resolutions  and-rules 
of-the  committee.    Will-yon-kindly'''''  acknowledge  receipt, 
and-advise  the-committee  whether  your  company  will  com- 
ply with  their  wishes  in-this-regard? 
Yours-truly, 

S.  F.  PiERSON,  Vice-Chairman.  (3) 

(377—3—2.) 


LESSON  XLI. 


NUMBERS,    SPECIAL  RULES,   AND  SUGGESTIONS. 
EXPRESSION   OF  NUMBERS. 

437.  Numbers  are  expressed  in  the  usual  manner  mainly, 
that  is,  by  the  Arabic  numerals,  1,  2,  3,  4,  etc.  In  the  num- 
ber 671,  the  figure  6,  by  virtue  of  its  position  (in  the  hun- 
dred's place),  expresses  six-hundred.  This  arrangement 
gives  figures  an  immense  advantage,  in  the  way  of  brevity, 
over  written  numbers;  thus,  671^six-hundred  and  seventy- 
one.  There  is  no  pressing  need  for  any  different  method  of 
expressing  numbers,  since  the  present  method  is  already  as 


EEPORTISG  STYLE  OF  SIIORT-IIAXD.  2.33 

short  as  short-hand  itself.  This  is  shown  by  the  fact  that  a 
column  of  figures  can  be  written  as  fast  as  the  numbers  are 
distinctly  called  off.  The  form  of  some  of  the  figures  could 
be  simplified;  but  it  is  hardly  necessary.  A  few  of  them 
when  standing  alone  should  be  expressed  in  short-hand 
characters,  as  1,  2,  3,  10,  etc.  L  1.  Round  numbers  also  can 
be  expressed  more  briefly  by  short-hand  symbols,  as  2,000, 
12,000.     See  Ls  1-6. 

SPECIAL  RULES. 

438.  Signs  of  unimportant  or  obscure  consonant  sounds 
are  often  omitted,  as  g  from  longest,  k  from  distinction.  L  7. 
Such  omissions  ai"e  onlj'  the  more  safe  when  several  conso- 
nants still  remain  in  the  word-form. 

The  exigency  of  joining  stems  together  not  infrequently 
renders  it  impossible  to  form  the  hooks  in  a  perfect  manner, 
as,  for  example,  shn  in  sectional,  n  in  jxoiic,  I  in  cable.  (See 
L  8.)  Sometimes  the  hook  is  not  written  at  all,  only  indi- 
cated (by  an  offset  or  otherwise),  as  ?*  in  destroy,  I  in  explain, 
etc.  L  9.  At  certain  junctures  the  circle  necessarily  be- 
comes a  loop,  as  in  counsel.  In  jail,  j  is  written  more  vp- 
right,  and  I  with  less  curvature;  otherwise  j-l,  if  written 

strictly  according  to  rule,  would  appear  thus,  //  The  same 
observation  applies  also  to  assail,  and  many  similar  com- 
binations. Angularity  and  facility  require  that  certain 
stems,  when  joined,  must  undergo  some  slight  change  in 
their  formation  in  order  to  be  adjusted  to  each  other.  To 
illustrate,  n  and  m  are  curved  less  Avhen  combined  with  t  or 
d,  either  preceding  or  following;  and  more,  when  attached 
to  k  or  g.    See  knotty,  tiny,  nick,  etc.    L  11. 

439.  In  a  few  instances  )  est  is  struck  upwards,  as  in 
gravest.  L  12.  Iss-hay,  though  rarely  occurring,  may  be 
expressed  by  changing  the  hook  to  a  circle,  as  in  soho.  L  12. 
The  st-loop  is  rarely  written  with  half-length  letters.  When 
so  applied  it  should  be  Avritten  fully  two-thirds  the  length 
of  the  stem.    The  large  loop  is  never  so  applied.    The  r-hook 


234  E SPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


is  sometimes  expressed  in  phrases  by  a  hack-stroke,  as  in 
triple  consonants.  For  example,  ihis-ijroperty ,  this-course, 
L  12. 

440.  Key.  1.  One  two  three  six  ten  twelve  hundred 
thousand  million  billion.  2.  First  second  third  fourth 
sixth-  tenth  twelfth  hundredth  thousandth  millionth. 
3.  100,000  2,000  0,000  1,200  ten-hundred  one-million  three- 
billion.  4.  Three-tenths  one-hundredth  two-thousandths 
a-thousand-millions  one-tenth  the-second-hundred  the- 
niillionth-part.  5.  Ten-or-twelve  three-or-four  twenty 
sixtieth  thirty  forty  fifty  sixty-hve  hundredths.  6.  210,000 
75,000,000  3,000,000,000  500  13,187,000.  7.  Longest  dis- 
tinction sanction  function  suggestion  Northampton  trans- 
pose. 8.  Sectional  panic  ungainly  defer  cable  manager 
engraving.  9.  Destroy'  pistol  explain  explicit  density 
counsel  rapaciously  jail  assail.  10.  Set  sick  safe  task 
excessive  settle  sutler  mechanism  chronicle.  11.  Knotty 
tiny  nick  canny  Mattie  Tommy  mock  calm.  12.  Gravest 
nicest  insurrectionist  best-table  best-time  nice-scene  soho 
this-property  this-course.  13.  Strive  strife  prize  price 
lays  lace   prizes   prices  fashion  fusion   raised. 

Phrases.  14.  Nevertheless-you-can  great-majority-of- 
cases  numerous-letters  number-of-claims  what-have-you- 
to-say  fellow-citizens.  15.  Just-taken  attorney-general 
examination-in-chief  honorable-court  law-office  Circuit- 
Court  under-all-the-circumstances-of-the-case. 

441.  A  fact  in  pronunciation,  which  is  but  rarely  observed, 
is  this:  An  initial  consonant  ordinarily  is  not  sounded, 
when  the  preceding  word  ends  with  the  same  element;  as  t, 
'for  example,  in  best-time,  best-table,  or  k  in  book-keeper,  pro- 
nounced bestime,  bestable,  bookeeper.  The  chief  difterence 
hetweenfine-nigJit,  and  Jinite,  is  that  the  Jirst  syllable  infinite 
is  accented,  while  in  fine-night,  each  word  has  its  separate 
accent.  To  some  extent  this  fact  may  safely  be  taken  advan- 
tage of  in  phrasing,  as  in  best-time,  L  12. 

442.  The  sub-vocals  v,  z  and  d,  in  rare  cases,  and  when 
really  necessary,  may  be  distinguished  from  their  cognates 


IPlate  4U 


Q O 


J     c    ^ ^...e...  V 


1  ^_y     N     0 

2^       -^0^       "t^^       ^        (^^ 


L 


6    SIO 


K 


L\ 


^ 


R. 


7.^^ 


^^1      y    65 


8 


11  '-1-  b  ---  _^  n-  E-. 

12 


)        v^S^ 


PURASES. 


14^ 


JD 


V 


^-"2) 


Co 


Ao 


1±.. 


236  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

f,  s,  and  t,  by  the  shading  of  a  hook,  loop,  or  circle,  as  in 
strive,  prize,  lays,  prizes,  L  13. 

443.  The  so-called  circles  iss  and  sez  are,  in  fact,  never 
entirely  round,  for  tlie  reason  that  the  stems  to  wliicli  they 
are  joined  form  a  part  of  them.  See  set,  sick,  etc.  L  10. 
The  circle  always  becomes  a  small  loop  when  written  wiUiin 
a  hook,  as  in  settle,  suffer,  etc.  In  rare  cases  two  hooks  may 
be  written  together,  as  in  chro7iicle,  L  10. 

444.  The  professional  reporter  is  allowed  certain  licenses 
which  should  not,  however,  be  taken  by  the  student.  In 
rai^id  writing  he  may  give  the  letters  a  less  degree  of  slant 
or  curvature,  omit  shading  to  a  greater  or  less  extent,  and 
occasionally  write  words  out  of  position.  Every  writer  in 
time  becomes  familiar  with  those  inaccuracies  which  are 
peculiar  to  himself;  but  it  should  be  his  constant  aim  to  keep 
as  7iear  the  standard  as  iwssible,  in  order  that  the  legibility  of 
difficult  passages  may  not  be  endangered,  and  that  others 
also  may  be  able  to  read  his  notes. 

Limit  of  Inaccuracy.  Even  in  fast  reporting  the  sten- 
ographer should  avoid  writing  any  word  so  far  wrong  as 
that  it  may  appear  to  be  an  entirely  different  word. 

445.  Large  or  Small  "Hand."  The  reporter,  when 
pressed,  writes  larger  than  at  other  times.  Some  persons 
take  this  to  be  an  evidence  that  a  large  hand  is  the  most 
rapid.  It  prov 33  just  the  contrary.  The  really  skilful  siaw- 
ographer,  when  writing  at  high  speed,  is  not  flurried,  and 
writes  about  as  small  a  hand  as  usual.  There  can  he  no 
question  but  that  the  greatest  s^eec^will  be  attained  tiltiniately 
only  by  writing  the  characters  near  each  other,  cultivating  a 
neat  style,  and  writing  as  small  a  hand  as  practicable. 

44G.  Professional  reporters  commonly  use  note-books 
manufactured  expressly  for  the  purpose.  Not  only  are  these 
better  suited  to  this  work,  but  greater  ease  in  writing  is  at- 
tained by  using  books  which  are  uniform  as  to  size  of  page, 
width  of  ruling,  and  quality  of  paper. 

447.  All  stenographic  notes,  no  matter  for  what  purpose 
taken,  should  be  tiled,  indexed,  and  carefully  px'eserved  for 


REPORTIXG  STYLE  OF  SIIOET-IIAXD.  237 

several  years.    The  contingencies  are  many  which  may  x*en- 
der  a  transcript  of  a  portion  of  these  very  valuahle. 

448.  No  .stenographer  can  alibrd  to  disregard  certain  gen- 
eral directions  which  relate  to  tlie  mechanical  part  of  his 
profession.  He  should  use  paper  distinctly  ruled,  and  the 
best  quality  only.  A  good  fine  pointed,  short-nibbed  gold 
pen,  of  medium  size,  is  the  best  for  reporting  purposes. 
This  should  be  more  or  less  elastic,  dependent  on  the  writer's 
lightness  of  toucli.     Good  writing  fluid  is  preferable  to  ink. 

449.  When  the  reporter  writes  with  a  pencil,  he  should 
obtain  one  of  medium  hardness  only,  keep  it  sharpened, 
and  use  it  with  soft  or  uncaleudered  paper.  For  general 
purposes  it  is  better  to  use  a  pen;  the  pencil  in  exceptional 
eases  only.  In  everj'  respect  it  v.'ill  be  observed  that  the 
pen  and  pencil  diiier  from  each  other.  The  question  as  to 
the  relative  merits  of  each  for  reporting  purposes  has  been 
discussed  to  a  considerable  extent  by  members  of  the  pro- 
fession. Those  reporters  who  employed  a  pencil  while 
learning,  never  afterwards  giving  the  pen  a  fair  trial,  of 
course  regard  the  pencil  with  the  greater  favor.  Of  those 
\\\\o  have  fairly  tested  both,  the  majority  prefer  the  pen. 
The  advantages  of  each  may  be  seen  from  the  following 
comparison  of 

450.  PEN  AND   PENCIL. 

1.  The  pen  must  be  dipped,  the  pencil  sharpened. 

2.  For  the  pen  an  inkstand  must  be  provided,  or  the 
"fountain"  tilled;  a  number  of  pencils  must  be  sharpened 
beforehand. 

3.  The  pen  is  elastic,  and  is  used  on  a  hard  surface;  the 
pencil  is  inelastic,  and  should  be  used  on  a  soft  surface,  or 
springy  tablet. 

4.  A  pen-drawn  line  is  uniform;  the  pencil's  point  is  con- 
tinuallj^  grinding  oft",  and  hence  does  not  serve  so  well  to 
indicate  light  and  shade. 

5  More  skill  or  training  is  required  to  handle  the  pen ; 
most  people  already  know  the  use  of  a  pencil,  which  is  simple. 


238  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

6.  Pen-work  is  permanent;  pencil-writing  fades  out  in  a 
feM'  years. 

7.  Notes  taken  with  a  pen  are  black  and  easy  to  read; 
pencil-writing  is  lianl  on  tlie  eyes,  and  for  this  one  imxjortant 
reason  a  pencil  should  be  used  as  little  as  possible. 

8.  Writing  with  a  gold  pen,  whit-h  is  a  yi(!lding,  sensitive 
instrnnient,  is  much  less  fatiguing  than  manipulating  a  pen- 
cil, wiiicli  is  stltt'and  inliexible. 

451.  BOOKS   AND  MATERIAL   RECOM^IENDED. 

Pitman's  Phonographic  Dictionary  contains  over  tliirty 
thousand  words  beautifully  engraved,  and  every  writer  of 
this  system  ought  to  possess  a  copy.  Pitman's  Phrase  Book 
is  also  very  useful,  and  ought  to  be  copied  through  by  the 
learner  sevei'al  times.  Humphrey's  Manual  of  Type-writing, 
from  which  a  number  of  the  business  letters  used  as  exercises 
in  this  present  book  were  taken,  with  the  kind  consent  of 
the  author,  is  the  foremost  work  on  tlie  subject,  and  it  ought 
to  he  tised  by  every  operator  of  a  writing  machine.  "One 
Hundred  Valuable  Suggestions  to  Short-hand  Students"  con- 
tains many  practical  hints,  and  is  adapted,  also,  to  dictation 
purposes.  The  "Reporting  Style"  Practice  Books,  designed 
to  accompany  this  work,  are  manufactured  from  a  good 
quality  of  paper,  properly  ruled,  and  of  a  suitable  size. 
An  inferior  quality  of  writing  material  should  not  be 
made  iise  of  in  any  case.  The  best  quality  of  fools-cap  is 
recommended  to  those  who  do  not  use  specially  preparetl 
paper.  Fountain  pens  are  coming  into  use.  These  have 
been  mucli  improved  of  late,  and  several  brands  Avill  be 
found  suHiciently  reliable  for  short-hand  purposes.  Wliile  a 
good  fountain  pen  may  be  a  convenience,  it  will  not,  consid- 
ered as  an  aid  to  speed,  be  found  of  any  special  value,  since 
an  ordinary  dip  of  ink  will  easily  write  three  hundred  words. 
These  pens  were  originally  made  for  the  convenience  of  per- 
sons who  wished  to  carry  ink  in  their  pocket.  For  easy  ainl 
I'apid  woi-k,  the  pen  should  be  of  gold,  short  nibbed  and 
sharp  pointed.     For  reporting  purposes,  and  advanced  prae- 


REPORTING  RTYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  239 

tice  also,  a  writing  fluid,  as  Arnold's  or  Carter's,  is  better 
than  ink,  which  is  apt  to  bo  too  thick  or  heavy. 

Professor  Morris'  books  on  phrasing  -well  merit  the  atten- 
tion of  students  of  all  systems.  Stenographers  who  wish  to 
know  their  business  well,  and  keep  abreast  the  times,  will 
sulDS'jribe  for  two  or  three  of  the  best  periodicals  devoted  to 
their  profession.  It  is  suggested  that  students  in  want,  of 
material  apply  to  the  dealer  from  whom  this  book  was 
obtained  for  information  and  prices. 

PHRASES. 

452.  After-many-inquiries  after-you-have-been  aftei'-the- 
matter  after-the-question  bad-account  can-you-make  dif- 
ferent-varieties during-the-year  ever-sinee-you-have-been 
express-purpose  for-another-purpose  for-my-part  may-their 
much-as-I-desire  much-as-we-desire  much-pleased  no-hurry- 
about  promissory-note  quite-probable  quite-sure  quite- 
sure-there-ai'e  real-estate-broker  remember-that-we  took- 
possession  very-certain  very-certain-about-it  very-good- 
man  very-good-quality  very-necessary  we-have-no-objec- 
tions  we-hope-that-you-can  we-will-name-you. 

453.  EXERCISE  41. 

DO   SOME   PRACTICAL  WORK   FOR  SOME  BUSINESS   MAN. 

From  "  One  Hundred  Valuable  Suggestions  to  Short-Hand 
Students.'' — To  be  phrased. 
The  best  kind  of  practice  the  student  can  have,  after  he 
has  learned  the  principles,  is  that  which  approaches  most 
nearly''  to  the  kind  of  work  he  will  be  obliged  to  do  in  actual 
reporting.  Business  men,  iu  fact,  prefer  those  who''  have 
had  some  practical  experience,  and  in  order  to  be  able  to 
satisfy  them  tliat  you  are  not  a  mere  beginner,'"''  you  should 
secure  some  actual  practice  just  for  the  experience  it  will 
give.  Go  to  some  business  man  who  has  more  (1)  or  less 
correspondence,  and  offer  to  take  all  his  letters  for  awhile 
Avithout  wages.  You  can  well  aftord  to  do  this.'  In  the  first 
place,  you  Avould  be  fitting  yourself  for  the  actual  work  in 


240  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SIIORT-nAND. 

the  most  thorough  and  practical  manner  possible/''  If  your 
work  is  satisfactory,  and  you  ought  not  to  expect  a  paying 
position  until  it  is,  it  would  be  mucli'''''  easier  to  secure  a 
situation,  and  to  fill  it  acceptably,  than  you  might  otherwise 
hope  to  do.  Another  advantage  that  often  arises  (2)  from 
suc'i  a  course  is  in  causing  the  man  for  whom  you  work  to 
leara  to  appreciate  the  advantages  of  short-hand,'' and  in 
tliis  way,  cause  a  demand  for  your  own  employment,  or  for 
that  of  some  other  short-haud  writer/''      (315—3:30—1:30.) 


LESSON  XLII. 


RULES  FOR  PHRASING. 


454.  Key.  1.  (Simple  phrases.)  Shall-have  have-been 
saves-time  good-men  many-good-men  men-of-action  some- 
men-of-nerve  begin-immediately.  3.  (Simple  sentence.) 
The-old-gentleman,  who-was-president  (of-the)  First-Nation- 
al-Bank,  immediately  gave-the-money  to-the  manager  (of-the) 
Pennsylvania-Railroad-Company,  who-was-standing  iu-the 
bank-parlor  at-the-time.  3.  (Omitted  consonants.)  Most- 
likely  fishing-tackle  general-breakdown  Trans-continental- 
Railway-Co.  4.  (Omitted  words.)  Promise-to-pay  by-the- 
la\v-ot-the-survival-of-the-fittest  day-of-the-month  change- 
of- the- weather  what-is-your-business  where-do-j'ou-i-eside. 
5.  (Lengthened  outlines.)  They-still  men's-strength  short- 
stop served-his-time  per-minute  serve-their-purpose  jury- 
man gentlemen-of-the-jury  per-annum.  6.  (Lengthened 
phrases.)  Shall-not-have  some-one-that  was-not-keeping 
for-there-came    may-thei"e-be    their-own-safety     may-it-be. 

7.  ("Variable  letters;  Com  and  Con.)  This-will-make  shall- 
merely  store-door  do-you-wish  such-as-will-not  you-should- 
iiot-condemn      you-will-contrive      they-may-well-eomplain. 

8.  (Position  words.)  For-iio-time  in-e\ery-part  the-same- 
man  I-shall-sue-hini  many-things  love-him.  9.  (Position 
words  vocalized.)      In-any-eAent     in-no-event     it-is-for-me 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SUORT-HAND.  241 

it-is-my-own-copy  rather-than-hope  for-some-men.  10.  (Con- 
tracted phrases.)  lu-reply-to  takes-us  will-thei'e-be  at-lirst 
it- will-not  at-all  wliich-are  in -regard-to. 

Phrases.  11.  Tnist-that-you-will  venture-to-say  we-may- 
liave  we-think-tlicre-is  we-will-order  day-of-the-week  nuist- 
acknowledge.  12.  Must-also  must-always  .obliged-to-give 
subject-to-my-order  two-or-three-limes  we-have-no-knowl- 
edge-of-the-matter.  13.  Able-to-collect  able-to-realize  ac- 
cording-to-the-letter  according-to-tlie-instruction  any-kind- 
of-business  at-the-same-rate.  14.  We-want-to-know  cer- 
tain-class-of-goods  I-am-a\vare-of-the-fact  just-received- 
your-letter-of-recommendation  as-j^er-my-order.  15.  Ac- 
cording-to-agreement  according-to-his-agreement  accord- 
ing-to-conti'act  receive-their-letter  by-some-othei'-firm 
within-a-day-or-so. 

455.  The  student  has  already,  by  the  faculty  of  imitation, 
learned  in  a  general  way  how  to  connect  words  together  into 
phrases.  Specific  rules  are  needed,  however,  as  a  safe  guide 
to  good  practice.  The  learner,  who  is  now  advanced,  will 
apprehend  the  meaning,  and  understand  the  application  of 
such  rules.  But  it  cannot  be  said  that  the  student  has  mas- 
tered this  or  any  other  subject  until  the  underlying  p?'mczpZe 
has  been  grasped.  This,  in  an  incidental  way,  we  shall  aim 
to  state.  An  elaborate  treatise  will  not,  of  course,  be  looked 
for  within  the  limits  of  a  single  lesson.  Phrasing  is  a  science 
of  itself.  It  has  been  characterized  as  an  "Art  within  an 
art."  It  beai'S  a  similar  relation  to  the  broad  subject  of 
Short-hand,  that  Algebra  does  to  the  general  subject  of 
Mathematics,  for  instance,  or  that  State  government  in  our 
country  sustains  to  the  National.  To  short-hand  it  is  the 
finishing  touch,  a  kind  of  internal  perfection.  By  it  speed  is 
increased,  and  legibility  added  to. 

That  there  is  a  gain  in  joining  words  to  some  extent  is  ad- 
mitted on  all  sides.  It  is  true,  however,  that  there  exists  a 
diversity  of  opinion  amongst  the  best  writers  and  teachers 
touching  the  extent  to  which  phrase-writing  can  profitably 
be  caiTied.     The  objectors  point  to  the  example  of  many  old 


242  JIEPORTINO  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


stenofjrapliers,  experienced  and  successful  in  their  profes- 
sion, who  phrase  but  little.  These  facts  carry  a  certain 
force;  they  are  valuable  evidence  of  at  least  one  of  the  possi- 
bilities of  the  art,  showing  what  can  be  done  with  simple 
short-hand,  unstrengtlwucd  by  the  phrase.  When  shoi"t-hand 
was  learned  by  our  earlier  i"eporters,  phrasing  was  a  new 
thing,  and  its  correct  use  unknown.  Most  of  the  successful 
stenographei's  of  to-day  employ  phrasing  habitually,  and 
connect  words  according  to  certain  well  settled  rules. 

The  statement  needs  no  proof  that  woi'ds  can  be  phrased 
in  less  time  than  they  can  be  written  separately.  Every 
pen-lifting  costs  nearly  half  a  second,  or  the  loss  of  a  word. 
The  obvious  advantage  of  joining  is  proved  by  the  universal 
custom  of  connecting  together  all  letters  of  each  word  when 
writing  long-hand.  Copy  this  sentence,  writing  each  letter 
separately:     '■'T-h-i-s  i-s  a  s-l-o-w  w-a-y  o-f  w-r-i-t-i-n-g .''' 

Why,  then,  ought  not  an  entire  discourse  to  be  reported 
without  a  single  break,  or  lifting  of  the  pen?  As  a  means  of 
getting  hold  of  our  subject,  we  will  assume  that  all  words  are 
to  be  joined  together  when  short-hand  notes  are  taken.  The 
exceptions  to  this  broad  rule  we  sum  up  as  follows: 

450.  1.  Sentences.  Phrasing  is  designed  partly  as  an 
aid  to  legibility,  which  is  a  matter  of  no  less  importance  than 
speed  itself.  But  joining  words  together  would  be  a  draw- 
back to  legibility,  unless  some  kind  of  correspondence  be- 
tween the  tnamier  of  phrasing  and  the  structure  of  language 
were  expressed  by  the  short-hand  notes  themselves.  To 
illustrate,  at  the  close  of  a  sentence  the  speaker  comes  to  a 
full  stop.  He  has  expressed  a  complete  thought.  There  is 
here,  as  there  should  be,  a  corresponding  break  in  the  phrase. 
In  short-hand  the  words  of  two  separate  sentences  should 
never  be  written  connectedly.  Hence  it  would  be  imjiroper  to 
express  the  two  sentences,  '^They-make-mo7icy.-Thcy-love-it," 

by  the  connected  phrase,  K.—^     -^""v^f  /i         Likewise  the 


X^ 


expression,      J  ''He-is-done.-Hc-may-go,''     is    wrong. 


t)Iate  42. 


244  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

457.  Subject  and  rRr-DiCATE.  It  is  well  established 
tliat  the  subject  of  a  sentence  and  its  verb  should  not  be 
joined.  The  subject  and  its  modifiers  form  a  complete  part, 
or  member  of  the  sentence,  as  do  also  the  verb  and  its  modi- 
fiers. For  this  reason  they  should  be  kept  separate.  The 
two  words,  for  example,  composing  the  sentence,  ^'Dogs 
bark,'''  should  und(>r  no  circumstances  be  connected.  Apro- 
iioun,  on  the  contrary,  is  always  joined  toils  verb,  as  1-do, 
thcy-make,  wc-have.  Ambiguity  would  result  not  infrequent- 
ly from  the  practice  of  joining  nouns  and  their  verbs,  as,  for 

example,  the  character,  {__  clocks-tick.,  could  also  be 

read,  clock-stick. 

458.  Compound  subject.  In  the  sentence  ^^Cor7i,  beans 
and  potatoes  are  raised  in  abundance,'"  the  three  Avords  corn, 
beans  and  potatoes,  of  which  the  subject  is  composed,  should 
not  be  connected.  The  same  rule  applies  to  the  compound  pre- 
dicate, as  in  the  sentence,"  The  patriot  soldier  fought,  bled, 
and  died  for  his  country,"  the  verbs  fought,  bled,  and  died, 
are  written  separately. 

459.  Related  WORDS.  Take  the  sentence  "JJavmg^  raiser^ 
another  army,  the  general  hastened  to  relieve  the  city'''' ;  here  the 
words  '■'■army  the  generar\  sliould  not  be  connected,  for  the 
important  reason  that  there  is  no  gramatical  relation  be- 
tween army  and  the.  For  the  same  reason,  chairs,  baskets,  and 
knives,  should  not  be  phrased  in  the  sentence,  "He  keepts 
chairs,  baskets,  and  knives  for  sale.''''-  The  rule  is  that  two  or 
more  words,  not  sustaining  some  i-elation  of  government 
or  modification,  should  not  be  connected  together. 

460.  Length.  Experience  shows  that  writing  longphrases 
occasions  loss  instead  of  gain  in  time.  The  reason  is  that 
when  the  pen  is  applied  to  the  paper  the  hand,  wrist  and 
forearm  are  so  fixed,  or  stationed,  that  it  is  very  inconven- 
ient to  move  the  pen  along  more  than  one  or  two  inches  of 
space  Avithout  re-stationing  the  hand  and  arm.  Indeed,  for 
most  persons  it  is  inconvenient  to  write  a  character  much 
more  than  half  an  inch  in  length.     An  attempt  to  copy  the 


EEPOBTING  STYLE  OF  SHORTHAND. 


245 


following  joined  letters  without  pausing,  will  serve   more 
forcibly  to  impress  this  truth: 


Con- 
venience would  suggest  that  this  combination  be  broken  in- 
to three  equal  parts,  of  which  one  would  be  v_--^ — xf^"^'^^-^"^^-^^ 
Most  persons  have  experienced  this  inconvience  when  writ- 
ing lengthy  words  in  long-hand.  Long  phrases  are  a  pos- 
itive drawback. 
The  difficulty  in  executing  tliem  may  be  illustrated  by  the 


phrase  '^        '     ^ — ^-^i ^..^-^^^-^--x^^  He-kept- 

coming-cmd-goi}ig-a>id-going-a)id-comiug-mani/-7nu)iy-yea7-s. 

Young  reporters  sometimes  go  to  the  absurd  extreme  of 
writing  as  many  words  in  a  single  phrase  as  can  be  made 
hang  together.  An  illustration  is  found  in  the  following  sen- 
tance  of  thirty-nine  words,  which  it  is  possible  to  write 
connectedly:  I-think-ii-is-quite-likely-that-we-ivill-leave-for- 
America  -  before  -  very  -  many  -  more-vionths-a7id-you-will-then- 
have-no-difficulty-whatever-in-getting-all  -  the  -  knowledge  -  you  - 
may-want-in-regard-to-that-wonderful-land. 

461.  Angularity.  Inconvenient  joinings,  also  those  pro- 
ducing obtuse  or  insufficient  angles,  are  not  permissible.  On 
this  account  the  following  expressions  cannot  be  i)hrased: 
Do-not  tell,  pay  np,  than  they,  one  people,  construction  train, 
great  expense,  do-not  go,  capital  gossip),  upon-his  honor,  find 
it,  have-not  found.  . 

462.  Consonant  position.  To  some  extent  phrasing  is 
limited  by  the  reqviirements  of  consonant  position.  Illustra- 
tions:   ^'^-%_^  Have-no-time  should  be  phrased    always 

while  ^       \r^   Have  any -time  sometimes  cannot  be;  \ 

in-every-part,  ]        iti-every  particular;   ^~'^^'^  the-same- 

man,    S~N  the-same  men;   ^   I-shall-sue-him,  Jy      ^~^ 


246  llEPOR  TING  STYL E  OF  SHOE T-IIA XD. 

I-shall  sec-hi)n;    ^— \_-^  many  things,     -^'~\_/^^    many- 

languages.  The  point  here  is  that  the  phrase  must  some- 
times be  broken  in  order  that  first  and  third  position  words 
may  be  in  their  place,  thus  relieving  the  notes  from  ambi- 
guity. Whether  a  given  word  may,  for  the  sake  of  a  i^hrase, 
be  written  out  of  position,  is  a  question  purely  of  context  and 
circumstances.  The  reporter  who  pays  attention  to  what  he 
IS  writing,  can  tell  in  a  moment  whether  legibility  demands 
the  phrase  to  be  broken  on  account  of  a  position  word.  He 
must  exercise  common  sense  and  judgment.  Since  phrases 
are  broken  on  account  of  first  and  third  position  words,  it  is 
for  that  very  reason  never  necessai'y  to  do  so  on  account  of 
any  second  position  word.  All  connected  words  ai'e  pre- 
sumed to  belong  on  the  line,  unless  the  requirements  of  sense 
plainly  indicate  otherwise.  In  L  8  it  would,  under  some 
circumstances,  become  necessary  to  break  the, connection,  if 
in  the  first  phrase  any  occurred  in  the  place  of  no,  or  partic- 
ular  in  the  place  of  part;  man  in  place  of  men;  see  in  place 
of  sue;  language  in  place  of  things;  or  m,e  in  place  of  him,. 

463.  Unusual  words.  Words  not  frequently  used 
are  Avintten  disconnectedly.  For  example,  the  expressions, 
mucilage  bottle,  cylindrical  cohimn,  habitual  drunkard,  merry 
girls,  should  not  be  phrased.  A  very  few  common  short 
words,  such  as  prono?i7is,  2yrcposilio?is,  and  conjunctions,  may 
be  attached  to  unusual  Avords,  as  in  the-middling ,  the-indubit- 
able,  or-California,  was-revised. 

ADVANTAGES. 

464.  Speed.  The  gain  in  speed,  resulting  from  tlie  dimin- 
ished number  of  pen-liftings,  is  obvious.  Write  the  plirase 
"saiJe-fo'me"  I'apidly  for  thirty  seconds;  then  write  the  two 
words  separately  as  often  as  you  can  in  the  same  length  of 
time.  The  experiment  will  show  the  phrase  written  six  or 
eight  more  times  in  the  first  trial,  which  is  equivalent  to  a 
gain  of  twenty-five  or  thirty  words  in  one  minute. 

465.  Legibility.    Since  the  grammatical  structure  of  the 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  247 

sentence  is  shown  in  large  part  by  the  phraseological  group- 
ing of  the  words,  ease  in  reading  tlie  notes  is  thereby  in- 
creased to  no  small  extent.  Referring  to  L  2,  the  first  three 
words,  the-old-ge7itlema)i,  are  phrased,  because  the  and  old 
are  both  modifiers  of  gentleman.  All  the  words  of  the  clause, 
tvho-was-prcsidcnt  of -the  First- Katcu7ial-])ank,  would  natur- 
ally be  connected  together,  but  it  is  broken  into  tivo  on  ac- 
count of  length,  and  broken  in  such  a  manner  that  qf-the 
is  expressed  hy  the  juxtaposition  of  the  two  phrases.  On 
account  of  angle  immediately  cannot  be  joined  to  gave. 
Qave-the-money  is  a  good  phrase,  and  it  is  customary,  Avhere 
convenient,  to  connect  a  transitive  verb  and  its  object.  The 
propriety  of  joining  words  and  their  modifiers  is  illustrated 
by  the  phrases  good-men,  men-qf-aclion,  etc.,  L  1.  phrasing 
enables  the  reader  to  see  at  a  glance  which  words  ai'e 
mutually  dependent,  and  which  are  not. 

466.  Accuracy.  Phrasing  makes  time  by  saving  time. 
By  means  of  it  the  writer  gains  more  leisure  in  which  to  form 
the  characters  Avith  greater  precision  and  skill,  thus  adding 
both  to  the  beauty  and  legibility  of  his  notes. 

467.  Abbreviation.  In  phrasing,  many  single  lettei's 
and  even  words  are  omitted.  See  most-likely,  promise-to-jiay, 
etc.,  Ls  3  and  4.  These  phrases  are  perfectly  legible;  but  it 
is  evident  that  this  legibility  would  be  impaired  by  such 
abbreviation,  if  the  words  composing  such  phrases  were  writ- 
ten disconnectedly.  A  phrase  may  be  abbreviated  safely, 
for  the  same  reason  that  a  long  word,  containing  a  good 
number  of  consonants,  maybe  abbreviated;  in  each  case  an 
abundance  of  material  remains  to  enable  the  reader  to  get 
at  the  meaning  easily.  This  is  an  important  point;  it  is 
giving  to  short-hand,  by  means  of  phrasing,  the  advantage 
of  the  universal  habit,  in  coloqual  discourse,  of  clipping 
some  words  and  merging  others,  when  they  occur  in  ex- 
pressions that  are  worn  and  familiar.     Ls  11-15. 

468.  Compactness.  The  fact  that  in  the  phrase  the 
words  are  drawn  into  the  briefest  compass,  renders  it  possible 
for  the  eye  to  take  them  all  in  at  a  glance;  notes  can  then  be 


248  REPORTING  STYLE  OP  SHORT-HAND. 

read  more  quickly  than  when  strung  out  over  two  or  three 
tinu'S  the  space.     Illustrations:    We-have-long-been: 

v^      /^'^^^        \  better,   vj         \  ;  tliat-it-may-not-be- 
as-welhas:  |      ^ ^  \       ^       ^      ^  or, 


469.  Expedients.  Many  word-forms  are  lengthened,  in 
order  that  tliey  may  be  joined  in  certain  plirases,  as  they-still, 
mcn's-strenglh.  L  5.  Certain  phrase-signs,  also,  are  written 
by  longer  forms,  in  order  to  render  it  practicable  for  more 
words  to  be  joined,  as  in  shnll-not-have,  some-one-that,  etc. 
L  6.  In  these  phrases  the  n-hook  cannot  be  vised  for  not, 
one,  or  own;  nor,  on  account  of  angularity,  can  the  lengthen- 
ing or  halving  principles  be  used  in  for-lhere-came,  may-it-be, 
etc.  The  variable  letters,  I,  r,  sh,  are  struck  in  either  direc- 
tion in  phrases,  as  angularity  may  retjuire,  as  in  this-will- 
■make,  do-you-wish.  L  7.  Words  beginning  with  com  and 
con,  except  a  few  very  frequent  ones,  are  disjoined  from  the 
one  just  preceding,  as  iw yoti-should-not  condemn.    L  7. 

Position  words  are  sometimes  vocalized  when  occurring  in 
phrases.  This  requires  less  time  than  breaking  the  phrase. 
(See  L  9.)  The  principle  of  contracting  outlines  by  means 
of  hooks,  circles,  loops,  lengthening,  halving,  etc.,  is  also 
employed  to  some  extent  in  Avriting  such  phrases  as  in-rej)ly- 
to,  will-there-be,  it-will-not.     L  10. 

470.  RULES. 

1.  Do  not  construct  phrases  inconveniently  long,  or  that 
extend  more  than  two  spaces  below  the  line. 

2.  Avoid  joinings  that  are  unangular;  also  difficult  ones, 

as  be-not-elected,  correctly  written  l — ,  A  difficult  join- 
ing requires  more  time  than  breaking  the  phrase.  Adverbs 
ending  in  ly  are  rarely  joined  to  following  Avords. 

3.  Words  beginning  with  com  and  con  are  rarely  attached 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  249 

to  preceding  words.     The  fact  of  separation  indicates  the 
prefix,  which  for  this  reason  need  not  be  written. 

4.  A  word  may  occasionally  be  written  by  a  longer  out- 
line, if  this  is  necessary  to  render  it  jjJiraseable.    See  L  5. 

5.  Words  only  that  are  comparatively  common  should  be 
joined  together.     Unusual  words  are  written  disconnectedly. 

G.  Never  join  two  words  that  are  separated  by  a  mark  of 
punctuation,  nor  any  set  of  words  not  mutually  inter-de- 
pendent, or  grammatically  related. 

7.  As  far  as  practicable  connect  together  a  pronoun  and 
its  verb;  a  modifying  word  or  phrase,  and  the  word  modified; 
pi'epositions  and  the  words  they  govern;  verbs  and  their 
objects;  conjunctions  and  the  clauses  they  introduce. 

8.  The  artistic  writer,  whose  characters  are  small  and 
well  formed,  may  adopt  more  lengthy  phrases  than  writers 
lacking  these  qualifications. 

9.  An  assemblage  of  words  making  a  suitable  phrase 
should  invariably  be  written  together;  not  phrased  at  one  time, 
and  separated  at  another. 

10.  The  first  Avord  of  a  phrase,  called  the  leader,  is  usually 
given  its  proper  position;  but  exceptions  ai'e  sometimes 
made  Avhen  it  is  important  that  the  second  word  hold  its  own 
place,  as  in  -.— —  his-own,  ..T7].._  give-out. 

11.  One,  than  and  own,  may  be  expressed  by  the  n-hook 
whenever  preceded  by  a  word  of  common  occurrence  to  whieli 
such  hook  may  be  joined  conveniently,  as  will-have-one,  bet- 
ter-than,  my-own. 

12.  Of  may  be  expressed  by  the  f-hook  in  phrases  Avhere 

the  tick  of  does  not  join  conveniently,  as  in  T      city-of-Bos- 
ton.  y 

13.  As  a  rule  or  and  biit  are  not  phrased,  but  may  be 
joined  when  there  is  no  possibility  of  conflict  with  a  or  and. 
His  is  not  commonly  joined  at  the  beginning  of  a  phrase,  as 
his  business,  written  disconnectedly. 

14.  It  is  indispensable  that  the  student  form  the  habit  of 


250 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


writing  the  words  connectedly,  always  within  the  limits 
aljove  specified.  This  habit  can  never  come  from  mere  read- 
ing, or  even  shidy.  Much  actual  writing  is  necessary.  Per- 
haps the  best  plan  would  be  to  copy  all  the  phrases  in  this 
book;  afterwards  taking  lip  a  standard  phrase-book,  and 
systematically  writing  it  through  several  tinu'S. 

15.  The  advanced  writer  may  with  propriety  adopt  an 
abridged  outline  for  a  difficult  or  unusual  set  of  words, 
which  happens  to  be  of  frequent  occurrence  in  the  particular 
I'eport  he  is  making. 

PHRASES. 

471.  A-good-many-of-our  as-quick-as-possible  as-many- 
as-possible  cash-business  cash-trade  certain-of-their  cer- 
tain-of-your  certain-questions  dear-brother  dear-friend 
did-not-understand-the-matter  did-not-understand-it-so  did- 
not-undertake  different-varieties  during-the-year  extra- 
pains  necessary-delay  on-account-of-having  sometime-ago 
sonie-reason-forthis  special-order  spring-trade  sum-and- 
substance  understand-that-you  understand-that-we  we-are- 
anxious  we-are-anxious-to-have-j'ou  we-are-always  we-are- 
aware  we-are-in-need  we-do-not-think-you-can. 


472. 


EXERCISE  42. 
KEEP  YOUR   OWN   COUNSEL. 


From  ''One  Hundred  Valuable  Suggestions:''— To  he  phrased. 
The  Stenographer,  like  everybody  else,  must,  in  a  certain 
sense,  be  a  machine.  This  arises  from  the  fact  that  in  many 
cases'  confidential  matter  of  the  greatest  importance  is  often 
dictated  to  him,  and  unless  he  exerts  the  utmost  care,  he  will 
be  apt,  inadvertently^'  it  may  be,  to  betray  a  knowledge  of 
his  employer's  afiairs  to  those  who  would  take  advantage  of 
it.  Again,  it  frequently'''  occurs  in  some  kinds  of  business 
that  the  Stenographer  is  approached  for  the  special  purpose 
of  persuading  him  to  make  knoAvn  his  (1)  employer's  inten- 
tions or  plans.  Attempts  may  even  be  made  to  bribe  him  in 
order  to  secure  the  desired  information.    Aside  from  the' 


REPORTINO  STYLE  OF  SlIORT-TIAXD.  251 


moral  phase  of  the  question,  the  Stenographer  can,  by  no 
mtans,  afford  to  betray  his  eniph)yi'r"s  secrets  to  others. 
Once  let  it  be'''  proven  that  he  has  done  such  a  thing  and  his 
prospects  as  a  reporter  will  be  ruined. 

Morally  it  is  Avrong,  and  financially"''  it  is  a  losing  invest- 
ment. If  you  find  that  you  have  a  tendency  to  speak  ot 
things  pertaining  to  your  work  to  (2)  those  not  connected 
with  the  business,  it  would  be  well  to  form  the  habit  of 
riejidly  refusing  to  speak  of  your  employer's''  affairs  at  all. 
By  so  doing  tlnre  is  no  risk  of  being  sixrprised  into  state- 
ments which  may  afterwards  be  regretted/' 

(226—2:30—1:30.) 


LESSON  XLIII. 

AMANUENSIS  KEPORTING. 


473.  As  a  prerequisite  to  success  in  this  field,  a  thorough 
education  is  demanded  in  the  common  English  branches,  as 
arithmetic,  orthography,  grammar,  and  business  forms. 
Good  peumanshix),  and  a  knowledge  of  type-writing,  book- 
keeping, and  in  rare  cases  telegraphy,  Yolapuk,  and  some  of 
the  modern  languages,  are  also  valuable. 

Various  degrees  of  speed,  ranging  from  90  to  150  words 
per  minute,  are  required.  As  siich  secretary,  it  becomes 
one's  duty  to  write  letters,  telegrams,  contracts,  agreements, 
newspajjer  articles,  briefs,  editorials,  etc.,  at  the  dictation  of 
his  employer,  or  whoever  has  the  business  management,  and 
afterwards  transcribe  and  deliver  the  same.  A  better  under- 
standing of  the  secretary's  duties  may  be  gained  from  a  con- 
sideration of  the  relations  existing  between  him  and  his 
employer.  It  is  much  more  severe  mental  work  to  raj)idly 
indite  important  business  letters,  than  to  slowly  write  them 
out.  Dictating  is  in  fact  as  much  an  accomplishment  as  re- 
porting. Perfect  quiet,  and  security  from  all  disturbance, 
are  essential  in  the  work  of  dictating  letters  and  papers  of 


2  52  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SnORT-HAND. 

this  kind.  Hence  the  stenographer,  to  the  fullest  extent 
possible,  should  refrain  from  everything  that  may  perplex  or 
disconcert  the  reflections  of  his  superior.  He  should  not 
only  maintain  quiet,  but  be  prepai-ed  the  moment  called  upcni 
to  read  what  he  has  written,  and  remain  in  constant  readi- 
ness to  record  every  word  spoken.  He  should  also  abstain 
from  all  show  of  nervousness  dui'ing  the  occasional  intervals 
in  the  dictation. 

When  the  matter  in  hand  is  entirely  finished,  he  may  ask 
for  the  spelling  of  projjer  names,  insert  words  which  he  failed 
to  hear  or  record,  and  make  the  necessary  corrections.  Ap- 
parent grammatical  and  vei-bal  errors  need  not  be  called  up, 
but  should  be  corrected  by  himself  when  the  transcript  is 
made. 

KEY. 

474.  Phrases.  1.  Additional-expenses  bona-Jide  in- 
witness-whereof  please-exchange  habeas-corpus  on-the- 
part-of-plaintiff  to-wit  to-such-an-extent.  2.  Abstract-of- 
title  alfidavit-of-plaintiff  may-it-please-the-court  niay-it- 
please-your-honor  are-you-able-to-state-whether-or-not  was- 
there-anything-said  by-the-court  called-and-sworn  docu- 
mentary-evidence. .3.  Bank-bill  bank-note  bank-account 
much-quicker-than  as-per-your-letter  acknowledge-receipt- 
of-your-letter.  4.  Balance-sheet  on-the-north-side  that-is- 
to-say  just-as-certain  let-us-be-satisfied  take-notes  burden- 
of-proof .    Translate  Ls  G  to  15  inclusive. 

PHRASES. 

475.  About-as-many-as  above-cost  accept-our  accept- 
them  accept-my-thanks  answering-j'our-letter  a-short-time- 
ago  a-short-time-since  by-return-mail  contents-of-my-letter 
express-order  extra-order  I-presume-matters-will  I-received- 
your-letter  I-regret-very-much  my-last-order  pay-master 
please-be-kind-enough  please-let-us-know- whether  received- 
his-letter  received -my-letter  received-our-letter  with-this- 
order  you-are-hereby. 


J^late  43* 


'H\^^~^y  c^^  1 4 


^_9 


Messrs.  Stone  &  Ordean,  Duluth,  Minn. 


^  /....^..,^..x  -i 


^\ 


"is 


Glidden,  Griggs  &  Co. 


Mr.  T.  J.  Dowd,  Hastings,  Neb. 


~^ 


>-. 


L  -:...v.^  ^ 


^ 


K  ..: J 


V 


H.  B.  Mathewson-. 


i—D 


c 


254  reporting  style  of  short-hand. 

476.  exercise  43. 
Geo.  W.  Crane  &  Co., 

Blank-Book  Manufacturers,  Printers  and-Binders, 

ToPEKA,  Kan.,  March  20,  1884.' 
Mr.  a.  B.,  Los  Angeles,  Cal. 

Dear-Sir: — The-Dockets  sent-you  are-the-kind  wliich-are 
in-general  use  in-this-city.  The-full  printed  form  nnule  it 
necessai'y  in-a-great-many-cases  to  transfer  the-record^''  to- 
the-back  of-the-book.  Tliis-is  obviated  in-the-form  which 
we-send-you,  and-also  in-the^''' Justice's  Guide  which  we  en- 
close, and-which  will  give-the  Justice  the-form  of  entry  of 
any  case  that-may-come  (1)  before-him.  We-will  exchange 
the-Docket  if-you-wish,  but  think-your  Justice  will-tind  the- 
form  sent'  the-more  convenient.    Yours-very-truly, 

Crane  &  Co. 

477.  St.-Paul,  Minn.,  Nov.  8,  1883. 
Messes.  A.  Ruiz  &  Sons,"  Malaga,  Spain. 

Gentlemen: — Referring-to-your  esteemed  favor  of-the  21st 
ult.,  we-wish-to  say,  that-when'''"  you-ai"e  ready  to  quote 
prices  on-your  brands  of  layer  raisins,  we  would-be-pleased 
to-receive  quotations,  (2)  with-the  view  of-placing  our  fall- 
and-winter  order  with-j-ou.  We  would  also  kindly  request 
you  to'  inform  us  whether-you-have  any  arrangements  M'ith- 
any  line  of  steamers  running  from-your  port  to  New-York" 
or  Baltimore,  and-what  rates  of  freights  you-can  quote  us; 
also,  what-the  insurance  and-other  expenses  connected'" 
with-a  shipment  of  say  5,000  or  10,000  boxes  would-be.  Any- 
other  (3)  information  that-you-can-give-us,  that-you-thiiik 
would-be  valuable  for-us,  Avill-be  appreciated.'  Awaiting 
your  reply,  we-are  Very-truly-yours, 

Glidden,  Griggs  &  Co. 

{To  be  phrased.) 

478.  Augusta,  Georgia,  July  15,  188G." 
Messrs.  Devinnt  &  Co.,  Baltimore,  Md. 

Dear  Sirs: — Messrs.  J.  Summerville  &  Co.,  of  your  city, 
have  made  certain"'  offers  to  me  which  promise  great  pecun- 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SnORT-HAXn.  251 


-.J 


iary  profit  provided  they  are  stable;  but  wliieli,  on  tlio  con- 
trary, would  involve  (4)  me  in  heavy  responsibilities  if  my 
correspondents  failed  to  meet  their  engagements. 

As  I  have  not  the  pleasui-e  of  knowing  the  gentlemen 
named,  it  is  essential  that  I  should  be  on  my  guard.  To  you, 
therefore,  I  apply  in^''  this  dilHculry;  and  should  esteem  it  a 
great  favor  if  you  would  acquaint  me,  so  far  as  lies  in  your 
power,'"'  with  information  i-especting  the  character  and 
means  of  this  firm. 

The  readiness  with  which  you  have  complied  with  my  (5) 
requests  leads  me  to  hope  that  you  will  still  further  oblige 
me  on  this  particular  occasion;  I  need  scarcely  to  say  that 
you'  may  count  on  my  discretion  in  keeping  profoundly 
secret  such  information  as  you  may  kindly  ofifer.  I  am, 
gentlemen,''  Yours  respectfully, 

A.  L.  Farmer. 
(454—5:30—3.) 


LESSON  XLIV. 

AMANUENSIS  REPORTING,    (CONTINUED). 

479.  The  thoughtful  student  need  not  be  told  that,  since 
all  the  plans  and  secrets  of  his  employer's  business  must  be 
made  known  to  the  correspondence  clerk,  the  most  implicit 
confidence  is  reposed  in  him,  and  loyalty,  integrity,  and  de- 
votion to  business  are  presumed  by  the  relationship  estab- 
lished. He  should  not  only  be  so  discreet  as  not  to  divulge 
office  secrets,  or  betray  implied  confidence,  but  he  should 
show  plainly  by  his  conduct  that  he  is  faithful  to  his  employ- 
ers, and  interested  in  their  behalf. 

No  matter  how  accomplished  a  private  secretary  may  be, 
his  services  will  not  be  sought,  if  he  has  not  cultivated  habits 
of  prudence,  and  shown  himself  to  be  safe  and  trustworthy. 

In  taking  difficult  matter  at  dictation,  in  wliich  corrections 
and  interlineations  are  afterwards  to  be  made,  it  is  well  to 
leave  the  alternate  lines  blank  for  this  purpose.  Letter 
books  should  be  paged,  and  every  letter  indexed  in  a  separate 


256  REPOIiTING  STYLE  OFzSHORT-HAND. 

book,  in  such  a  manner  that  it  can  be  quickly  referred  to 
afterwards. 

In  amanuensis  work  the  name  and  address  of  correspond- 
ents slaould,  as  a  rule,  be  written  in  long-hand. 

KEY. 

480.  Phrases.  1.  As-a-matter-of-necessity  as-a-matter- 
of-eourse  in-order-to-have  it-is-no-doubt  postal-service 
enelosed-letter.  2.  I-am-in-i*eceipt-of-your-favor  iii-mj'-last- 
letter  your-obedieut-servant  your-statenient  we-will-not 
my-instructions  wholesale-store.  3.  Aceording-to-his-con- 
tract  as-per-his-order  confidential-communication  esti- 
mated-eost  estimated-weight  I-may-be-there  monthly-re- 
port. 4.  Postal-eard  postage-stamp  we-always-like-to-have 
within-a-week-oi'-two  your-most-obedient-sei'vant  just-say- 
so  our-instructions.    Translate  Ls  6  to  15  inclusive. 

PHRASES. 

481.  According-(to)-my-agreement  according-(to)-your- 
contract  account-book  another-class-(of)-goods  at-any-cost 
east-bound-shipments  I-shall-be-pleased  just-received-your- 
coramunication  letter-press  please-order  please- write  we- 
answer  we-will-forward-you  what-have-you-to-ofter  when- 
ever-you-are-ready  will-be-charged  Avill-be-collected  will- 
be-marked  will-be-expressed  Avill-you-please-acknowledge- 
receipt  your-loss  your-i'isk  your-order  your-humble-servant. 

483.  exercise  44. 

Our  Home  on-the  Hillside, 

Dansville,  Livingston  Co.,  New-York,  March  1, 1884. 

Isaac  Bennett,  Esq.,''  Carrollton,  111. 

My-Dear-Sir: — Our  mutual-friend,  Mr. -Peters,  who-is  at- 
present  in-the-employ  of-Our^''  Home  on-the  Hillside,  as-one 
of-its  I'eporting-seeretaries,  has  handed  me  yonr-letter  of 
Feb.  20,'''''' wherein  you  express  a-desireto-have-my  testimony 
in-respect-to  stenographic-writing.  It  gives-me  great-pleas- 
ure (1)  to  say-to-you,  that-for  twenty-six  years  I-have-had 
young-men-and-women  in-my-employment'  as  stenograph- 


Plate  44* 

la-- ^3     o.^— ^^_D     ^        ^ 

V^ 

..r 

l3       - 

Mr.  M.  M.  Trarer,  TJniot 

I,  III 

) 

~-^>/^-^/-- 

r  V. 

y     1  (S-~^ 

^~-       b        X                ra      __    o         /                ^ 

V- 

■-■J--\ 

-^    -V^      1    -^     =-V'      "^    X 

r  XL 

Q_^            J 

.  C   '   V  .     ^        ^. 

C.F. 

-4Z6o  De  Bernales,  New  York  City. 

-    ^ 

-  •  ->     o/      X 

(-  .-5      — :3 
X         ^^ 

"Y  X    p^ 

258  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SUORT-HAND. 

ers.  Siich-is-my  estimate  of-the-valiie  of-the-art  of-short- 
hand,  that-1-would-have-it''''  taught  in-all-our  graded-schools 
and-acaderaies  throughout  the-land  to  young-men -an  d- 
women.  Taking''''''  all-our  institutions  into  account,  and-the 
wide  range  of-occupationsin-which-our  young-men  have-to(2) 
engage,  and-\vluch-ai"e  opening  to-our  young-women,  I- 
Avould-rather  have  given  proficiency  in  stenography'  as-a- 
part  of-a  young-man's  or-a  young-woman's  education,  than- 
tlie- best  average  Collegiate'''' accomplishment  which  aiiy-of- 
our  Colleges  or-Universities  furnish  iu-the  Latin  and-Greck 
languages.  It-is-not  simply'''''  as  scribes  for-others  that-this- 
art  is-of -value ;  for-it-is  of-quite  as-much  service  (3)  to-those- 
who  attain  it  in-their-own  private  affairs.  What-an-excellent 
opportunity  it  furnishes  to-one''  wiio-has-'it  at-liand  to-make 
memoranda  of  things  seen  and-heard,  and-thus  fui'nishing 
him'''  with-the-means  of-fastening  in-his-mind,  and-having 
at-his  sei'vice,  most  useful  information!  I-have-had''''''  on-an 
average  for  twenty-five  years,  not-less-than  three  short-hand- 
writers  in  constant  use;  (4)  and-I-do-not-know  of  any  who, 
after  my  training,  have-not  secured  good-positions,  and-kept' 
them,  and-obtained  entirely  satisfactory  compensation. 
Assuring  you  that-I-am  iu-the  fullest  sense  a-believer'"  in- 
the-worth  of-the-art  as-a-means  of  added  usefulness  in-what- 
ever profession  or-calling  any-person  may-be''''  engaged, 
and-wishing  you  all-success  in-your  pursuit  of-it,  I-remain, 

Yoiu-s  faithfully, 

James  C.  Jackson.  (5) 
(365—5—3.) 

{To  be  phrased.) 

483.  New  York,  July  11th,  1886. 

W.  W.  Griffith,  Esq.,  Memphis,  Tenn. 

Dear  Sir: — We  regret'  exceedingly  the  non-delivery  of 
yoiu'  esteemed  order,  and  the  inconvenience  and  disappoint- 
ment occasioned  you  thereby.  We  can  assure  you,"  how- 
ever, that  we  are  in  no  way  responsible  for  the  delay;  ])ut 
that,  on  the  contrary,  we  have  used"'  every  effort  to  secure 
the  promp  execution  and  despatch  of  the  order. 


REPORTIXG  STYLE  OF  SIIORTIIAXD.  259 

It  happens,  unfortnnately  foi-us,  that  just  at  (1)  the  present 
moment  the  mainifarturers  are  overwhelmed  with  Inisiiiess; 
and,  in  a  juncture  such  as  this,  there  is  no  help'  for  it  but  to 
wait  patiently  the  execution  in  due  course  of  theox-ders  sent. 

With  the  hope,  however/''  of  prevailing  on  the  manufac- 
turer in  this  particular  instance  to  make  a  little  extra  extor- 
tion, we  have  written  him,  by  this'''"  evening's  mail,  a  most 
urgent  letter;  and  we  feel  almost  certain  that  if  our  request 
can  be  complied  with  (2)  it  most  certainly  will  be.  As  soon 
as  Ave  receive  an  answer  Ave  Avill  Avrite  or  telegraph  to  you 
sucl/  positive  information  as  may  prevent  further  disap- 
pointment. We  must  apologize  for  not  having  written  to 
you  previously,  but,  the''  truth  is,  we  ourselves  were  ex- 
pecting every  day  to  hear  some  tidings  of  the  order  which 
Ave  might  send'''' you.  Regretting  the  trouble  and  annoyance 
to  which  you  have  been  put,  Ave  ai-e, 

Yours  faithfully, 

J.  L.  King  &  Co.  (3) 
(234—3—1:30.) 


LESSON  XLV. 

SPEECH   KEPOKTING. 

484.  A  verbatim  report  of  a  rapid  public  speaker  is  the 
greatest  achievement  of  the  stenographic  art.  There  are, 
hoAvever,  but  comparatively  fcAV  speeches  of  A\iiich  reports 
are  wanted;  and  it  is  a  fortunate  fact  that  the  best  orators, 
Avhose  speeches  are  the  most  frequently  published,  are  the 
easiest,  also,  to  report.  But  it  is  very  rare  that  a  speech 
appears  well  in  print,  in  the  precise  language  in  Avhich  it 
Avas  delivered.  A  certain  amount  of  tautology  and  repetition 
add  to  the  force  of  a  spoken  address,  Avhich  in  a  printed  re- 
port must  be  discarded.  Many  phrases,  and  cA'en  whole 
sentences,  may  oftentimes  be  profitably  omitted;  and  the 
rhetoric  of  an  extemporaneous  speech  can  generally  be  im- 
proved. These  matters  lie  clearly  Avithin  the  scope  of  the 
stenographer's  duty;  but  the  best  plan  is  ahvays,  when  pos- 


260  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

sible,  to  submit  to  the  speaker  liimself  an  exact  copy,  written 
on  paper  with  a  broad  margin,  in  order  that  he  may  amend 
and  remodel  as  he  sees  lit. 

485.  Key.  1.  As-it-is-the-characteristic  of  great  wits  to  say- 
much  in  few  words,  so-it-is  of-small  wits  to  talk  much  and 
say  nothing.  2.  It-is-when  you-come  close  to-a-man  in 
conversation  that-you  discover  what-his  real  abilities  are. 
3.  Speech-making  is-a  knack. ^  4.  Men  are  born  with  two 
eyes,  but-with-one  tongue,  in-order-that-they  should  see 
twice  as-much-as  they-say. 

Matt.  5:  3-18.    Transhite  without  refen-ing  to  key. 

486.  The  student  will  find  the  following  suggestions  of 
value,  whether  he  intends  making  a  business  of  this  branch 
of  reporting  or  not: 

Fully  prepare  yourself  before  the  speech  begins.  Obtain 
a  seat,  one  at  a  desk  if  possible,  within  easy  hearing  of  the 
speaker.  Have  yourself  amply  provided  Avith  suitable  writ- 
ing material.  Use  a  pen,  if  you  are  accustomed  to  one; 
otherwise,  have  a  number  of  sharpened  pencils  at  hand. 

No  matter  what  the  purpose  of  yoi;r  report  may  be,  make 
it  a  point,  as  far  as  you  are  able,  to  take  every  word  that  is 
uttered.  If  the  entire  speech  is  not  Avanted,  you  can  prepare 
an  intelligent  synopsis  from  your  full  short-hand  notes;  but 
an  abridgement  made  in  short-hand  while  the  speech  is  being 
delivered,  is  by  no  means  so  satisfactory. 

Beginners  are  sometimes  obliged,  however,  before  they 
can  follow  a  rapid  speaker,  to  make  as  full  a  synopsis  as  they 
are  able,  recording  the  substance  only  of  what  is  said.  And 
it  is  commonly  the  case,  indeed,  that  only  partial  reports  of 
very  rapid  speakers  are  wanted. 

A  complete  report  of  a  speech  requires  that  many  things 
be  inserted,  which,  verbally,  are  not  a  part  of  the  address 
itself,  things  acted  rather  tlian  said.  The  manner  and  ap- 
pearance of  the  speaker  should  be  descril:)ed;  also,  the  cliar- 
acter  of  the  audience,  and  the  demonstrations  of  approval, 
or  otherwise,  with  which  the  speaker's  utterances  are  re- 
ceived. 


SENTENCES. 


•^ 


c D 


Q_ 


) 


®^  /  V  \  1  ^  L  "I  ...iL^...  ( 


TRANSLATE. 


.1..^  3    ^ 


Matt.  chap.  5.  (s)   \d 


Z     X    ^10- 


/^  Q ^ 


> 


n  «  X 


262  REPORTINO  STYLE  OF'.SHORT-HAND. 

PHRASES. 

487.  Further-consideration  good-as-ever  great-many- 
times  I-suppose-you-can  I-suppose-tliere-will-be  1-take- 
great-pleasure  knowledge-of-the-subject  little-as-possible 
little-less  local-affairs  local-interest  paper-money  per-day 
per-dozen  per-week  personal-affairs  personal-expenses  pei'- 
sonal-knowledge  personal-property  relating-to-the-subject 
we- want-to-find. 

EXERCISE  45. 

488.  THE-PRESENT-AGE. — CHANNING. 

1.  The-remarks  now-made  on-literature  might-be  extended 
to-the  fine-arts.  2.  In-these  we  see,  too,  the-tendency  to- 
universality/  It-is-said,  that-the-spirit  of-the  great  artists 
has  died  out;  but-the  taste  for-their  works  is  spreading. 

3.  By-the''''  improvements  of  engraving,  and-the  invention 
of  casts,  the-genius  of-the  great-masters  is  going  abroad. 

4.  Their  conceptions  are  no-longer  pent''''  up  in  galleries 
open-to  but  few,  but  meet  us  in-our  homes,  and-are-the 
household  pleasures  of  millions.  5.  Works  designed  for- 
the  (1)  halls  and-eyes  of-emperors,  popes,  and-nobles,  find 
their-way,  in  no  poor  representations,  in  humble  dwellings, 
and-sometimes  give-a  consciousness'  of-kindred  powers  to- 
the  child  of  poverty.  6.  The-art  of  drawing,  which  lies  at- 
the-foundation  of-most  of-the  tine-arts,"  and-is-the-best 
education  of-the  eye  for-nature,  is-becoming  a-branch  of- 
common  education,  and  in-some  countries  is  taught"''  in- 
schoolsto-which  all-classes  are  admitted.  7.  I-am  reminded 
by-this  remark  of-the-most  striking  feature  of-our  times, 
as  (2)  showing  its  tendency  to-universality,  and-that-is-the 
unparalleled  and-constantly  accelerated  diffusion  of-educa- 
tion.  This  greatest  of-arts,  as-yet  little'  understood,  is 
making  sure  progress,  because-its  principles  are-more-and- 
more  sought  in-the-common  nature  of  man;  and-the  great- 
truth"  is  spreading,  that-every-man  has-a-right  to-its  aid. 

8.  Accordingly  education  is  becoming  the-work  of  nations. 

9.  Even  iu-the  despotic'"  governments  of  Europe  schools 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORTHAND.  268 

are  open  for-every  child  without-distiuctiou;  and-not-only-the 
elements  of-readiiig  and-writing,  but-music  and-drawing  (3) 
are  taught,  and-a  foundation  is  laid  for  future-progress  in 
history,  geography,  and-physical  science.  10.  The-greatest 
minds  are  at-worlv  on-popular' ethu-ation.  11.  The-revenues 
of  states  are  applied  most  liberally,  not  to-the  uuivei-sities 
for-the  few,  but  tothe  common-st'hools.  12.  Undoubtedly 
mucl/''  remains  to-be-done;  especially  a-new  rank  in-society 
is-to-be  given  to-the  teacher;  but  even  in-this-respect'''''  a- 
revolution  has  commenced,  and-we-are  beginning  to-look 
on-the  guides  of-the  young  as-the-chief  benefactors  of-man- 
kind.  (4)  (369—4—3.) 


LESSON  XLVI. 
CONVENTION  REPORTING. 

489.  Stenographers  are  employed  to  report  the  proceed- 
ings of  various  deliberative  assemblies,  as  legislatures,  con- 
stitutional, and  the  more  important  political  conventions, 
and  professional  and  trades-men's  associations.  These  re- 
ports are  commonly  furnished  to  newspapers,  and  also 
frequently  published  in  book  form.  The  purposes  for  which 
they  are  made,  and  the  degrees  of  fullness  required  are  so 
various,  that  no  comprehensive  rules  can  be  laid  down  sufll- 
cient  to  govern  the  reporter  in  every  case.  The  following 
suggestions,  however,  will  be  found  of  value: 

490.  The  stenographer  should,  if  possible,  be  seated  neax", 
or  at  the  same  table  with  the  official  secretary,  in  order  that, 
as  the  business  progresses,  he  may  learn  the  names  of  speak-, 
ers,  and  those  taking  part  in  the  discussions. 

It  is  the  best  plan  alwajs  to  take  as  full  notes  as  possible 
although  an  abridged  report  only  may  be  wanted,  since  the 
work  of  condensing  can  better  be  performed  when  the  tran- 
scribing is  being  done,  than  when  the  pi'oceedings  are  in 
course. 


264  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

It  is  commonly  the  reporter's  duty  to  take  clown  all  mo- 
tions anil  i-esolutious,  except  those  in  writing;  also,  amend- 
ments thereto,  and  remarks  and  decisions  thereupon. 

Essays,  and  other  papers  which  are  read  to  tlie  association, 
are  filed  with  the  secretary,  and  need  not  be  taken  down  in 
short-liand;but  the  discussion  of  any  question  to  which  these 
may  give  rise,  should  be  noted  by  the  reporter. 

The  speaker's  name,  when  announced  by  the  chairman, 
should  be  written  in  long-hand  at  the  left  margin  of  the 
paper,  and  his  remarks  recorded  just  below. 

The  official  stenographer  of  the  convention  should  make  a 
record  of  everything  that  transpires.  Much  revision,  and 
the  judgment  of  an  editor,  are  needed  in  preparing  such 
verbatim  reports  for  publication.  This  is  usually  done  by 
the  secretary,  or  a  special  committee.  Short-hand  writers 
experienced  in  this  branch  of  the  profession,  are  often  em- 
ployed both  to  make  and  revise,  or  edit,  such  reports. 

The  successful  reporter  of  public  meetings  is  wide-awake 
and  observing;  on  the  alert  constantly  not  only  to  hear  what 
is  said,  but  to  know  Avhat  is  meant  by  the  speaker.  The 
stenographer  who  does  not  knoAV  the  meaning  of  what  he 
writes  cannot  be  relied  upon  to  make  a  correct  transcript. 

EXERCISE  46. 
491.  PROCEEDINGS 


THIRD  ANNUAL  MEETING  OF  THE  IOWA  STATE 
PHARMACEUTICAL  ASSOCIATION, 

Held  in  Des  Moines,  February  14-15,  1882. ' 

First  Day. — Wednesday  Afternoon  Session. 

The-meeting  was  called  to-oi'der  at  10  o'clock.  President 
Hogin  in-the  chair. 

The-minutes  of-the  last  session  were  read,^''  corrected, 
and-approved. 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  265 

The-President:  I-will-now  call-for-the-report  of-the  Com- 
mittee on  Legislation. 

Tlie-report  was  read  by-the-Chairman/''''  Mr.  Bush,  and- 
the  paper  passed  to-the  Secretary. 

On  motion  of  Mr.  Wallace,  the-report  of-the  Committee  on 
Legislation  was  adopted.  (1) 

The-President:  Dr.  Treat,  have-you  anything-further  to- 
report  on  Pharmacy  and  Quei-ies? 

Dr.  Treat:  Yes-sir;  a-paper  by'  Mr.  W.  H.  Hardy,  of- 
Clinton. 

The-Secretary:  Mr. -Chairman,  I-would-like  to  say  first, 
that  our  Treasurer  has-a-letter  from  Mr. -Hardy,'''  expressing 
regrets  for-his  inability  to-be  at-the  meeting. 

The-President:  We-will-now  listen  to-the  reading  of-the 
paper'''  by  Mr.  W.  H.  Hardy,  of-Clinton. 

The-paper  is  read  to-the  Association  by  Dr.  Treat. 

The-President:  Now-you-have  heard-the  (2)  reading  of- 
the  paper  by  Mr. -Hardy,  of-Clinton.  What-is-the-pleasure 
of-the  house  as-to-the  disposal  of-it?' 

Dr.  Treat:  I-move-you,  Mr. -Chairman,  that-the  communi- 
cation be-received. 

The-President:  You-mean-by-that,  that-it  shall -be  printed" 
in-the  proceedings? 

Dr.  Treat:    Yes-sir, 

The-motion  was-carried  and-the  thanks  of-the  Association 
tendered  the-writer. 

Mr.  Schafer:'"  I-will-now-present  the-report  of-the  com- 
mittee appointed  to-consider  the-President's  address. 

Vice-President  Townsend  assumes  the-chair. 

The  committee  (3)  referred  to  report  as  follows:  "  To-the 
President  and-members  of-the  Iowa  State  Pharmaceutical 
Association:  Your  committee  appointed  to-consider  the- 
address  of-our'  retiring  President,  ask-to-present  the-follow- 
ing  report: 

We-do  most  heartily  concur  in-the  leading  suggestions. 
We  would,  however,  call-your  special"  attention  to-the  fol- 
lowing recommendations: 


266  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

1.  That-every  registered  Pharmacist  look  well  to  all  im- 
positions from  unprincipled  persons,  in-ohtaining  liquors  for 
improper  use''''''  under-all-mauner  of-representations. 

3.  Tliat-we  heartily  endorse  the  aiding  and-sustaining  the- 
Commissioners  of  Pharmacy  iu-their  duties  to-the  full  (4) 
extent  of-tlie  law. 

3.  The-subject  of -revising  the-By-Laws  had-our  attention, 
but  owing  to-the  necessities  of-the-case,  amendments  have'' 
already-been  adopted,  which  fully  cover  this-point. 

4.  We-most  heartily  and-cheerfuUy  endorse  the-sngges- 
tion,  that-the  Association  become  incorporated  under-the'''' 
laws  of- the  State.  A-motion  to-adopt  the-report  of- the  com- 
mittee prevailed. 

Mr. -Crawford:  Mr. -Chairman;  I-move-you  that-the''''' 
Committee  on  Legislation,  as  expressing  the-sense  of-this 
Association,  be  instructed  to-procure  an-amendment  to-the- 
present  law,  making-it-a  (5)  penalty  not-exceeding  $'300  for- 
a-person  conducting  a-piiarmacy  witliout  registration,  by 
having-that-matter  so-that-it-will  properly'  come-before-the 
Grand-Jury,  and-that-the  Court  may  act  at  discretion,  and- 
make-a  fine  not-exceeding  this  amount.  There-are''''  com- 
munities where-the  prohibitory  liquor  law  of  Iowa  is  prac- 
tically a-dead-letter.  No  Grand-Jury  can-be  impaneled  to- 
take  proper  cognizance''''''  of-the  law. 

The-law-maker  makes-the  law,  not-only  to-rnle  subjects, 
but  also  to-rule  the-law-makers.  Now  I-think-that,  (6)  in- 
this-matter,  we-stand  between-the  law-maker  and-the  law- 
breaker. In-this-respect  we-are  handling,  unfortunately, 
patent  medicines,'  one-of-the  giant  evils  of-the  day.  That- 
there-is-a-demandfor-thera,  no-one  questions.  Tliis-demand 
comes  as-welK''  from-the  law-maker  as-it  does  froni-the  law- 
breaker. While-one-man  claims  to  call  for-it  within-the 
limits  of-the'''''  law,  there-is-a-question  at-last  about-what 
there-is-a  call-for.  Now-then,  we-are-not  only  standing  be- 
tween law-makers  (7)  and  law-breakers,  but-we-stand  be- 
tween-the patent  medicine  man  and-the  consimier,  between- 
the  physician  and-the  patient.    It-seems-to-me'  our-position 


BEPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  267 

is-a-veiy  peculiai*  one.  For-instance,  some  nostrum  is  placed 
upon-the  market  and-it-is-so  advertised''''  tliat-there-is-a-de- 
mauil  f  or-it,  and-\ve,  as  retail  dealers,  purchase  some  and-sell 
it  to-our  customers  who  demand-it.  It-is-a'''' spurious  article. 
Wlio-gets-the  blame?  I-thiuk-those-Avho-are  doing-business 
on-honest  principles  and-living  up  to-the  law,  will  (8)  go 
forward  and-raise  the-standard  so  high  that-every-one  will- 
be  ashamed  to  engage  in-that-business. 

The-President:  The-motlon''  now  is-that-the  Committee  on 
Legislation  procure  a-pharmacy  law  making-the  violator 
liable  to-a  penalty  not-exceeding  $200/'' 

Mr.  Parish:    Did-you  say  that-it-should-be  indictable? 

Mr. -Crawford:  Yes-sir.  I  said  that-it-should-be-a  misde- 
meanor,'"''' and-that-the  penaltj'should-be-that  amount. 

A-Member:  I-think-there  ought-to-be  a-way  of-getting 
out-of-it  without-making  (9)  it  a-Grand-Jury  affair.  1-think- 
it-is-an  offense  that-ought-to-be  punishable  before-a-justice- 
of-the-peace.'' 

Mr.  Parish:  I-don't-think,  Mr. -Chairman,  that-jou-can 
find-a  town  in  Iowa,  where-there-is-a  druggist,  but  who-has- 
a  delicacy'''  about  filing  a-complaint  against-a  competitor. 
But  if-you-make-it  a-Grand-Jury  offense,  they-will  be-obliged 
to-take  action''"  in-these-matters.  You-may  take-it  in-any 
town.  There-is  one  in-our  town  who-is-not-a  pharmacist, 
not  eligible  by-reason-of  (10)  age,  and-he-is  violating  the- 
law,  and-there  ought-to-be  somebody  whose  duty  it- was  to- 
take  action  in-these-matters.' 

Mr.  Ellis:  Let-us-take-a  view  of-our  position  as  druggists, 
the-position  iu-whicli  Ave-ai'e  held  up  before-the-public,''''  so 
far-as  we-are  individually  concerned.  It-ought-to-be  our 
object  personally  to  abide  bj^ -tlie  laws,  whatever  these  laws 
may-be.''''  (1010—10:45—8.) 

492.  TRANSLATE. 


T  ^  o^  0  c    A  -' 


-^. 


868 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


:v 


'^ 


Schafer:       ^^o 


c 


o 


V 


vA 


1> 


c 


i5         ^ 


^ 


■^  ^ 


^ : L^....^^-  ^'^  ,  U^x 


493. 


PHRASES. 


t-'-vp 


EKPORTINO  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  269 

LESSON  XL VII. 

LAW    REPORTING. 

494.  Law  Reporting,  or  the  business  of  recording  the 
proceedings  liad  on  the  trial  of  causes,  is  one  of  the  most  im- 
portant branches  of  tlie  stenographic  profession.  In  this  day, 
all  important  cases  are  reported  in  short-hand,  and,  in- 
deed, of  so  great  advantage  is  this  art  fonnd  to  be  in  the  ad- 
ministration of  justice,  that  in  many  states  the  appointment 
of  sivilled  stenographers  is  authorized  by  law.  In  the  most 
perfect  methods  of  administering  justice  that  have  been 
devised,  it  has  been  required  that  some  kind  of  record  of  the 
evidence  be  preserved,  and  tlie  fuller  this  is  the  better. 

Stenography  has  revolutionized  the  methods  of  proceeding 
in  the  coiu-ts  ;  for  by  its  speed  much  time  is  saved,  and  de- 
lays, which,  during  a  trial,  are  prejudicial  to  justice,  are 
more  easily  prevented,  and  the  occasion  lor  expensive  re- 
trials oftentimes  precluded.  In  no  business  or  profession  is 
stenography  more  welcome  than  in  law,  where  so  much 
depends  on  a  record  being  kept  of  the  precise  words  made 
use  of. 

The  Law  Reporter  must  possess  various  qualitications  in 
order  to  a  competent  discharge  of  the  duties  of  his  calling. 
He  should  be  able  to  write  at  least  one  hundred  and  seventy- 
live  words  a  minute,  and  read  his  notes  fluently.  In  addi- 
tion, also,  to  a  thorough  English  education,  good  memory, 
and  quickness  of  perception,  he  should  have  a  familiar  ac- 
quaintance with  the  various  forms  and  methods  of  proceed- 
ing in  Courts.  The  greater  his  knowledge  of  law,  esi^ecially 
that  of  evidence,  the  better.  No  student  should  neglect  the 
main  features  of  this  branch  of  the  profession.  Especially 
the  forms  of  such  reports  should  be  learned,  since  amanuen- 
ses, and  all  short-hand  writers  in  fact,  are  frequently  desired 
to  make  reports  of  depositions,  referred  cases,  and  the  testi- 
mony received  at  preliminary  hearings. 

495.  The  Caption  of  a  law-stenographer's  report  should 
show  the  title,  number,  and  nature  of  the  cause,  the  Court 


270  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

where  pending,  the  name  of  the  judge,  referee,  commission- 
er, or  other  tribunal  by  wliom  the  same  is  heard  ;  the  term 
of  court,  building,  town,  countj^,  and  state  -where  the  trial  is 
had  ;  the  name  of  counsel  appearing  on  either  side  ;  the 
name  and  address  of  the  stenographer  employed.  This 
should  occupy  the  first  page  and  be  drawn  up  in  the  follow- 
ing manner  : 

CAPTION. 


James  Morgan,  et  al. 

vs. 

Oscar  A.  Simons 
and 
John  H.  Bass. 


APPEARANCES : 

NiNDE  &  Ellison, 

^Q   fj-gg  Altoraeijs  for  Plaintiffs. 

R.  S.  Taylor  and 
Coombs,  Morris  *fc  Bell, 

Attorneys  for  Defendants. 


EJECTMENT. 

Pending  in  theU.  S.  Circuit  Court  for  the  Northern  District 
of  Indiana,  June  Term,  A.  D.  1881.  At  the  Federal  Court 
room,  Fort  Wayne,  before  His  Honor,  Judge  Walter  Q. 
Gresham,  and  a  jury. 

Eldon  Moran,  Ofiicial  Stenographer. 

496.  The  report  proper  begins  on  the  second  page,  the 
heading  of  which  should  show  for  what  party  litigant  the 
testimony  is  taken,  the  hour,  the  day  of  the  week  and  month, 
and  the  year,  when  tlie  trial  was  begun.  Names  of  witnesses 
should  be  wi'itten  in  long-hand.  The  reccn-d  should  also 
show  what  attorney  conducted  the  examination. 

The  main  body  of  a  law-report  consists  in  the  record  of 
question  and  answer,  or  what  is  said  by  the  lawyer  in  elicit- 
ing testimony,  and  by  the  witness  in  reply  thereto.  That 
which  is  spoken  by  the  lawyer  is  for  convenience  denomi- 
nated question,  and  the  reply  of  the  witness,  answer,  al- 
though the  reverse  is  sometimes  in  fact  true,  as  may  be  illus- 
trated by  the  following  colloquy  between  lawyer  and  wit- 
ness : 

Ques.  (lawyer)  Where  were  you  living  at  the  time? 

Ans.  (witness)  When  do  you  mean? 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SUORT-IIAND. 


271 


Ques.  (lawyer)  I  mean  at  the  time  the  accident  happened. 

497.  Paper  about  five  inches  broad  is  the  most  convenient 
for  law-reports.  The  question  begins  at  the  left  margin  and 
extends  across  the  page.  The  answer  should  begin,  and  be 
entirely  written,  in  sucli  a  manner  as  that  no  part  of  it  shall 
be  nearer  than  one  and  one-half  inclies  of  the  left  margin. 
Answers,  when  brief,  may  be  written  on  the  same  line  witli 
the  question,  provided  a  space  of  at  least  one  inch  is  allowed 
to  intervene. 

The  proper  heading,  and  disposition  of  question  and  an- 
swer, is  illustrated  by  the  exercise  for  translation. 

PHRASES. 

498.  About-how-many  about-what-time  all-contracts  an- 
nual-report enter-into-an-agreement  enter-into-a-contract 
enter-into-possession  further-consideration  give-evidence 
give-possession  Grand-Jury  into-court  law-reports  about- 
how-long-was-it  by-the-evidence  court-of-claims  not-to-niy- 
recollection  oflFers-in -evidence  state-when-it-was  state-how- 
many  take-into-consideration  I-do-not-know  I-know-noth- 
ing-about  it-is-only  in-its-exercise  in-all-such-cases. 


499. 


EXERCISE   47. 


WILSON  H.  SWALES,  Guardian, 

vs. 

THE  WHITE-WATER  RAILROAD 

COMPANY. 


Appearances  : 
IIOLMAN  &  McMULLEN, 
No.  1460.  Atti/sfor  I'lff. 

BELL  &  BAINBRIDGE, 
Ally's  for  Deft.' 


DAMAGES. 

Tried  at  Lawrenceburg,  Indiana,  at  the  May  Term,  A.  D. 
1881,  of  the  Dearborn  County  Circuit  Court,  before"  his 
Honor,  Judge  Hayes,  and  a  jury. 

Charles  Ashb}^ — sworn  on  the  part  of  Plaintiff. 

Examined  by  Mr.  McMullen. 

Q.     Where-do-you-reside  ?''''' 

A.    In  Harrison  Township,  Dearborn  Co.,  Ind. 

Q.     Do-you-know  where  Longnecker  station  is? 

A.    Yes-sir. 


272  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

Q.    Tell-the-Jury  where  you-live  iu-reference-to  the-sta- 

tioll.    (1) 

A.  I-live  on-the  pike  about-one-quart cr  of-a-mile  from- 
the-station.  Right  about  here,  (referring  to-the  jnap,  ex- 
hibit "B")/ 

Q.  How  far  is-it  from-whei'e  you-live  straight  across  to- 
the  raih'oad? 

A.    About  forty  rods. 

Q.     Do-you-remember  when-this-accident  happened  f 

A.  I-believe  it-was-the  9th  of  December,  1879,  between 
five  and  six  o'chjck,  to-the-best  of-niy-knowledgc/'''' 

Q.     You-may-state-whether  it- was  light  or  dark. 

A.  It-was  ou-the  darkish  order.  It-was-a  sort  of  cloudy 
evening.  (2) 

Q.  How  far  is-that  frora-where-the  railroad  crosses  into 
Franklin  County? 

A.    About  two-miles. 

Q.  Wbere-were-you  on-the  evening  that-this-accident 
happened'?'' 

A.     At  my  house,  standing  out  on-the  porch. 

Q.  What-did-you  first  hear, — not  what-was-said  to-you — ; 
first  state- whether-or-not''''  you-heard  any  collision  or  noise? 

A.     I  heard-the  collision,  that-is  what  drew  niy-attention. 

Q.  State  to-the  Jury  whether-or-not  at-this-tiine''''''  j'ou 
saw-the  passenger-train. 

A.     I-did. 

Q.     Where-was-the  passenger-train  Avhen  you  saw-it? 

A.     It-was  coming  along-down  here  by-the  dam.  (3) 

Q.     Wh(!ie-did  the-work  or  wild  train  whistle  if-at-all? 

A.     Right-here  at-the  graveyard — just-gave  one  blast. 

Q.  You-may-state-wliotlier''  that-work-train  gave  another 
signal  from-that-time  till-you-heard  the-collision  down  b^-- 
the  crossing. 

A.    Yes-sir,  that-is-all  I  heard'''  till-the-collision. 
Q.     Now  how  near  was-this  train  to-tlie  passenger-train 
wlien-the-passcnger  moved  away  from-tlie-stationv 


EEPORTIXG  STYLE  OF  SIIORT-IIAXD.  273 

A.  Well,  I-cannot-answer"'  that  because  I-cannot  see-the 
station  from-my-house. 

Q.  Was-there  any-time  when  you-could  see  both  trains 
at-once?  (4) 

A.  Yes-sir,  when-the  passenger-train  was  here  in  front 
of-the  graveyard,  (referring  to-the  map),  the  wild-train  was 
coming  around  the-dam/ 

Q.  Tell-the-Jur3'  about-how  far  apart  these  trains  were 
at-tliat-time. 

A.    Considerably  over-a-mile. 

Q.  That-is,  when-the  passenger-train"  was-at-the  grave- 
yard? 

A.    Yes-sir. 

Q.  How  far  down  toward-the-station  could-you  see-the 
passenger-train  f rom-your-house ?'''" 

A.  To-right  above-the  target  at-the  upper  end  of-the 
switch. 

Q.  How-far  above-the-railroad  is-this  ground  where-your- 
house  is  located?  (5) 

A.    Forty-five  feet  I  should-judge. 

Q.  How-long- was-it  from-the-time-you  heard  the  whistle 
till-you  heard-the  collision  ?' 

A.  I-didn't  pay  any-attention,  but  it-was-a-very-short- 
time. 

Q.  Have-you  anything  by-which-you-can  measure  the 
time?''' 

A.  No-sir,  I-didn't  pay  much  attention  at-that-time.  It- 
was  so  short-a-time  that-I-made  remarks  to-my-wif  e — ^'^ 

Q.  If-you-have-anything  by-which-you-can  fix  it  in-your- 
mind  without  telling  what-was-said-and-done,  (6)  you-may- 
give  us  your-best  knowledge  of-it. 

A.  It-was-a-minute  or  somewheres  about  there  ;  perhaps 
it-might-have-been-that-loug''  or  longer  to-the-best-of-my- 
knowledge. 

Q.    Did-you-go-down  to-the  station  after-that? 

A.  Yes-sir,  they  came  after  me''  just-a-few-minutes  after- 
it-happened,  a-very-short-time. 


274  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

Q.    You  went-down  then  ? 

A.    Yes-sir. 

Q.    Wlio-went-with-you,  if-anybody?'''" 

A.  Nobody  went  with-me,  only-the-gentleman  who-came 
for-me. 

Q.    Were-yon  there  when-the-train  backed  up  again? 

A.    No-sir.    (7) 

Q.     Had-it  gone  on  when-you  arrived? 

A.     It-was  just-going  when-I-got  there. 

Q.    Where-was  Miss  Hurley? 

A.     Riglit  at-tlie  end  of-tlie  crib/ 

Q.    What- was  done  with  her? 

A.    She-was  piclced  up  and-carried  to-my-house. 

Q.    How-long  did  slie  remain  at-your-house?'''' 

A.     I-think  two-or-three  days. 

Q.  Did-you  ever  measure  the-distance  between  that  crib 
and-the  railroad? 

A.  I-measured  between-the''''''  end  of-the  shingle-pile  and- 
the  rails  ;  I-think  the-distance  was-about  one-hundred  feet. 

Q.    You  did-not  measure  the-crib  by-itself  ?  (8) 

A.  No-sir,  but  I  should-judge  the-crib  to-be  about  sixty 
feet  long. 

Q.    It-is  simply  a-pile  of  shingles  with-a  shed  over  iV/ 

A.     Yes-sir,  that-is-it. 

Q.     Can-you  see  the-crossing  from-your-house? 

A.    No-sir,  I-cannot. 

Q.  Now-suppose  a-party  is''''  seated  in-a  two  horse  spring- 
wagon,  the  hind  wheels  being-past  this-end  of-the  shingle- 
shed,  how-far  above-the  crossing''''  cau-the-railroad  target 
be-seen  ? 

Mr.  Bell  objects-to-the-question,  as  calling  for-a-conclusion 
of-the  witness  rathei'-than  for-the  facts.  (9)  Question  with- 
drawn. 

Q.  I-wish-you-would  state  just  the-condition  of-the  lady, 
when-you  saw  her  there  at-the-time-when''  she-was  taken-up 
to-your-house. 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SIIORT-IIAND.  275 

A.  She-was  perfectly  unconscious,  did-not-know-anything 
for-a  couple  of-daj's/' 

Q.    What  bruises,  if-any,  did-you  see  upon  her? 

A.  She-had-a  wouud  on  her  arm,  but-I-do-uot  remem- 
Ijgj.///  now  which-one  ;  she-had  also-been  struck  on-the  head. 

Q.     Where-was-the  wound  dressed?    A.     At-my-house. 

Q.  Who-was-the  physician?  (10)  A.  Dr.  West,  of  Har- 
rison. 

Q.  Was  she-taken  away  from-your-house  before  she 
again-became  conscious? 

Mr.  Bell,  on-part  of-defendant''  objects-to-the-question  on- 
the-ground  that-it-is  leading.  Objection  sustained.  Plain- 
tiflf-excepts.^'  (97&— 10:30— 7.) 


500.  BUSINESS   LETTER. — TRANSLATE. 


276 


REPOETING  STYLE  OF  SnOBT-IIAyD. 


501 


TRANSLATE. — Charles  Ashby — Continued. 


J 


er^ 


\: 


A     \ 


\-\ 


-^    1 


0  ) 


v_P' 


,-v^  « 


\=.  '  r\ 


L 


1 


c 


u 


to 


\ 


.r:....v 


.)  1 


V  1  r 
0 


A 


^    '  L 


^ 


\3 


> 


^  o  ~-T 


I  \ 

n  J      .  n     ^~, 


LESSON  XL VIII. 

OBJECTIONS,  RULINGS,  EXCEPTIONS,  EXHIBITS  AND  INDICES. 

502.  The  main  purpose  in  I'eporting  a  law-suit  is  that  the 
party  aggrieved  may  be  secured  in  his  right  of  appeal  to  a 
higher  Court.'  There  are  many  other  uses,  however,  which 
these  records  are  made  to  serve.  A  verbatim  report  is  use- 
ful in  various  ways  on  re-trials,  as,  for  instance,  when  im- 
peachments are  sought ;  also,  to  refresh  the  memory  of 
counsel  and  witnesses,  and  settle  disputes  in  regard  to  the 
testimony  formerly  elicited. 

For  the  same  reasons  they  are  often  serviceable  in  collate- 
ral proceedings ;  also,  to  perpetuate  the  testimony  of  wit- 
nesses Avho  subsequently  decease  or  become  insane.  Even 
during  the  trial,  the  presence  of  "Mr.  Reporter"  has  grown 
indispensable,  as  shown  by  the  fact  that  his  notes  are  hourly 
referred  to. 

The  stenographer's  notes  are  presumed  to  be  correct,  and 
cannot  be  changed  or  modified  except  with  the  consent  of 
the  judge,  and  agreement  of  interested  parties.  The  record 
should  contain,  not  only  everything  that  is  said  pertain- 
ing to  the  trial,  but  by  whom  it  is  spoken.  When  questions 
ai"e  asked,  or  remarks  made,  by  the  Court,  jurors,  or  attor- 
neys not  conducting  the  examination,  or  by  the  parties  them 
selves,  the  name  of  the  speaker  should  appear  parentheti- 
cally in  the  margin. 

Next  in  importance  to  the  evidence  itself  is  the  recording 
of  objections,  which  ai"e  made  from  time  to  time  to  the  intro- 
duction of  the  same,  or  to  any  proceeding  which  either  party 
may  regard  as  illegal.  The  grounds  upon  which  such  ob- 
jections are  based  should  be  noted  by  the  reporter ;  and 
should  they  not  be  stated  specifically,  the  counsel's  argu- 
ment in  presenting  the  matter  to  the  Court  should  be  taken 
down.  When  an  objection  is  decided,  the  exception,  if  any, 
taken  by  the  party  over-ruled,  should  also  be  recorded.  Ex- 
ceptions are  also  taken  to  the  decisions  of  the  Court  in  sus- 
taining or  over-ruling  various  motions  submitted  in  the 
course  of  the  trial. 

—277— 


278  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHOET-IIAXD. 

In  1-eporti  ng  depositions,  objections  are  recorded,  and 
testimony  taken  subject  thereto,  no  rulings  being  made,  or 
exceptions  taken,  at  the  time.  A  law-report  should  be  as 
nearly  as  possible  a  phoiogrcqih  of  all  the  proceedings  had. 
H(Mioe,  it  becomes  the  reporter's  duty  to  make  a  minute  of 
every  transaction  which  has  a  Ijearing  on  the  case.  Exam- 
ples of  such  notes  which  are  inserted  parenthetically  are  : 
"Witness  refuses  to  answer  the  question  ;""  12  o'clock  M. 
Court  adjourns  ;"  "The  railing  referred  to  by  the  Avitness  is 
about  twenty  feet  distant ;"  "Gentleman  referred  to  by  wit- 
ness is  Mr.  Jones,  attorney." 

In  some  civil  and  most  criminal  cases,  a  report  is  made  of 
the  impaneling  of  the  jury.  This  shouM  embrace  the  exami- 
nation of  eaeli  juror  as  to  his  qualification  to  act,  challenges 
pei'emptory  and  for  cause,  by  both  prosecution  and  defense, 
rulings  of  the  Court,  and  exceptions  of  counsel. 

The  reporter  is  at  liberty  at  all  times  to  check  witnesses 
who  speak  too  rapidly  or  indistinctly,  or  while  the  question 
is  being  put,  or  objection  made. 

503.  Written  documents,  as  deeds,  notes,  contracts, 
mortgages,  letters,  depositions,  etc.,  are  frequently  produced 
in  Court,  and  made  a  part  of  the  evidence  ;  and  for  the  pui'- 
poses  of  identification,  and  convenience  in  making  referen- 
ces, the  same  are  at  the  time  marked  by  the  reporter  as 
exhibit  "A",  "B",  etc.,  according  to  the  order  in  which  they 
are  introduced.  After  the  alphabet  has  been  exhausted,  the 
double  letters  "AA",  "BB",  etc.,  may  be  employed.  The 
paper,  besides  the  letter  "A",  should  be  marked  with  the 
initials  of  the  parties  to  the  suit ;  thus,  for  examjile,  in  the 
case  of  Frederick  vs.  Wilson,  the  certificate  of  a  County 
Auditor  is  offered  in  evidence,  and  marked  by  the  reporter, 
"Exhibit 'A',  F.  vs.  W."  This  prevents  ambiguity  in  cases 
where  the  same  document  has  already  been  marketl  with  a 
different  Letter,  as  an  exhibit  in  another  case. 

As  part  of  the  evidence,  also,  knives,  lungs,  keys,  photo- 
graphs, or  any  article  AvhatcA^er  which  may  be  important  for 
the  Court  and  Jury  to  examine,  are  from  time  to  time  intro- 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SnORT-HAND.  279 

duced.  These  may  be  marked  by  attaching  a  written  card 
firmly  to  them,  The  reporter  should  be  careful  to  identify 
as  an  exhibit,  every  article  or  document  offered  by  either 
party,  whether  or  not  the  same  is  actually  admitted  in  evi- 
dence by  the  Court,  since  rejected  exhibits  are  necessary  to 
complete  the  appellant's  bill  of  exceptions. 

504.  Half  the  value  of  a  law-report  is  lost  by  not  having  it 
properly  indexed.  In  the  first  place,  the  paper  used  should 
be  accuratelv  paged,  and  each  separate  book  or  manuscript 
numbered  in  the  order  used.  Trials  vary  in  length  from  an 
hour  to  several  months.  Reference  is  frequently  made,  and 
the  reporter  ordered  to  read  sections  of  testimony  taken 
days  and  even  weeks  previously.  This  can  be  done  only  by 
means  of  a  running  index,  which  is  kept  making  from  hour 
to  hour,  just  as  the  proceedings  take  place.  This  should  give 
the  day  and  date  of  each  session  of  Court,  the  name  of  each 
witness,  and  the  page  where  his  testimony  and  cross-exami- 
nation begins. 

Agreements,  admissions,  stipulations,  and  the  introduction 
of  exhibits,  should  also  be  indexed.  Long-hand  transcripts 
are  paged  and  indexed  in  a  similar  manner. 

505.  INDEX. 

SVTALES  i  EVIDENCE 

^      ,^         ^^^^-       „,  ^^^.^  \    on  part  of  plaintipf. 
The  White- Water  Railroad.  ) 

FIRST  DAY,  I^IAY  19,  1881. 

THURSDAY  FORENOON  SESSION. 

Impaneling  of  the  Jury,  Vol.  1,  Page  1. 
M.  B.  Fox,     ....     Vol.  1,  Page  5. 

AFTERNOON    SESSION. 

Fox,  continued,     .     .     .     1-11    Chas.   Ashby,     .     .     .     1-37 
Cross-examination,      .     .  1-13    Cross-ex.,     .     .     .     .     .  1-43 


280  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SIIORT-IIAXD. 

Re-direct  examination,  1-20  C.  Ashby,  recalled,  .  1-48 
Frank  Jackuian,  .  .  .  1-23  Benj.  Holden,  .  .  .  1-48 
Cross-ex., 1-28 

SECOND  DAY,  May  20. 

FKIDAY   FORENOON  SESSION. 

B.  F.  Hurley,     ....     1-59  Guardianship, admitted,    2-3 

Cross-ex., 1-63  Exiiibit   "B",   Map   of 

W.  H.  Swales,  .  .  Vol.  2-3  Longuecker,  admitted,  2-4 
Exhibit  "A",   Letters  of 

FRIDAY  AFTERNOON  SESSION. 

Cross-ex., 2-4      Dr.  L.  J.  Collins,    .     .    2-28 

Carrie  Hurley,  ....  2-15  Dr.  J.  P.  Green,  .  .  .  2-44 
Cross-ex., 2-21    Dr.  J.  D.  Gatch,      .     .    2-47 

PHRASES. 

506.  Aceept-service  in-chancery  it-is-also-agreed  judge'.s- 
order  Law-courts  Law-journal  legal-proceedure  legal -pro- 
ceedings legal-representative  new-trial  personal-estate 
plaintiff-and-defendant  police-court  supreme-court  with- 
out-prejudice your-honor  according-(t())-your-recollection 
along-about-that-time  according-(to)-my-recollection  did- 
you-recognize  do-you-recollect-anything-about-this  if-tlie- 
court-please  if-your-honor-please  this-is-an-actiou  where- 
did-you-go  will-you-examine  what-has-been. 

507.  exercise  48. 

Frederick     ) 

vs.  \    Evidence  on  part  of  Contestee. 

Wilson.       ) 

Session  at  Marshalltown,  Iowa,  April  12,  1883. 

James  K.  Johnson,  sworn.''    Examined  by  Judge  Bradley. 

Q.     What  official-position  if -any  do-you  hold? 

A    I-am  deputy-clerk. 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  281 

Q.  Have-you-examined-the  naturalization  x-ecords  of-this- 
countyV'''' 

A.  Yes-sir,  also  all-the-records  of  naturalization  that- 
have-been  kept  by- the  Circuit  and-District-Courts. 

Q.  Have-you-made-a  memorandum  of  whaf''''  these-re- 
cordsshovv  eoncerning-the  naturalization  of-certain-persons? 

A.     I-have. 

Mr. -Brown  on-part  of  Contestant  objects  to-the  testimony 
of-this-witness  (1)  on-the-ground  that-it-is-incompeteut  and- 
immaterial,  the-original  record  books  only  being  admissible 
as  evidence. 

Q.  I-will-ask-your  attention  to-the''  declaratory  statement 
made  by  James  Dunn.  State-whether-you  ever  examined 
the-record  of-the  naturalization  of-such-a-person,  and-if-so, 
when-did-you''''  find  that-it-was-made? 

Mr. -Brown  on-part  of  Contestant  objects-to-the-question 
on-the-gi'ound  that-it-is  incompetent  and-immaterial.^''^  The- 
original  books  themselves  are-the-best  evidence,  and-the 
witness  should-not-be-allowed  to-testify  from  any-document 
other-than  these-books  themselves.  (2) 

A.  I-have  examined  the-records  carefully,  and-find  that- 
there-are  two  James  Dunns.  One  made  his  declaratory 
statement  on-the  28th  of  July,  1856  /  the-other  made  his  de- 
claratory statement  on-the  12th  of-December,  1866.  I-also 
found  from-a  careful  examination  of-the  naturalization^'' 
records  of-the  Distinct  and-Circuit-Court  Journals  from-the 
beginning,  that-is  from  Journal  A  down  to-the  time  when- 
the  naturalization  records  were  begun,''''''  that-there-is-no 
record  of  James  Dunn's  having-been  naturalized. 

Mr. -Brown  on-part  of  Contestant  objects  to  answer  of 
witness  on-the-ground  (3)  that-it-is-incompetent  and-irama- 
terial,  since-it  purports  to-be-a  statement  of-the  official 
records,  the-same  not-being  produced. 

Q.  Then  we  understand''  you  as  testifying  that-there-is-no 
record  of  any  second-papers  ever-having-been  issued  to  any- 
such-person? 

A     No-sir/' 


282  BEPOETTNO  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

Q.    To  any  James  Dunn,  or  James  Dunn,  Jr.  ? 
A.    No-sir. 

Q.    What-do-the  records  show  with-reference-to  Patrick 
Dunn? 
A.     On-the  37th  of-August.'''  1866,  Patrick  Dunn  made  his 

declaratory  statement,  but  there-is-no  record  of-his  ever- 
having-beeu  naturalized. 

Mr. -Brown  on-part  (4)  of  Contestant  moves  that-the-answer 
be-stricken  out  as  incompetent  and-immaterial,  being-the 
statement  of  what  the-records  contain,  Avithout-the-same'' 
being  produced. 

Q.    No-evidence  at-all? 

A.    No-sir,  none. 

Q.    Now  I-will-ask-your  attention  to  William  Broadhead. 

A.  He  filed  his  declaratory  statement  on-the''''  3rd  of  Nov., 
1868.  There-are-no  records  of-his  subsequent  naturaliza- 
tion. 

Contestant  moves  to-strike  same-as-above. ''" 

Q.  Is-this-the  gentleman  known  as  Uncle  Billy  Broad- 
head,  who-lives  in-the  poor-house? 

A.  The-name  is-the-same,  and-I  suppose  it-is-the-same- 
man.  (5) 

Q.    Did-you  find  that-any-papei's  had-been  issued  to  Frank 

Delaware  ? 

A.    No-sir,  I-did-not. 

Contestant  moves  to-strike  same-as-above.'' 

Q.  I-will-ask-you  if-you-have  gone  tlirough  these  natural- 
ization and-Court-rccords  by-the-index,  or  if-not,  how  did- 
you-examine  them?'''' 

A.  I-examined  them  both  ways  ;  first  by  index,  and-then 
by-looking  carefully  over  each  page. 

Q.     State-whether-or-not  you  found  any  record''^''  of-the 

naturalization  of  Edward  Willigrod  ;  if-so,  what-is-the  date 

of-it? 
A.    I-can  state  the-book  and-the  page  from-memory.  (6) 

It-is-in  Minute  Book  Number  One,  page  fourteen,  of-the 
records  of-the  County-Court.  The-date  is  somewhere  be- 
tween 1856  and  1858.' 


REPORTIXG  STYLE  OF  SIIORT-IIAND.  2*3 

Contestant  moves  to  strike  same-as-above. 

Q.    Does-the-record  show  that  two  iJapers  were  issued? 

A.  No-sir,  but-the  record''''  1-mention  is-of-the  issue  of-the 
second,  or  official  naturalization  papers. 

C.     What  Court  were-they  issued  from? 

A.  From-the  County-Court,  when'"''  Wm.  C.  Smith  was 
judge. 

Contestant  moves  to-strike  same-as-above. 

Q.  Mr.  Johnson,  you-say-you  have  examined  these-re- 
cords  from-the  beginning,  page  by  page,  (7)  Avill-you-please 
state  more  specifically  as-to  what-records  you-refer? 

A.  I-have  examined  Journals  1,  2  and  3,  of-the  Circuit- 
Court  of^  Marshall-County,  and-Journals  A,  B  and  C,  of-the 
District-Court.  The-remaiuing  records  form  a-book  called 
First-Paper  or  Declaratory  book.''''  I-examined  them  all 
page  by  page. 

Q.  Are-there  more-Journals  than  this  in-the  Circuit- 
Court? 

A.    Yes-sir. 

Q.  How  far  does-the  third  Circuit-Court  Jom'nal  ex- 
tend?'^' 

A.  Down  to  1873,  when-the-first  naturalization  record 
was-begun. 

Q.  And-the  District-Court  Journal  you-have  referred-to 
covered  the-same  period?  (8) 

A.     Yes-sir. 

Q.  Mr.  Johnson,  will-you-please  bring  over  the-book  con- 
taining the-record  of-the  paj)ers  issued  to  Mr.  Willigrod? 

Witness  produces  Naturalization''  Record-Book  Number  3. 

Q.  Did-you  find  this-book  in-the  oflice  and-custody  of-the 
clerk  of-the  District  and-Circuit-Courts  of-this-County? 

A.    Yes-sir,   it-is-one  of-the  official  records,  kei^t  in-the 

office  of-the  clerk  whose  deputy  I  am. 

Q.  Please  state-the  title  and-character  of-the'''  third  book 
you  now  have-in-your  possession. 

A.  It-is  called  Minute  Book  Number  1,  of-the  Marshall- 
County-Court,  kept  when  Wm.  C.  Smith  was  judge.''''' 

(907—8:45—7) 


284 


REPOETING  STYLE  OF  SHORTHAND. 


508.  Swales 

vs 
The  White- Water  Railroad. 


Impaneling 

OF 

THE  Jury. 


^ 


V 9        X 


X 


\a o 

L 


"^ 


>  ^^.-.. 


r 


^A^ 


i  I 


^ 
0 


X       )  .     . 


■F-F--^=^- 


( 

>  t 


<. 


n  ^  -N  ^  , 


Vo 


) 


\  r 


1 


\ 


c^   t  ) 


Xj 


LESSON  XLIX. 

TRANSCRIPTS  AND  PROFESSIONAL   CONDUCT. 

509.  All  short-hand  reports  should  be  securely  filed  away, 
either  by  tiic  Clerk  of  the  Court,  or  by  tlie  stenographer 
himself.  A  transcript  in  long-hand  may  be  ordered  at  once, 
or  not  till  after  years  ;  possibly  never.  Before  making  such 
transcript,  the  reporter  would  do  well  to  ascertain  whether 
more  than  one  copy  is  wanted,  since,  should  he  make  use  of 
a  type-writer,  which  is  much  the  best  plan,  two  or  more 
copies  can  be  made  simultaneously.  The  testimony  of  cer- 
tain Avitnesses  only,  or  a  brief  of  all  the  evidence  in  narra- 
tive form  not  containing  objections,  etc.,  is  sometimes  or- 
dered ;  while  again,  only  an  abstract  is  wanted,  giving  the 
testimony  to  which  objections  were  made,  together  with  the 
rulings  and  exceptions.  In  addition  to  the  usual  fee  allowed 
for  making  transcripts,  the  reporter  receives  extra  compen- 
sation for  the  work  of  making  such  briefs  and  abstracts.  In 
all  cases,  the  stenographer  has  a  right  to  hold  the  transcript 
until  his  fees  are  paid.- 

510.  Original  notes  are  always  taken  hurriedly,  and  need 
more  or  less  revision  and  condensation  when  transcribed 
into  long-hand.  In  this  matter  the  reporter  is  allowed  some 
discretion.  Answers  of  witnesses,  with  few  exceptions, 
should  be  written  as  spoken,  but  the  language  of  interroga- 
tories should  be  corrected  if  ungramatical,  and  may  be 
abbreviated  often  with  advantage.  Lawyers  not  uncommonly 
indulge  in  repetitions  which  have  only  the  effect  of  lumber- 
ing the  record,  and  should  in  many  cases  be  entirely  ex- 
cluded from  the  transcript. 

511.  Notes  should  be  transcribed  in  the  order  taken,  and 

one  side  only  of  the  paper  be  written  upon.    Ample  margin 

for  the  notes  of  counsel  should  he  allowed  to  remain  at  the 

left  of  each  page  ;  also  at  the  top,  so  that  the  sheets  may  be 

bound  together. 
Every  interrogatory  should  be  numbered,  beginning  anew 

with  the  testimony  of  each  witness.    The  transcript,  when 

complete,  is    paged    and  indexed,   and  bound  fii*mly  into 

volumes  of  convenient  size. 

j,  —285— 


286  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

TRANSCRIPT. 

512.  APPEARANCES. 

State  of  Indiana    ^  W.  H.  Harrington, 

!  on  ixirl  of  Prosecution. 

^^"  I  Daniel  W.  Voorhees, 

Lyon.  J  for  Defendant. 

cross-examination  op  MRS.  RACHEL  STOWE,  Contimied. 

Ques.  31.  How  far  were  you  standing  from  the  corner 
tree  when  you  heard  the  report  of  the  pistol? 

Ans.  About  as  far  from  it  as  I  am  from  the  stove  there 
(referring  to  the  stove  about  sixteen  feet  distant). 

Ques.  32.  You  say  you  heard  two  shots  ;  now  was  it  a 
long  or  short  space  of  time  that  elapsed  between  them? 

Ans.     It  seemed  to  me  rathei'  long. 

Ques.  33.     Well,  how  long? 

Ans.    Perhaps  a  minute. 

Ques.  34.    You  ai'e  certain  as  much  as  that? 

Ans.    Yes  sir,  that  long  anyway. 

Ques.  35.  Will  you  please  indicate  the  time  that  elapsed 
as  nearly  as  you  can  remember  it,  by  tapping  with  my  knife 
upon  the  desk? 

(Mrs.  Stowe  taps  twice  ;  time,  eighteen  seconds,  by  the 
reporter's  watch). 

Ques.  36.  How  far  was  your  boy  standing  from  you  at  the 
time? 

Ans.  About  as  far  away  from  me  as  that  gentleman,  (re- 
ferring to  Senator  Voorhees). 

Ques.  37.  Were  not  remai'ks  passed  between  you  and  the 
boy  during  the  time  between  the  shots? 

Ans.    Yes  sir,  my  boy  first  said Objection. 

Ques.  38.  Did  not  he  know  one  of  the  men  on  hoi"se-back, 
and  did  not  he  say  "He  has  shot "  ? 

Mr.  Griffith  objects  to  the  question  on  the  ground  that 
it  is  not  proper  cross-examination  ;  also  that  it  misrepre- 
sents the  witness. 

Objection  over-ruled.    Defendant  excepts. 


3|latc  49- 


) 


288  EEFORTINO  STYLE  OF  SIIORT-IIAND. 

513.  The  reporter  should  be  prompt  in  his  attendance 
upon  Court,  and  in  the  preparation  of  transcripts  ;  diligent 
and  accommodating  as  an  oflicer. 

It  is  not  unusual  for  him  to  be  made  the  confidant  of  the 
Judge,  and  for  this  reason  he  should  exercise  the  greater 
caution,  since  he  is  the  more  subject  to  interested  inquiry. 
He  is  expected  to  make  a  ti-ue  and  impartial  record  ;  and  to 
avoid  all  inference  of  prejudice,  it  is  by  far  the  best  policy  to 
say  nothing  whatever  about  the  case  during  the  trial.  He 
should  be  trustworthy,  and  mix  suavity  with  discretion. 

In  the  heat  of  an  exciting  trial,  when  the  feelings  and 
apprehensions  of  advei'se  parties  are  most  awakened,  tiie 
slightest  look,  movement,  or  insinuation  on  the  reporter's 
part,  is  liable  to  ))e  construed  into  an  indication  of  prejudice 
or  partiality.  The  utmost  care  and  circumspection  are 
necessary  to  prevent  such  reflections,  whicii  are  sometimes 
carried  even  to  the  extent  of  a  question  as  to  the  integrity  of 
the  report. 

514.  PHRASES. 

Balance-due  breach-(of)-contract  certiflcate-(of)-marriage 
circumstantial-evidence  common-law  contempt-(of)-court 
Court-ol-law  Court-of-Record  custom-(of-tiie) -country  laws- 
(of-the)-land  laws-(of)-England  learned-judge  matter-of- 
form  on-the-south-side  records-(of-the)-court  subject-mat- 
ter verdiet-(of-the)-jnry  aceording-(to-the)-evidence  place- 
(of)-business  do-you-mean-(to)-say. 

EXERCISE  49. 

515.  [Heading,  Question  and  Answer,  Objections,  etc., 
to  be  arranged  by  the  student  in  the  proper  manner]. 

Benj.  T.  Frederick  vs.  James  Wilson.  Appearances : 
Timothy  Brown,  Attorney  for  Contestant.  J.  H.  Bradley, 
Attorney  for  Contestee.  Contested  Election.  For  the  office 
of  Representative  in  Congress  for'  the  Fifth  District  of  Iowa. 
Cause  pending  in  the  House  of  Representatives  of  the 
United  States  of  America.    Testimony  taken  before  Eldon 


JiEPOHTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-nAXD.  389 

Moran,  Stenographer  and  Commissioner,  during  the  months 
of  February/''  March,  April  and  May,  1883.  Evidence  on 
part  of  Contestant.  Session  at  Marshalltown,  Iowa,  Marcli 
5,  1883.  A.  N.  French,  sworn  on-part^^'  of  contestant.  You- 
may-state  if-you-are  the-Auditor  of  Marshall-County,  Iowa, 
and-have-now  in-your  possession  the-poll-books  which-were 
returned  to-you  from  (1)  Washington  Township?  Yes-sir, 
I-am  Auditor,  and-have  them.  Please-take-the'  poll-book, 
aud-read  so-that-the  Commissioner  cau-take-it  down,  giving 
the-number'' of-votes  that-were  cast  in-that  Township,  for- 
each-Candidate  for-Congress  at-the  November-election,  1882. 
I-understand  you  want-the  certificates  just-as'''  they-were 
returned?  Yes-sir.  For  Representative-in-Congress  there- 
were  110  votes  cast,  of-which  James  Wilson  had  45  ;  Benj. 
T.  Frederick  52  ■/"  and  David  Platner  13.  Is-that-the-num- 
ber  of-votes  for-each-candidate  returned  in-the  abstract 
made  bj^-the  County  canvassers  to-the  Board  of-State-can- 
vassers?  (2)  Yes-sir,  the-same-number.  Please-turn  to-the 
poll-book  of  Marietta  Township  and-state  how-many-votes 
were  returned  from-that  township  for-the  office''  of-Repre- 
sentative-in-Congress  by-the  Trustees  of-that  township,  as- 
show'n  by-the  poll-books,  and-read  it  off  so-tliat  it-may-be 
taken-dowm  by-the  Commissioner.''''  (Reading  from  poll- 
book)  For-Representative-in-Congress,  Fifth  District,  there 
w^ere  123  ballots,  of-which  James  Wilson  had  81  ;  Benj.  T. 
Frederick  3T  /''  and  David  Platner  5.  Please-turn  to-the 
poll-book  of  Le-Grande  Township,  and-state-how-many-votes 
Avere  cast  for-each-Candidate  at-the  last  November-election, 
(3)  for-the  office  of-Representative-in-Congress,  Fifth  Dis- 
trict. (Reading  from  poll-book)  For-the  office  of-Represen- 
tative-in-Congress, Fifth  District,  there  w^ere  263  ballots 
cast,  of-Avhich  James  Wilson'  had  180  ;  Benj.  T.  Frederick 
78  ;  and  David  Platner  5.  Now  state  if-your  returns  made 
for  Washington,  Bangor,  and-MariettaTow'nships,  were-the- 
same''  as  showai  by-the  poll-books.  I-will-have-to  look  and 
see.  First,  I-will-ask-you,  if-you-have-a  copy  of-the  returns 
made   by-the    County    canvasser'''  to-the    State-canvasser? 


290  repohtino  style  of  short-hand. 


Yes-sir,  I-have.  Now  state  as-to  Washington  Township, 
how-many-votes  for-the  office  of-Representative-in-Congress 
were  returned  to-the  State-canvassers  (4)  for-this  Township. 
For  James  Wilson  45  ;  B.  T.  Frederick  52  ;  David  Platner  13. 
Now  state  with-reference-to  Marietta  Township/  James 
Wilson  81  ;  B.  T.  Frederick  37  ;  David  Flatner  5.  These 
numbers  coi'respond  with-the  poll-book.  State,  also,  with- 
reference-to  Le-Grande  Township.  The  schedule  shows^^ 
James  Wilson  received  180  votes  ;  B.  T.  Frederick  78  ;  and- 
David  Platner  5.  These  numbers  are-the-same  as-those  I- 
read  from-the  poll-book.  Now  state^^''  with-reference-to 
Bangor.  For-the  office  of-Representative-in-Congress,  there 
were  85  ballots  cast,  of-whieh  James  Wilson  had  75;  (5)  B.  T, 
Frederick  2;  and-David  Platner  13.  The-abstract  also 
shows  Wilson  to-have-received  75 ;  Frederick  2 ;  and-Plat- 
ner  12.'  Excused.  (595—5:15 — 4) 


LESSON  L. 


SYSTEMS  AND  IMPROVEMENTS. 


516.  Isaac  Pitman,  Inventor  of  Phonography,  the  most 
popular  of  all  short-hand  systems,  began  publishing  half  a 
century  ago.  Within  this  time  the  sale  of  his  principal  in- 
struction books  may  be  roughly  estimated  as  follows  :  The 
Reporter's  Companion,  about  145,000  copies  ;  the  Manual, 
475,000;  the  Teacher,  nearly  one  and  a  quarter  million.  He 
has  also  published  a  dictionary,  a  phrase-book,  and  various 
lesser  woi-ks.  His  weekly  Journal  numbers  twenty  thousand 
suliscribers.  This,  however,  does  not  convey  an  adequate 
idea  of  the  extent  to  which  the  system,  of  which  he  was  the 
chief  originator,  has  spread  abroad.  Various  teachers  and 
authors,  embracing  Mr.  Pitman's  own  brothers  and  sons, 
have  published  books,  many  of  which  have  met  with  a  large 
sale.     The    Manual  of  Benn  Pitman,   the  chief  American 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  291 

author,  has  sold  to  the  extent  of  about  four  hundred 
thousand  copies.  The  Munson,  Graham,  Longley,  and  a 
number  of  other  systems,  are  all  Pitmanic,  each  one  however 
being  characterized  by  certain  modiJications,  or  improve- 
ments, most  of  which  are  introduced  in  this  chapter.  The 
Pitman  system  as  a  whole,  in  its  present  state  of  perfection, 
is  a  growth,  the  result  of  almost  countless  experiments  maile 
by  conscientious  workmen  and  thoughtful  writers.  Each 
author  has  to  some  extent  modified  his  own  original  presen- 
tation of  the  system,  but  none,  perhaps,  have  made  so  many 
changes  as  Mr.  Pitman  himself.  One  of  the  inevitable  con- 
sequences of  this  gradual  develoj)ement  is  that  reporters 
who  learned  ten,  twenty,  or  thirty  years  ago,  write  the  system 
somewhat  difl'erently  from  each  other,  and  a  style  differing 
also  from  the  system  as  it  is  taught  to-day.  The  system  as 
presented  by  the  inventor  is  that  most  employed  in  England 
and  the  British  Provinces.  The  Benn  Pitman  system  is  the 
one  most  followed  in  America.  The  chief  features  wherein 
the  English  differs  from  the  American  Short-hand,  are  the 
following  :  A  new  sign  for  h,  struck  both  upwards  and 
downwards  ;  also  different  characters  for  w  and  y,  and 
compound  characters  for  rcli,  rj,  Ir,  wh,  hwl;  a  large  initial 
hook  attached  to  curves  for  I;  a  large  w-hook,  changed  to  a 
circle  to  indicate  a  preceding  s,  a  somewhat  different  mark 
for  oi,  etc.  Within  certain  limits  the  straight  stems  are 
lengthened  to  add  tr,  dr,  thr.  A  final  hook  attached  to  a 
lengthened  stem  is  given  force  before  the  added  tr  or  thr  is 
pronounced,  as  in  thunder  (lengthened  th-n).  For  illustra- 
tive words  see  Ls  1,  3  and  3. 

The  chief  differences,  however,  consist  in  what  is  known 
as  the  inverted  vowel  scale,  by  which  the  first  place  dots  are 
make  to  change  places  with  the  third  place,  it  and  tah  being 
written  as  we  would  write  at  and  tea.  The  principal  effect 
of  this  change  is  this  :  that  many  first  position  words  are 
written  in  the  third  position,  and  vice  versa.    See  L  3. 


i:  "PORTING  STYLE  OF  SHOBT-HAND. 


517.  KEY. 

1.  (Isaac  Pitman)  Heaven  hall  yes  widow  torch  dirge 
whisper  whalebone.  2.  Printer  conductor  ponder  slander 
thunder  color  spoil  square  former.  3.  Flesh  liame  eat  tah 
it  at  keep  king  knack.  4.  (Munson)  Hurry  cure  do-you  pay- 
your  clatter  tether  to-receive  to-trade  by-our  ought-we.  5. 
(Graham)  Active  combative  thief  leave  trial  timbrel  clerk 
would-there.  6.  I-have  or-not  but-not  but-are-not  of- 
our-own  and-of  we-were  what-would  ye-were  you- 
were  you-would.  7.  Explanatory  perniciousness  in- 
considerateness  examination  exasperation  episcopacy  in- 
temperance we-were-to-have  twenty  forty.  8.  (Longley) 
Heap  hawk  gather  has-there  is-there  building  sinfulness 
have-been.  9.  (Scott-Browne)  Dated  talented  mastered  re- 
mitted mentioned  help  inhale  harbor.  10.  (Watson)  Plat- 
ter trader  damp  jjoke  beg  puff  cling  pang.  11.  Yoke 
rambling  receiving  mason  jealousy  addition  alienation 
unmarried.  12.  (Lindsley)  Eat  key  tay  sea  oat  ought 
ooze  saw  taw  aid.  13.  (Other  Authors)  Loosest  nicest 
voted  invaded  charm  warm  sermon  thrive.  14.  Sir  Dear- 
sir  mar  mortar  mat  extra.  15.  Cap  poke  papa  view  love 
lad  do. 

518.  James  E.  Munson,  author  of  the  Complete  Phono- 
grapher,  follows  Isaac  Pitman  in  the  manner  of  vowel  ex- 
pression. He  also  adds  a  y-hook,  attached  to  straight  letters, 
as  in  cure.  It  is  employod  chiefly,  however,  in  phrases,  as 
do-you,  'pay-yotir.  A  large  final  hook,  when  written  on  the 
r-hook  side  of  .straight  stems,  expresses  tr,  dr,  thr,  as  in 
clatter,  tether.  He  also  has  a  different  character  for  Ji,  and 
writes  words  entirely  below  the  line,  or  in  what  is  called 
the  fourth  position,  to  express  a  preceding  to,  a.8\n  to-rcceive. 
He  employs  the  w  and  y  hooks  quite  extensively  in  phrase 
signs,  as  in  by-your  ought-we.    L  4. 

519.  Andrew  J.  Graham,  author  of  Standard  Phonogi'a- 
phy,  uses  a  hook  similar  to  Munson's  ter  hook  to  express 
live,  and  lengthens   the   n-hook  when  attached  to  curved 


IPlate  50, 


3  e_7  ^v.    .1    r  J 


cr 


■^  c  ^    1   u^ 


c 


\ 


6  £„..i..j    0    .-1 


"3 


7  ^   „^....    ^ 

8  y^         11 


9  L         l^       /'Tvii 


G 


10 

11  A 


^     '^ 1 .":! ^tT..*^...  ^ 

^     \     ^O  -^^       -w 


12  ,, V 

13  r 


V 


^    ^ 


14 
15  0 


-7r~b 


^    >    j     \     /\ 


T' 


294  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT  HAND. 

stems  to  express^  or  v,  as  in  thief  or  leave.  When  joined  to 
straight  stems  the  r-hook  is  enlarged  to  add  I,  as  in  trial, 
timbrel;  and  tlie  1-hook  is  enlarged  to  add  r,  as  in  tumbler, 
clerk.  A  short,  heavy  dash  is  used  in  phrases  for  ther,  as  in 
would-there.  See  L  5.  A  characteristic  feature  is  a  series 
of  phrase  signs  obtained  by  attaching  hooks  to  vowel  word- 
signs,  as  in  I-have,  or-not,  btU-nol,  etc.  The  coalescents  are 
enlarged  to  add  were  and  would,  as  in  we-were,  what-would, 
etc.  See  L  6.  It  is  safe  to  say  that  no  other  system  has  been 
elaborated  to  an  equal  extent.  It  is  quite  perfect  in  what 
may  be  termed  the  mathematical  sense;  but  there  ai'e  so 
many  fine  turns  and  delicately  conti'ived  characters  in  his 
reporting  style,  that  persons  only  Avho  are  hard  students, 
and  possess  considerable  artistic  ability,  are  capable  of 
making  a  success  of  it.  The  common  objection  is  the  un- 
usual number  of  contractions,  a  few  of  which,  selected  at 
random,  are  given  in  L  7. 

520.  Elias  Longley,  author  pf  the  Eclectic  Series,  has  a 
still  different  character  for  h,  struck  both  upwards  and 
downwards.  He  also  uses  the  tr  hook  on  straight  stems, 
writes  vowels  by  the  inverted  scale,  and  adopts  the  Isaac 
Pitman  I  and  r  hooks.  Other  features  also  of  his  system  are 
shown  in  L  8,  His  books  are  clearly  written,  and  unusually 
well  suited  to  the  purpose  of  instruction. 

521.  Scott-Browne.  A  popular  device  of  this  author  is 
the  ed-tiek,  affixed  to  stems  to  signify  the  past  tense,  as  in 
added,  talented,  etc.  L  9.  He  modifies  h  to  indicate  the 
added  I  and  r,  enlarging  the  hook  to  indicate  the  first,  and 
shading  the  stem  to  indicate  the  second,  as  in  heliy,  harbor. 
Mr.  Scott-Browne  has  been  a  close  student  of  the  philosophy 
of  short-hand,  and  his  theories  are  clearly  set  forth  in  his 
text-books. 

522.  John  Watson,  of  Maryland,  has  produced  an  excep- 
tional book  in  regard  both  to  the  originality  of  its  principles, 
and  the  novelty  of  its  teaching.  He  adopts  the  inverted  scale, 
and  lengthens  all  straight  stems  to  add  ter,  as  in  platter, 
trader.    He  employs  a  shaded  up-stroke  for  ??zp,  also  writes 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND  ■  295 

the  f-hook  large,  and  uses  the  old  f-liook  to  exin-ess  k  and  g. 
The  1-hook  also  is  made  large,  and  ing  inverted  when  more 
convenient,  asin^jan^,  L  10.  He  also  makes  various  other 
changes,  a  few  of  which  are  shown  in  L  11. 

523.  D.  P.  Lindsley,  author  of  Takigraphy,  transforms  the 
system  completely,  making  use  of  the  old  material  in  con- 
structing what  is  known  as  the  connective  vowel  system. 
Vowel  signs  of  such  a  character  are  selected  that  they  can  be 
written  between  stems  without  the  pen  being  lifted  from  the 
paper.     Consonant  position  is  not  made  use  of,  and  hence 

'ruled  paper  is  not  strictly  necessary  in  taking  notes.  In  tlie 
reporting  style,  however,  most  vowels  are  dropped,  and 
many  word-signs  and  contractions  made  use  of.  The  simple 
style  is  easily  learned,  and  the  writing  very  legible.  An 
obvious  disadvantage  is  that  an  entirely  new  style  must  be 
learned  before  the  student  can  report  verbatim,  or  fill  a 
situation  requiring  a  high  degree  of  speed.  For  illustrative 
vrords  see  L  13. 

524.  W.  W.  Osgoodby,  author  of  Phonetic  Short-hand, 
adds  a  number  of  improvements,  among  which  are  the  re- 
duplicated loop,  as  in  loosest,  and  the  slanting  ed-tick,  as  in 
voted.    See  L  13. 

525.  Curtis  Haven  employs  an  entirely  original  vowel 
scale,  and  makes  use  of  consonant  position  to  quite  a  con- 
siderable extent.  In  the  consonant  alphabet  he  discards 
several  shaded  stems,  allowing  the  light  mates  to  represent 
both  the  cognate  sounds.  He  employs  a  shaded  up-stroke 
hn-rm,  as  in  chnrm,  ivarni.  R  is  expressed  by  the  up-stroke 
only,  the  curved  sign  being  used  for  v,  as  in  thieve.     L  13. 

526.  Prof.  J.  G.  Cross,  author  of  "Eclectic  Short-Hand," 
l^resents  an  entirely  original  system,  of  which  one  main 
feature  is  that  it  is  not  phonetic,  but  rather  what  may  be 
termed  orthographical,  following  the  old  spelling  to  a  large 
extent.  Only  a  few  shaded  strokes  are  used,  and  there  are 
five  consonant  positions  significant  of  the  pi'incipal  vowels. 
These  are  also  provided  with  stem  signs,  which  are  some- 
times used.    The  alphabet  is  derived,  not  from  the  circle, 


206  liEPORTljyCr  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

like  the  Pitman,  but  from  the  ellipse,  like  the  German  system 
of  Gabelsberger.  The  common  abbreviations,  but  not  many 
word-signs,  are  used.  The  sj'stem  is  expeilitious,  but  it  pos- 
sesses neither  the  philosophical  basis  nor  the  broad  capabili- 
ties of  the  Pitman  system.    For  illustrative  words  see  L  14. 

527.  H.  M.  Pernin,  author  of  Universal  Phonography) 
presents  a  system  bearing  some  resemblance  to  the  French 
system  of  Duploye.  Liglit  lines  only  are  used,  the  sub- 
vocals,  as  b,  d,j,  being  written  longer  for  distinction.  The 
chief  vowels  are  written  connectedly  between  stems,  and 
consonant  position  is  not  made  use  of.  For  illustrativtJ 
words  see  L  15. 

528.  There  are  numerous  other  authors  and  teachers, 
more  or  less  known  to  fame,  who  have  devoted  their  efforts 
to  invent  new  systems  or  improve  the  old.  A  partial  list  oi 
these  is  given  (American)  :  Morris,  Marsh,  Burns,  Bishop, 
Kimball,  Day,  Fames,  Thornton,  Dement,  Jenkins,  Barnes, 
Rogers,  Humphrey,  Allen,  Howai'd,  Scovil,  Boyle,  AndrcAvs, 
Webster,  Towndrow,  Palmer,  et  al. 

OBSERVATIONS. 

529.  So  far  as  the  student  has  time  and  disposition  to  do 
so,  he  will  liud  it  both  agreeable  and  profitable  to  examine 
more  closely  the  various  S3^stems,  pai'ticularly  the  different 
Pitman  authors.  After  he  has  had  considerable  experience 
in  actual  reporting,  he  may  so  far  as  he  judges  expedient, 
adopt  and  incorporate  into  his  style  contrivances,  hooks, 
and  word  and  phrase  signs  of  other  authors.  He  will  need 
of  course  to  use  discrimination  in  writing  letters,  employing 
only  those  signs  with  which  his  correspondent  is  familiar. 
But  comparatively  little  time  is  required,  and  considerable; 
advantage  may  be  gained,  from  learning  enough  of  the  dif- 
ferent authors  to  enable  the  student  to  read  the  notes  and 
correspondence  of  other  reporters. 

530.  EXERCISE  50. 

Practice  on  the  Vocabulary  until  you  can  write  the 
Avhole  of  it  at  dictation  in  twenty  minutes. 


VOCABULARY. 


A 

Ahle-to 
Able-to-give-lt 

Abundant 

Accoinplish 

According 

Accord  Ing-to 
According-to- 
his-coiitract 
According-to- 
the-lnslruction 

Accuracy 
Accurate 
Acknowledge 

Acquiesce 

Aciiuit 

Act-ol-congres8 

Actual 

Acute 

Advantage 

Advantageous 
Adverlise-ing 
Advertisement 

Affirmative 

Alter 

Afternoon 

Aftenvard 
Again-and- 

again 
Ago 

Agriculture 

All 

Allow 

Almighty 

Almost 

Alraost-always 

Alreadv 

All- the- world 

Altogether 

Always 

Amanuensis 

Ambiguity 

Amendment 

An 

Analogy 

'  And 
!  Angel 
Anguish 


^ 


\y 


r-r^ 


V-^=i 


V 


v-r^ 


/ 


Anno  Domini      I 

(A.D.) 
Annual 
Antiquarian 

Antiquity 

Anxiety 

Anyhow 

Anything 

Apostle 

Appear 

Appearance 

Appeared 

ApiJlied 

Apply 

Appoint 

Ajipointed 

Appointment 

Appoints 

Appreciate 

Apprehend 

Apprehensive 
Approve 

Are 

Aristocrat 

Arrange 

Article 
As 

As-a-matter-of- 
fact 

As-fast-as 

As-great-as 

As-has 

As-his 

As-it 

As-it-will 

As-is 

As-soon-as 

Associate 

Astonish 

Astonishment 

As-well 


At 

At-all 
At-all-events 


At-all-It8 

At-all-times 

At-any-rate 


\ 


Y 


<\ 


\ 


>  o-o       O 

O        )    p.. 

O       Q_9        1> 

1 1 r 

-i---f--b- 

c" — c^ t" 


298 


EEPORTiya  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


At-first 
At-it 
At- length 

At-once 
Avenue 
Average 

Aware 
Awlul 
Awhile 

Bank-note 

Jjaptist 

Barrier 

Be 

Because 
Become 

Before 

Beforehand 

Began 

Begin 
Begun 
Behalf 

Behind 
Behold 
BeUef 

Belong 

Belonged 

Beneficial 

Benevolence 

Benevolent 

Be-not 

Bequest 

Better-not 

Better-than 

Beyond 

BiU-of-sale 

Blunder 

Board 

Board-of-trade 

Brilliancy 


Brother 

Brotherhood 

But 

By-the-first 
By-way-of-illus- 

tr.'ition 
Calculate 


I  1^ 


Call 

Campaign 

Cau-lt 

Cannot 

Can"t 

Capable 

Capital 

Care 

Catholic 

Censure 

Certain 

Certificate 

Certify 

Challenge 

Change-d 


Chaplain 

Chapter 

Character 

Characterize 

Characterizes 

Child 

Children 

Christian 
Christianity 

Christianize 

Circuit 
Circulate 

Circulation 

Circumstance 

Circumstances 

Collect 

Collect-on-de- 
hvery  (C.O.D.) 
Collector 

Come 

Commercial 

Common 

Commonwealth 
Communication 
Company 

Comparative 

Compliance 

Compreliend 

Comprehensive 

Concern 

Confession 


VOCABULARY. 


299 


Contideutial 
ConlidemiiU- 
commuQioation 
Conges  uou 

Congratulate 

ConueL'iKiu 

Conscientious 

Consequence 

Coiiseiiiicnt 

Consequential 

Consider 

Consideration 

Consisteul 

Consonant 
Coustantiy 
Constitution 

Constitiition-of- 

the-1'.-S. 
Construct 
Construction 

Constructive 

Continue 

Continued 

Convenience 

Co-operate 

Correct 

Correspond 

Counteuauee 

Counterbalance 

Courageous 

Creature 

Criticise 

Criticism 
Cross-examina- 
tion 
Cross-examine 

Cultivation 

Cure 

Danger 

Dark 

Darken 

Darkness 

Dare-not 
Day-of-tlie- 

■\veek 
Dear 

Dear-sir 

Decemlier 

Defendant 


^ 


Definition 

Degree 

Deliberate 

Deliberation 

DeliL'lit 

Delinquent 

Deliver 

Deliverance 

Delivery 

Demonstration 

Demoralize 

Demoralization 

Denominate 

Denomination 

Denominational 

Denounce 

Dependent 

Derivative 

Derive 

Describe 

Description 

Descriptive 

Destiny 

Determination 

Determine 

Develop 

Development 

Did-not 

Differ 

Difference 

Different 

Diilicult 

Difficulty 

Dignity 

Disadvantage 

Disagree 

Disappear 

Discounect 

Dishonor 

Dis-meml)er-ed 
Dissatisfaction 

Dissatisfy 

Doctor 

Doctrine 

Do-it 


L   > 


„    I 


300 


BEPORTINO  STYLE  OF  SnORT-HAYD. 


DoUar-s 

Domestic 

Duminioa 

Do-not 

Downward 

Due 

During 

Dwarf 

Each 

Eacli-are 
Each-will 
Eacli-will-bave 

Ea8t-and-west 

Efficient 

Elaborate 

Electricity 
Eloquence 
Embezzle 

Emphatic 

Emphatically 

Enclosure 

Endeavor 

Endless 

Energy 

Enfrlish-lan- 

fiua.sfe 
Enlarge 
Enterprise 

Equal 

Equator 

Especially 

Essentially 

Establiah-ed 

Establishment 

Estate 

Estimated-cost 
Estimated- 
weiglit 

Estimation 

Et  o;t'tera  (etc.) 

Eternal 

Eulogy 
Europe 
European 

Ever 

Ever-and-ever 

Everlasting 


Everlasting-life 

Every 

Every-one 

Evidence 

Examination 

Example 

Excellence 

Excellent 
Exchange 

Expect 

Expected 

Experience 

Explanation 

Express 

Expression 

Exquisite 

External 

Extinguish 

Extraordinary 

Eye 

Eye-sight 

Fact 

Failure 

Faithiul 

Falsehood 

Familiar 

Fear-ot-God 

Feature 

Feliruary 

Fellow-citizen 

Fellow-creature 

Few 

Fewest 

Finally 

Finance 

Finish 

First 

First-class 

Five-or-six 

Follow 

For 

Foreign 


Forever-and- 

eVer 
For-instance 
For-it 


<r^ 


^  '^ 


AY^ 


^. 


^    ^V:r^ 


^    &—0 


^ 


V,  ^y 


V. 


VOCABULARY. 


301 


Forsake 
For-tbe-first- 

tiine 
For-Jhe-most- 

part 

For-the-sake-of 

Forthwith 

Fortunate 

Forward 

Four-or-five 

Franklin 

Frequent 
From 

Froui-first-to- 
last 

Full 

Fundamental 
Furniture 

Future 
Gave-it 
Generation 

Genial 

Gentleman 

Gentlemen 

Give 

Give-it 

Given 

Give-US 

Glorious 

Glory 

Good 

Good-and-bad 

Govern 

Government 

Governor 

Great-Britain 

Greater- than 

Great-extent 
Guilt 


Guilty 
Gvpsy 
Had 

Had-it 

Had-not 

HaU 

Hand 

Hand-in-hand 
I  Handsome 


V^ 


\. 


\S^ 


^ 


(/ 


Handwriting 

Handy 

Happen 


Happiness 

Happy 

Hard 

Hardware 

Has 

Has-his 

Hath 
Have 
Have-had 

Have-it 

Have-not 

Hazard 

He 

Health 

Hear 

Heard 
Heart 
Heathen 

Heaven 
Height 
Held 

Help 

Hence 

Herald 

Herein 

Heretofore 

Hesitate 

Hesitation 

He-supposed 

High 


Higher 

Highest 

Highly 

Highway 

Him 

His 

His-is 

Historian 

Historj' 


'••■^--v 


Hold 

Holiness 

Holy 


303 


EEPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


Home 

Honestly 

Honor 

Honorable 

Hope 
How 

However 

How-long 
Howsoever 


Human 

Human-life 

Human-nature 

Humor 

Hundred 

Humble 

I 

I-am-wllling 

Idea 

If-it 

If-you-wish 

Illegible 

Imagine 

Imaginable 

I-may-be-there 

Imbecile 

Immediately 

Importance 

Important 

Impossiljllity 

Impossible 

Improve-d 

Improvement 

In 

Inaccurate 

In-as-many 

Inclination 

Income 

Incompetent 

Incomplete 

In-considera- 

tion 
Indefinite 
Independent 

In-describing 

Indicate 

Individual 


r 


^ 
v 


A 


X 


^~b     ■'"& 


ndividuality 
[nilolence 
ndulge 

Industrious 
ndustry 
nfinite 

nfluence 

uHuential 

nformation 

ugenious 
n-liis-descrip- 

tion 
:n-his-estima- 

tion 

n-bis-experi- 

ence 
n-liis-expres- 

sion 
n-his-life 

n-bis-secret 

n-liis-usual 

nitial 

n -order- that 

n-order-to 

n-point-of-lact 

:nfiuest 

n- regard-to 

n-reply-to 

n-response-to 

u-seemiug 

nsiguiticance 

nsigniflcant 

n-some 

nstruction 

nstructive 

n-supposing 

ntellect 

ntelligence 

ntelligent 

utelligible 

ntent 

ntercbange 

nterfere 

Internal 
nterrogation 
n-tbe-first- 
place 

:n-the-world 
n-tbis-city 
intimacy 


^3^^ 


I 


X^ 


VOCABULARY. 


308 


Invention 

Investigate 

Investigation 

Iowa 

Irregular 

Irresistible 

Is 

Is-as 
Is-liis 

Is-it 

Island 

Is-said 

Is-said-to-have 

Is-seen 
Is-sucli 

Issue 

It-liad 

It-liad-not 

It-is  simply 

It-is-sometliing 
It-is-8ufficient 

It-ought 
It-ought-not 
It-oiigbt-to- 
liave-liad 

Its 

It-will 

It-will-liave 

It- will  liave-had 

It-will-not 

It-would 

It-would-liave- 

had 
It-would-not 
January 

Jesus-Christ 

Joint-committee 

Journal 

Joyous 
Junior 
Just-as-certain 

Just-as-mueh-a  s 

Just-as-well-as 

Just-been 

Just-had 
Justice-of-the- 

Feace 
Just-say-so 


"-v^n^-v 


L    r    c 


t    .f 


z. 


</ 


Just-what 
Knowledge 
Ijadifs-and- 
gentlemen 

Landlord 
Language 
Languish 

I>arge 

Larger 

Larger-than 

Largest 

Last-mail 

Laws-of-health 

Laws-of-life 

Lawyer 

Legible-y 

Liberty 
Liberty-of-the- 

]ieople 
Liberty-of-the- 

press 

Lord-Jesus- 
Christ 
Loves-US 
Luxurious 

Magazine 

Magnanimous 

Maintain 

Majestic 
Majesty 
Majority 

Malpractice 

Man 

Manager 

Manner 

Manuscript 

Marshall 

May-as-well 

May-be 

May-not 

Measure 
Medium 
Member 

Member-of-the- 

Ijar 
Member  of-the- 

Legislature 
Memorandum 

Men 

Merciful 

Mercy 


/    7  / 

/   /■■/ 

■f  r^- 


/ 


304 


REPORTINO  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


Mere 

Messenger 

jMethod 

Methoclical-lv 

Milium 

Miuimuni 

Mlnister-ed 

Ministerial 

Ministry 

Minority 

Mistake 

Monarcli 

Monthly-report 

More 

More-or-les3 

More-than 

MiirtsaKe 
Most-important 

Most-likely 

Mostly 

Mr. 

Much 
Mia-h-are 
Mnch-quicker- 
than 

Mucli-will 

M  ufh-will-have 

Must-be 

Must-expect 

Must-like 

Must-make 

Mv  Instructions 

Mvself 

Mystery 

Natural-ly 

Nature 

Near 

Neglect 

Negligent 

Negotiation 

Neighborhood 

Never 

Nevertheless 

Nevertheless-it- 
is 

New-Hamp- 
shire 

New- York 


'^. 


r 


-^-b  /"Xi^ 


>^ 


I  New- York-City 
Next 
Next-time 

X(m-appear- 

ance 
Nciii-conductor 

Nor 

North 

North-America 

North-eastern 

North-west 

North-western 
Notwitlistand- 
ing 

November 
N  o  w 
Number 

Numerous- 
questions 
Nutshell 
Oltedience 

Obey 

Object 

Objection 

Olijective 

<)l)ViOUS 

Occur   ■ 

Occurrence 

(.11' 
C)fficia 

Oh 

oliio 

On 

On-either-hand 

One-ol-tlie-most 
Oue-of-the-best 

One-or-two 
On-the-one- 

hand 
Oii-tlie-other- 

liand 

Only 
<  tnward 
I  >i)ens 

Ojtinion 
( ipportunity 
or 

Organize 

(Jrnamental 

Or-uot 


'^'-^Y' 


vU 


\. 


\ 


C — D 


\) 


^ 


^ 


/^ 


t-^ 


VOCABULABY. 


305 


Other 
Ouf-'lit 
Ouglit-to-have 

Our-instnic- 

tious 
Our  own 
Ourselves 

Over  and-over- 

again 
Overwhelm 
Own 

Owner 

Paragraph 

Parlor 

Part 

Partake 

Particular 

Particularly 

Particularize 

Party 

Peculiar 

Peculiarity 

Pennsylvania 

People 

People-of-God 

Perfection 

Perform 
Perhaps 
Personal 

Phenomenon 

Philosopher 

Philosophy 

Phonographic 
Phonography 
Pleasure 

Political 
Popular 
Postage-stamp 

Postal-card 

Posterity 

Postmarli 

Post-master 

Post-office 

Postal-service 


Povert}' 

Practicable 

Practical 


■■1 


L 


^ 


^N/^ 


^V^ 


"'\' 


Practice 

Predominate 

rriucipal-ly 

Principle 

Probability 

Probable 

Problem 

Professor 

Proficiency 

Proficient 

rofit 
Pronounce 

Proper 

Propeitj' 

Prophet 

Prosperity 

Protect 

Prove 

Providential 

Public 

Publish-ed 

Punishment 

Quantity 

Qualification 

Question 

Questionable 

Quick 

Quiet 
Quite 
Railing 

Railroad 
Railway 
Railway-car 

Ransom 

Rather 

Rather-than 

Real 

Real  estate 

Reality 

Recollect 

Recollection 

Recommend 


Recommenda- 
tion 
Reconsider 
Record 


V"-^ 


cX!/^cA- 


■'^- 


30C 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


Reduction 
Reference 
Retlection 

Reform 

Reformation 

Regular 

Recriilarity 

ReKulate 

Regulation 

Relatinjr-to-the- 

sutiject 
Keliaiile 
Reliance 

Religion 

Religious 

Rely 

Remark 

Reiiiarlvable 

Remember 

Renounce 

Represent-ed 

Representation 

Republic 
Requisite 
Respect 

Respectability 

Resi)ectable 

Responsible 

Revelation 
Revolution 
Roll 

Romantic 

Rule 

Said-to-have 

Salvation 

Satisfaction 

Satisfactory 

Satisfactory- 
inauner 

Satisfactory- 
proof 

Satisfy-fied 

Savior 

Scorn 

Scripture 

Season 
Secure 
Self-esteem 


/b 


/n  Ai/^ 


Selfish 
Senior 
Sensation 


Sentence 

Sentiment 

Set-lortli 

Set-off 

Seveu-or-elglit 

Several 

Shall 
Sliait 
Shelf 

Short-hand 

Simula 
Significance 

Significant 

Signification 

Similar 

Similarity 

Simple 

Simply 

Singular 

Six-or-seveu 

Slander 

Some-one 

Something 
Sometime 

Somewhat 
Soutli  America 
South-eastern 

Spealv 

Special 

Specially 

Specialty 

Speech 

Spirit 

Spiritual 

Spoke 

Spoken 

Square 

Squirrel 

Stability 

Statesman 

Stenographer 

Stenographic 


J       ^-^ 


Q_2y 


--,5-- 


^r^r    <5"^  <^~^ 


r 


Q-^ 


^^-d^ 


^ 


(5-:^ 


VOCABULABY. 

307 

Stenography 

There 

) 

Stenofrraphic- 
Bociety 

"^^^     ^5^-/}-^-,./^ 

Therefore 
There-would- 

I 

Stumble 

not 

T" 

Subject 

Subjective 

Subsequent 

\     V     1, 

They 

They-are 

They-are-not 

C 

1 

D 

Such-are 

Thev-wiU 

C 

6 

/ 

Such-are-not 
Such-a-one 

/  ^    y 

This-is 
This-has-never 

(^-■ 

Such  have 
Such-have-had 
Such-ought-to- 
have 

f. {... 

This-svstem 
This-will 

Those 

r 

/- 

-t 

Such-ought-to- 

hv-hd 
Such-were 
Such-were-not 

.f.. 9 

Thou 

Though 

Three-orfour 

( 

■(-- 

^\ 

/           ^ 

Such-will 

Such-would 

/"     O 

Throughout 

Thus 

Till 

!) 

..(..... 

Sufficient 

/= 

Suggestion 
Suppress 

^  ^  V. 

Till-Jt 

To 

To-be 

r 

\ 

-\ 

Sujjremacy 

3 

\ 

Surprise 

Suspension 

Systematic 

\  ?  e 

To-become 

Together 

Told 

N 

P 

Takes-ua 

Tavern 

Tedious 

U   L^ 

Too 

Toward 

Towards 

\ 

1 

% 

Telegram 

Tell 

Tell-it 

To-wit 

Transcript 

Treacherous 

^ 

r 

n 

Tell-us 

True 

f 
J 

0 

Temperament 
Temperance 

■\ 

Tn-to-have 
Tuition 

r 

c/ 

Temperate 

Temporal 

Tendency 

Twelve 

Twist 

Two 

C 

t 

\ 

Termination 

Territory 

Testament 

Two-or-three 

Unconcern 
Under 

1 

% 

>^ 

Testimony 

Tliank 

That 

cK.^       / 

Undergone 
Uniform 

Union 

-trr^^s 

^^" 

^ 

That-is-to-say 

The 

Them 

s  •   ( 

Unite 

United-States 

Unity 

.^m 

.^D 

TrrH.... 

^ 


308 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


Universal 

ITniverae 

University 

Unless 

Unpracticed 

Unquestionable 

Unscriptural 

Unseasonable 
Unselfish 

Until 

Until-It 
Upon-liis 

Ui)on-it 
Upvyard 
Us 

Use (noun) 
Use  (verb) 
Usually 

Vacancy 

Value 

Very 

Very-well 

Virtue 
Washington 

Watch 
Water 
We 

We-always-like- 

to-have 
Weare 
We-are-not 

Welcome 

A\'e-may 

We-may-be 

We-may-be- 

able-to 
We-must-be 
Were 

Western 
West- Virginia 
We-wiil 

We- will-not 

Wliat 
Whatever 

When 

Whence 

Whenever 


^       ^      ^ 


CTN       CTN 


IP  5 


\ 


c 


"^-^      <5>^      CL-A 


V\lien-it 

W'liensoever 

Where 

Wheresoever 

Mlierewith 

Whether 

Which 

Wliich-are 

Which-are-not 

Whicli-are-to- 

have 
Whichever 
Which-had-not 

Which-have- 

liad 
Which-ought- 

ti)-have 
AVhich-ought- 

not 
A\'liich-not 
Whichwere-not 
Which-will-not 

Which-would- 

have-had 
While 
Whilst 

White 

Who 

Whoever 

^\liohave 

Whole 

Wholesale-store 

Wholly 

Whom 

Whosoever 

Whv-not 

Will 

Willingly 

Will-not 

Wilt 

Wisconsin 

Wisdom 

With 

Withdraw 

With-him 
Within 

Witliin-a-week- 
or-two 

With-me 
With-my 
hVithout 


'^-^y 


I 


rOCABULAHY. 


309 


"With-reference- 

to 
With-regard-to 
Witli-respect-to 

"Wlth-whom 

Witness 
Woman 

"Women 

"\\\)rd 

Word-of-God 

Worker 

AVorld 

Would 

Ye 

Year-s 

Yearly 

Yesterday 

Yet 

You 


u 


c-b 


c-^ 


■>      >- 


-V" 


vi 


Younp 

Youngest 

Your 


Your-favor 

Yourself 

Yourselves 


Your-statement 

You'rs-truly 

Youth 


._^.. 


r 


421 


(      -^ 


Spiritual  Freedom. 


.2. .-/  ^^   ^ 


•Vo 


L 


■V 


<. 2 :.!../  ^    L    _  •  )A3  > 

^  /  L  ^/  ^  ^  /  1-.  ^  -  '^ 
.t--^./ A,  .  ^    C(.-  ^  /A   L 


^ 


V 


V       ^_       <       ^       ^       y 

'^    o    ^=    .^-    ,; 


■^  ^ 


.Nd   L         >  \    ^        V    c^    c   ^  ^ 


-< 


Co 


^  \...L 


'^  L 


FAC  SIMILES. 

Short-hand  notes  as  actually  produced  at  a  high  rate  of 
speed,  present  an  appearance  very  ditierent  from  the  char- 
acters contained  in  the  engraved  pages  of  this  book.  The 
higher  the  speed,  the  greater  the  variance  from  an  exact 
standard.  We  present  a  few  specimens,  but  not  for  criti- 
cism or  imitation.  They  were  executed  by  teachers  in 
different  schools  in  which  this  book-  is  used.  The  transla- 
tion is:  "  You  may  state  your  name,  age,  x)lace  of  residence 
and  occtcpation;  also,  whether  or  not  you  are  acqtmintcd  with 
the  plaintiff  in  this  action^  The  student,  while  he  may  ad- 
mire the  ease  with  which  a  stenographer  may  read  very 
wretched  looking  notes,  should  nevertheless  stick  as  close  to 
the  standai'd  as  possible. 

No.  1  was  written  at  the  rate  of  150  words  per  minute; 
No.  3,  175  per  minute;  No.  3,  216;  No.  4,  200;  No.  5,  200. 


% 


nr^^b. 


C 


/     l-l 


\j 


(311) 


EVERY  STUDENT  OF  SHORT-HAND, 

.'   ;   ;   Young  Reporter  and  Teacher  of  the  Art   ;   :   : 

Should  send  for  a  Copy  of  a  New  Work,  Entitled 

ONE  :•  HUNDRED  >  VALUABLE  :•  SUGGESTIONS 

— TO— 
—BY — 

SELBYA.  MORAN, 
University  of  Michigan. 


This  Tvork  has  been  prepared  with  the  view  of  affording 
students,  teachers  and  young  reporters  of  all  systems  of 
Short-hand  with  such  special  assistance  as  it  has  been  found 
necessary  for  them  to  have  in  order  that  they  may  be  suc- 
cessful in  their  work.  These  suggestions  embrace  many  im- 
poi'tant  facts  which  every  student  of  Short-hand  should  un- 
derstand; yet  facts  which  no  text-book  whatever  contains. 
Every  Stenographer  is  also  aware  that  between  the  mere 
learning  of  the  art  from  some  text-book  and  actual  report- 
ing there  is  a  wide  gap  over  which  the  young  reporter  must 
pass,  generally  with  anything  but  a  pleasant  experience. 

To  render  to  the  student  the  help  which  he  cannot  ob- 
tain from  any  text-book,  and  to  bridge  over  the  chasm  be- 
tween the  learning  of  the  theory  and  its  successful  use  in 
practice,  have  been  the  chief  objects  kept  in  view  in  prepar- 
ing this  work. 

''HAVE  FAITH  IN  SHOBT-HANPy 

—SELECTED  FROM— 

''100  VALUABLE  SUGGESTIONS.'' 

"There  is  probably  no  other  one  thing  that  has  caused  so 
many  people  to  fail  in  their  endeavors  to  become  reporters 
as  a  lack  of  confidence  in  Short-hand.  Too  often  we  hear 
beginners  say,  'I  will  try  it  and  see  whether  I  can  succeed 
or  not.'  The  young  man  or  woman  who,  after  seeing  that 
thousands  of  others  have  made  a  success  of  Short-hand,  can- 
not say,  'I  wiY^  succeed,'  had  better  not  spend  time  or 
money  upon  it,  or,  in  fact,  upon  anything  else  that  requires 
alittle  study  and  application." 

Mailed  Post-Paid  on  Receipt  of  $1.00. 
Address : 

STENOGRAPHIC  INSTITUTE, 

ANN  ARBOR,  MICH. 


("THE  BOOK-KEEPER." 


A  Live,  practical,  handsome  8-page  journal,  devoted 
exclusively  to  the  interests  of  book-keepers,  steno- 
graphers, and  office  persons  generally.  Each  number 
is  full  of  good  things  which  any  one  who  is  anxious 
to  succeed  in  the  profession  should  know. 

Subscription  price,  including  a  copy  of  our  440  page 
book  of  useful  information  as  a  premium,  50  cents 
per  year. 

THE  BOOK-KEEPER  CO. ,  Publishers, 

Detroit,  Mich. 

A  subscriber  says,  "I  look  forward  to  each  issue  with  eagerness.    The 
paper  alone  is  worth  double  the  price  without  a  premium." 

lOIOIOIOIOIOIOIOIOIOIOIOl" 

Do  You  Know  It  All? 


OR  DO  YOU  WISH   TO   LEARN   SOMETHING 

MORE? 


^TTHE  Central  Correspondence  College  can  teach  you  by  mail  I 
©"Do  you  believe  it?— Give  the  matter  a  trial  and  be  con- 
convinced.  Information  and  trial  Lessons  given  free.  Able 
Instructors;  Three  Hundred  Students;  Everything  the  VERY 
BEST.  Full  Course  in  all  Academic  and  Business  Branches. 
One  Term,  $5.00.  Diploma  a-warded  graduates.  The  plan  is 
cheap,  quick,  practical.  If  you  want  an  education,  begin  NOW. 
Send  for  prospectus  to 

The  MORAN  SHORT-HAND  Company, 

1588  OUve  Street,    -    ST.  LOUIS,  MO. 


l^^^z 


SHOULD 


LEARN 


phonography  or  phonetic  ^hort-hand. 


I  deem  Phonography,  when  thoroughly  learned,  an  invalua- 
ble adjunct  to  education;  and  one  which  when  acquired  in 
youth  would  not  be  parted  with  in  manhood  for  thousands  of 
dollars. — Hon.  J.  W.  Sto7ie. 

The  Manual  of  Phonography  by  Benn  Pitman  and  Jerome 
B.  Howard  is  especially  intended  for  self-instruction  and  by  its 
use  thousands  of  phonographers  have  learned  to  write  rapidly 
without  a  teacher.  Price,  cloth  bound,  postpaid  $1.00;  boards 
80  cents.  Complete  catalog  of  text-books  and  helps  free  on 
application. 

©Jfte  pftoaograpfiic  MagaYlae. 

JEROME  B.  HOWARD,  Editor. 


A  24-page  Monthly.  Eight  pages  of  beautifully  engraved 
shorfr-hand  every  month.  The  authentic  exponent  of  the  Benn 
Pitman  System  OF  Phonography.  $1.50  per  Annum.  Specimen 
Copies  Free.    Address, 


Phonographic  Institute, 


<> 


Cincinnati,  Ohio. 
<> 


Typewriter  Headquarters^ 

Is  the  best  place  to  buy  a  Writing  Machine 
of  any  make.    Instruments  shipped  with 
privilege  of  examination.     The  largest 

'     variety  of  instruments  in  the  world, 
at  very  low  prices. 

MACHINES    RENTED 

^Oiit  to  any  part  of  the  U.  S. 

Exchanging  a  Specialty. 

^Typewriter  supplies,  attach-^ 

ments  and  novelties 

in  abundance. 


EVERY 
student  of 
short-hand 
and  typeivrit- 
ing  should 
subscribe    for 


70 

Broadway, 

N.  Y.  City.  • 


Illustrated  Cata^ 
logue  free. 


Do  not  fail , 

to  write 

us. 


144 
La  Salle  St. 

Chicago. 


THE  largest,  oldest,  and  most  interesting  paper  published 
in  the  interests  of  either  of  those  professions. _  The  World 
is  now  in  its  fourth  year  of  uninterrupted  issue,  and  has 
to-day  a  larger  bonatide  circulation  than  all  the  other  short- 
hand and  typewriting  journals  published  in  this  country  com- 
bined. 

Each  monthly  issue  contains  from  20  to  28  large  pages, 
size  of  each  page  8^  x  11  inches,  (or  about  twice  as  large  as  the 
other  journals),  which  are  crowded  each  month  with  news, 
correspondence,  personals,  stenographic  legislation  reports, 
sent  in  by  a  corps  of  nearly  one  hundred  paid  editors,  acting 
for  us  now  in  every  State  in  the  Union,  and  in  every  part  of 
the  Globe.  Fac-similes  of  notes  of  the  leading  reporters  of  the 
world,  in  ALL  systems,  appear  from  time  to  time,  with  regular 
series  of  portraits,  sketches,  etc.,  of  the  leading  lights  in  the 
profession,  and  all  combining  to  form  a  grand  display  of  mat- 
ter in  all  styles  of  short-hand,  invaluable  to  the  reporter, 
teacher,  student,  or  investigator.  Every  number  is  profusely 
illustrated  with  co.stly  engravings,  and  no  pams  or  cost  is  spared 
in  any  way  to  have  it  maintain  the  place  long  since  accorded 
The  World,  of  first  and  best  among  like  pei'iodicals  of  the 
Universe. 

Price  per  year,  issue  of  twelve  nuinhers,  ontv  $1.00;  3  subscribers  (new)  $2.50; 
6  do  $3.75;  10  do  $7.00.  Refndar  discount  from  $1.00  a  year  to  all  teachers  of  25  per 
cent.    Sample  copy  will  be  sent  on  application. 

E.  N.  MINER,  Editor  and  Publisher, 


No.  70  Broadway,  New  York  City. 


WORCESTER'S 
DICTIONARY 

'  'The  highest  authority  known  as  to  the  use  of  the 
English  language." 


The  Standard  of  the  Leading  Publishers,  Magazines,  and 

^J  f^ \n/ ^  p 3. D G rS  • 

The  Dictionarv  of  the  Schohir  for  Spelling,   Pronunciation,  and 
Accuracy  in  Definition.  ^"Send  for  large  Circular  to  the  Publishers. 


J.    B.    LIPPINCOTT    COMPANY, 

PHILADELPHIA,     PA. 


ESTABLISHED  1875. 


The  Oldest  and  Cheapest  House  In  the  City. 


GENERAL 


S.  G.  ADAMS, 

tiene.) 

^^  GRAVING 


(Successor  to  Adams  &  Wathene.) 


RUBBER  ST 


hi^ 


K^^ 


WORKS. 


— MANXTFACTTTEEE  OF— 


Stencils,  Alphabets  and  Figures,  Brushes,  Paste,  Stamps, 
Seals,  Etc.     Mail  Orders  promptly  Attended  to. 


FIRST-CLASS  WORK  AND  LOW  PRICES  GUARANTEED. 

ST.  LOUIS,  MO. 


314-  N.  Sixth  Street, 


:K:^iv£Z3^a-T03ST 


STANDARD 


For  Championship  of  the  World, 

At  Toronto,  in  open  contest,  Aug.  13,  1888. 

151  WORDS  per  Minute,  WITHOUT  an  ERROR. 


The  above  is  an  authentic  record  made  by  Mr.  Frank  E. 
McGurrin,  at  Detroit,  on  January  21,  1889,  on  a  memorized 
sentence,  thus  beating  all  previous  records  of  correct  work  by 
30  woi'ds  per  minute,  and  placing  the  "Remington"  still  fur- 
ther beyond  reach  of  competition.  Photograjihic  copies  of 
•certified  work  furnished  on  application. 

WYCKOFF,  SEAMANS  &  BENEDICT, 

No.  308  North  6th  Street, 
********  ST.  LOUIS.  MO. 


Men  and  Women  Differ  in  Character. 


IF  YOU  WANT  SOMETHING 

that  will  interest  yon  more  than  anything  you  have  ever  read  and  enable  you 
to  understand  all  the  differences  in  people  at  a  glance,  by  the  "Signs  op  Chab- 
ACTEB,"  send  for  a  copy  of 

HEADS  AND  FACES;  How  to  Study  Them. 

A  new  Manual  of  Character  Reading  for  the  people,  by  Prof.  Nelson  Sizer, 
the  Examiner  in  the  phrenological  office  of  Fowler  &  Wells  Co.,  New  York, 
and  H.  S.  Drayton,  M.  D.,  Editor  of  the  Puhbnological  Journal.  The  authors 
know  what  thev  are  writing  about.  Prof.  Sizer  having  devoted  nearly  fifty 
years  almost  exclusively  to  the  reading  of  character,  and  he  here  lays  down 
the  rules  employed  by  him  in  his  professional  work.  It  will  show  you  how  to 
read  people  as  you  would  a  book,  and  to  see  if  they  are  inclined  to  be  good, 
trustworthy  people,  such  as  you  would  like  to  know. 

A  knowledge  of  Human  Nature  would  save  many  disappointments  in  so- 
cial and  business  life.  .  ,.  .     J  if      »v. 

This  is  the  most  comprehensive  and  popular  work  ever  published  for  the 
price,  55,000  copies  having  been  sold.  Contains  200  large  octavo  pages  and  250 
portraits.  Send  for  it  and  study  the  people  you  see  and  your  own  character. 
If  yoii  are  not  satisfied  after  examining  the  book,  you  may  return  it,  in  good 
condition,  and  money  will  be  returned  to  you.  _        ,      .       .„        .     . 

We  will  send  it  carefully  by  mail  postpaid,  on  receipt  of  price,  40  cents,  In 
paper,  or  $1.00  in  cloth  binding.    Agents  wanted.    Address: 

FOWLER  &  WELLS  CO., 

PUBLISHERS,  775  Broadway,  New  York. 

N.  B.— If  you  will  mention  this  Short  hand  book  we  will  send  you  free  a 
number  of  the  Phrenological  Journal  [15  cts.  a  number,  $1.50  a  year],  the 
only  magazine  of  Human  Nature  published.  We  have  just  issued  a  very  com- 
plete list  of  works  on  Phonography  and  Typewriting,  including  all  Systems. 
Largest  ever  published.    Sent  on  receipt  of  stamps.  F.  &  W.  CO. 


p  ."-■' 


?^<Xc/-^     t^-L-^^  -^t  ^  y     >^^  ^.'/^a'^ 


// 


/ 


UJNlVllKMlI     Ur    t.ALlfUKiMA    LlJBtt.AK.1 

Los  Angeles 
This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


ig 


M793r  The  reporting 

-1M9 style  of  short 

hand. 


UC  SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 


:l:' 


AA    000  482  564    2 


Z^6 

M793r 

1889 


JVS07 

IVDdO 

NQHHl 

) 

IHHl 


■.K". 


mm^m^Mmmm^^^m^ 


